Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Legal notice
Legal notice
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Notice
Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing. However, information is subject to
change.
Warranty
Alcatel-Lucent provides a limited warranty for this product. For more information, consult your local Alcatel-Lucent customer support team.
Ordering information
The ordering number for this document is 8DG42227DAAA. To order 1350 OMS information products, contact your local Alcatel-Lucent customer support
team.
Technical support
For technical support, contact your local customer support team. You can reach them through the Web at the Alcatel-Lucent Customer Support web site
(http://www. alcatel-lucent.com/support) or the customer support telephone number listed at the Alcatel-Lucent Contact Us web site (http://www.alcatellucent.com/contact).
Information product support
For questions or concerns about this or any other Alcatel-Lucent information product, please contact us at one of the following numbers: (888) 727-3615 (for
the continental United States), +1 (630) 713-5000 (for all countries).
Contents
About this document
Purpose
..................................................................................................................................................................................... lxxvii
lxxvii
................................................................................................................................................................ lxxvii
lxxvii
............................................................................................................................ lxxviii
......................................................................................................................................................... lxxxi
lxxxi
................................................................................................................................................................... lxxxii
lxxxii
Part I: Introduction
1
Product Overview
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1-1
1350 OMS Overview ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1-2
1350 OMS Modules for System Resiliency and Northbound Communication ................................................. 1-6
1-6
Introduction to Administration
Application Administration ................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2-1
View Application Release Information ............................................................................................................................. 2-4
2-4
..................................................... 3-4
3-4
.......................................................................................................... 3-9
3-9
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
iii
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Integrate 1350 OMS PKT Client Workstations with the Master Workstation
4
................................................. 3-10
3-10
............................................................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5-2
............................................................................................... 5-10
5-10
................................................................................................................... 6-2
6-2
.............................................................................................................................................. 6-6
6-6
................................................................................................................................................................ 7-2
7-2
................................................................................................................................................................. 7-7
7-7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
iv
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................... 8-3
8-3
...................................................................................................................... 9-2
9-2
................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10-1
......................................................................................................................................... 10-3
10-3
Generalities
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11-1
.............................................................................................................................................................. 11-5
11-5
......................................................................................................................................... 11-8
11-8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
v
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ 11-42
11-42
............................................................................................................................. 11-48
11-48
.................................................................................................................................... 11-50
11-50
............................................................................................................................................................ 11-69
11-69
................................................................................................................................................. 11-75
11-75
................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12-1
NML-EML synchronization
1350 OMS PKT resynchronization .................................................................................................................................. 12-2
12-2
Alignment after deletion and recreation of SDH Path .............................................................................................. 12-3
12-3
VPWS Ethernet PM management procedure
PM feature for the ISA ES1 1.0 board ............................................................................................................................ 12-4
12-4
Provider network operating as a distributed MAC Bridge ...................................................................................... 12-9
12-9
Single-Customer, No-VLAN, RSTP provisioning ................................................................................................... 12-11
12-11
Provisioning procedure (MAC-SC-NV-RSTP)
........................................................................................................ 12-12
12-12
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13-1
Managing Subnetworks
Overview about Subnetworks ............................................................................................................................................ 13-5
13-5
View the list of subnetworks .............................................................................................................................................. 13-7
13-7
Description of the list of subnetworks ............................................................................................................................ 13-8
13-8
Create a Subnetwork
............................................................................................................................................................. 13-9
13-9
............................................................................................................................. 13-16
13-16
................................................................................................................................................. 13-18
13-18
............................................................................................................................................................ 13-30
13-30
........................................................................................................................................ 13-34
13-34
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. 13-37
13-37
.......................................................................................................................................................................... 13-48
13-48
............................................................................................................................... 13-55
13-55
........................................................................................................................................ 13-59
13-59
............................................................................................................ 13-69
13-69
......................................................................................................................................... 13-71
13-71
............................................................................................................ 13-78
13-78
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................... 13-93
13-93
Delete an ETP
....................................................................................................................................................................... 13-96
13-96
.............................................................................................................................. 13-107
13-107
............................................................................................................... 13-109
13-109
................................................................................................................................. 13-114
13-114
............................................................................................................... 13-116
13-116
....................................................................................................... 13-130
13-130
...................................................................................................................................................... 13-132
13-132
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
ix
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................... 13-133
13-133
................................................................................................................................... 13-136
13-136
..................................................................................................................................................................... 13-137
13-137
..................................................................................................................................................................... 13-139
13-139
.................................................................................................................................. 13-140
13-140
...................................................................................... 13-156
13-156
.................................................................................................................... 13-161
13-161
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... 13-164
13-164
................................................................................................................................................... 13-166
13-166
................................................................................................................................................ 13-167
13-167
................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-1
14-1
...................................................................................................................................................... 14-5
14-5
............................................................................................................................................... 14-6
14-6
..................................................................................................................................................... 14-21
14-21
.................................................................................................................................................. 14-30
14-30
................................................................................................................................................ 14-34
14-34
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
xi
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. 14-35
14-35
................................................................................................................................................. 14-41
14-41
............................................................................................................... 14-40
14-40
............................................................................................................................................... 14-43
14-43
................................................................................................................................................. 14-45
14-45
................................................................................................................... 14-50
14-50
............................................................................................................... 14-60
14-60
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................. 14-83
14-83
......................................................................................................................................... 14-87
14-87
................................................................................................................................. 14-88
14-88
............................................................................................................................. 14-95
14-95
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
xiii
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................... 14-102
14-102
......................................................................................................................................... 14-108
14-108
........................................................................................................................................................................ 14-119
14-119
.................................................................................................................... 14-122
14-122
................................................................................................................................. 14-124
14-124
............................................................................................................... 14-125
14-125
................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-1
15-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
xiv
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... 15-19
15-19
........................................................................................................... 15-33
15-33
........................................................................................................................ 15-36
15-36
......................................................................................................................... 15-41
15-41
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
xv
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................... 15-42
15-42
........................................................................................................................................................ 15-44
15-44
.......................................................................................................................................................... 15-46
15-46
............................................................................................................................................................ 15-47
15-47
........................................................................................................................... 15-52
15-52
.................................................................................................................... 15-54
15-54
................................................................................................................................. 15-55
15-55
....................................................................................................................................... 15-68
15-68
.................................................................................................. 15-70
15-70
................................................................................................................... 15-74
15-74
...................................................................................................................................... 15-78
15-78
........................................................................... 15-81
15-81
.................................................................................................................................................. 15-83
15-83
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
xvi
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................... 15-94
15-94
....................................................................................................... 15-104
15-104
................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-1
16-1
.................................................................................................................. 16-5
16-5
....................................................................................................................... 16-6
16-6
........................................................................................................ 16-7
16-7
....................................................................................................................................... 16-8
16-8
...................................................................................................... 16-14
16-14
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ 16-26
16-26
........................................................................................................... 16-27
16-27
........................................................................................................................ 16-30
16-30
............................................................................................................................... 16-33
16-33
.......................................................................................................................................... 16-45
16-45
........................................................................................................................... 16-46
16-46
........................................................................................................................................ 16-48
16-48
........................................................................................................................................ 16-54
16-54
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................... 16-64
16-64
...................................................................................................................... 16-68
16-68
.......................................................................................................................... 16-82
16-82
.......................................................................................................... 16-91
16-91
.................................................................................................................................... 16-93
16-93
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. 16-96
16-96
................................................................................................................... 16-107
16-107
................................................................................................................................................. 16-117
16-117
.................................................................................................................. 16-126
16-126
......................................................................................... 16-133
16-133
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ 16-137
16-137
..................................................................................................................................................... 16-145
16-145
.............................................................................................................................................................................. 16-147
16-147
........................................................................................................................ 16-148
16-148
........................................................................................................................................ 16-151
16-151
..................................................................................................................... 16-154
16-154
................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-1
17-1
................................................................................................................................................ 17-11
17-11
............................................................................................................................. 17-12
17-12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
xxi
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create a Customer
............................................................................................................................................................... 17-13
17-13
Modify a Customer
Delete a Customer
............................................................................................................................................................. 17-15
17-15
............................................................................................................................................................... 17-17
17-17
................................................................................................................................ 17-20
17-20
.................................................................................................................................................. 17-38
17-38
............................................................................................................................................................. 17-40
17-40
.......................................................................................................................................................... 17-52
17-52
............................................................................................................................................................ 17-54
17-54
.................................................................................................................................................................. 17-58
17-58
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................... 17-65
17-65
.............................................................................................................. 17-70
17-70
.................................................................................................................................... 17-71
17-71
...................................................................................................................................................... 17-82
17-82
....................................................................................................................................................................... 17-85
17-85
........................................................................................................................................ 17-88
17-88
T-MPLS Takeover
T-MPLS Takeover description
........................................................................................................................................ 17-96
17-96
....................................................................................................................................... 17-99
17-99
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................... 17-102
17-102
.................................................................................................................................................... 17-104
17-104
...................................................................................................................................................... 17-107
17-107
............................................................................................................................... 17-113
17-113
......................................................................................................................... 17-122
17-122
...................................................................................................................................... 17-124
17-124
............................................................................................................................. 17-125
17-125
....................................................................................................... 17-139
17-139
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
xxiv
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................ 17-141
17-141
......................................................................................................................................................... 17-142
17-142
........................................................................................................... 17-151
17-151
............................................................................................................... 17-155
17-155
............................................................................................................................. 17-162
17-162
............................................................................................................................... 17-165
17-165
............................................................................................................ 17-169
17-169
........................................................................................................................... 17-170
17-170
............................................................................................................................... 17-172
17-172
.......................................................................................................................................... 17-175
17-175
........................................................................................................................................ 17-178
17-178
.......................................................................................................................................... 17-181
17-181
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................. 17-187
17-187
.................................................................................................................... 17-192
17-192
.................................................................................................................... 17-200
17-200
................................................................................................................................. 17-203
17-203
............................................................................................................................ 17-207
17-207
................................................................................................................................... 17-209
17-209
....................................................................................................................................... 17-222
17-222
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
xxvi
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Additional section
Display the Services of a Customer ............................................................................................................................ 17-231
17-231
Display the OAM MD list .............................................................................................................................................. 17-232
17-232
Description of the list of OAM MDs
......................................................................................................................... 17-234
17-234
......................................................................................................................... 17-235
17-235
....................................................................................................................... 17-236
17-236
....................................................................................................................................................... 17-239
17-239
....................................................................................................................................................... 17-240
17-240
......................................................................................................................................... 17-246
17-246
............................................................................................................................... 17-250
17-250
................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-1
18-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
xxvii
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. 18-18
18-18
.................................................................................................... 18-24
18-24
............................................................................................................................................... 18-25
18-25
.............................................................................................................. 18-56
18-56
.................................................................................................................................... 18-57
18-57
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
xxviii
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................. 18-61
18-61
.............................................................................................................................................. 18-78
18-78
.......................................................................................................................................................... 18-82
18-82
Domain Configuration
Domain Modification
....................................................................................................................................................... 18-85
18-85
......................................................................................................................................................... 18-87
18-87
........................................................................................................................................ 18-89
18-89
............................................................................................................................................................... 18-96
18-96
............................................................................................................................................... 18-99
18-99
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
xxix
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Additional section
View the list of bridge NEs ............................................................................................................................................ 18-113
18-113
Description of the list of Bridge NEs ......................................................................................................................... 18-114
18-114
View the list of bridge ENEs ......................................................................................................................................... 18-115
18-115
Description of the list of Bridge ENEs ...................................................................................................................... 18-116
18-116
Bridge EVC Allocation
................................................................................................................................................... 18-117
18-117
.......................................................................................................................................... 18-122
18-122
............................................................................................................................ 18-123
18-123
.................................................................................................................... 18-124
18-124
........................................................................................................... 18-127
18-127
............................................................................................................................... 18-135
18-135
....................................................................................................................... 18-136
18-136
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
xxx
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19
................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-1
19-1
....................................................................................................................................................................... 19-23
19-23
........................................................................................................................... 19-24
19-24
..................................................................................................................... 19-27
19-27
ERP configuration
Create ERP Ring
.................................................................................................................................................................. 19-33
19-33
.......................................................................................................................... 19-55
19-55
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
xxxi
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................... 19-70
19-70
........................................................................................................... 19-76
19-76
.......................................................................................................................................................... 19-79
19-79
.............................................................................................................................................. 19-80
19-80
..................................................................................................................... 19-83
19-83
...................................................................................................................... 19-88
19-88
............................................................................................................................................................ 19-91
19-91
........................................................................................................................ 19-92
19-92
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................... 19-98
19-98
............................................................................................................................................. 19-100
19-100
........................................................................................................................................ 19-104
19-104
.................................................................................................................................... 19-107
19-107
.................................................................................................................. 19-113
19-113
.............................................................................................................................................................................. 19-119
19-119
..................................................................................................................................................... 19-120
19-120
.............................................................................................................................. 19-124
19-124
.............................................................................................................................................................................. 19-133
19-133
............................................................................................................................................. 19-134
19-134
............................................................................................................. 19-138
19-138
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
xxxiii
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... 19-139
19-139
............................................................................................................... 19-140
19-140
............................................................................................................................ 19-144
19-144
.............................................................................................................................................................................. 19-146
19-146
............................................................................................................................................ 19-149
19-149
............................................................................................................................................................. 19-158
19-158
.............................................................................................................................................................................. 19-174
19-174
........................................................................................... 19-203
19-203
................................................................................................................................................................................... 20-1
20-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
xxxiv
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction
Overview about Broadcast TV
.......................................................................................................................................... 20-3
20-3
.................................................................................................................................. 20-4
20-4
..................................................................................................................................................... 20-11
20-11
............................................................................................................................................. 20-17
20-17
.................................................................................................................................. 20-20
20-20
.................................................................................................................................. 20-23
20-23
.............................................................................................................................................................. 20-33
20-33
..................................................................................................................................................... 20-35
20-35
........................................................................................................................................... 20-42
20-42
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
xxxv
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21
Network Supervision
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 21-1
21-1
Managing alarms
Overview about alarms ......................................................................................................................................................... 21-2
21-2
Alarms from ISA E/FE/GE board
Alarms from ISA ES1/4 board
.................................................................................................................................... 21-3
21-3
.......................................................................................................................................... 21-4
21-4
.................................................................................................................................. 21-16
21-16
................................................................................................................ 21-17
21-17
Specific Behavior
Client Signal Fail Alarm Management ......................................................................................................................... 21-18
21-18
22
Network Utilities
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 22-1
22-1
............................................................................................................................................................. 22-3
22-3
............................................................................................................ 22-16
22-16
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... 22-22
22-22
............................................................................................................................. 22-27
22-27
................................................................................................................................................................................... 23-1
23-1
Ethernet OAM
OAM main functions
............................................................................................................................................................ 23-3
23-3
............................................................................................................................................................... 23-8
23-8
................................................................................................................................ 23-9
23-9
.................................................................................................................................................. 23-10
23-10
....................................................................................................................................................... 23-12
23-12
.................................................................................................................................................. 23-13
23-13
........................................................................................................................................... 23-14
23-14
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................ 23-17
23-17
............................................................................................................... 23-24
23-24
................................................................................................................................................... 23-27
23-27
................................................................................................................................... 23-30
23-30
Loopback
Loopback activation ............................................................................................................................................................ 23-32
23-32
Linktrace
Linktrace activation ............................................................................................................................................................. 23-34
23-34
Delay measurement and Loss measurement
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 23-36
23-36
Packet Delay measurement
.............................................................................................................................................. 23-37
23-37
.......................................................................................................................................... 23-41
23-41
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................................................... 24-1
24-1
CES Overview
Circuit Emulation Services definition ............................................................................................................................. 24-4
24-4
TDM client synchronization ............................................................................................................................................... 24-9
24-9
Protection setup after link creation ................................................................................................................................ 24-10
24-10
CAC tolerance and modulation mode
.......................................................................................................................... 24-12
24-12
............................................................................................................. 24-18
24-18
........................................................................................................................ 24-20
24-20
..................................................................................................................... 24-25
24-25
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
xxxix
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................... 24-29
24-29
............................................................................................................... 24-39
24-39
.................................................................................................. 24-41
24-41
................................................................................... 24-52
24-52
................................................................................................................................................ 24-56
24-56
CES Procedures
Circuit Emulation Service graphical inventory ......................................................................................................... 24-57
24-57
View the list of CES Domains (Packet Radio) .......................................................................................................... 24-60
24-60
Description of the list of CES Domains (Packet Radio) ........................................................................................ 24-61
24-61
View the details of CES Domain (Packet Radio) ..................................................................................................... 24-62
24-62
Details of CES Domain (Packet Radio) ....................................................................................................................... 24-63
24-63
Inventory from CES Domain (Packet Radio) ............................................................................................................ 24-64
24-64
Create CES Domain (Packet Radio) ............................................................................................................................. 24-66
24-66
Assign/Deassign resources to Packet Radio Domain ............................................................................................. 24-67
24-67
Assign/Deassign resources to T-MPLS Domain
...................................................................................................... 24-68
24-68
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ 24-79
24-79
....................................................................................................................................... 24-89
24-89
........................................................................................................................................................... 24-90
24-90
...................................................................................................................... 24-100
24-100
.............................................................................................................................. 24-108
24-108
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
xli
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................ 24-133
24-133
.................................................................................................................................................................. 24-134
24-134
......................................................................................................................................... 24-138
24-138
Topology
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 25-1
25-1
Network configuration
Create the network objects .................................................................................................................................................. 25-2
25-2
External Network Reference ............................................................................................................................................ 25-13
25-13
Create Physical Connection
............................................................................................................................................. 25-19
25-19
...................................................................................................................................................................... 25-26
25-26
.............................................................................................................................................. 25-30
25-30
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Traffic categories
Create Traffic Descriptor ................................................................................................................................................... 25-38
25-38
Create Traffic Classifier ..................................................................................................................................................... 25-42
25-42
L2 Encapsulation .................................................................................................................................................................. 25-45
25-45
26
................................................................................................................................................................................... 26-1
26-1
........................................................................................................................................................ 26-2
26-2
........................................................................................................................................................ 26-15
26-15
......................................................................................................................................................... 26-96
26-96
................................................................................................................................................................................... 27-1
27-1
............................................................................................................................................. 27-2
27-2
...................................................................................................................................................... 27-12
27-12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
xliii
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................... 27-17
27-17
................................................................................................................................................................................... 28-1
28-1
E2E
End to End EVC connection
.............................................................................................................................................. 28-2
28-2
................................................................................................................................................................................... 29-1
29-1
Fault Detection
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 30-1
30-1
Tunnel protection
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 31-1
31-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
xliv
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Tunnel protection
Tunnel protection create ....................................................................................................................................................... 31-2
31-2
T-MPLS Routing display ..................................................................................................................................................... 31-6
31-6
Tunnel switch commands .................................................................................................................................................... 31-9
31-9
Other info on T-MPLS routing display ........................................................................................................................ 31-16
31-16
32
Performance Monitoring
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 32-1
32-1
PM in EVC create
PM in EVC create
.................................................................................................................................................................. 32-2
32-2
............................................................................................................................................................... 32-17
32-17
PM report generate
PM report generate .............................................................................................................................................................. 32-21
32-21
33
Technical Annexes
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 33-1
33-1
........................................................................................... 33-5
33-5
Enhanced Procedures
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 34-1
34-1
................................................................................................................................................................................... 34-3
34-3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
xlv
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................... 34-8
34-8
.......................................................................................................................................... 34-21
34-21
....................................................................................................................... 34-31
34-31
.................................................................................................................................. 34-33
34-33
.................................................................................................................................. 34-35
34-35
........................................................................................................................................ 34-44
34-44
................................................................................................................................................ 34-46
34-46
........................................................................................................................................... 34-47
34-47
.................................................................................................................... 34-48
34-48
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................... 34-59
34-59
Tunnel Redundancy
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 34-60
34-60
Description
............................................................................................................................................................................. 34-61
34-61
................................................................................................................ 34-74
34-74
............................................................ A-1
A-1
Application Limits
Limits ............................................................................................................................................................................................ B-1
B-1
List of Abbreviations
Abbreviations
............................................................................................................................................................................ C-1
C-1
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
xlvii
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
xlviii
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of tables
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
EPTL /ETS
11-5
11-6
11-7
11-8
11-9
.............................................................................................................................................................. 11-18
11-18
............................................................................................................................... 11-17
................................................................................................................................ 11-18
.................................................................................................................................. 11-18
............................................................................................................. 11-19
................................................................................................................................... 11-19
..................................................................................................................................... 11-19
.................................................................................................. 11-20
........................................................................................................................ 11-20
.......................................................................................................................... 11-20
11-14 Extended EVPL /ETS and ETB Provider Bridge ...................................................................................... 11-21
11-15 Extended EVPL /ETB Virtual Bridge
11-16 Extended EVPL /ETB MAC Bridge
........................................................................................................... 11-21
.............................................................................................................. 11-21
.............................................................................. 11-22
.................................................................................................... 11-22
...................................................................................................... 11-22
.............................................................................................................................................. 11-24
11-24
...................................................................................................................................... 11-24
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
xlix
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................ 11-25
11-25
.............................................................................................................................. 11-25
.................................................................................................................................. 11-26
.................................................................................................................................... 11-26
...................................................................................................................................................... 11-27
11-27
.................................................................................................................... 11-27
........................................................................................................................ 11-27
.......................................................................................................................... 11-28
13-1
15-1
15-2
17-1
17-2
17-3
17-4
18-1
L2 Control Protocols
18-2
21-1
21-2
21-3
21-4
23-1
Terminology Mapping
24-1
24-2
24-3
24-4
24-5
..................................................................... 15-7
............................................................................ 15-7
............................................................................................. 17-44
......................................................................... 17-111
.................................................................. 17-112
........................................................................................................................................... 18-16
....................................................................................... 18-38
.............................................................................................................................................. 21-3
21-3
.................................................................................................................................. 21-6
........................................................................................................................... 21-9
........................................................................................................................................... 23-4
.......................................................................... 24-26
............................................................. 24-32
..................................................................................................... 24-32
................................................................................. 24-38
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
l
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-6
24-7
24-8
24-9
..................................................................................................................... 24-52
................................................................................................................................. 24-57
........................................................................................................................ 24-58
................................................................................................................. 24-58
.................................................................................................................... 24-59
............................................................................................................................... 24-79
............................................................................................................................. 24-85
...................................................................................................................................... 24-91
....................................................................................................................................... 24-93
24-93
.......................................................................................................................................... 24-104
.......................................................................................................................................... 24-106
..................................................................................................................................... 24-114
........................................................................................................................................ 24-115
...................................................................................................................................... 24-117
...................................................................................................................................... 34-38
B-1
.......................................................................................................................................... B-1
B-2
B-3
B-4
B-5
....................................................................................................................................... B-1
.................................................................................................................................................. B-1
B-1
........................................................................................................................................................... B-1
B-1
........................................................................................................................................................ B-2
B-2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
li
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-6
................................................................................................................................... B-2
B-7
B-8
B-9
B-10
B-11
B-12
B-13
B-14
............................................................................................................ B-3
B-15
.............................................................................................................. B-3
B-16
B-17
B-18
B-19
B-20
B-21
B-22
................................................................................................................................. B-2
.......................................................................................................... B-2
.................................................................................................................. B-2
...................................................................................................................... B-3
................................................................................................................................. B-4
......................................................................................................................................... B-4
...................................................................................................................... B-4
................................................................................................................ B-4
................................................................................................................................... B-4
.............................................................................................................................................. B-5
B-5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
lii
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of figures
4-1
11-1
Application Positioning
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6
11-7
Hub & spoke with multi level aggregation topology ............................................................................... 11-35
11-8
11-9
Ring Topology
........................................................................................................................................ 11-6
.............................................................................................. 11-15
...................................................................................................................................... 11-32
.......................................................................................................................................... 11-37
....................................................................................................................................................... 11-39
11-39
................................................................................................................................. 4-2
............................................................................................................................................ 11-45
11-45
........................................................................ 11-48
................................................................................................................................................................ 11-52
11-52
....................................................................................................................................... 11-58
................................................................................................................................. 11-59
................................................................................................................................ 11-63
.................................................................................................................................. 11-63
....................................................................................................... 11-64
.................................................................................................................................. 11-65
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................. 11-67
12-1
...................................................................... 12-9
12-2
.................................................................... 12-10
12-3
13-1
13-2
13-3
13-4
13-5
13-6
13-7
NE Adding window
13-8
13-9
............................................................................................ 12-11
............................................................................................................................................. 13-47
....................................................................................................................................... 13-75
..................................................................................................................................... 13-79
............................................................................................ 13-83
......................................................................................................................................... 13-94
13-13 Ethernet Physical Port Config. window (for PR EA or ES16 electrical board)
13-14 Ethernet Physical Port Config. window (for ES1 or ES4 electrical board)
.......................... 13-103
.................................. 13-104
13-15 Ethernet Physical Port Config. window (for ES1 or ES4 optical board) ....................................... 13-105
13-16 Ethernet Physical Port Assign NAD window
13-17 Scheme of a Link Aggregation
.......................................................................................... 13-110
...................................................................................................................... 13-118
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-1
14-2
14-3
14-4
14-5
14-6
14-7
14-8
14-9
.................................................................................................................... 14-7
......................................................................................................... 14-8
.................................................. 14-11
......................................................... 14-12
...................................................................................................... 14-26
.......................................................................................................................................... 14-31
....................................................................................... 14-7
....................................................................................................... 14-44
.......................................................................................................... 14-48
................................................................................................................................................. 14-53
14-53
..................................................................................................................................... 14-56
................................................................................................................ 14-62
................................................................................................................ 14-65
................................................................................................................. 14-71
15-1
............................................................................................................. 15-4
15-2
15-3
15-4
15-5
15-6
15-7
15-8
15-9
................................................................................................................ 15-9
..................................................................................................... 15-12
................................................... 15-26
.............................................................................................................. 15-29
............................................................................ 15-34
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
lv
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................. 15-39
15-12 LSP Tunnel Modification window (for an LSP tunnel defined) .......................................................... 15-45
15-13 Constraint List related to an LSP tunnel
...................................................................................................... 15-53
................................................................................................... 15-56
................................................................................................. 15-60
............................................................................................................ 15-65
.............................................................................................................. 15-69
15-18 LSP Tunnel (Best Effort) Bandwidth Load window ................................................................................ 15-76
15-19 LSP Tunnel (Assured Forwarding) Bandwidth Load window
............................................................. 15-76
......................................................... 15-77
............................................................................................................................... 15-79
........................................................................................................................ 15-103
16-1
.............................................................................................. 16-17
16-2
16-3
16-4
16-5
17-1
17-2
17-3
17-4
17-5
17-6
.............................................................................................................. 16-23
............................................................................ 16-28
................................................................ 17-31
............................................................................................................... 17-42
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
lvi
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-7
17-8
17-9
Create Domain
........................................................................................................... 17-64
....................................................................................................................... 17-67
....................................................................................................................................................... 17-89
17-89
............................................................................................................................................................. 17-92
17-92
................................................................................................................................................. 17-93
............................................................................................................ 17-105
.................................................................................................................. 17-109
........................................................ 17-123
.................................................................................................... 17-133
.......................................................................................................... 17-137
........................................................................................................................ 17-148
............................................................................................................................... 17-154
.............................................................................................................. 17-166
.................................................................................................................. 17-170
.................................................................................................................. 17-173
................................................................................................... 17-179
.................................................... 17-184
.......................................... 17-186
....................................................................... 17-188
.................................................................................... 17-195
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. 17-210
...................................................................................................... 17-212
............................................................ 17-213
............................................................................................. 17-219
.................................................. 17-214
..................................................................................... 17-221
...................................................................................................................... 17-226
............................................................................................................. 17-229
18-1
............................................................................................................ 18-23
18-2
18-3
18-4
18-5
18-6
18-7
18-8
18-9
......................................................................................................... 18-27
.............................................................................................................. 18-30
............................................................................................................ 18-44
.................................................................................................................... 18-54
....................................................................................... 18-55
........................................................................................... 18-67
............................................................... 18-69
........................................................................................................... 18-76
.................................................................................................... 18-86
........................................................................................................... 18-90
.......................................................................................................................................... 18-92
18-92
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................... 18-95
.............................................................................................................................. 18-97
19-2
Actions>Packet>Construction>Create Domain
19-3
19-4
19-5
19-6
19-7
Defined NE list
19-8
19-9
........................................................................................ 19-14
............................................................................................................................................ 19-15
19-15
.................................................... 19-16
.................................................................................... 19-17
............................................................................................................. 19-17
...................................................................................................................................................... 19-18
19-18
....................................................................................................................................... 19-20
..................................................................................................... 19-20
....................................................................................................................................................... 19-21
19-21
........................................................................................... 19-22
...................................................................... 19-22
....................................................................................... 19-24
.............................................................................................................................. 19-25
............................................................................................................... 19-26
........................................................................................................................... 19-29
.................................................................................................................... 19-31
........................................................................................................ 19-32
..................................................................................................... 19-33
................................................................................................................................................... 19-34
19-34
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
lix
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... 19-36
19-36
19-27 Search>Packet>ERP>Rings
19-28 List of ERP Rings
............................................................................................................................. 19-37
................................................................................................................................................. 19-37
19-37
.................................................................................................... 19-38
...................................................................................................................................... 19-38
................................................................................................................................... 19-39
.................................................................................................................. 19-40
................................................................................................................... 19-41
............................................................................................................................. 19-42
............................................................................................................. 19-43
.............................................................................................. 19-43
.......................................................................................................................... 19-44
............................................................................................................................ 19-45
............................................................................................................................................ 19-47
19-47
.................................................................................... 19-48
................................................................................................................... 19-51
......................................................................................................................................................... 19-52
19-52
................................................................................................................................................................ 19-53
19-53
............................................................................................................................. 19-53
..................................................................................................... 19-54
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................. 19-60
............................................................................... 19-61
............................................................................................................ 19-61
....................................................................................................................... 19-141
.................................................................................................... 19-162
............................................................................................................................................. 19-163
19-163
................................................................................................................... 19-164
..................................................................... 19-168
............................................................................................................ 19-176
................................................................................................. 19-177
.................................................................................... 19-178
.................................................................................. 19-185
............................................................................................. 19-186
.......................................................................... 19-187
............................................................................................................................... 19-188
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
lxi
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................. 19-190
.......................................................................................... 19-192
......................................................................................................... 19-193
...................................................................................................... 19-198
...................................................................................................................... 19-201
........................................................................................................................ 19-202
.................................................................................................................................... 19-204
...................................................................................................................................... 19-205
................................................................................................................................................. 19-209
................................................................................................................... 19-210
............................................................................................................................ 19-211
................................................................................................................................... 19-212
............................................................................................................................... 19-213
20-1
..................................................................................................................... 20-4
20-2
20-3
20-4
20-5
................................................................................................................ 20-6
......................................................................................................................................... 20-21
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
lxii
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-6
20-7
20-8
20-9
.................................................................................................... 20-27
.................................................................................... 20-30
...................................................................................................................................... 20-36
20-36
................................................................................................................................. 21-11
21-2
24-1
24-2
24-3
24-4
24-5
24-6
24-7
24-8
24-9
............................................................................................................................ 24-4
.......................................................................................................................... 24-6
............................................................. 24-12
................................................... 24-18
....................................................................................................................................................... 24-31
24-31
............................................................................................................................................ 24-34
........................................................................................................................................ 24-34
............................................................................ 24-39
25-1
Actions>Create Subnetwork
............................................................................................................................... 25-3
25-2
25-3
25-4
25-5
25-6
25-7
Actions>Modify subnetwork
............................................................................................................................. 25-7
.......................................................................................................................... 25-8
.............................................................................................................................. 25-9
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
lxiii
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
25-8
25-9
......................................................................................................................................... 25-11
............................................................................................................................. 25-12
............................................................................................................... 25-17
................................................................................................................. 25-18
............................................................................................................................ 25-19
....................................................................................................................................................... 25-20
25-20
................................................................................................................................................... 25-24
25-24
........................................................................................................................ 25-25
........................................................................................ 25-26
.......................................................................................................................... 25-27
....................................................................................................................................................... 25-28
25-28
25-28 Search>Packet>Construction>Domains
...................................................................................................... 25-28
............................................................................................................. 25-31
........................................................................................................................ 25-31
.............................................................................................. 25-32
........................................................................................................................... 25-33
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
lxiv
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................... 25-34
25-34
................................................................................................................................... 25-37
.............................................................................................................. 25-40
........................................................................................................... 25-41
............................................................................... 25-42
..................................................................................................................................... 25-43
25-43
............................................................................................................................................ 25-44
25-44
........................................................................................................................... 25-46
........................................................................................................................... 25-47
................................................................................................................................................................ 25-48
25-48
................................................................................................... 25-51
.......................................................................................................................... 25-52
..................................................................................................................... 25-53
............................................................................ 25-54
.......................................................................................................................... 25-54
........................................................................................................................... 25-56
................................................................................................................................. 25-57
...................................................................................................................................................................... 25-58
25-58
..................................................................................................................... 25-58
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
lxv
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................... 25-59
............................................................................................. 25-60
............................................................................................... 25-60
26-1
Physical map
............................................................................................................................................................. 26-3
26-3
26-2
26-3
26-4
26-5
26-6
26-7
Physcon list
26-8
26-9
......................................................... 26-4
......................................................................................................................................... 26-5
26-5
................................................................................................................................ 26-7
............................................................................................................................................................... 26-8
26-8
........................................................ 26-9
................................................................................................................................................ 26-9
26-9
........................................................................ 26-10
....................................................................................................................................... 26-11
......................................................................................................... 26-12
............................................................................................................................................ 26-14
26-14
................................................................................................................ 26-16
.................................................................................. 26-15
................................................................................................. 26-18
.......................................................................................................................... 26-20
................................................................................................................. 26-21
................................................................................................................................................................ 26-22
26-22
............................................................................................................ 26-23
................................................................................................................................ 26-23
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
lxvi
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................... 26-24
.................................................................................................. 26-25
.................................................................................... 26-26
..................................................................................... 26-27
............................................................................................................................................. 26-28
26-28
............................................................................................................... 26-28
........................................................... 26-29
................................................................................................................................... 26-29
................................................................. 26-31
............................................................................................................................ 26-34
................................................................................................................................. 26-36
.......................................................................................... 26-37
....................................................................................................................................... 26-38
26-38
............................................................................................................................................... 26-42
26-42
................................................................................................................................................ 26-45
26-45
.................................................................................................................................. 26-47
......................................................................................................................................... 26-49
.......................................................................................................................................... 26-50
.................................................................................................................................... 26-51
...................................................................................................................................... 26-52
........................................................................................................ 26-55
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................... 26-58
................................................................. 26-59
....................................................................................................................................... 26-62
26-62
............................................................................................................................................. 26-64
26-64
................................................................................................................................................ 26-66
26-66
.................................................................................................................................... 26-68
................................................................................... 26-69
........................................................................................................ 26-70
............................................................................................................................ 26-71
......................................................................................................................... 26-72
........................................................................................................ 26-73
....................................................................................................................................... 26-78
26-78
....................................................................................................................................... 26-82
.................................................................................................................................... 26-84
........................................................................................................ 26-86
............................................................................................................................ 26-87
..................................................................................................................................... 26-88
....................................................................................................................................... 26-92
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
lxviii
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................... 26-98
................................................................................................................ 26-98
............................................................................... 26-97
.................................................................................... 26-99
................................................................................................................................... 26-99
.................................................................................. 26-101
................................................................................................................ 26-103
................................................................................................ 26-105
.................................................................................................... 26-106
........................................................................................................ 26-107
...................................................................................................................... 26-108
...................................................................................................................................... 26-108
...................................................................................................................................... 26-109
...................................................................................................................................... 26-110
................................................................................................................................. 26-110
................................................................................................................................... 26-111
..................................................................................... 26-112
........................................................................................................... 26-113
...................................................................................................................................... 26-113
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
lxix
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................... 26-116
26-116
........................................................................................................................................... 26-117
26-117
27-1
............................... 27-2
27-2
27-3
27-4
27-5
27-6
27-7
27-8
27-9
.............................................................................................................................. 27-3
......................................................... 27-3
.................................................................................................... 27-4
................................................................................................................................. 27-6
................................................................................................................................................. 27-7
27-7
........................................................................................................................................ 27-8
.................................................................................................................. 27-13
............................................................................................................................. 27-14
..................................................................... 27-15
........................................................................................................................... 27-15
..................................................................................................................... 27-19
............................................................................................................................... 27-21
........................................................................................................................... 27-22
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
lxx
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................... 27-23
27-23
......................................................................................................... 27-24
........................................................................................................................................... 27-24
27-24
..................................................................................... 27-25
............................................................................................................................................ 27-28
27-28
..................................................................................... 27-27
............................................................................................................................... 27-29
........................................................................................................................................... 27-30
27-30
..................................................................................................................... 27-31
.............................................................................................................. 28-3
29-1
Reference Network
29-2
29-3
29-4
29-5
29-6
29-7
29-8
P2P: constraint
29-9
................................................................................................................................................. 29-3
29-3
.................................................................................... 29-4
..................................................................... 29-7
............................................................................................................................................... 29-8
29-8
....................................................................................................................................................... 29-11
29-11
..................................................... 29-12
................................................................................................................................................................ 29-14
29-14
............................................................................................................ 29-14
................................................................................................................................ 29-15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
lxxi
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................... 29-16
........................................................................................................................... 29-17
..................................................................................... 29-20
............................................................................................................................................. 29-21
29-21
............................................................................................................... 29-21
.............................................................................................................................................. 29-24
29-24
.................................................................................. 29-25
........................................................................................................................................ 29-26
29-24 Point to point Packet Ring bidir protected T-MPLS tunnel open sink
.............................................. 29-27
................................................................................................................ 29-29
29-27 P2P bid prot T-MPLS tunnel open sink: selected extremities
.............................................................. 29-30
................................. 29-32
................................................................................................................................................................ 29-34
29-34
............................................................................................................ 29-34
................................................................................................................................ 29-35
..................................................................... 29-36
........................................................................................................................... 29-37
..................................................................................... 29-40
............................................................................................................................................. 29-41
29-41
............................................................................................................... 29-41
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
lxxii
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................. 29-43
.......................................................................................... 29-47
....................................................................................................................................... 29-48
29-48
............................................................................................................................................... 29-52
29-52
................................................................................................................................................ 29-55
29-55
.................................................................................................................................. 29-57
....................................................................................................................... 29-58
......................................................................................................................................... 29-60
.......................................................................................................................................... 29-62
...................................................................................................................................... 29-63
........................................................................................................ 29-65
............................................................................... 29-67
.................................................................................................................................................. 29-68
29-68
................................................................................................................................................ 29-68
29-68
30-1
.......................................................................................................................... 30-2
30-2
30-3
30-4
30-5
30-6
31-1
31-2
31-3
........................................................................................................................ 30-3
............................................................................................................................... 30-4
.......................................................................................................................... 30-6
............................................................................................................................................. 30-7
30-7
................................................................................................................................................. 31-5
31-5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
lxxiii
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
31-4
...................................................................................................... 31-5
31-5
Search>Packet>T-MPLS>T-MPLS>Tunnels
31-6
31-7
31-8
31-9
............................................................................................... 31-6
...................................................................................................... 31-8
................................................................................................................................ 31-10
............................................................................................................................. 31-13
.......................................................................................... 31-14
.............................................................................................................................. 31-15
.............................................................................................................................. 31-17
................................................................................................................... 31-18
................................................................................................................................................. 31-19
31-19
.......................................................................................................................................................... 31-20
31-20
32-1
.................................................................................................................................. 32-3
32-2
32-3
Create Measure
32-4
32-5
Search>PM>PM domains
32-6
.......................................................................................................................... 32-9
32-7
...................................................................................................................... 32-10
32-8
32-9
PM TP list
........................................................................................................................................................ 32-6
32-6
.................................................................................................................................... 32-9
............................................................................................................................. 32-10
................................................................................................................................................................ 32-11
32-11
............................................................................................................................................... 32-11
............................................................................................................................................... 32-12
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................... 32-16
32-16
.......................................................................................................................................... 32-21
....................................................................................................................................... 32-22
.................................................................................................. 32-23
33-2
Tunnel entities
33-3
33-4
DH EVPLINE infrastructure
34-1
34-2
Create Domain
34-3
34-4
.......................................................................................................................................................... 33-3
33-3
............................................................................................................................. 33-8
............................................................................................................ 34-8
....................................................................................................................................................... 34-13
34-13
...................................................................................................... 34-61
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
lxxv
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
lxxvi
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Purpose
This preface provides information about how to use this document, which is the 1350
OMS PKT Guide.
The purpose of the 1350 OMS PKT Guide is to explain the administration and
provisioning features of the 1350 OMS PKT application for the 1350 OMS 9.6 release.
This document describes how to use, administer, and maintain the 1350 OMS PKT
application for configuring and for monitoring Ethernet or MPLS networks.
Reason for reissue
This document has been reissued to support the 1350 OMS 9.6.
The revision history of this document is shown in the following table:
Location
Revision
Issue
Issue 2, May
2012
Issue 1, March
2012
Safety information
This document does not contain any safety information (cautions or warnings) because
the 1350 OMS is a software product.
Important! When working with any hardware that is associated with any piece of
software, always refer to the safety information that the hardware manufacturer
provides for that particular piece of hardware. For example, when working with an
HP server, refer to safety information that is provided in the HP documentation for
that server. When working with any Alcatel-Lucent network element, refer to safety
information that is provided in the Alcatel-Lucent documentation for that particular
NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
lxxvii
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Intended audience
The 1350 OMS PKT Guide is written primarily for the advanced users of the 1350 OMS,
who typically are systems engineers, programmers, and system administrators who must
configure and monitor Ethernet or MPLS networks. This document can be used by
anyone who needs specific administration or provisioning information about the features,
applications, and operations of the 1350 OMS PKT component of the 1350 OMS. These
people are you, its users.
The 1350 OMS PKT Guide assumes that the user is familiar with the function of
telecommunication networks and has had some exposure to the X.org Foundation
X-Window and Microsoft Windows and environments.
How to use this information product
Conceptual and task content
In the broadest sense, this document contains the following types of content:
The conceptual information complements and enhances the step-by-step instructions that
are found in each task. To optimize the use of the conceptual and task content, users
should consider the following:
The conceptual information should be used to broaden your general knowledge of the
network management system. It is best if you read all conceptual information and
have a good understanding of the concepts being presented before undertaking the
step-by-step instructions given in any task.
The conceptual and task portions of the document have extensive hyperlinks. Use
these links to toggle between the two types of information presented so you can
access all pertinent information related to particular concepts and tasks.
The task information is based on a user needs analysis that has been performed for
each management system user job; therefore, use the task information to get the job at
hand done quickly and with minimal system impact.
Each task consists of sections that are called When to use, Related information, Before
you begin, and Task. The intent of these sections is self-explanatorythey explain when
you should use the task, any related information that you would need to know while doing
the task, and what you need to consider or do before you start the task.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
lxxviii
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
When a task does not have any related information that must be considered before it is
started, the Related information section for that task states the following:
This task does not have any related information.
When a task does not have any conditions that must be considered before it is started, the
Before you begin section for that task states the following:
This task does not have any preconditions.
Each Task section consists of steps. The completion of all steps, which are sequentially
numbered, is required for the entire task to be completed successfully. In some instances,
a step might be prefaced with the wording Optional, which indicates that the step can be
skipped and the task can still be completed successfully. A task is considered to be
completed when all of its steps are completed and when the wording End of Steps
appears.
Many times, the management system affords users with multiple ways to accomplish the
same task. In these instances, this type of task gives the user several Methods of how to
accomplish the same set of steps successfully.
Typographical conventions used for content
GUI fields/parameters and their options are identified with this type.
Document titles or words that are being defined or emphasized are identified with this
type.
The following convention is used to indicate a path, which is a flow of buttons and/or
menu items that you must navigated through to arrive at a destination on the GUI:
Search > EML > Network Elements
This same convention is also used to show a path through a series of menu items, for
example:
Click the filtering tool and select Node > Node Type.
All mouse selections are presumed to be left clicks. Right click mouse selections are
indicated as the following:
Right click the highlighted item and follow the path: Search > Clients.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
lxxix
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Occasionally, a set of 1350 OMS features is not supported for all NEs or for all operating
components and/or environments. This set of features is clearly marked to show these
exceptions.
Technical content
In general, the technical content in this document is augmented by technical content that
is provided in other documents in this documentation set and/or in the document set of the
particular network element (NE ) or piece of hardware in the network configuration. It is
the user's responsibility to read all pertinent material in all documentation sets in order to
understand a particular concept or procedure and/or to implement the procedure in his or
her working environment.
This document contains information on the complete line of NEs that the 1350 OMS
supports. Each release of the 1350 OMS and its applications supports certain NEs within
the Alcatel-Lucent family of optical NEs. Mention of NEs or specific NE features in the
text of this document, or any document in the 1350 OMS documentation set, that are not
supported in this particular product release can apply to prior or future product releases.
Such material may not be currently visible or operable on the GUI and/or the server and
has been added only as a convenience for our customers. This material is subject to
change. For a list of NEs that are supported in the 1350 OMS 9.6, contact your
Alcatel-Lucent local customer service support team.
This document, or any document in the 1350 OMS documentation set, may contain
information that is related to features, service packs (SPs), maintenance releases, or other
updates that our product and its applications supported in prior releases or is to support in
the near future. This material may not be visible or operable on the supported servers
and/or GUI, and has been added only as a convenience for our customers. This material is
subject to change. For a list of all supported features for a particular release, contact your
Alcatel-Lucent local customer service support team.
Treatment of terms
A term that is presented in the text of this document, along with any used abbreviation for
the term, is typically defined where the term is initially introduced.
Many of the more generic terms that are defined in this document, along with the terms
that are defined in other documents in this documentation set, are also defined in the
Glossary, which is part of the 1350 OMS Getting Started Guide. We encourage our users
to rely on the Glossary for a comprehensive set of terms and any abbreviations of the
terms.
Document formats
The on-line HTML version of the document has a search capability, a table of contents in
the front matter of the document, a partial table of contents in each chapter, and an index.
The PDF version can be viewed on-line; or it, or portions of it, can be printed locally at
the user's discretion.
On-line help
The 1350 OMS help systems are designed to consider the task that the user is performing
and to help the user complete the task.
Contact sensitive help, which defines many GUI fields, is available; and other types of
help can be accessed from the GUI menu.
Related documentation
The following documents are related to the 1350 OMS PKT Guide:
1. The 1350 OMS Getting Started Guide (8DG42227AAAA) explains the look-and-feel
of the user and administration GUIs to new users. This document contains a complete
explanation of the 1350 OMS information product set and a glossary of terms that is
applicable to the entire documentation set.
2. The 1350 OMS Administration Guide (8DG42227LAAA) explains how to use the
tools and the administration GUIs to administer and maintain the element
management layer, network management layer, and service management layer of the
1350 OMS.
This document consists of the following volumes:
The 1350 OMS Administration Guide, Vol 1: Common Tools and Processes
(8DG42227LAAA-Vol1) explains how to administer and maintain the common
tools and processes that are associated with the 1350 OMS.
The 1350 OMS Administration Guide, Vol 2: Common GUI Functions
(8DG42227LAAA-Vol2) explains how to administer and maintain the common
administration GUIs that are associated with the 1350 OMS.
3. The 1350 OMS EML Guide (8DG42227BAAA) explains how to administer and
provision the 1350 OMS EML application of the 1350 OMS, which is the element
management layer of the 1350 OMS.
4. The1350 OMS SDH Guide (8DG42227CAAA) explains how to administer and
provision the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) network management layer of the
1350 OMS.
5. The 1350 OMS WDM Guide (8DG42227QAAA) explains how to administer and
provision the 1350 OMS WDM, which provides the Wavelength Division
Multiplexing (WDM) and Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing (DWDM)
network management layer for the 1350 OMS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
lxxxi
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
1350 OMS HA Guide (8DG42227GAAA) explains how to install, administer, and use
the High Availability feature.
1350 OMS OI Guide (8DG42227HAAA) explains how to install, administer, and use
the Open Interfaces that are supported for the 1350 OMS.
In addition, the 1350 OMS 9.6 also supports installation and migration activities with
related documentation. Contact your Alcatel-Lucent local customer service support team
for additional details.
Ordering information
The entire document set that supports the Alcatel-Lucent 1350 OMS 9.6 release can be
ordered on CD-ROM. The ordering number for this CD-ROM is 8DG42228AAAA. The
ordering number for this particular document is 8DG42227DAAA. Contact your local
Alcatel-Lucent local customer service support team for details.
In addition, to order the 1350 OMS and/or any of its applications, add-on features or
upgrades, contact your local Alcatel-Lucent local customer service support team.
How to comment
To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://infodoc.alcatellucent.com/comments/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline
(comments@alcatel-lucent.com).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
lxxxii
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Part I: Introduction
Overview
Purpose
This part contains a general description about the 1350 OMS product and introduce the
user to the activity of administration and maintenance of the 1350 OMS PKT application.
Contents
Chapter 1, Product Overview
1-1
2-1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
I-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Introduction
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
I-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Product Overview
1
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides an overview of the 1350 OMS PKT and the user functions that are
required to provision the application.
Contents
1350 OMS Overview
1-2
1-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
1-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Product Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 1350 OMS is a network management system that supports three layers of
management to accommodate and grow with the optical network of the Customers.
The Element Management Layer, or EML, provides the functionality that is needed to
access any Alcatel-Lucent supported network elements (NEs) that are deployed in a
customer network. The EML provides a single access point for communication with an
NE.
The Network Management Layer, or NML, provides the functionality that is needed to
commission, provision, and supervise the network that is deployed in a customer premise.
The Service Management Layer, or SML, provides the functionality that is needed to
commission, provision, and supervise a Virtual Private Network (VPN) that an
Alcatel-Lucent customer deploys to its end users or to its customers.
1350 OMS and its applications
The 1350 OMS is the Alcatel-Lucent converged and unified network management
system. It manages the complete portfolio of Alcatel-Lucent active network elements
(NEs) and it maintains the complete portfolio of Alcatel-Lucent legacy NEs.
The 1350 OMS consists of the following set of integrated, licensed applications:
Refer to the 1350 OMS Getting Started Guide for a more detailed system description.
1350 OMS EML
The 1350 OMS EML application provides element level management (EML) capabilities
for both Alcatel-Lucent ANSI and ETSI NEs. Its set of protocol adapters supports basic
NE functions such as NE MIB backup/restore and software downloads. Because the 1350
OMS provides all of the element layer functions that are required to manage the deployed
network, it requires to deploy also the 1350 OMS EML application and/or the 1350 OMS
eOMS legacy management system. (See Legacy management and NE support
(p. 1-5).).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
1-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Product Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to the following documents and contact your Alcatel-Lucent local customer service
support team for additional details:
.
1350 OMS EML Guide.
1350 OMS Service Assurance Guide.
The 1350 OMS PKT application provides Ethernet network management layer support
along with provisioning, alarm correlation, and historical PM data services. Ethernet
services include Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS), Transport-Multi-Protocol Label
Switching (T-MPLS), bridging, Connection Oriented traffic, and packet rings.
Refer to the following documents and contact your Alcatel-Lucent local customer service
support team for additional details:
The 1350 OMS SDH application provides the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
network management layer along with provisioning, alarm correlation, and PM
correlation capabilities. The 1350 OMS SDH functions as a client for the 1350 OMS
WDM application and as a server for the 1350 OMS PKT application.
Refer to the following documents and contact your Alcatel-Lucent local customer service
support team for additional details:
.
1350 OMS SDH User Guide, Vol 1: Basic Management-notused.
1350 OMS SDH User Guide, Vol 2: Enhanced Solutions-notused.
1350 OMS CLI Reference.
For 1350 OMS support of SDH in a legacy system, refer to Legacy management and NE
support (p. 1-5) for details.
1350 OMS SONET
The 1350 OMS SONET application provides direct Synchronous Optical Network
support along with provisioning, alarm correlation, and historical PM data capabilities.
The 1350 OMS SONET functions as a client for the 1350 OMS WDM application and as
a server for the 1350 OMS PKT application.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
1-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Product Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to the following documents and contact your Alcatel-Lucent local customer service
support team for additional details:
.
1350 OMS SONET Guide.
1350 OMS Service Assurance Guide.
For 1350 OMS support of SONET in a legacy system, refer to Legacy management and
NE support (p. 1-5) for details.
1350 OMS WDM
The 1350 OMS WDM application provides Wavelength Division Multiplexing (WDM)
and Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing (DWDM) support along with provisioning,
alarm correlation, and historical PM correlation capabilities.
Refer to the following documents and contact your Alcatel-Lucent local customer service
support team for additional details:
.
1350 OMS WDM Guide.
1350 OMS Service Assurance Guide.
For 1350 OMS support of WDM and DWDM in a legacy system, refer to Legacy
management and NE support (p. 1-5) for details.
1350 OMS software and the Web
1350 OMS is run through an Internet browser-based Graphical User Interface (GUI). It
supports the standard web features that a browser offers, such as bookmarks, back,
forward, reload, and print.
The Web Desktop is the available mechanism that both system administrators and users
can use to access the 1350 OMS GUI. It provides a central access point from which both
system administrators and users are authenticated and from which they can navigate to
the Web Portal to access the 1350 OMS applications.
The Web Portal is a Java application that is started when the administrator or user logs in
from the Web Desktop. The Web Portal provides the administrator with a view of all 1350
OMS applications and manages GUI navigation between the subsystem components. The
Web Portal also provides various methods of navigationsuch as menus, icons, and a left
tree navigation areabetween applications and tools.
From the 1350 OMS Web Portal, administrators can set up each application and its users,
and users can access the network and element level applications that enable the family of
Alcatel-Lucent NEs to be provisioned.
Refer to the 1350 OMS Getting Started Guide for a more detailed description of the look
and feel of the software and for a glossary of terms and acronym list.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
1-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Product Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Through its Web Portal, the 1350 OMS provides users with the ease of accessing and
using the familiar embedded Optical Management System (eOMS) to provision the NEs
that are managed through the 1350 OMS eOMS and the NEs that are managed through an
XML-over-socket (XoS) interface (such as TNA, CNA, or ITM-SC).
Refer to the following documents for additional information on the 1350 OMS eOMS:
Because the 1350 OMS provides all of the element layer functions that are required to
manage the deployed network, it requires the 1350 OMS EML application and/or the
1350 OMS eOMS legacy management system also to be deployed. (See 1350 OMS
EML (p. 1-2).).
1350 OMS supported NEs
The 1350 OMS supports the Alcatel-Lucent family of optical network elements (NEs). To
accommodate the world of optical transmission standards, these NEs operate using
different transport structures and they support different native command languages.
Contact your local customer support team for a list of NEs that are supported by the 1350
OMS and its particular applications.
Important! Each release of the 1350 OMS and its applications supports certain NEs
within the Alcatel-Lucent family of optical NEs. Mention of NEs or specific NE features
in the text of this document, or any document in the 1350 OMS documentation set, that
are not supported in this particular product release can apply to prior or future product
releases. Such material may not be currently visible or operable on the GUI and/or the
server and has been added only as a convenience for our customers. This material is
subject to change. For a list of NEs that are supported in the 1350 OMS 9.6, contact your
Alcatel-Lucent local customer service support team.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
1-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Product Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 1350 OMS supports High Availability (HA) as an added value module, which is
referred to as the 1350 OMS HA. The 1350 OMS HA software package is installed on top
of an already installed and configured NML and EML platform and independently of any
other application such as the 1350 OMS SDH, 1350 OMS PKT, 1350 OMS WDM, or
1350 OMS SONET, or any element manager such as the 1350 OMS EML or 1350 OMS
eOMS.
As its name suggests, the 1350 OMS HA provides high availability to these applications
whose main task is to manage transport networks. It protects the 1350 OMS applications
and its HP server platform against hardware and software failures that could be caused
by system failures (such as the failure of the system power supply or a system
component), a site failure (such as a natural disaster or fire), a backplane failure, a
processor failure, or any unplanned outage.
The 1350 OMS HA is explained in detail in the 1350 OMS HA Guide
(8DG42227GAAA). This document includes installation, administration, and user
information for the 1350 OMS High Availability (HA) feature.
Contact your Alcatel-Lucent local customer service support team for additional details.
1350 OMS OI
The 1350 OMS OI software package is installed on top of an already installed and
configured MW-INT platform and independently of any other application such as the
1350 OMS SDH, 1350 OMS PKT, 1350 OMS WDM, or 1350 OMS SONET, or any
element manager such as the 1350 OMS EML or 1350 OMS eOMS.
The 1350 OMS OI enables the 1350 OMS applications to export or import data to
multiple external operation systems (OSs). The 1350 OMS OI is a flexible, powerful, and
effective set of generic OS-to-OS interfaces (GENOS) that allow an external OS to
synchronize alarms, performance monitoring, network inventory, and remote inventory
data with any of the 1350 OMS applications.
The 1350 OMS OI is explained in detail in the 1350 OMS OI Guide (8DG42227HAAA).
This document includes installation, administration, and user information for the Open
Interfaces (OIs) that are supported for the 1350 OMS.
Contact your Alcatel-Lucent local customer service support team for additional details.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
1-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
I2ntroduction to
Administration
Application Administration
MW-INT as the building block
The MW-INT, which is the middleware interface, is the building block of the 1350 OMS
architecture; and as such, it is the platform for all 1350 OMS components and its features.
The MW-INT enables the administrator to install a single product or several different
products, as well as different instances of the same product on one hardware platform.
The 1350OMS applications are installed and configured on top of the MW-INT platform.
The MW-INT provides the following functionality:
Process management
Subsystem configuration
Installation/integration and customization
System management
Application instances
The 1350 OMS supports the 1350 OMS PKT application, and each occurrence of this
application in the management system is referred to as an instance. Each application
instance is managed by the MW-INT. Refer to the 1350 OMS Administration Guide, Vol
1: Common Tools and Processes for details.
Process Monitoring
Process Monitoring is the graphical representation of the system processes and their
actual status.
The Process Monitoring Control application is the graphic interface of the MW-INT
application that allows the user to have an overall control of the IM subsystem of the
selected System Instance. The PMC graphic interface is composed of a common window
dedicated to display information and to execute commands for the management of all the
processes (agents) of the selected System Instance. The processes are collected in groups
(for example Database processes, Alarms processes,...) and each group is represented in
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
2-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Introduction to Administration
Application Administration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
the PMC window through an icon which color informs the user of the group functional
state. Exactly the group icon gives the summarized information about the functional state
of all the processes and their children included in the group itself.
Refer to the 1350 OMS Administration Guide, Vol 2: Common GUI Functions for details.
The Web Desktop
Much of the administration of the 1350 OMS PKT application occurs through the Web
Desktop of the 1350 OMS. The Web Desktop provides a central access point from which
both system administrators and users are authenticated and from which they can navigate
to the Web Portal to access the 1350OMS applications. Refer to the 1350 OMS
Administration Guide, Vol 2: Common GUI Functions for details.
SEC User Administration and SEC User Authentication
The 1350 OMS uses its two SEC (Security) GUIs to administer and maintain security:
The 1350 OMS enables administrators to create and maintain user accounts through
its SEC User Administration GUI.
Functional area domains (FADs), object access domains (OADs), and combinations of
these domains along with user profiles and the declaration and discarding of user
accounts are administered through its SEC Authentication GUI.
Both the SEC User Administration GUI and the SEC User Authentication GUI are
explained in the 1350 OMS Administration Guide, Vol 2: Common GUI Functions.
Full system backups
The 1350 OMS enables administrators to perform a full system backup and recovery. For
details, refer to the 1350 OMS Administration Guide, Vol 1: Common Tools and
Processes, which details full system backups and recoveries, single volume backups, and
mirror configurations. Troubleshooting information is also included.
Application backup and restore
The 1350 OMS enables administrators to backup and restore a particular 1350 OMS
application and to schedule a backup of a particular 1350 OMS application. For details,
refer to the 1350 OMS Administration Guide, Vol 2: Common GUI Functions, which
details how use the SMF Scheduler to schedule a full backup or a backup of just the
network data, the alarm data, the performance monitoring data, the log data, user data, or
the system configuration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
2-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Introduction to Administration
Application Administration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PM Administration
Through its Data Management facilities, the 1350 OMS enables administrators to view
the performance monitoring statistics of a particular PM database. For details, refer to the
1350 OMS Administration Guide, Vol 2: Common GUI Functions.
Logs, Command Log, and Command Log Administration
Log files are files that consist of records that are created by the various tools (scripts) and
processes. Administrators use log files to track any and/or all meaningful operations that
occur within the application or when a tool is executed. The 1350 OMS supports security
logs, command logs, and system logs. These logs are explained in detail in the 1350 OMS
Administration Guide, Vol 2: Common GUI Functions.
The Command Log enables administrators to parse a command log or a set of command
logs from a list of command logs. Once that list of command logs has been parsed, the
Command Log enables administrators to extract log records from target command log
files by using filters and to output that extracted list to a browser or to a table, called the
Command Result List, which is a tabular display that can be printed. For details, refer to
the 1350 OMS Administration Guide, Vol 2: Common GUI Functions.
Command Log Administration enables the administrator to edit the command output
template. In addition, the Command Log Administration function then allows the
administrator to view, parse, and filter the Command Log. For details, refer to the 1350
OMS Administration Guide, Vol 2: Common GUI Functions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
2-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Introduction to Administration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
: <system name>
: <system version number>
: <number of the OS customized instance>
: <Role assigned to the OS customized
instance: master/client>
Master Ws
: <Name of the master workstation>
LOCAL OSK -ENGINE: <Version of the component
OSK-ENGINE on the local machine>
Master Kernal Type: <Kernel type of the master machine>
Master OSK-ENGINE Interface Version: <version of the component
OSK-ENGINE on the master
machine interface>
Info
...
: *
Introduction to Administration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
2-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Introduction to Administration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
2-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
Purpose
This document part provides to system and network administrators information and
procedures to administer and to maintain the 1350 OMS PKT.
Contents
Chapter 3, 1350 OMS PKT Configuration
3-1
4-1
5-1
6-1
7-1
8-1
Chapter 9, 1350 OMS PKT MIB Realignment and the ISA Board
9-1
10-1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
II-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Administration
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
II-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides the administrator with the conceptual information and the
associated tasks that pertain to the configuration of the overall 1350 OMS PKT
application.
Contents
1350 OMS PKT Configuration
3-2
Access the System Configuration Window and Configure 1350 OMS PKT
3-4
3-9
Integrate 1350 OMS PKT Client Workstations with the Master Workstation
3-10
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
3-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The administrator must log into the 1350 OMS PKT configuration from the log in mask
as alcatel.
Important! We strongly recommend that you do not log in as bmml to start the 1350
OMS PKT session. The default administrator log in is alcatel, which is available
since the first customization. If needed, you can create additional administrator log
using SMF.
Any security warnings that appear should be ignored.
Application Configuration through SystemConfig
Open a Unix Terminal window starting from the Unix Server machine to activate the
System Configuration Window:
The System Configuration window is divided into the following two panes:
A static list of processes can be defined that can belong to the System Instance.
A variable list of processes can be defined that can have multiple instances within the
System Instance.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
3-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A configuration file can define the ID category of the multiple instances off-line.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
3-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this task to access the system configuration window and to configure the 1350 OMS
PKT.
Related information
Access the System Configuration Window and Configure 1350 OMS PKT (p. 3-4)
You cannot add a proxy to the system configuration while the system is running. When
configuring proxies, the system must be down.
Task
Complete the following steps to configure a 1350 OMS application, such as the 1350
OMS PKT.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the CDE front panel, press the terminal icon to start a Unix terminal application.
Result: The terminal window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The System Configuration window is displayed. The left pane of the window
In the Parameters Definition window, select the following to configure each of the
parameters:
For USE_CDN, select False, which is the default, if the proxy is to be an SNMP-type. If
the proxy is not to be an SNMP-type, select True.
For EML_NAME, enter a name given to the EML proxy. The name can be 1 to 10
characters in length. It cannot contain spaces (blanks). In addition, do not use any
characters that will conflict with the UNIX ps command.
For NM_INSTANCE_NAME_TO_USE, enter the complete EML system instance name. For
example: 1353NM_1-7.4 where the EML is configured. If USE_CDN is true, this value
must be the value of the SDH.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click the right arrow to move the NMLIM_PROXY from the Instantiable Subsystems list
to the Subsystems List.
Result:
In the Parameters Definition window, select the following to configure each of the
parameters:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
3-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For NML_NAME, enter a name given to the NML proxy. The name can be 1 to 10
characters in length. It cannot contain spaces (blanks). In addition, do not use any
characters that conflict with the UNIX ps command.
For RM_INSTANCE_NAME_TO_USE, enter the complete 1350OMS-RM system instance
name. For example: 1350OMSRM_1-7.4.5.
Follow this path to exit: Actions > Apply & Exit
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Parameters Definition window, select the following to configure each of the
parameters:
For EML_NAME, enter a name given to the EML proxy. The name can be 1 to 10
characters in length. It cannot contain spaces (blanks). In addition, do not use any
characters that will conflict with the UNIX ps command.
For NM_INSTANCE_NAME_TO_USE, enter the complete EML system instance name. For
example: EML_2-9.1.0 where the adapter TL1 is configured.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
3-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
12
Leave the default values, which are 100 for SYSTEM_TUNING_VAL and 30 for
SYS_START_WAIT_VAL.
Follow this path to exit: Actions > Apply & Exit
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
Under MIB in the Actions pane of the Parameters Definition window, specify NEW to
create a new database.
Under DB_SIZE in the Actions pane of the Parameters Definition window, specify the size
of the new database to be one of the following. (The DB_SIZE is linked to the kind of
instance that you selected at OS_CONF predisposition time.)
small
If you selected IM_Small instance, you must select small as the DB_SIZE.
If you selected IM_Medium instance, you must select small or medium as the
DB_SIZE.
large
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
3-7
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If you selected IM_Large instance, you can select small, medium, or large as the
DB_SIZE.
Follow this path to exit: Actions > Apply & Exit
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
Under IFRREP in the Actions pane of the Parameters Definition window, specify NEW, the
default, to create a new persistent file.
Follow this path to exit: Actions > Apply & Exit
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
selected to create a new database, the database creation takes about 20 minutes. When the
configuration is finished, the System Configuration Log is output. Ignore the warning
messages.
Click the Dismiss button to close the window.
Follow this path to exit from the System Configuration window: Main > Quit.
Result: The system asks you if you really want to quit.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
3-8
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this task to integrate an instance of the 1350 OMS PKT with other network
management systems (NMSs), such as the 1350 OMS SONET, 1350 OMS SDH, or 1350
OMS WDM.
Related information
Access the System Configuration Window and Configure 1350 OMS PKT (p. 3-4)
This task is to be used if an instance (master or client) of the 1350 OMS PKT is
co-located with other NMSs, such as the 1350 OMS SONET, 1350 OMS SDH, or 1350
OMS WDM. This task validates inter-system navigation; that is, navigation from one
NMS to another NMS. It also enables CORBA communication between NMSs.
Task
Complete the following steps to integrate an instance of the 1350 OMS PKT with other
network management systems (NMSs), such as the the 1350 OMS SONET, 1350 OMS
SDH, or 1350 OMS WDM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Log in as root.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Choose yes when integrating PKT with EML/SDH/NPR for both PLT and NAV
integration and yes when integrating eOMS only for PLT part.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
3-9
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this task to integrate each the 1350 OMS PKT client workstation with its 1350 OMS
PKT master workstation.
Related information
Access the System Configuration Window and Configure 1350 OMS PKT (p. 3-4)
Execute this task for each 1350 OMS PKT client workstation that must be integrated with
its 1350 OMS PKT master workstation.
Task
Complete the following steps to integrate each the 1350 OMS PKT client workstation
with its 1350 OMS PKT master workstation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Log in as root.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
3-10
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides the administrator with the conceptual information and the
associated tasks that pertain to the process monitoring of the overall 1350 OMS PKT
application.
Contents
Process Monitoring Overview
4-2
Run Levels
4-5
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
4-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Processes are collected in groups, such as the database group, alarms group, or adapters
group.
Figure 4-1 Process Monitoring Window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
4-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Process Name
Function
Database
oracle_monitor_process
Alarms
AS_Current_IM
AS_Historic_IM
AlmAdapter
EmlAdapter
NmlAdapter
c_FaultManagement
c_DataManagement
c_TopologyManagement
c_EquipmentTopology
c_AuditAlignRecovery
c_Scheduler
m_FaultManagement
m_NetworkManagement
m_
TrafficProfileManagement
m_DataManagement
m_AuditAlignRecovery
Adapters
Core
Mpls
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
4-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Process Groups
Group name
Eot
Process Name
Function
e_DataManagement
e_FaultManagement
e_ProfileManagement
e_ServiceManagement
e_TrafficManagement
e_AuditAlignRecovery
e_Facility
e_Bridge
e_PM
Session
SessionManagement
Nbi
NbiManagement
EML_Proxies
Proxy_E_EML_NAME
Proxy_E_SNA_NAME
NML_Proxies
Proxy_N_NML_NAME
E2E
e2e_manager
e2e_data
e2e_indirect
tmpls_adaconfig
tmpls_dom
tmpls_inventory
Inventory management
tmpls_lsp
Lsp Management
EthOperatorLog
Tmpls
OperatorLogger
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
4-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Run Levels
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Run Levels
Run levels 0 through 4
Name
Information
FullFunctionality
BackupMode
RestoreMode
ADAPTERS
DB_Only
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
4-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Run Levels
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
4-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides the administrator with the conceptual information and the
associated tasks that pertain to the user management of the overall 1350 OMS PKT
application.
Contents
User Profiles
5-2
5-3
5-8
5-10
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
5-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
User Profiles
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Profiles
Default operator profiles
A constructor can manage the topology of the network, which includes subnetworks,
NEs, ENEs, LOS, LOC, and LOM. The constructor can perform every function on
maps and NEs; however, the constructor cannot perform certain administration
functions. For example: a constructor cannot add or remove operators or perform a
backup and restore of the system.
An operator can create local maps, import saved maps, and manage services such as
Ethernet; however, the operator cannot manage NEs (start/stop supervision) or
manage the global inventory. In addition, an operator cannot perform certain
administration functions. For example: an operator cannot add or remove operators or
perform a backup and restore of the system.
A viewer can view lists of data and can view the maps. In general, a viewer can only
look at data; a viewer has limited access and privileges.
When a new operator is created through the Create User function, that operator must be
assigned to one of the default profiles. The default profiles names cannot be changed and
the profiles themselves cannot be reconfigured.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
5-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
Services
T-Mpls deletion
T-Mpls modification
T-Mpls properties
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
Domain creation
Domain deletion
Domain modification
Domain properties
Domain inventory
Domain management
Domain Management
is Allowed
Macro Function
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
5-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NE management
NE Management
is Allowed
Macro Function
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
NE list / search
NE definition
NE deletion
NE modification
NE properties
NE acknowledge
NE configuration
NE assign to domain
ENE management
ENE Management
is Allowed
Macro Function
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
ENE creation
ENE deletion
ENE modification
ENE properties
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
5-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
Operator
Viewer
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
Administrator
Constructor
ETP creation
ETP deletion
ETP properties
Operator
Viewer
Administrator
Constructor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
5-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
Operator
Viewer
Administrator
Constructor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
5-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Utilities management
Utilities Management
is Allowed
Utilities Management
Administrator
Start/End Procedure
Audit NE
Display NE Audit
Align NE
Reserve
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
5-7
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
Characteristics definition
Operator
Viewer
Administrator
Constructor
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
5-8
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
Clipboard
VC LSP management
VC LSPManagement
is Allowed
Macro Function
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
VC LSP creation
VC LSP deletion
VC LSP implementation
VC LSP de-implementation
VC LSP commission
VC LSP de-commission
VC LSP extremities
VC LSP modification
VC LSP properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
5-9
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
Customer create
Customer modify
Customer properties
Customer delete
Inventory of services
Service management
Service Management
is Allowed
Macro Function
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
Service list
Service create
Service modify
Service properties
Service delete
EVC management
EVC Management
is Allowed
Macro Function
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
EVC list
EVC create
EVC modify
EVC properties
EVC delete
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
5-10
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EVC Management
is Allowed
Macro Function
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
5-11
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
Inventory of Ethernet
Segments
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
5-12
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
Ethernet Segment
de-implement
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
5-13
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
5-14
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
5-15
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
5-16
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides the administrator with the conceptual information and the
associated tasks that pertain to the system log management of the overall 1350 OMS PKT
application.
Contents
SMF/Commands/Event Log File Overview
6-2
6-5
6-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
6-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The log files for SMF, commands, and/or events are stored in the following locations:
/usr/Systems/<application>_<instance>/maintenance/log
/usr/Systems/<application>_<instance>/SMF/tools/log/data
/usr/Systems/<application>_<instance>/ORACLE/databases/dbnml/admin/create
/usr/Systems/<application>_<instance>/ORACLE/databases/dbnml/admin/bdump
/usr/Systems/<application>_<instance>/ORACLE/databases/network
/usr/Systems/<application>_<instance>/TAO/maintenance/trace
/usr/Systems/<application>_<instance>/databases/dbbmml/data
/usr/Systems/<application>_<instance>/ORACLE/databases/dbnml/admin/logbook
.log
.data
.dataflow
maintenance/log files
Contents
smf.log
pmc2.log
JacORB.log
PMCStart.log
1354BM.log
EMLStart.log
NMLStart.log
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
6-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Contents
*_dbi.log
Log files for the 1350 OMS PKT for the processes
that used the DBI.
*Gui.log
ascurusm.log
BmAdaptationModifyTrace.log
BmCoreModifyTrace.log
BmMplsModifyTrace.log
EotModifyTrace.log
allTracesModify.log
SMF/tools/log/data file
The /usr/Systems/<application>_<instance>/ORACLE/databases/dbnml/admin/create
directory contains the crdb_phase<X>.log, which is the log file that is created during the
creation of the database.
ORACLE/databases/dbnml/admin/logbook file
The
/usr/Systems/<application>_<instance>/ORACLE/databases/dbnml/admin/logbook
directory contains the start_db.log and stop_db.log files, which is the log files that log
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
6-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ORACLE/admin/dbump file
The
/usr/Systems/<application>_<instance>/ORACLE/databases/dbnml/admin/bdump
directory contains the alert_dbbmml1.log file, which is the log file that contains
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
6-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.err
.outerr
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
6-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
/usr/Systems/<application>_<instance>/maintenance/trace
/usr/Systems/<application>_<instance>/PMC2/trace
.data
.data.lck
.dataflow
.dataflow.lck
.trc
trc.old
.trace
.out
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
6-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides the administrator with the conceptual information that pertains to
the parameters for the 1350 OMS PKT application.
Contents
Parameter Overview
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-9
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
7-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Parameter Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter Overview
Parameter functional definition
The parameters can be defined for the 1350 OMS PKT application during the initial
installation of the application or after the installation of the application through the SMF
interface.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
7-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
7-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The UI_LANGUAGE parameter specifies the language to be used by the User Service
Manager (USM).
The allowed value is English. The default is English.
This parameter is a GUI NMA parameter. This parameter must be defined during
instantiation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
7-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
7-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The DB_SIZE parameter specifies size of the Oracle database for the application.
The allowed values are the following:
small is specified to create a database that is 0.5 Gb, which is the default size.
medium is specified to create a database that is 2.0 Gb.
large is specified to create a database that is 4.0 Gb.
The MIB parameter specifies whether the old application database should be saved.
The allowed values are the following:
NEW is specified so the customization process creates a new, empty database. This
value must be specified during the first installation of the application.
OLD is specified to save the current database or to recover the old database from an
old installation directory.
REC is specified to recover the database from a backup. This value should be
specified after a disk failure causes the reinstallation of the application. The
customization process does not create a new database to save the mirrored database
information so a database recovery from an incremental backup can be performed.
This value have to be used during the first installation of 1350 OMS PKT application.
Using this value the customize procedure will create a new empty DB.
REC
This value should be used after a disk failure that causes the re-installation of 1350 OMS
PKT application. The customize procedure will not create a new DB in order to save the
mirrored DB information to permit the recover of DB from an incremental backup.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
7-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Make a check for the consistency of the parameter you will set.
How to set the parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
7-7
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
7-8
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The TMP_ALM_BUFFERSIZE parameter specifies the size of the alarm buffer that the
ALM adapter uses.
The allowed values are 50 to 1000. The default is 250.
This parameter can be modified by SMF.
TMP_ALM_PADDINGRATE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The allowed values are 0 and 1. A value of 0 is no, which does not activate
synchronization with the 1350 OMS PKT log for links over SDH and SDH terminations.
A value of 1 is yes, which activates synchronization with the 1350 OMS PKT log for
links over SDH and SDH terminations. The default is 0.
This parameter can be modified by SMF.
TMP_NE_UNDER_<application>_MANAGEMENT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TMP_SE_ACCESSCT
The TMP_SE_ACCESSCT parameter specifies whether the session access control should
be activated.
The allowed values are 0 and 1. A value of 0 is false, which does not activate the session
access control. A value of 1 is true, which activates session access control. The default is
1.
This parameter can be modified by SMF.
TMP_TRACELEVEL
The TMP_TRACELEVEL parameter specifies the trace level for the 1350 OMS PKT
trace.
The allowed values are 1 to 8. The default is 1.
This parameter can be modified by SMF.
TMP_TRACEMAXLINECOUNT
The TMP_TRACEMAXLINECOUNT parameter specifies the line number for the 1350
OMS PKT trace file.
The allowed values are 1000 to 10000. The default is 10000.
This parameter can be modified by SMF.
TMP_WAIT_EOT_SYNCHRO_STARTUP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TMP_OPERATOR_LOGGER_ENABLED
0 : disabled
1 : enabled
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
7-13
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
7-14
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides the administrator with the conceptual information for
Multi-Manager configurations for the 1350 OMS PKT application.
Contents
Multi-Manager Management Overview
8-2
Operational Guidelines
8-3
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
8-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following Multi-Manager Management scenarios explain the most general operation
scenarios. These scenarios depict a Mutli-Manager environment in which operations
occur over the same Ethernet link, over Alcatel-Lucent Ethernet enabled NEs, and/or
along with the entities of Alcatel-Lucent NEs:
In the first scenario, the management of services is performed through the 1350 OMS
PKT application. The management of some specific tuning operation is performed
through the EML/CT GUI.
In the second scenario, the management of some features, such as the ETS
Transparent technology management, is performed through the 1350 OMS PKT
application. The management of other features, such as the ETB Bridging technology
management, is performed through the EML/CT GUI.
In the third scenario, the management is performed through the 1350 OMS PKT
application; however, the completion and/or recovery of some actions is performed
through the EML/CT GUI in an emergency situation.
Note: When resource isolation occurs, the 1350 OMS PKT deduces that either the NE
or the network manager is unreachable. The 1350 OMS PKT application might not be
able to complete any future user request; therefore, the application informs the user
that the action is partially completed with a message such as the following:
Partially Implemented Service Creation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
8-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Operational Guidelines
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Operational Guidelines
Operational guidelines
The administrator must adhere to the following operational guidelines when working in
an Multi-Manager Management configuration:
Any other operations that are performed through the EML/CT must be the customer's
responsibility and they must be agreed to by the Alcatel-Lucent local customer service
support team.
The administrator must be aware of and manage the existing Ethernet traffic, the
Ethernet-enabled NEs, and the managed NE entities on the 1350 OMS PKT
application.
The administrator must never change, and/or configure, and/or delete any entities that
are managed from the 1350 OMS PKT application by using the EML/CT. These
entities can be easily recognized. See Identifying Ethernet-defined entities
(p. 8-3) for details.
If 1350 OMS PKT application could not complete any administrator request (for
example, it is in Partially Implemented/Deimplemented state), the administrator must
retry the request or return to the previous state (for example: go from Partially
Deimplemented to Defined state).
If all of the operational rules have been followed and the administrator still does not
succeed with the request, the administrator must notify and work with the
Alcatel-Lucent local customer service support team.
In Multi-Manager Management environment, refer to the 1350 OMS PKT Guide for a
detailed explanation of the allowed and recommended operations for the 1350 OMS PKT
application and the EML/CT to ensure the proper operation of the Alcatel-Lucent
Ethernet-enabled NEs.
Identifying Ethernet-defined entities
Administrators who work on the EML/CT can recognize the Ethernet entities that the
1350 OMS PKT application defines and manages:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
8-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Operational Guidelines
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Important! The administrator must never change, and/or configure, and/or delete
any readily identifiable 1350 OMS PKT created entities because the 1350 OMS PKT
application will not be aligned to the NE.
Color Profiles
InFlows
When the user labels and traffic descriptors for the ETS InFlows begin with
1350OMSPKT #<number> or another identifier that readily identifies that it is the
1350 OMS PKT application, such as PKT, and the ETSinflow is of the format
ETSInFlow#<number>, the Inflow is created by the 1350 OMS PKT application.
Where: 1350OMSPKT is the application and #<number> is the instance number of
the application that the NE defines.
When the user labels or traffic descriptors for the ETS InFlows are blank or do not
resemble 1350 OMS PKT and the ETSinflow is of the format ETSInFlow#<number>,
the Inflow is created by the EML/CT.
Important! The administrator must not delete or modify through the EML/CT any
cross-connection entities that are associated to inflows and/or outflows that are
labeled 1350OMS-PKT #<instance number>.
OutFlows
When the user labels and traffic descriptors for the ETS OutFlows begin with 1350
OMS PKT #<number> or another identifier that readily advertises that it is the 1350
OMS PKT application, such as PKT, and the ETSOutFlow is of the format
ETSOutFlow#<number>, the OutFlow is created by the 1350 OMS PKT application.
Where: 1350OMSPKT is the application and # is the instance number of the
application that the NE defines.
When the user labels or traffic descriptors for the ETS OutFlows are blank or do not
resemble 1350 OMS PKT and the OutFlow is of the format ETSOutFlow#<number>,
the OutFlow is created by the NM/CT.
Important! The administrator must not delete or modify through the EML/CT any
cross-connection entities that are associated to inflows and/or outflows that are
labeled 1350OMS-PKT #<instance number>.
VlanTypeTable
Traffic Descriptor (MPLS)
TunnelName
The VC-LST and LSP_Tunnel are named something similar to the following:
135OMSPKT Tunnel #<number of TunneIIndex>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
8-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides the administrator with the conceptual information and the
associated tasks that pertain to the ISA Board for the 1350 OMS PKT application.
Contents
MIB Alignment and ISA Board Overview
9-2
9-4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
9-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MIB realignment for a new ISA board that is under the management of the 1350 OMS
EML and the 1350 OMS PKT applications follows the same principals and procedures
that apply to any SNMP NE that is under 1350OMS-EML and 1350 OMS PKT control.
In addition, the same principals and procedures apply to any SNMP NE that the 1350
OMS EML and the 1350 OMS PKT applications control and to all instances when the
MIB of an SNMP NE under 1350 OMS EML and the 1350 OMS PKT application control
needs a full realignment after a MIB re-initialization.
The presence or the lack of the 1350 OMS PKT application is not relevant.
Operating principals
The first and main level of network protection, that is of the ISA boards, is through
the 1350 OMS EML.
The automatic and periodical MIB backup procedures of the 1350 OMS EML that are
available for both Q3 and SNMP NEs enables a periodic MIB backup. It also enables
the backup to be split into different sessions that are activated sequentially and to
define, for each session, the list of NEs whose MIBs are to be uploaded (backup)
periodically into the 1350 OMS EML MIB repository.
Splitting into different sessions can be used to organize the protection of the network
in different partitions and to perform the upload of the MIBs sequentially
partition-by-partition, to avoid a concentrated overload of the systems and of the
DCN. At any scheduled time, the MIB of all the SNMP NEs defined in the job are
always uploaded to the 1350 OMS EML, whether they are misaligned.
The second level of network protection is through the 1350 OMS PKT application
and its Audit/Alignment/Reserve (AAR) feature.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
9-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Since the 1350OMS-EML MIB backup periodic procedure cannot protect the last
modifications in the MIB that were applied after the last periodic MIB backup, the
1350 OMS PKT application provides a way to audit the NE MIBs against their
internal database representations and to realign the detected differences.
It further protects the NEs that are under its control, but only for misalignments due to
1350 OMS PKT operations. Important! Other than through the 1350 OMS PKT
application, no means exists to protect the last modifications that were applied after
the last MIB backup that occurred in the NE.
Categories of misalignment
The NE MIB audit for the 1350 OMS PKT application can detect the following categories
of misalignments:
The D+ misalignment occurs when a resource exists in the 1350 OMS PKT database,
but not in the NE MIB. This misalignment typically occurs when the 1350 OMS PKT
has implemented some Ethernet service after the MIB backup and the MIB file is
restored in the NE or whenever services or generic resources are manually removed
by the 1350OMS-EML or the CT without involving the 1350 OMS PKT.
The 1350 OMS PKT application can realign a D + misalignment can be realigned by
activating a simple Align down procedure.
The D- misalignment occurs when a resource exists in the NE MIB but not in the
1350 OMS PKT database. This misalignment typically occurs when the 1350 OMS
PKT application has de-implemented some Ethernet service after the MIB backup and
the MIB file is restored in the NE or whenever services or generic resources are
created in the NE MIB by 1350OMS-EML or CT without involving the 1350 OMS
PKT.
The 1350 OMS PKT can reserve these resources in its internal database to avoid using
them for to implement its services.
The D misalignment occurs hen a resource exists in both the NE MIB and in the 1350
OMS PKT database, but it differs. This misalignment typically occurs whenever
services or generic resources are modified in the NE MIB by the 1350OMS-EML or
the CT without involving the 1350 OMS PKT.
The realignments for a D misalignment are best done from the same system that
originated the misalignment, which is the 1350OMS-EML or the CT.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
9-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this task to realign an ISA board MIB that is under the control of the 1350OMS-EML
and 1350 OMS PKT applications.
Related information
For details about how to operate the AAR capabilities in the 1350 OMS PKT, as well as
activate a periodic MIB backup and MIB restore in the 1350 OMS EML, refer to the 1350
OMS EML Guide and 1350 OMS PKT Guide.
Before you begin
This task assumes the following in regard to the initial state of the ISA board and the
MIB:
The ISA board has already been replaced or its MIB has already been reinitialized.
A periodic MIB backup of the ISA board has been activated in the 1350 OMS EML
and the relevant MIB file is stored in the 1350 OMS EML MIB repository.
Task
From the 1350 OMS EML application and the relevant NE EMLUSM, launch the NE MIB
Restore.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the 1350 OMS PKT application, perform an Audit of the relevant ISA NE.
Result: If the Audit does not detect any differences, this task is completed.
For each D- misalignment that the Audit detects, do one of the following:
1. Reserve the resource from the 1350 OMS PKT application.
2. Remove the resource from the NE MIB by using the 1350 OMS EML application and
the relevant NE EMLUSM.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
9-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For each D misalignment that the Audit detects, use the 11350 OMS EML application and
the relevant NE EMLUSM to do one of the following:
1. Realign the difference to the 1350 OMS PKT.
2. Remove the difference from the NE MIB. (The D misalignment is changed into a D+
misalignment.)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For the whole set of D+ misalignments that the Audit detects, perform an Align down
procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
9-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
9-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
10
10 OMS PKT
1350
AlignDBSDHPathID Tool
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides the administrator with the conceptual information and the
associated tasks that pertain to the AlignDBSDHPathID tool for the 1350 OMS PKT
application.
Contents
AlignDBSDHPathID Overview
10-2
10-3
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
10-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
AlignDBSDHPathID Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AlignDBSDHPathID Overview
AlignDBSDHPathID tool definition
The AlignDBSDHPathID tool is a shell script that the administrator can use to align the
1350 OMS PKT application database to the 1350 OMS SDH database.
AlignDBSDHPathID tool operating principals
An SDH Path that is under 1350 OMS PKT control (and known as Link Over SDH)
has been deleted and re-created from the 1350 OMS SDH.
The SDH path that is deleted and has been recreated from 1350 OMS SDH must have
the same characteristics.
Example: the SDH path must have the same User Label, the same end points, the
same rate.
The Link Over SDH in the 1350 OMS PKT is visible to both the Core USM and to
the Eot USM.
The Link Over SDH in the Core USM is marked as not Consistent.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
10-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this task to align the 1350 OMS PKT application database to the 1350 OMS SDH
database..
Related information
This task assumes the following in regard to the initial state of the ISA board and the
MIB:
The ISA board has already been replaced or its MIB has already been reinitialized.
A periodic MIB backup of the ISA board has been activated in the 1350 OMS EML
and the relevant MIB file is stored in the 1350 OMS EML MIB repository.
Task
Complete the following steps to align the 1350 OMS PKT application database to the
1350 OMS SDH database.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify that an SDH path has been deleted from the 1350 OMS SDH.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify that the corresponding Link Over SDH does not disappear from the 1350 OMS
PKT and that it becomes notConsistent.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create a new SDH path in the 1350 OMS SDH that has exactly the same characteristics
as the SDH path that was previously deleted.
Note: The SDH Path creation can be performed when 1350 OMS PKT application is up
or down. In either case, the 1350 OMS PKT application is not aware of the newly
recreated path.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Retrieve from the 1350 OMS SDH the SDHPathUserLabel, theSDHPathId, and the
SDHPathFDN.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
10-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To retrieve the SDH Path User Label on the 1350 OMS SDH, select the created path and
select the SHOW/SET ATTRIBUTES window. Select the Specific panel. The User Label at
the end of the list is the value to insert as the parameter when running the script.
To retrieve the SDH Path ID on the 1350 OMS SDH, select the created path and select the
SHOW/SET ATTRIBUTES window. Select the Miscellaneous panel. The Path ID at the end
of the list is the value to insert as the parameter when running the script.
To retrieve the SDH Path FDN on the 1350 OMS SDH, select the created path and select
the View* *Report* *full on selected* window. The Path FDN is the value to insert
as the parameter when running the script.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter the following command lines to change directories and execute the tool:
cd /usr/Systems/<NMS_INSTANCE>/script/common
./AlignDBSDHPathId.sh <SDH Path User Label> <New SDH Path Id>
<New SDH Path FDN>
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
10-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
Purpose
This document part provides a detailed description about the basic functions of the 1350
OMS PKT application.
Contents
Chapter 11, Generalities
11-1
12-1
13-1
14-1
15-1
16-1
17-1
18-1
19-1
20-1
21-1
22-1
23-1
24-1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
III-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Basic Functions
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
III-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
11
Generalities
11
Overview
Purpose
This chapter gives general information about 1350 OMS PKT application.
This chapter presents the application product, provides basic concepts, and introduces the
functional domain.
Contents
About 1350 OMS PKT application
11-3
Main features
11-3
Management Layers
11-5
Application Positioning
11-6
Main concepts
11-7
11-8
11-13
11-16
11-29
11-32
11-41
Web access
11-41
11-42
11-43
11-45
Software interfaces
11-45
Multi-Manager environment
11-47
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Functional Domain
11-48
11-48
11-50
Traffic Management
11-56
MPLS Management
11-69
Maintenance Management
11-73
11-75
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
Main features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This chapter gives general information about the 1350 OMS PKT.
1350 OMS PKT application is a Network Management system belonging to
Alcatel-Lucent 1350 OMS product family.
1350 OMS PKT software is optionally installed as an add-on to the 1350 OMS overall
product.
Main network operations
1350 OMS PKT manages Ethernet Networks in a metro area network (MAN)
environment.
1350 OMS PKT is designed to establish Ethernet end-to-end connections based on
Connection Oriented and Connection Less technologies.).
1350 OMS PKT manages Ethernet Networks functionalities in term of service
provisioning, maintenance, and performance monitoring:
Supported technologies
SDH.
SONET.
Ethernet Cables.
WDM.
MPLS.
T-MPLS.
VPLS.
RPR-like.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
Main features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Supported equipments
The 1350 OMS PKT manages Alcatel-Lucent equipments and SNMP devices coming
from different vendors.
1350 OMS PKT manages the complete family of Ethernet ISA boards (that include
different types).
1350 OMS PKT supports overall fault, performance, and security management.
The MPLS, T-MPLS, and RPR-like transport layers are managed by 1350 OMS PKT as a
server application for the Ethernet client layer.
Open architecture
The 1350 OMS PKT can act as agent for service applications like 1355VPN (Virtual
Private Network).
In a large network architecture, 1350 OMS PKT can also be accessed by external OSs.
by North Bound Interface (NBI).
The 1350 OMS PKT adheres to standards and recommendations of CCITT, ETSI, IEEE,
MEF.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
Management Layers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Management Layers
Management Layer description
The EML manages each Network Element (NE) on an individual basis. The EML
supports an abstraction of the functions provided by the Physical Layer.
On a devolved basis from the management layer, the EML has a set of element managers
that are individually responsible for a subset of NEs.
Network Management Layer (NML)
NML has the responsibility for the management of a set of NEs. As presented by the
EML, the management is accomplished both on a single NEs or a set of NEs. NML is not
concerned with how a particular element provides services internally.
Functions addressing the management on a wide geographical area are located at this
layer. Complete visibility of the whole network is typical and a vendor independent view
is maintained.
Service Management Layer (SML)
SML offers services such as network analysis or Virtual Private Network (VPN)
management.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
Application Positioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Application Positioning
The product family
The following figure shows how 1350 OMS PKT application is positioned inside the
layering concept and then inside the 1350 OMS product family.
Figure 11-1 Application Positioning
At EML level, the 1350 OMS EML manages both SDH NEs and all ISA Ethernet cards.
At NML level, operates two applications: 1350 OMS SDH and 1350 OMS PKT.
The 1350 OMS SDH manages SDH equipment (ADM, DXC, MW, SUBM). The 1350
OMS PKT manages the ISA Ethernet equipment (ISA E/FE/GE, ISA PR EA, ISA PR,
ISA ES).
The OMSN equipments are Add and Drop Multiplexer (ADM) or Cross-Connect (DXC)
including one or more ISA cards.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
Main concepts
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Main concepts
Ethernet Services:
An Ethernet Service is an end-to-end that involves two or more end points. The Ethernet
Service is characterized by an established topology, a quality of service (QoS) and an
internal defined Ethernet packet forwarding rule.
The Ethernet Services are implemented: directly over SDH network layer (GFP or
LAPS), over an intermediate MPLS network layer, over an intermediate RPR-like ring or
directly over a cable. An Ethernet Service can use every type of combination of these
network support layers.
A fundamental aspect of Ethernet Services is the Ethernet Virtual Connection (EVC).
Ethernet Virtual Connections
An Ethernet Segment has associated the quality of service (QoS) value, the bandwidth,
and the forwarding rules. The QoS value can be: Guaranteed, Best Effort, Regulated. The
forwarding rule is based on VLAN classification.
The quality of service information is collected in a Traffic Descriptor entity. The
forwarding rule (or segregation rules) are collected in a Traffic Classifier entity.
The Ethernet Segment is the elementary connection managed by 1350 OMS PKT.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-7
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network users are searching ways to expand the capability in offering transport services
to Service and Application Providers: in such way they try to generate new revenues.
To expand the capabilities means to offer new advanced communication services at a
lower price than the analogous service offered before (that is leased lines). To reach the
goal of cost reduction, the transport network resources have to be used in more efficient
way.
The management has to be able to reduce the cost in defining and maintaining the new
services. In the majority of cases, a network provider use a mix of technologies to provide
the best solution: ATM, Ethernet, MPLS,.
SDH or SONET-based networks are used in majority of the Metro Access.
The Ethernet networks used at transport layer imply a lower cost of physical interface in
terms of single interface cost and number of interfaces. Deliver must have high capacity,
scalable bandwidth with low latency and jitter.
The user requests for the support of Ethernet interface as well as the transport of Ethernet
frames.
Dynamic provisioning
The static provisioning of bandwidth (in SDH) has the following shortcomings:
No burst capability.
Unused bandwidth is wasted.
No networking, that is the transport network provides pipes.
As the number of Ethernet ports grows, the number of pipes increases too (no
scaling).
The following figure summarizes the network architecture supporting Ethernet Services:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-8
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Legacy network
Bridge network
O-MSN/ISA ES 1-4-16
MPLSnetwork
Here are reported definition and classification of topologies and services in use:
(*) EPL or EVPL can be managed using port forwarding or port + VLAN
forwarding: in this case more than one Service or EVC can be defined on a single
Ethernet port.
(**) In 1350 OMS PKT is not distinguished when the back-hauling service is related
to a single customer EVP Hub or more than one customer (BA).
(***) Both Connection Oriented and Connection-less Networks; MAC Bridging
(802.1D based) is considered a Private Service.
(****) In 1350 OMS PKT the VPHS sends each Ethernet frame to all other port
belonging to VPHS service. In ISA PR R1.0, in R1.1 the selective forwarding is
implemented.
(*****) Both Connection Oriented and Connection-less Networks; Two types of
Bridging are considered Virtual: Virtual Bridging (802.1Q based) and Provider
Bridging (802.1ad based).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-9
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Transport layer
Using the proprietary Resilient Packet Ring (RPR-like based on SDH paths).
MPLS/T-MPLS layer
With respect to MPLS, the T-MPLS solution adds carrier-class OAM and survivability
management.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-10
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The OAM capabilities enable status and performance reports. The OAM capabilities are
confined within the T-MPLS layer and do not require deeper packet inspection. The OAM
capabilities enable also Fault Localization.
The survivability capabilities enable both protection switching and restoration. The
T-MPLS data plane can be operated statically through network management or
dynamically through GMPLS control plane. The granularity of the separation between the
T-MPLS static and dynamic networks is on port basis. The operator configures which
ports are reserved for dynamic LSP setup through GMPLS and which ports are reserved
for static LSP setup through management system.
The network vision
The network vision is based on the multi-service node concept. The T-MPLS is the
converged packet network technology.
The T-MPLS is able to support any service type
Ethernet
IP/MPLS
FR
ATM
TDM via CES
T-MPLS nodes can be located either at the edge or in the middle of the T-MPLS network.
They are:
T-MPLS sections between nodes can be physical or supported by a server layer (TDM,
WDM).
T-MPLS networking layers
Tunnels are point-to-point logical connections between NNI ports. The route of the
tunnels spans one or more T-MPLS sections.
PseudoWires are point-to-point logical connections between NNI ports, usable by only
one service. The route of PseudoWires spans one or more T-MPLS sections and/or
tunnels.
The same tunnel can carry one or more PseudoWires.
The Tunnel purpose is to enhance scalability of T-MPLS logical connections.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-11
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The PseudoWire purpose is to carry one service across the T-MPLS network.
Both PseudoWires and Tunnels are Label Switched Paths (LSP).
The PseudoWire and the Tunnel terminations correspond to:
Proprietary RPR ring (RPRring is a technology mixed between RPR and MPLS
implemented by ISA PR), makes possible:
The classification features is the management of traffic type. the of traffic type can be
guaranteed, regulated, and best effort. The classification features depend on the board
type. The classification features do not depend on the used transport layer.
An Ethernet End to End service can use all the defined transport server layers: transparent
SDH, then cross the proprietary RPR or MPLS ring and then use an LSP (MPLS network)
to reach the final destination port.
Introducing the ISA ES support and management also a connection-less subnetwork
can be crossed by an end-to-end service.
The 1350 OMS PKT supplies an integrated view allowing in a simple way:
Furthermore, must be managed the MPLS transport layer and the proprietary RPR ring.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-12
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Bundling attribute makes configurable a UNI. The Bundling allow the mapping of
more than one CE-VLAN Id to a particular EVC at the UNI.
The Bundling service attribute is independent of the EVCs at the UNI.
An EVC with more than one CE-VLAN Id mapping to it has the CE-VLAN Id
Preservation Service Attribute. The list of CE-VLAN IDs mapped to the EVC is the same
at each UNI in the EVC.
The Figure 11-3, Example of Bundling (p. 11-13) shows an example of Bundling. In
this example, UNI A and UNI B have the bundling attribute as seen from the mapping for
EVC1. EVC1 has the CE-VLAN Id Preservation attribute.
Figure 11-3 Example of Bundling
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-13
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
All to One Bundling is a special case of Bundling. All to One Bundling is sufficiently
important to be called out as a separate attribute.
When a UNI has the All to One Bundling attribute set to TRUE the following conditions
must be verified:
The EVC at the UNI must have the CE-VLAN Id Preservation Service Attribute (see
Section Modify an edge port (p. 17-142)).
The list of CE-VLAN IDs mapped to the EVC must include all CE-VLAN IDs and be
the same at each UNI in the EVC.
A UNI with the Service Multiplexing attribute must be configurable to support multiple
EVCs. Point to point EVCs and Multipoint EVCs can be multiplexed in any combination
at a UNI. Figure 11-4, Example of Service Multiplexing on UNI A (p. 11-15) shows an
example of Service Multiplexing. In this example, CE A is attached to the MEN through a
Gigabit Ethernet UNI. The CEs B, C, and D are attached through 100 Mbit/s Ethernet
UNIs.
Using Service Multiplexing, Point to point EVCs to each of B, C, and D can be
implemented with a single physical port on the CEA.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-14
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-15
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Ethernet Services are based on EVC. The service is a container of one or more EVCs.
The combining of more than one EVC defines a high number of possible services.
A specific type of service introduces restriction on the EVC types to be used for that
service.
If a different classification is required, the user can adapt these definitions and then the
related implementation in a simple way.
Each service requires the 1350 OMS EML capacity to collect Performance data to verify
the defined QoS level. Furthermore 1350 OMS EML has to be clearly shown in case of
network failure the affected services: both alarms and specific performance data are used
to guarantee the maintenance features.
Supported EVC
The main items managed by 1350 OMS PKT are the EVC. The following types of EVC
are managed:
Point to point.
Routed multi-point: an EVC termination has the role of root and the other the role
of leaf.
Any to any is a bus like topology: each EVC termination can communicate with the
others.
The service classification that follows is one of the possible service classification used as
a basis.
Each Service is shortly described together with its topological characteristics, technology
dependencies and MEF attribute mapping for UNI and for EVC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-16
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Service type:
Technology:
Service characteristics:
UNI characteristics:
EVC characteristics:
Classification = Y/N.
CE-VlanPreservation = Y/N.
Bundling = Y/N.
CE-VlanCosPreservation = Y/N.
AllToOneBundling = N.
BwdPerUNI or BwdPerEvc or
BwdPerCoS.
Table 11-2
Service type:
Technology:
Not allowed.
Table 11-3
Service type:
Technology:
Not allowed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-17
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EPTL /ETS
Service type:
Technology:
ETS.
Main characteristics:
Service characteristics:
UNI characteristics:
EVC characteristics:
two UNIs.
Classification = DontCare.
Service Multiplexing = N.
CE-VlanPreservation = Y.
Bundling = N.
CE-VlanCosPreservation = Y.
AllToOneBundling = Y.
UnicastDelivery = DeliverUncond.
N.EVC = 1.
MulticastDelivery = DeliverUncond.
BwdPerUNI = FullTLBwd.
BroadcastDelivery = DeliverUncond.
L2ControlProtocol =
equalOnBothUNI.
L2ControlProtocol =
equalOnAllInflows.
Table 11-5
Service type:
Technology:
Not allowed.
Table 11-6
Service type:
Technology:
Not allowed.
Table 11-7
Service type:
Technology:
Not allowed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-18
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Service type:
Technology:
Service characteristics:
UNI characteristics:
EVC characteristics:
two UNIs.
Service Multiplexing = N.
CE-VlanPreservation = Y/N.
Classification = Y/N.
Bundling = Y/N.
CE-VlanCosPreservation = Y/N.
AllToOneBundling = Y/N.
N. EVC = 1,BwdPerUNI or
BwdPerEvc or BwdPerCoS.
Table 11-9
Service type:
Technology:
Not allowed.
Table 11-10
Service type:
Technology:
Not allowed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-19
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Service type:
Technology:
Service characteristics:
UNI characteristics:
EVC characteristics:
Service Multiplexing = Y.
Bundling = Y/N.
CE-VlanPreservation = Y/N.
Classification = Y/N.
AllToOneBundling = Y/N.
CE-VlanCosPreservation = Y/N.
BwdPerUNI or BwdPerEvc or
BwdPerCoS.
Table 11-12
Service type:
Technology:
Not allowed.
Table 11-13
Service type:
Technology:
Not allowed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-20
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Extended EVPL
Table 11-14
Service type:
Technology:
Service characteristics:
UNI characteristics:
EVC characteristics:
Classification = Yes.
CE-VlanPreservation = Y/N.
Bundling = Y/N.
CE-VlanCosPreservation = Y/N.
AllToOneBundling = Y/N.
BwdPerUNI or BwdPerEvc or
BwdPerCoS.
Table 11-15
Service type:
Technology:
Table 11-16
Service type:
Technology:
Not allowed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-21
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Service type:
Technology:
Service characteristics:
UNI characteristics:
EVC characteristics:
Bundling = Y/N.
CE-VlanPreservation = Y/N.
Classification = Y/N.
AllToOneBundling = Y/N.
CE-VlanCosPreservation = Y/N.
BwdPerUNI or BwdPerEvc or
BwdPerCoS.
Table 11-18
Service type:
Technology:
Table 11-19
Service type:
Technology:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-22
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Service type:
Technology:
Service characteristics:
UNI characteristics:
EVC characteristics:
Service Multiplexing = Y.
CE-VlanPreservation = Y/N.
Classification = Y/N.
Bundling = Y/N.
CE-VlanCosPreservation = Y/N.
AllToOneBundling = Y/N.
UnicastDelivery = DeliverUncond.
MulticastDelivery = DeliverUncond.
BroadcastDelivery = DeliverUncond.
PolicyMode = IETFColorAware +
ColorProfile.
Bundling = Y/N.
AllToOneBundling = Y/N.
BwdPerUNI or BwdPerEvc
or BwdPerCoS.
L2ControlProtocol = (See
comment in Expected Checks
column).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-23
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 11-21
Service type:
Technology:
ETS Multicast.
Main characteristics:
Service characteristics:
UNI characteristics:
EVC characteristics:
Service Multiplexing = Y.
CE-VlanPreservation = Y/N.
Bundling = Y/N.
CE-VlanCosPreservation = Y/N.
Classification = Y.
AllToOneBundling = Y/N.
QoS = AllTypes.
UnicastDelivery = DeliverUnconditionally.
MulticastDelivery =
DeliverUnconditionally.
BroadcastDelivery =
DeliverUnconditionally.
Table 11-22
Leaf UNI:
L2ControlProtocol = (See
comment in Notes column).
Service type:
Technology:
Table 11-23
Service type:
Technology:
Not allowed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-24
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Service type:
Technology:
ETS Multicast.
Main characteristics:
Service characteristics:
UNI characteristics:
EVC characteristics:
1 UNI root.
Service Multiplexing = Y.
CE-VlanPreservation = Y/N.
Bundling = Y/N.
CE-VlanCosPreservation = Y/N.
AllToOneBundling = Y/N.
Classification = Y.
UnicastDelivery = DeliverUnconditionally.
QoS = AllTypes.
Leaf UNI:
MulticastDelivery =
DeliverUnconditionally.
BroadcastDelivery =
DeliverUnconditionally.
Table 11-25
Service type:
Technology:
Service characteristics:
UNI characteristics:
EVC characteristics:
Service Multiplexing = Y.
CE-VlanPreservation = Y/N.
Bundling = Y.
CE-VlanCosPreservation = Y/N.
AllToOneBundling = N.
Service Multiplexing = Y.
Bundling = Y.
AllToOneBundling = N.
BwdProfile = All.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-25
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 11-26
Service type:
Technology:
Not allowed.
Table 11-27
Service type:
Technology:
Not allowed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-26
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Broadcast /ETS
Service type:
Broadcast.
Technology:
ETS.
Main characteristics:
Service characteristics:
UNI characteristics:
EVC characteristics:
Table 11-29
CE-VlanPreservation = Y/N.
Bundling = Y/N.
CE-VlanCosPreservation = Y/N.
AllToOneBundling = Y/N.
UnicastDelivery = DeliverUnconditionally.
MulticastDelivery =
DeliverUnconditionally.
BroadcastDelivery =
DeliverUnconditionally.
Leaf UNI:
L2ControlProtocol = (See
comment in Notes column).
Service type:
Broadcast.
Technology:
Not allowed.
Table 11-30
Service type:
Broadcast.
Technology:
Not allowed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-27
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 11-31
Service type:
Broadcast.
Technology:
Not allowed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-28
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Services definitions are inspired by Service names provided in MEF standard
documentation. Such MEF Services are completed with the addition of Alcatel-Lucent
proprietary extensions to provide a large set of Services.
All the previous Service definitions become obsolete. This chapter, further than providing
the new Services meaning, also provides the way to migrate older definitions into new
ones.
The following table summarizes the main characteristics of the new services definition.
M. Old
E. Service
F. Type.
New
Service
Type.
Service
Frame
Delivery.
Privacy.
Bandwidth
Profile.
Main characteristics.
Service pattern.
All-to-One-Bundling: YES.
ELINE.
E.
P.
NA.
L.
(Point
to
point).
Deliver
conditionally
or
unconditionally (unicast,
multicast,
broadcast).
Multiplexing: NO.
Bundling: NO.
UNI.
UNI.
1
A
PRIVATE
PRIVATE
PolicyMode: ColorBlind.
All-to-One-Bundling: NO.
ELINE.
E.
V.
P.
NA.
L.
E.
P.
T.
L.
(Point
to
point).
EPTLINE.
ELINE.
(Wizard
or manual
link).
(Point
to
point).
Deliver
conditionally
or
unconditionally (unicast,
multicast,
broadcast).
Deliver
unconditionally (unicast,
multicast,
broadcast).
Multiplexing: YES.
None.
UNI.
EVC.
CoS.
Preservation (VLAN or
CoS): YES or NO.
M
N
M
A
Z
N
PolicyMode: Disabled or
ColorBlind.
Dedicated
UNI and
Links.
Single
SDH
based
infrastructure.
All-to-One-Bundling: YES.
Multiplexing: NO.
Bundling: NO.
None.
1
1
1
1
PRIVATE
PRIVATE
PRIVATE
A
PolicyMode: Disabled.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-29
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
M. Old
E. Service
F. Type.
New
Service
Type.
Service
Frame
Delivery.
Privacy.
Bandwidth
Profile.
Main characteristics.
Service pattern.
All-to-One-Bundling: NO.
Multiplexing: YES.
Bundling: YES or NO.
E.
ELAN.
V.
P.
L.
NA.
A.
N.
(Multi
point to
multi
point).
UNI.
Any values.
None.
EVC.
CoS.
M
Z N
M
N Z
M
N Z
M
Z N
M
Z N
All-to-One-Bundling: YES
or NO.
EPTLINE.
(more
than one
manual
links)
EPLINE
EVPLINE.
Any values.
Optional
UNI and
Links.
UNI.
EVC.
M
N A
CoS.
Preservation (VLAN or
CoS): YES or NO.
PRIVATE OR SHARED
M
N
PolicyMode: Disabled,
ColorBlind, ColorAware +
profile.
P.
L.
E.
x.
t.
All-to-One-Bundling: YES
or NO.
e.
n.
d.
e.
d.
E.
V.
P.
L.
EPLANE
VPLAN
unknown.
ELAN.
(Multi
point to
multi
point).
Any values.
Optional
UNI and
Links.
UNI.
EVC.
CoS.
Preservation (VLAN or
CoS): YES or NO.
PolicyMode: Disabled,
ColorBlind, ColorAware +
profile.
M
N Z
M
N Z
M
Z N
M
Z N
M
Z N
PRIVATE OR SHARED
A.
N.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-30
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
M. Old
E. Service
F. Type.
New
Service
Type.
Service
Frame
Delivery.
Privacy.
Bandwidth
Profile.
Main characteristics.
Service pattern.
All-to-One-Bundling: NO.
Multiplexing: YES.
H.
S.
I.
EVP hub.
BA.
ETREE.
(Rooted
multi
point).
Deliver
conditionally
(MAC based)
or
unconditionally (VLAN
Based).
Bundling: YES.
UNI.
None.
EVC.
CoS.
MxS
NxSH
PolicyMode: Disabled or
ColorBlind.
M
N
M
N
M
N
B.
BTV.
T.
(Bridge or
ETS
based).
V.
Bundling: YES.
ETREE.
(Rooted
multi
point).
UNI.
Any values.
None.
EVC.
CoS.
Mx
SN
M
N
M
N
Preservation (VLAN or
CoS): YES or NO.
M
S
PolicyMode: Disabled or
ColorBlind.
All-to-One-Bundling: YES
or NO.
o.
a.
d.
c.
a.
s.
t.
BTV.
(SDH
broadcast
based).
ETREE.
(Rooted
multi
point).
UNI.
Any values.
None.
EVC.
CoS.
S
N
PolicyMode: Disabled or
ColorBlind.
MAC forwarding: NO.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-31
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Based on the number of terminations, the service is implemented with one or more EVCs.
The topology can be Point to point or Multipoint to multipoint.
The following main topologies used by Ethernet Services are defined:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-32
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the direct mapping, the Ethernet port maps an SDH VC (GFP mapping) or a group of
SDH VCs called packet concatenation.
Packet concatenation uses a group of SDH VCs by the LO packet concatenation on ISA
PR EA or by Virtual concatenation..
The boards can additionally implement a transparent or a compressed transmission.
Boards involved in Point to Point topology
ISA E/FE/GE.
ISA PR EA.
ISA PR.
ISA ES1.
ISA ES4.
ISA ES16.
TSS.
The transport of Ethernet frames is possible by one or more LSP. As LSP, the usage of
ISA PR EA,ISA PR or ISA ES16 is mandatory.
Mixed configuration
A Hub & spoke topology for Ethernet Services connects one PE to more than one PE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-33
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The typical use of Hub & spoke topology is the traffic diffusion from a central CE, trough
connected PE, toward the remote CEs or the grooming feature. The grooming feature is
the access of remote sites to the main site.
Figure 11-6 Hub & spoke Topology
The Hub & spoke topology can be built directly on an SDH layer.
In the direct mapping the Ethernet port maps an SDH VC (GFP mapping) or a group of
SDH VCs (packet concatenation).
Packet concatenation uses a group of SDH VCs by the LO packet concatenation on ISA
PR EA or by Virtual concatenation..
The boards can additionally implement a transparent or a compressed transmission.
Boards involved in the Hub & spoke topology
The following boards can be involved in the Hub & spoke topology: ISA E/FE/GE, ISA
PR EA, ISA PR, ISA ES16 at spoke parts; only ISA PR EA, ISA PR,ISA ES16 in the Hub
side.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-34
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The mixed configuration is also possible (the configuration are reported per branch or
leg).
It is possible to have partial Ethernet traffic aggregation (that is more than one level of
hub).
Figure 11-7 Hub & spoke with multi level aggregation topology
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-35
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This topology is typically managed using a Point to multipoint EVC having associated a
set of unidirectional Ethernet Segments. Each Ethernet Segment with specific Traffic
Descriptor (bandwidth and traffic type) and Traffic Classifier (VLAN). The cardinality of
this set is the number of the leaf nodes.
Full Meshed Topology
A Full Meshed topology connects one PE to all PEs belonging to the same Ethernet
Service. Alternatively can connect a subset of PE. This topology is like a distributed
LAN.
The typical use of full meshed topology is in the implementation of a Virtual Private Hub
Service (VPHS).
In a Virtual Private Hub Service, a customer (typically an enterprise) requires that all its
own sites connect to each other. Each connectivity between a couple of sites can have
different characteristics, even though probably in the normal case all the sites share the
same connection characteristics).
The topology can be shown this way:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-36
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-37
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using ISA ES family in bridge mode, the SDH VC acts as a common Transport Link to
distribute Ethernet frames. The involved ports must belong to the same service. The
service must be based on MAC address or S-VLAN routing capability.
To implement full meshed topology can be used only: ISA PR EA, ISA ESfamily, or ISA
PR. The ISA E/FE/GE can be used but only to control remotely the Ethernet port, without
having any feature related the switching capability.
The mixed configuration is also possible:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-38
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The ring topology is built directly on SDH layer implementing an RPR like protocol. The
protocol is managed, in the first step, by a specific Network Management system.
The Ethernet frames are mapped on this ring protocol.
Boards involved in Ring topology
When ISA PR EA or ISA ES16 is deployed in ring topology, it still works as an MPLS
board. The mesh topology is taken into account to define LSP. Specific behavior must be
implemented to guarantee the same access capabilities (fairness behavior) to all best
effort traffics coming from all nodes in the ring.
This topology is not directly related the Ethernet connections. This topology is specific of
SDH or RPR technology. This topology is no mapped with a specific EVC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-39
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
About 1350 OMS PKT application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Any EVC type (Point to point, Point to multipoint, Multipoint to multipoint) can be used
to describe the Ethernet connection on ISA PR ring. When the service crosses the ISA PR
ring, part of an EVC is implemented on the ISA PR ring itself.
The ring topology for Ethernet Services is a specific configuration that is possible to
build:
The main differences is that ISA PR bases its behavior on the ring topology itself (have to
be deployed in this topology) while ISA PR EA or ISA ES16 being an MPLS board can
be also deployed in a ring topology and in this case it uses the fairness feature to
manage the best effort traffic (up to now this capability, that is the ring fairness, is not
managed by ISA PR EA and by ISA ES16 and then this topology is managed only for ISA
PR).
The ISA PR boards require to be connected in a ring topology way. The ISA PR boards
implement an RPR like ring.
Inter-working with the ISA PR EA or ISA ES16 is possible trough a GE physical
interface, using the MPLS labels (Martini encapsulation).
The label passed by ISA PR EA or ISA ES16 is swapped at ingressing by ISA PR and
substituted with an internal ISA PR label.
Internal label is maintained trough all crossed ISA PR.
If the ISA PR is a connection with another ISA PR EA, at egressing the ISA PR, the label
is swapped again with another label. Otherwise, if the service is terminated, the label is
popped out.
The inter-working with ISA E/FE/GE is not possible. To connect the ISA PR boards an
external Ethernet cable is needed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-40
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
How to access the application
Web access
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Web portal provides the user with a view of all the 1350 OMS applications and
allows the user to navigate the application subsystems and components.
To access and navigate the application, the user needs:
For a quick reference about the web access and MS-GUI, refer to document [1] 1350
OMS Getting Started Guide.
For a complete description about the web access and MS-GUI, refer to document [2]
1350 OMS Administration Guide, Vol 2: Common GUI Functions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-41
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
How to access the application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 1350 OMS PKT Multi-Service GUI is the specialization of the MS-GUI for the 1350
OMS PKT application. The MS-GUI framework is the reference graphic environment for
the 1350OMS. The MS-GUI can be accessed by any web browser.
The 1350 OMS PKT MS-GUI main window includes the menu bar, the toolbar and is
split in more section views as shown in the figure. The main view area is managed as set
of tabbed panels, defined by the operator. By default, the main view area shows the
Inventory list panel and the Log panel. According with the MS-GUI common behavior
the main view area supplies filtering and searching facility and table management.
The user accesses the system functions both from the main menu and from the pop-up
menu available from the list, for single or multiple selected items. Functions are grouped
under the main menu and, for the more complex ones, the menu items give access to
specific submenus, organized in a hierarchical tree.
For a quick reference about the web access and MS-GUI, refer to document [1] 1350
OMS Getting Started Guide.
For a complete description about the web access and MS-GUI, refer to the document [2]
1350 OMS Administration Guide, Vol 2: Common GUI Functions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-42
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
How to access the application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function requests the user to confirm or cancel the execution of an action.
Related information
The actions that affect heavily the managed network request a confirmation before the
execution of the ongoing operation.
The confirmation acts as a reminder for the user and gives the user the chance to renounce
the action.
The execution is suspended until the user confirms or cancels the requested action.
Before you begin
Yes.
No.
Yes.
No.
All.
Cancel.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-43
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
How to access the application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
then.
Click Yes.
Click No.
Click All.
Click Cancel.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-44
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
The application interfaces
Software interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows the interfaces used by 1350 OMS PKT software.
Figure 11-10 Interface description
Interface features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-45
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
The application interfaces
Software interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Application configuration
To manage the proxy stop or start directly from the PMC GUI.
EMLIM_PROXY.
NMLIM_PROXY.
Note: For a detailed description about proxy configuration, refer to: Access the
System Configuration Window and Configure 1350 OMS PKT (p. 3-4), step Step 7
and step Step 8.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-46
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
The application interfaces
Multi-Manager environment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Multi-Manager environment
Multi-manager environment description
Multi-Manager Management occurs when the user manages part of the network by an
application and the rest of the network using another application.
Multi-Manager Management is a state of network management. A typical example is the
management by the 1350 OMS PKT and along with another application at EML layer.
Note: For a description, refer to: Multi-Manager Management Overview (p. 8-2).
For best practice and suggestions, refer to: Operational Guidelines (p. 8-3)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-47
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
Functional Domain
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Functional Domain
Overview about functional domains
The Ethernet connectivity
SDH.
OTH.
MPLS.
RPR-like rings.
Management areas
NE or ENE management.
Subnetwork management.
Domain management.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-48
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
Functional Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Policy control.
LSP management.
Alarms management.
Fault Localization.
Audit.
Alignment and Force alignment.
Reserve and Recovery.
System management.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-49
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
Functional Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The subnetwork management allows to organize the network in a set of subnetwork and
build a hierarchical view of the network.
A configurable number of levels (up to 4 by default) is possible.
The network hierarchical view allows having different synthesis of the network structure.
Domain management
In the scope of the construction domain, NEs are characterized by a set of the following
resources
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-50
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
Functional Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: To avoid confusion between local ports and remote ports, the word port is
reserved for the denomination of the Ethernet physical ports. The remote ports are
named TDM terminations.
NE boards
ENE management
The ENE management allows the user to define NEs, networks, Customer Edges. The
ENE give the user a complete view of the network.
Inner equipment or Provider equipment
If the ENE role is Inner Equipment, then the interface type is NNI.
If the ENE role is Inner Provider, then the interface type is IWI.
The NEs next to the ENE and part of the 1350 OMS PKT managed network, are known
as the Customer Premise Equipment (CPE).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-51
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
Functional Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Transport links between NE and inner ENE can be either Link Over Cable or Link Over
TDM. Inter-working with SDH always involves an inner ENE.
An RPR ring is viewed like an inner ENE by the 1350 OMS PKT.
Customer Edge
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-52
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
Functional Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To provide the infrastructure of the Ethernet, the Ethernet application uses the Transport
Links. uses means that it asks for creation or it uploads the needed Transport Links.
The topology of Transport links can be Point to point, or Point-to-multi-point, or
multi-point-to-multi-point.
Transport links for Ethernet Services can be:
Paths directly supporting Ethernet frames can have fixed or variable rate. If the
path is a Virtual Concatenated or a Packet Concatenated path, the rate is variable.
Paths can be defined and configured to be assigned to Connection Oriented
management (configured in ETS mode) or to Connection-less management
(configured in ETB mode).
Link Over Cables.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-53
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
Functional Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Details about Link Over Cable Transport link for Ethernet Services:
The Ethernet cable is the connection between an ISA E/FE/GE (Q3 board) or ISA
ES1/4 (SNMP board) and an ISA PR.
Link Over Cable is different from Martini cable. Martini cable is a connection
from ISA PR EA or ISA ES16 and ISA PR. The inter-working is at MPLS level
and uses just one label (VC-LSP level).
Ethernet cables can be defined and configured to be assigned to Connection
Oriented management (configured in ETS mode) or to Connection-less
management (configured in ETB mode).
.
Link Over WDM.
Details about Link Over WDM Transport link for Ethernet Services:
They are managed by external applications.
Refer to the document: [5] 1350 OMS WDM Guide
.
Link Over MPLS.
Details over MPLS Transport link for Ethernet Services:
VC-LSP is the connection individuated by the VC label (inner label): this
connection is associated just to a single transport and then to an Ethernet link.
LSP tunnel is the infrastructure that carries more than one VC connection. LSP
tunnel is managed by MPLS manager.
Alcatel-Lucent MPLS implementation foresees the usage of two labels differently
by Native implementation that uses only one label.
Link Over RPR.
Details over RPR Transport link for Ethernet Services:
To manage ISA PR, in the ring implemented with ISA PR (Native ring), the
connectivity links need further definition after consolidation of the interface.
Links Over WDM are managed by external applications.
Refer to the document: [5] 1350 OMS WDM Guide
Ethernet ports are managed to give a customer the possibility to connect the Ethernet
Services.
Ethernet port can be defined and configured in:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-54
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
Functional Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When Ethernet connectivity is based on SDH technology and is not terminated in the
scope of 1350 OMS PKT, Ethernet ports are considered Edge ports. It depends on the
particular characteristics of the specific Ethernet connection.
Autonegotiation
Autonegotiation is used to check the consistency of the Ethernet interfaces. The check is
done between CPE and CE Ethernet ports. The following characteristics are exchanged
between peers:
Autonegotiation is used to warn the user when the two peers are not aligned regarding
duplex mode and interface speed. The autonegotiation process must not mandatory
choose between interface speeds or duplex modes. For this reason, 1350 OMS PKT
always chooses, for E/FE port, an interface speed between 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s.
In case of detected misalignment, the NE raises a LOS alarm.
Autonegotiation is triggered when the interface is activated. During the autonegotiation,
traffic is interrupted.
It exists a relation between autonegotiation and flow control configuration:
If autonegotiation is not activated on the Ethernet Port, then the user explicitly enables
or disables the flow control.
On port basis, the user can enable or disable the Auto-negotiation mode. In case of
enabling the user optionally set the advertised characteristics, to allow connecting a CE
with characteristics different from the default ones. The user provides:
After port activation and autonegotiation completed, 1350 OMS PKT uploads the
negotiation result. If Flow Control is enabled or disabled, the user is warned.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-55
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
Functional Domain
Traffic Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Traffic Management
Overview
The traffic management is related to the Ethernet Service, EVC management, VLAN
management, Policy control, and SLA management.
Note: SLA management function must be confirmed and then detailed: for this reason
no further information is reported in this version, only a simple label reference is
managed, without any elaboration or control.
Ethernet Service Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-56
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
Functional Domain
Traffic Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Creation of Transport Link: for each Ethernet Segment one or more Transport Links
are associated. The 1350 OMS PKT uses Transport links created by specific
manager. If Transport links are not available, 1350 OMS PKT requires the
implementation of the needed Transport Link to the specific manager.
Supervision: the 1350 OMS PKT provides the complete control of an EVC and
associated Ethernet Segments status management, connectivity end-to-end test, alarm
management, and PM. (The supervision operation is listed here but it belongs to
Ethernet Maintenance management area)..
VLAN management
One important feature of the Alcatel-Lucent ISA boards is the support and the
management of the VLAN tag (often called simply VLAN ).
Note: Only Edge VLAN is supported for ISA PR EA 1.1.
Only Stacked VLAN is supported for ISA PR EA 1.2 and ISA ES family.
The VLAN tag on Ethernet frames is a way to segregate Ethernet traffic.
The VLAN tag is composed of 4 bytes:
the first two are the VLAN Tag Protocol Type (802.1Q Tag Type), whose standard
value is 0x8100 .
the second 2 bits are the Tag Control Information (TCI). TCI is split into VLAN Id
(12 bits) and Priority Id (3 bits).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-57
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
Functional Domain
Traffic Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Preamble
7 octects
Preamble
7 octects
Preamble
1 octects
6 octects
Destination Address
1 octects
6 octects
Source Address
6 octects
Source Address
6 octects
Source Address
Length/Type
2 octects
2 octects
2 octects
2 octects
Length/Type
Data
Destination Address
46 .. 1500
octects
Length/Type
Data
Padding
MAC Frame
Padding
Frame Check Sequence
Tagged MAC Frame
1 octects
6 octects
6 octects
2 octects
2 octects
2 octects
2 octects
2 octects
46 .. 1500
octects
Data
7 octects
4 octects
46 .. 1500
octects
Padding
Frame Check Sequence
4 octects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-58
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
Functional Domain
Traffic Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The ISA PR EA boards and ISA ES16 boards handle all the frame types of the Ethernet
Frame hierarchy: untagged, Q-tagged, and P-tagged frames.
The following figure shows the place of those objects in the topology:
Figure 11-16 Ethernet Frame Hierarchy
The management of the VLAN Tag Protocol Type (Standard Q-TAG or proprietary Tag)
is logically separated from the management of the VLAN Id and Priority Id.
The VLAN Tag Protocol Type is managed on Ethernet Interface basis.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-59
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
Functional Domain
Traffic Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The VLAN Id and Priority Id are managed on Ethernet Flow (Ethernet Segment) basis.
The VLAN Id is used to direct Ethernet traffic to those Ethernet ports (UNI) that are
members of a given VLAN tag.
VLAN Tag and VLAN Id ensure that tagged frames are accessible only by the proper end
user, they implement traffic segregation.
The 12 bits of the VLAN Id permit a maximum of 4096 different VLAN in a single
Ethernet Segment.
The VLAN Tag Protocol Type associated to an Ethernet interface is used to determine
whether a frame is tagged or untagged:
If the protocol type matches the one provisioned on the interface, such a frame is
considered tagged.
If the protocol type does not match the one provisioned on the interface, such a frame
is considered untagged.
If the protocol type is missing as in the case of untagged frames, such a frame is
considered untagged.
Then the frame is subjected to the classification using the Traffic Classifiers.
The VLAN tag has a major problem when used for implementing Ethernet Services on a
transport network: it does not allow designing a global and scalable solution for switching
Ethernet frames on a transport network.
Alcatel-Lucent solution
Transparently. The VLAN tag is passed from the ingress to the egress port without
any elaboration. The VLAN is not used by Alcatel-Lucent network but only by the
customer.
To switch the Ethernet frames. In the VPAS service, the customer must use different
VLANs for different ports (at least one VLAN for each port). The Ethernet frames are
sent from hub only to the selected spoke site.
To swap a received VLAN tag (provider VLAN) with another one.
To pop the internally used VLAN tag before to egress the frame.
To swap the used VLAN tag with another one.
The VLAN tag is introduced for splitting the network into different broadcast (or
multicast) domains. The VLAN tag solve security, privacy, bandwidth management, and
increase the performance.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-60
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
Functional Domain
Traffic Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-61
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
Functional Domain
Traffic Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The interface of the NE must be provisioned with a value of VLAN tag protocol type to
recognize the frames and classifies them. By default, the interfaces support the standard
VLAN tag protocol type (Q-tag: 8100).
For an incoming VLAN tagged frame, the NE processing has the following sequence:
The comparison of the VLAN tag protocol type of the frame with the one configured
on the interface. If they match, the frame is handled as a VLAN tagged frame. If
protocol types are different or the incoming frame is untagged, the frame is
considered untagged.
The classification of the frame according to the P-VLAN Id, C-VLAN Id, or
untagged. If no classifier matches then the frame is discarded.
The pop or push operation.
When a pop is performed, the topmost VLAN tag is removed from the frame.
When a push is performed, a new VLAN tag is inserted in the outgoing frame. The
VLAN protocol type value is taken from the egress interface and a given VLAN Id.
The transmission of the frame.
Mapping Model:
Mapping Model implements the inter-working with the customer edge equipment or
the provider networks, at edge or crossed equipment. The VLAN tag of the frame
must be removed (pop) or added (push) at UNIs or IWIs. The following basic cases of
VLAN tag management are described. Any combination of these cases can occur in
the network.
Customer VLAN mapping (p. 11-62).
Provider VLAN mapping (p. 11-63).
Tunneling Model:
In Tunneling Model, the VLAN tag is preserved across the network. The two cases of
tunneling are:
Customer VLAN tunneling (p. 11-65).
For the inter-working with the customer edge equipment, the VLAN tag of the frame
must be removed (pop) at UNIs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-62
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
Functional Domain
Traffic Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provider VLAN mapping manages the inter-working with external networks. An external
network belongs to an external provider. An external network can be edge or crossed. The
VLAN tag of the frame must be removed (pop) or added (push) at IWIs.
P-VLAN tag removal.
Figure 11-18 Provider VLAN Removal
Note: The interface of the NE must be configured with P-VLAN protocol type. To
avoid a discarding of the frame, the NE contains a classifier with VLAN Id equal to
P-VLAN Id.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-63
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
Functional Domain
Traffic Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The interface of the NE must be configured with the P-VLAN protocol type.
P-VLAN tag addition + removal
Figure 11-20 Provider VLAN Addition and Removal
Note: The interfaces of the NEs connected to the provider network must be
configured with the P-VLAN protocol type. To avoid a discarding of the frame, the
NE of the pop operation contains a classifier with VLAN Id equal to P-VLAN Id.
Provider VLAN tunneling
Generalities
Functional Domain
Traffic Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The VLAN Tag Protocol Type configuration is needed for the mapping mode and the
tunneling mode. See also Configure a transport Link (p. 18-25).
In Ethernet port or TDM termination, theVLAN tag protocol type of crossing interface is
compared with of the VLAN tag protocol type of the frame. If they do not match, the
frame is considered as an untagged frame. If the interface is not associated to an untagged
classifier, the frame is discarded.
Untagged classifier has VLAN Id equal to 4096.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-65
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
Functional Domain
Traffic Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the case of mapping mode, the add or remove of the P-VLAN tag is supported.
Only the interfaces connected to the provider network must be configured.
In the case of tunneling mode, P-VLAN tag preservation is accomplished.
In tunneling mode, two kinds of connections exist:
Note: For Ethernet Service with multiple destinations, the associated classifier
contains a VLAN Id equal to 2 and the P-VLAN tag protocol type is configured in
each crossed interface.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-66
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
Functional Domain
Traffic Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: For Ethernet Service single destination, the associated classifier contains a
VLAN Id equal to 4096 (untagged value). All the frames from the provider network A
are sent to the Z. No VLAN tag protocol type configuration is required at the
interfaces.
Policy Control
The policy control is an application to configure the edge nodes with QoS parameters,
IEEE 802.1p defines 8 priority levels and how Ethernet Service utilizes these priorities.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-67
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
Functional Domain
Traffic Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
At the edge of the network, frames (identified by port and VLAN) are classified in a set
of priority levels and tagged according to classification criteria. In the core of the
network, frames are switched using different queues, based on their priority tag.
The Ethernet frame priority bits are used together the VLAN Id. They form just a single
value. Priority bits individuate an Ethernet traffic flow. To the traffic flow is associated a
traffic type (Guaranteed, Regulated or Best Effort) and bandwidth. When ISA PR EA is
an Edge node, traffic type and bandwidth are mapped on PIR, CIR, and CBS and PBS.
The priority permits to classify the frame in term of green, yellow, or red frames. Frames
are then mapped on MPLS layer or on SDH VC. In case of ISA E/FE/GE board (Q3
board) these bits are transparently transported.
The ingress of Ethernet frames can be managed by a policy color blind (the incoming
classification is not used) or color aware. In color aware, the priority bits are
considered by ISA board family.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-68
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
Functional Domain
MPLS Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MPLS Management
Overview
For general information about Transport Links, see: Transport link management
(p. 11-53).
A Transport Link is the image, in the MPLS Management Domain, of a Link Over TDM
or a Link Over Cable. Its end points are Transport Link End Points.
A Transport Link (MPLS) is always Point to point:
If based on a Link Over TDM, it provides the transport of LSP tunnel between two
NEs or between a NE and an ENE.
If based on a Link Over Cable, a VC-LSP between a NE and an ENE carries it.
Characteristic definition.
Get bandwidth indication.
Get properties, extremities, inventory.
Characteristic definition consists of the configuration of the MPLS label range. This
operation is automatic after the creation of the Transport Link. However, the user could
modify this parameter.
A Transport Link can be a Unidirectional or a Bi-directional Entity.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-69
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
Functional Domain
MPLS Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Traffic Descriptor
Each LSP is characterized by a Traffic Descriptor. It indicates the QoS and the traffic
parameters according to these rules:
BE: related to the best effort. No bandwidth is reserved but a maximum number of
VC-LSP by transmission path is checked. The system also checked that PIR is greater
than 0, CIR is equal to 0, PBS is greater than 0, and CBS is equal to 0.
EF: related to the guaranteed traffic. The reserved bandwidth is equal to CIR and PIR
equal to CIR, CBS equal to PBS and CBS greater than 0.
AF: related to regulated traffic. The reserved bandwidth is equal to CIR and PIR
greater than CIR, PBS greater than 0 and CBS greater than or equal to 0.
LSP Tunnel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-70
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
Functional Domain
MPLS Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault Localization.
Provisioning state:
Usage state:
Idle, Busy, Reserved.
If the LSP Tunnel supports at least one VC-LSP, it changes to busy. In addition, at
each changing, the available bandwidth must be computed.
.
Availability status:
Normal, Degraded, In failure.
The availability status is related to the presence or not of alarms.
.
Working state:
Normal, Removing, Allocating, De-Allocating, Implementing, De-Implementing.
VC-LSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-71
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
Functional Domain
MPLS Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Commission, de-commission.
State management.
Provisioning state:
Defined, Partially Implemented, Implemented, Commissioned.
Availability status:
Normal, Degraded, In failure.
The availability status is related to the presence or not of alarms.
Working state:
Normal, Removing, Implementing, De-Implementing, Commissioning,
De-Commissioning.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-72
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
Functional Domain
Maintenance Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Maintenance Management
Overview
The only available alarms are the equipment alarms: no specific Ethernet transmission
alarm is available; only an alarm related the link between CE and PE are available at
Ethernet port level. The alarm coming from SDH failure is signaled and associated to the
Ethernet link termination supported by the alarmed SDH path.
The application evaluates the service status on Ethernet Services starting from EVC and
Ethernet Segments. On Ethernet Segments, the availability status is calculated based on:
Alarms on the server Transport Links: SDH alarms, MPLS VC-LSP alarms.
The alarms received are used to calculate the availability status of each affected objects.
The alarm received is elaborate and a new specific alarm is generated. These alarms with
a specific Network Management Level probable causes are sent to Fault Management.
Affected objects are the different type of Transport Link (called Link Over
technology specific), the MPLS LSP tunnel and the Ethernet Segment.
Fault Localization
The Fault Localization allows a user to determine the list of elementary alarms affecting a
managed resource. Examples of managed resource are Ethernet Segments, Transport
Links, and LSP tunnels.
The Fault Localization distinguishes problems related to the Ethernet Service from
problems in the underlying transport network. Fault Localization helps the user in
verifying where the fault is located, which board, which connection. The methods used
are the loop back operation and selective PM counters collection.
Fault Localization is called by choosing an alarm on AS: the overall elementary alarms
affect the objects are visualized.
The Fault Localization List window can be invoked either from Fault Management GUI
or from Construction, Ethernet Management, or MPLS GUI.
Quality of service: PM management
Generalities
Functional Domain
Maintenance Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
These data can be used as base for QoS data or for maintenance reason (Fault
Localization, preventive maintenance, and so forth). The use depending on the counter
type (aggregation counters or flow counters) and on the frequency of the collection.
Inventory
The inventory requires information about the resources used by a service: from Ethernet
Service until the transmission resources.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-74
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
Functional Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The main system management offered functions concern the User Profile management.
The System management is taken in charge by the System Management Function (SMF)
external application of ALMAP.
For more information about SMF, refer to the document: [2] 1350 OMS Administration
Guide, Vol 2: Common GUI Functions.
User Profile concepts
FAD: Set of functional access domains, for example a set of management functions.
Initiator: Gives the access rights on the NAD. By default, they are seven initiators:
Administrator, Free Pool, NAD1, , NAD5.
User Profile: Set of FADs that a user is allowed to access.
User: The user is identified by a login and a password and associated to one User
Profile and one initiator. A user is only allowed to access the management functions
and the management entities included in profile and initiator the user is assigned to.
Access control database: The database which contains all the information relative to
the access control management (for example users, user profiles, User Profile
assignments, and so on).
The actors
The actors who interact with this set of services are the following:
The Administrator is a user allowed to administer the 1350 OMS PKT application
and to operating system.
The Constructor has the rights to manage only the subnetworks, NEs, ENEs, Links
Over TDM, cable, MPLS.
The Operator has the rights to configure and get information about the network.
The Viewer has the rights only to get information about the network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-75
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Generalities
Functional Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The north interface manager has the rights to configure and get information about
the network.
The north interface viewer has the rights only to get information about the network.
For a detailed description on available operations for each actor, refer to: Chapter 5,
1350 OMS PKT User Management.
Relationship between resource and initiator
The Free Pool NAD is a set of resources available to all 1350 OMS PKT users. The
1350 OMS PKT Administrator NAD groups resources available to users with the 1350
OMS PKT Administrator initiator.
NAD of the resource.
Free Pool.
Other.
The NAD value is a numerical value between 0 and 99999. The following NAD values
have specific meaning:
NAD=0 identifies a free pool object. The free pool object is not assigned to any
specific Network Partition. The free pool objects are visible and accessible by each
user and by external applications. (External access is not checked by 1350 OMS
PKT).
NAD=999 identifies a dedicated free pool object. The dedicated free pool is a
second set of FREE POOL objects. The dedicated free pool objects are not assigned
to any specific Network Partition neither to the Free Pool set. The dedicated free
pool objects are visible and accessible by each user and by external applications.
(External access is not checked by 1350 OMS PKT).
NAD value in the range from 1 to 998 and from 1000 to the unsigned integer limit
identifies a Network Partition. The Network Partition objects are visible only to users
having the privileges on that Network partitions. (In the scope of 1350 OMS PKT, no
user access right are connected to NAD values, so that the external applications
supply the appropriate filtering criteria to access and operate on the right set of
objects).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
11-76
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
12
Overview
Purpose
12-2
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-4
12-9
12-11
12-12
12-17
12-17
12-19
12-19
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
12-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NML-EML synchronization
1350 OMS PKT resynchronization
Overview
At startup, the 1350 OMS PKT synchronizes the TDM terminations and Links Over TDM
tables with 1350 OMS SDH NAPS and SDH paths.
In case the 1350 OMS PKT has detected a de-synchronization with the 1350 OMS SDH,
at the GUI start up, the user receives a message indicating the loss of synchronization.
To start a manual synchronization, click the menu: Action > Construction >
Synchronization > Manual synchronization.
A confirmation message is displayed.
After confirmation, the synchronization is performed on TDM terminations and Links
Over TDM entities.
The 1350 OMS PKT and 1350 OMS SDH synchronization is fulfilled in the following
cases:
The synchronization status can be checked at any time, by Action > Construction >
Synchronization > Check synchronization status command.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
12-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The procedure aligns 1350 OMS PKT data base after the deletion and subsequent
recreation of the same SDH Path in 1350 OMS SDH.
The Tool AlignDBSDHPathId.sh is applicable when following conditions occurs:
An SDH Path under 1350 OMS PKT control (and known as Link Over TDM) has
been deleted and recreated from 1350 OMS SDH.
The SDH path deleted and recreated from 1350 OMS SDH must have the same
characteristics. They must have the same User Label, the same end points, rate, and so
forth.
The Link Over TDM inside 1350 OMS PKT is visible both to MS-GUI.
The Link Over TDM inside Core GUI is marked as not Consistent.
Note: This procedure is a shell script that runs offline.
For a description of the alignment tool, refer to: Chapter 10, 1350 OMS PKT
AlignDBSDHPathID Tool.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
12-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The procedure describes the use the Performance Monitoring on an ISA ES1 1.0 board
and of a port-to-port connection.
Additional information
This case is supplied in the scope of one VPWS (Virtual Private Wire Service). The
established connectivity is bidirectional between two Ethernet ports fully dedicated to this
service.
The procedure is based on the service definition and management from the 1350 OMS
PKT. The PM operations are done through Navigation in the scope of the 1350 OMS
EML.
The goal of this procedure is to activate the Performance measurement on each extremity
of the service to analyze the rendering of the connection.
The following figure aims to describe the application case of the procedure:
The procedure aims to describe the different steps the user must do. Procedure starts from
a VPWS Service between two extremities: ISA #A Port N and ISA #Z port M. The user
aims to observe the corresponding Performances.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
12-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This chapter aims to list the necessary steps requested to go on with the following
procedure:
All NEs are under the 1350 OMS PKT management, the required resources in term of
port and Link Over TDM have already been built.
The Ethernet Service of type VPWS has been created.
The contained EVC and Ethernet Segment have been allocated and implemented.
Task
attributes.
Following window is displayed:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
12-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the menu: Search > Inventory from Service > List EVC Terminations.
Result: The EVC Termination List window presents all the terminations of the
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
12-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For each EVC termination, the user must note the reference of the NE and also the user
label of the port.
Starting from the MS-GUI, the user can open the NE list and Navigate for each of them
toward the 1350 OMS EML GUI:
select one NE in the list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
EML or 1320CT).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the 1350 OMS EML View, on the top right-hand side of the menu bar, select the
menu Performance == > Ethernet Port Management == > Configure Eth Aggr..
Result: The following window is displayed:
Note: Some small differences appear between the 1320CT GUI and the 1350 OMS
EML GUI. This procedure has been built from the 1320CT GUI.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
12-7
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For each area in the window (Incoming, Outgoing), activate the Performance activity:
Select the Data collection tic == > close.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Note: The Navigation toward PM is, at the moment, only based on NE, not on
termination granularity.
The first results are available about 3 h after the start of the PM activity. In the mean
while, the display of PM result is empty of any data.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
12-8
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This procedure explains how Provider network operates as a distributed MAC Bridge.
Related information
Figure 12-1 Provider network operating as a distributed MAC Bridge
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
12-9
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Scheme
Figure 12-2 Provider network operating as a distributed MAC Bridge
Description
When a new Ethernet Service has to be realized for a new customer, the user must be
aware of the following information:
All ISA switches and all switching ports must be used by the same customer.
All infrastructure links connecting switching ports must be used by the same
customer.
Tagged and untagged frames are carried in the same way across the network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
12-10
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Single customer.
No VLAN management in the provider network.
Spanning tree protocol: RSTP.
All traffic is routed on the active topology. Links not belonging to the current active
topology are unused by data traffic. Traffic classification do not apply: even if different
classes of traffic exist for the same user, they are not managed inside the provider
network.
Figure 12-3 Single-Customer, No-VLAN, RSTP-enabled
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
12-11
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description of the function, refer to the topic Single-Customer, No-VLAN, RSTP
provisioning (p. 12-11).
For a description of VLAN, refer to the topic VLAN management (p. 11-57).
For a description of MAC Bridge and Spanning Tree, refer to the topic MAC Bridge
Basics (p. 12-19).
Before you begin
ASAP configuration.
Flow control.
Auto-negotiation.
Rate limiting management.
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For each local or remote Interface Port belonging to the switching NE and to be
configured as a switching port (either UNI, IWI or NNI):
Execute the procedure: Configure UNI, IWI, or NNI switching ports (p. 12-14).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
12-12
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For each local or remote Interface Port belonging to a switching NE and to be configured
as an internal (that is NNI) switching port:
Execute the procedure: Configure internal switching port (p. 12-15).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For each local or remote Interface Port belonging to a switching NE and to be configured
as an edge (that is UNI or IWI) switching port:
Execute the procedure: Configure edge switching port (p. 12-15).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
For each local or remote Interface Port belonging to the switching NE:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the port is active, then deactivate the port, by means of conditioning port administrative
status to down. Operation is performed through navigation to 1350 OMS EML:
Note: Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Available NEs >
Navigate to EML.
Transmission View > Select Local/Remote Interface > Configure Ethernet Port >
Admin Status > down.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set the type of spanning tree protocol to be used in the connection-less network, by means
of conditioning protocol type to RSTP. Operation is performed through navigation to
1350 OMS EML:
Select Transmission View.
Select the Bridge then click Configure (R) STP Bridge > Protocol Type > RSTP.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
12-13
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For each local or remote Interface Port belonging to the switching NE that must be
configured as a switching port (either UNI, IWI or NNI):
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set the port as a bridging port, by means of conditioning port client type to ETB.
Operation is performed directly by 1350 OMS PKT.
if.
then.
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements >
Defined NEs.
Select NE and click physical Port list.
Select Port and click Configure > Client Type > ETB.
SelectSearch > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) >
ETS Transport Links.
Select Transport Link and click Configure > Client Type > ETB.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
12-14
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For each local or remote Interface Port belonging to a switching NE that must be
configured as an internal (that is NNI) switching port:
Force control plane port state to dynamic. Operation is performed through 1350 OMS
EML:
Select Transmission View.
Select Bridge Port and click RSTP Per-Port Management > Force Port State > dynamic.
Note: This operation is not supported by all the NE types and releases.
The forced state is dynamic by default. Forcing control plane port state is supported
by ISA ES1/4 1.2, ISA ES16 2.0.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Activate the port, by means of conditioning port administrative status to up. Operation is
performed through navigation to 1350 OMS EML:
Select Transmission View.
Select Local/Remote Interface and click Configure Ethernet Port > Admin. Status > up.
Result: After this step, control frames travel inside the provider network and the
spanning tree is stabilized. If the customer network has no back-door links giving rise
to loops, the provider active topology remain stable.
Note: If none of the following conditions occur: Fault on a local or remote
interface, NE isolation, Local access control granted, Topology modification.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
For each local or remote Interface Port belonging to a switching NE that must be
configured as an edge switching port (that is UNI or IWI):
Force control plane port state to forwarding. Operation is performed through 1350 OMS
EML:
Select Transmission View.
Select Bridge Port and click RSTP Per-Port Management > Force Port State >
forwarding.
Note: This operation is not supported by all the NE types and releases.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
12-15
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When not supported, you have the same spanning tree instance running across the
customer networks and the provider networks. Forcing control plane port state is
supported by ISA ES1/4 1.2, ISA ES16 2.1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Activate the port, by means of conditioning port administrative status to up. Operation is
performed through navigation to 1350 OMS EML:
Select Transmission View.
Select Local/Remote Interface and click Configure Ethernet Port > Admin. Status > up.
Result: After this step, user data frames are allowed to flow inside the provider
network. No flooding occurs since the active topology is stable at this stage.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
12-16
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
VLAN configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description of VLAN, refer to the topic VLAN management (p. 11-57).
Before you begin
Create the VLAN Types with all their characteristics (User label and VLAN Tag Protocol
type value).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Associate the Edge ports to the VLAN Type (if its usage state is idle).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Associate the Provider Networks to the VLAN Type. Operation induces association
between Transport Link Terminations and VLAN Type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create an Ethernet Segment with a VLAN model (Tunneling or Mapping) and associate a
Traffic Descriptor, a Color Profile, and a Traffic Classifier. For a Tunneling VLAN
model, give a VLAN Type associated to an Ethernet Segment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
12-17
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
VLAN configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: This action induces associations between the Ethernet Edge ports and the
Select the route constraints. If the Ethernet Segment has the Tunneling VLAN model,
for a low cost solution, force the route to use one VC-LSP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Configure the VLAN Constraint classes. For push, give the VLAN Id to push, the color
policy, and the Traffic Classifier. For pop operation, give the associated Traffic Classifier.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Implement the Ethernet Segment. Configure automatically the edge ports (download the
P-VLAN protocol type). Provision the pop or push operations.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
12-18
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
12-19
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
12-20
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
13
13
Network
Organization
Management
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes how to define subnetworks, domains, NEs, ENEs, and Services
Nodes, ports.
Contents
Managing Subnetworks
13-5
13-5
13-7
13-8
Create a Subnetwork
13-9
Modify a Subnetwork
13-12
Delete a Subnetwork
13-15
13-16
Details of a subnetwork
13-17
Managing Domains
13-18
13-18
13-20
13-21
Create a Domain
13-23
Modify a Domain
13-25
Delete a Domain
13-27
13-29
Details of a Domain
13-30
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13-31
13-34
13-34
13-35
13-36
13-37
13-37
13-39
13-40
Define a NE
13-41
Add a NE to a Subnetwork
13-45
Modify a NE
13-48
Delete a NE
13-51
13-53
Details of a NE
13-54
13-55
13-59
13-61
13-64
13-66
13-68
13-69
13-70
13-71
13-72
13-74
13-78
13-78
13-80
13-81
Create an ENE
13-82
Modify an ENE
13-85
Delete an ENE
13-87
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13-89
Details of an ENE
13-90
13-91
13-92
Create an ETP
13-93
Delete an ETP
13-96
13-98
13-98
13-99
13-101
13-107
13-109
13-111
13-112
13-114
13-116
13-117
13-117
13-120
13-121
13-123
13-125
13-130
13-131
13-132
13-133
13-134
13-135
13-135
13-136
Create a NAD
13-137
Modify a NAD
13-138
Delete a NAD
13-139
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13-140
13-140
13-142
13-145
13-145
13-151
Additional section
13-153
13-153
13-154
13-155
13-156
13-157
13-158
13-159
13-160
13-161
Assign a NE to a Domain
13-162
13-163
13-164
13-166
13-167
13-168
13-170
13-171
13-172
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Managing Subnetworks
Overview about Subnetworks
Subnetwork description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The main network called MEN (Metro Ethernet Network) is created by the 1350
OMS PKT.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Subnetwork List window presents all the subnetworks and their attributes.
Related information
For information about subnetwork, see: Overview about Subnetworks (p. 13-5).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of subnetworks
(p. 13-8)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-7
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-8
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Create a Subnetwork
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create a Subnetwork
When to use
This function adds a subnetwork to the main network. A subnetwork can be created also
inside another one.
Related information
For information about subnetwork, see: Overview about Subnetworks (p. 13-5).
Before you begin
The User Label must be different as one which is already used by another subnetwork
or one which is reserved for the main network.
Task
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-9
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Create a Subnetwork
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result:
Figure 13-2 Subnetwork Creation window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Choose the Parent Subnetwork by using the sensitive help. If a subnetwork has been
previously selected from the list, or from graphical view or from the tree, this field is
automatically filled.
Enter a Comment (optional).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The subnetwork is created.
The tree area, the subnetwork list and the opened graphical views are updated.
The user can define NEs, ENEs, or create a subnetwork in this subnetwork.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-10
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Create a Subnetwork
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: In graphical views, subnetwork list or in the tree, this command creates the
subnetwork inside the previously selected subnetwork.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-11
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Modify a Subnetwork
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Modify a Subnetwork
When to use
Comment.
For information about subnetwork, see: Overview about Subnetworks (p. 13-5).
Before you begin
If the User Label is modified, the new User Label must not be used by another
subnetwork or reserved by the main network.
Restrictions
Select Action > from (Sub) network > Modify or right-click the mouse and Select
Modify.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-12
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Modify a Subnetwork
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result:
Figure 13-3 Subnetwork Modification window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-13
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Modify a Subnetwork
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The subnetwork is modified.
The tree area, the subnetwork list and the opened graphical views are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-14
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Delete a Subnetwork
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Delete a Subnetwork
When to use
This function deletes a subnetwork from the 1350 OMS PKT supervision.
Related information
For information about subnetwork, see: Overview about Subnetworks (p. 13-5).
Before you begin
The subnetwork must be empty. It must not contain: subnetwork, NE, ENE.
Restrictions
Select Action > from (Sub) network > Delete or right-click the mouse and Select
Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: If one or more subnetworks are removed, the subnetwork list, the tree area,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-15
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about subnetwork, see: Overview about Subnetworks (p. 13-5).
Before you begin
Select Search > (Sub) network > Properties or right-click the mouse and Select
Properties.
Result: The Property window is displayed
See the following topic in this document: Details of a subnetwork (p. 13-17)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-16
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Details of a subnetwork
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Details of a subnetwork
Attributes of a Subnetwork
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
Comment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-17
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Managing Domains
Overview about Domains
Domain management description
The following domains are created by default and cannot be deleted nor modified:
ETS.
T-MPLS.
Indirect (eOMS).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-18
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-19
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a detailed description, refer to the topic Overview about Domains (p. 13-18).
Before you begin
Select Domains.
Result: The list window is shown.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Domains
(p. 13-21)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-20
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following domains are created by default and cannot be deleted nor modified:
ETS.
T-MPLS.
Indirect (eOMS).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-21
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attributes of a Domain
User Label.
Comment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-22
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Create a Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create a Domain
When to use
For a detailed description, refer to the topic Overview about Domains (p. 13-18).
Before you begin
Task
To create a domain:
Choose the STP Type (None, STP, RSTP, PVSTP, MSTP, Disabled).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-23
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Create a Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-24
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Modify a Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Modify a Domain
When to use
User Label.
Comment.
For a detailed description, refer to the topic Overview about Domains (p. 13-18).
Before you begin
Task
Select Action > Domain > Modify or right-click the mouse and select Modify.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-25
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Modify a Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The domain is modified.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-26
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Delete a Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Delete a Domain
When to use
This function deletes a domain from the 1350 OMS PKT supervision.
Related information
For a description about Domains, refer to the topic Overview about Domains
(p. 13-18).
Before you begin
Task
Select Action > Domain > Delete or right-click the mouse and select Actions > Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-27
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Delete a Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-28
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Domains, refer to the topic Overview about Domains
(p. 13-18).
Before you begin
Select Action > Properties or right-click the mouse and select Properties.
Result: The Domain window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Details of a Domain (p. 13-30)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-29
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Details of a Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Details of a Domain
Attributes of a Domain
User Label.
Domain Type.
Bridge Type.
STP Type.
Id.
Comment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-30
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A selected domain
A selected resource
For a description about Domains, refer to the topic Overview about Domains
(p. 13-18).
Before you begin
Select Action > Domain > Assign Resources to Domain or right-click the mouse and
select Actions > Assign Resources to Domain.
Result: The Assign Resources to Domain window is displayed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-31
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Right-click the mouse and select Actions > Assign Resources to Domain.
Result: The Assign Resources to Domain window is displayed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-32
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The window Assign Resources to Domain shows all the objects to assign.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-33
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Service node is a geographic gathering of 1350 OMS PKT defined NEs depending on the
characteristics of the OMSN that carries each NE.
The service node manages a list of defined NEs having the same OMSN User Label and
the same Location Name.
An OMSN User Label, a Location Name, and a list of defined NEs define the Service
node.
The 1350 OMS PKT user does not manage directly the service nodes:
Each service node is implicitly created at the NE definition (if it does not exist in the
1350 OMS PKT).
The service node is implicitly deleted at the deletion of the last NE. The service node
is also deleted when OMSN User Label or Location Name is changed and old service
node has no more NE associated to it. at the NE configuration change notification
reception.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-34
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The function shows all the service nodes and their locations.
Related information
For a description about Service nodes, refer to the topic Overview about service nodes
(p. 13-34).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Nodes (p. 13-36)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-35
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Location Name.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-36
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Defined NE list.
Available NE list.
Properties.
Ethernet physical port list.
TDM termination list.
Equipment view (if the 1350 OMS EML application or 1350 OMS EML presentation
instance are co-hosted with the 1350 OMS PKT).
The NE management chain gives the order in which the available actions can be
performed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-37
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-38
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The function shows all the NEs managed by the 1350 OMS PKT, and their attributes.
Related information
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of NEs (p. 13-40)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-39
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Operator Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
Domain.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-40
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Define a NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Define a NE
When to use
To be assigned, the NE must be declared and supervised by the 1350 OMS EML.
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Available NEs.
Result: The list presents all the available NEs (that is not yet assigned to the 1350
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-41
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Define a NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > from Available NE > Define Network Element or right-click the mouse
and select Define Network Element.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-42
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Define a NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To define the Network Element, select a Domain from the list displayed and confirm with
OK button.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-43
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Define a NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-44
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Add a NE to a Subnetwork
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Add a NE to a Subnetwork
When to use
For a description about Network Elements refer to the topic Overview about Network
Elements (p. 13-37).
If the NE supports the bridging, and the user has specified a domain user label, the NE is
attached to the specified domain.
If the NE is managed by the 1350 OMS SDH, all resources of the NE are uploaded from
the 1350 OMS SDH: TDM terminations, Ethernet ports, and Links Over TDM.
If the NE is ISA PR EA, ES1, ES4, or ES16, and the NE is not managed by the 1350
OMS SDH, the TDM terminations are uploaded directly from the NE.
The NE is defined with the following states:
All other states (Operational state, LAC state, Inhibited Alarm state) are updated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-45
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Add a NE to a Subnetwork
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Condition
The maximum number of NEs in the parent subnetwork must not be reached.
The Operational state of the selected NE must be Enabled. In case of ISA PR EA,
ES1, ES4, ES16, the NE must not be isolated from the 1350 OMS EML. In case of
E/FE/GE, the NE must not be isolated from the 1350 OMS SDH.
The LAC state of the selected NE must not be Granted.
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click the mouse and Select Action > from NE > Add .
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-46
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Add a NE to a Subnetwork
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result:
Figure 13-7 NE Adding window
Click Ok.
Result: The NE is attached to the Service Node corresponding to the same OMSN
User Label and the same Location Name as the added NE. If the Service Node does
not exists, the application automatically creates a Service Node.
The tree area, the graphical views, and the Network Element List are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-47
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Modify a NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Modify a NE
When to use
Comment.
For a description about Network Elements refer to the topic Overview about Network
Elements (p. 13-37).
Before you begin
The new User Label must be different as one which is already used by another
Network Element.
The NE must not be locked (that is audit, alignment, reserve are not in progress).
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-48
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Modify a NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-49
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Modify a NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify a NE:
Enter a New User Label (optional).
Modify the Comment (optional).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: Then, the Network Element list, the tree area, and the opened graphical views
are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-50
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Delete a NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Delete a NE
When to use
This function deletes a Network Element from the 1350 OMS PKT supervision.
Related information
For a description about Network Elements refer to the topic: Overview about Network
Elements (p. 13-37).
If the NE is an SNMP NE (ISA PR EA, ES1, ES4, or ES16), a de-assignment request is
sent to the 1350 OMS EML.
If the Service Node is no more attached to any NE, the Service Node is automatically
deleted from 1350 OMS PKT.
If the NE is in a Bridge domain, the NE is removed from the Bridge domain.
All the Links Over TDM with an extremity on the NE, uploaded from the 1350 OMS
SDH at the NE definition, and managed by 1350 OMS SDH, are automatically removed.
If the 1350 OMS SDH did not manage the NE, all the Links Over TDM created manually
must be deleted manually. The NE deletion is refused if at least one Link Over TDM ends
on it (that is if at least one TDM termination is busy).
Before you begin
The NE must not be locked (that is audit, alignment, reserve are not in progress).
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-51
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Delete a NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > Network Element > Delete or right-click the mouse and Select Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: If the command is confirmed, one or more NEs are removed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-52
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Network Elements refer to the topic Overview about Network
Elements (p. 13-37).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-53
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Details of a NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Details of a NE
Attributes of a NE
User Label.
Operator Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
Location Name.
Type.
Bridge Type.
Version.
Working State.
Consistency State.
Lock State.
Comment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-54
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in uploading the Ethernet physical ports of a previously selected
NE and it is used:
Manually, by the user to solve a misalignment between 1350 OMS PKT and the NE.
In this case, the Client Type value is not aligned and must be configured. See
Configure an Ethernet physical port (p. 13-101).
Automatically, at the NE definition.
For a description about Network Elements, refer to the topic Overview about Network
Elements (p. 13-37).
For a description about physical ports, refer to the topic NE management (p. 11-50).
Retrieved Information
The following attributes are retrieved for each port during the upload:
Port Identifier.
Port Type (Optical, Electrical) (derived from the uploaded Interface Type
characteristics).
Note: When the Interface Type is 10/100BaseT, Interface Rate can be 10 Mb/s or
100 Mb/s.
Then, for each Ethernet port returned the following checks are performed:
If Ethernet port does not exist in 1350 OMS PKT, the Ethernet port created with
default characteristics. The Manager control is set to Enabled. The port is available
to be an extremity of one or more Ethernet Segments.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-55
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If Ethernet port exists in 1350 OMS PKT, the user must consider the following cases:
No change of interface rate and/or supported Layer, its characteristics are updated.
If interface rate has changed:
Usage State.
Manager
Control.
Idle / Reserved.
Busy.
Not Meaningful.
enabled.
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
If no Ethernet
Segments uses it, the
Port is updated.
Otherwise,
Consistency State is
set to Not Consistent.
disabled.
No Link Over
Cable uses it, then
the Port is
updated.
Not applicable.
Idle / Reserved.
Busy.
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
If no Ethernet
Segments uses it,
Manager control is set
to disabled.
Otherwise,
Consistency State is
set to Not Consistent.
No Link Over
Cable uses it, then
the Port Manager
Control is set to
enabled.
Not applicable.
enabled.
MPLS >
ETH.
Disabled.
Not Meaningful.
If an Ethernet port is not found in the list of retrieved Ports, the Usage State is
checked. In case the Usage State is idle or reserved, the Ethernet port is removed from
the NE in the 1350 OMS PKT.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-56
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If Ethernet port is busy then its Consistency State is set to Not Consistent.
If the Manager control is disabled, the port usage state is meaningful in the
construction domain. Otherwise, the usage of the port is checked in the Ethernet
traffic management domain.
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > Network Element > Upload Ethernet Physical Ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, the NE working state is set to Uploading.
The 1350 OMS PKT sends a request to the NE to retrieve the list of its Ethernet ports.
The list of Ethernet ports of the NE in 1350 OMS PKT is aligned with the ISA board.
The new ports are created in 1350 OMS PKT. If the supported layer is Ethernet, the
port Manager Control set to Enabled. In the other cases, the port Manager Controlis
set to Disabled.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-57
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-58
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in uploading the TDM terminations of a previously selected NE.
This function is used:
manually, by the user to solve a misalignment between 1350 OMS PKT and the 1350
OMS SDH, concerning a given NE.
automatically, at the NE definition.
For each TDM termination, the following attributes are retrieved during the upload:
If the TDM termination has the Usage State set to idle, TDM termination characteristics
are updated.
If a TDM termination has the Usage State set to idle or reserved, the list of retrieved
Terminations is checked. If the list of Terminations is not found, the TDM termination is
removed.
Note: For a TDM termination uploaded in the busy Usage State: if no Link Over
TDM is connected to it inside 1350 OMS PKT, the Usage State is set to Reserved.
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, the NE working state is set to Uploading. The 1350 OMS
PKT sends a request to the 1350 OMS SDH to retrieve the list of TDM terminations
of the specified NE.
The list of TDM terminations of the NE in 1350 OMS PKT is aligned with the 1350
OMS SDH.
Then, the NE Working State is set to Normal.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-60
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in uploading the Links Over TDM (SDH paths from the 1350 OMS
SDH) terminated on a given NE.
This function is used:
Manually, by the user to solve a misalignment between 1350 OMS PKT and the 1350
OMS SDH.
Automatically, at the NE definition.
For a description about Transport Links refer to the topic Transport link management
(p. 11-53) or the topic Transport link definition (p. 14-5).
Retrieved information
For each uploaded Link Over TDM, the following attributes are retrieved during the
upload:
Reliability Level.
Direction.
Bit rate (vc12, vc3, vc4, vc4-4c, Eth 10 Mb/s, Eth 100 Mb/s, Eth 1 Gb/s).
Extremities.
For both:
NE identifier is retrieved from NE TDM user label and Location name).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-61
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For each uploaded Link Over TDM the following checks are performed during the
upload:
If at least one of the specified extremities is in the busy Usage State for another link
or does not exist, the Link Over TDM is rejected, and an error is logged. Also if the
extremity does not exist, the Link Over TDM is rejected, and an error is logged.
If both extremities exist in 1350 OMS PKT:
If Usage State is not busy, the Link Over TDM is created in the 1350 OMS PKT,
and the TDM terminations Usage State is set to busy.
If the SDH path provisioning state is defined, allocated, or implemented, the
Manager Control is set to Disabled and provisioning state to Not
Commissioned.
If the provisioning state is commissioned, the corresponding transport or
transmission path is created according to the supported layer, the Manager
Control is set to Enabled and the provisioning state is set to Commissioned.
The Client Type of the uploaded Link Over TDM is set to ETS by default.
The Protocol Type of the uploaded Link Over TDM protocol is chosen according to
the following rule:
If the supported layer is MPLS, the Protocol Type is equal to HDLC.
If the two boards at the extremities of the link are ES1 or ES4, the Protocol Type
is the value set in the 1350 OMS PKT configuration file. The value can be GFP or
LAPS.
If one of the board is not an ES board, the Protocol Type is GFP.
The 1350 OMS SDH must not be isolated from 1350 OMS PKT point of view.
The Working State of the selected NE must be normal.
The NE must not be locked (that is audit, alignment, reserve are not in progress).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-62
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > Network Element > Upload Links Over TDM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, the NE working state is set to Uploading. The 1350 OMS
PKT sends a request to the 1350 OMS SDH to retrieve the list of TDM paths
terminated on the specified NE.
The list of Links Over TDM of the NE in 1350 OMS PKT is aligned with the 1350
OMS SDH.
Then, the NE Working State is set to Normal.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-63
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in auditing the TDM terminations of a NE not managed by the
1350 OMS SDH.
The function is used to compare the TDM terminations information contained in the 1350
OMS PKT database with the ones contained in the NE.
For more information about Audit, refer toChapter 22, Network Utilities.
For a description about TDM terminations, refer to the topic NE management
(p. 11-50).
Retrieved information
For each termination found in the 1350 OMS PKT and/or in the NE, the data displayed
are:
The audit allows detecting de-synchronization between the NE and the 1350 OMS PKT
data. The user can launch the Synchronize TDM termination command, to update the
1350 OMS PKT database with the NE data.
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Conditions
The NEmust not be locked (that is audit, alignment, reserve are not in progress).
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, the NE working state is set to Uploading.
The 1350 OMS PKT sends a request to the NE to retrieve the list of TDM
terminations of the specified NE.
The information read from the NE and the information read from the 1350 OMS PKT
database, are displayed to the user.
At the end of the audit, the NE working state is set to Normal and the Audit TDM
termination list window is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-65
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function is used to check misalignments between NE and 1350 OMS PKT (that is
after an audit TDM termination command).
For a description about Synchronization refer to the topic 1350 OMS PKT
resynchronization (p. 12-2).
Before you begin
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-66
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, the NE working state is set to Uploading.
The 1350 OMS PKT sends a request to the NE to retrieve the list of TDM
terminations of the specified NE.
For a TDM termination found in the NE and not present in the 1350 OMS PKT, the
TDM termination is created in the 1350 OMS PKT database.
For a TDM termination found in the 1350 OMS PKT and not present in the NE, the
TDM termination is deleted from the 1350 OMS PKT database. If the deletion is not
possible, the TDM termination consistency state becomes Not Consistent. The
deletion is possible when the TDM termination is not used by a Link Over TDM.
At the end of the synchronization, the NE working state is set to Normal.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-67
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from Network Element > TDM Termination List.
Result: The TDM Termination list is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of TDM
Terminations (p. 13-69)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-68
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Transport Link.
Alarm Status.
Supported Layer.
Working State.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-69
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from Network Element > TDM Termination List.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Details of a TDM termination (p. 13-71)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-70
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NE User Label.
User Label.
Transport Link.
Bit Rate.
Alarm Status.
Working State.
Supported Layer.
Manager Control.
Client Type.
NAP Number.
NADs.
Concatenation Level.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-71
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function allows the user to acknowledge the Local Access Control state.
Related information
When the LAC state of the NE is equal to Post-granted, this function allows the user to
acknowledge the possible misalignment between the 1350 OMS PKT and the NE due to a
possible modification from the 1320CT.
As the 1350 OMS EML could authorize the local access to a NE from the 1320CT, the
data stored in 1350 OMS PKT could be different.
To check and resolve misalignments, the user perform a NE audit and a NE alignment. At
alignment, the data is downloaded from 1350 OMS PKT to the NE or the data is uploaded
from NE to 1350 OMS PKT. Upload from NE is also called Plug & Play.
For more details about Audit and Alignment, refer to the topic Chapter 22, Network
Utilities.
Before you begin
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-72
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, the LAC state of the concerned NEs is set to Denied and
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-73
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For details about equipments, refer to the topic The product family (p. 11-6).
Before you begin
The 1350 OMS EML application or a 1350 OMS EML presentation instance must be
installed on the same workstation or server as the 1350 OMS PKT.
The user login must be declared on both 1350 OMS EML and 1350 OMS PKT.
This command is available only for the ES1, ES4, ES16 or PR EA Network Elements.
Select: Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click the mouse and Select Inventory from TDM Termination > External
Navigation to > USM.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-74
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The equipment view of the selected NE is opened and the selected port
highlighted.
Figure 13-9 Show Equipment View
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-75
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from Network Element > TDM Termination List.
.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click the mouse and Select Inventory from TDM Termination > External
Navigation to > USM .
Result: The equipment view of the selected NE is opened and the selected port
highlighted.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Select: Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from Network Element > Ethernet Physical Port List.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one or more items in the list and Right-click the mouse.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-76
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Inventory from physical Port > External Navigation to > USM.
Result: The equipment view of the selected NE is opened and the selected port
highlighted.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-77
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information about ENE, refer to ENE management (p. 11-51).
The ENE management, part of the network construction, consists in performing actions
such as:
ENE list.
ETP list.
properties.
The ENE management chain gives the order in which the available actions are performed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-78
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-79
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The ENE Role indicates whether ENE represents a customer edge equipment (outer) or
equipment not managed inside the network (inner).
Refer to the topic ENE management (p. 11-51).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of ENE (p. 13-81)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-80
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-81
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Create an ENE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create an ENE
When to use
The ENE makes visible to the 1350 OMS PKT, a NE or a set of NEs not managed by the
1350 OMS PKT, for example a NE contained in an adjacent subnetwork not accessible to
the 1350 OMS PKT.
Refer to the topic ENE management (p. 11-51).
An Inner ENE is a subset of NEs not managed by the 1350 OMS PKT. The connection
between the managed network and the inner ENE is an internal Link Over Cable to a NE.
An Outer ENE is any equipment outside the scope of the network management. An Outer
ENE is located at customer premises. The equipment is connected through an external
Link Over Cable to a NE.
During the creation of an ENE with an Inner Equipment role, the Manager Control of
the five first ETP is set to Enabled. The other five ETPs are created with a Manager
Control set to Disabled. If the Edge Port List (available from the Ethernet Management
GUI) is opened, this list is updated the five first ETPs of the new created ENE.
For an ENE with a Customer Edge ENE role, all ETPs are created with a Manager
Control set to Disabled.
Before you begin
Note: It is authorized to create an ENE in the main parent subnetwork (called MEN
by default).
To get a positive result:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-82
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Create an ENE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the selected subnetwork, the amount of ENE must not exceed the maximum. See
Table B-1, Limits for Subnetworks (p. B-1).
The User Label must be different as one which is already used by another ENE.
Task
Select Action > Packet > Construction > Create External Network Element.
Result: The ENE Creation window is displayed.
Figure 13-11 External Network Element Creation window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-83
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Create an ENE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create an ENE:
Enter a Domain.
Choose the ENE Role: Inner Equipment ( That is Inner ENE), Customer Edge (That
is Outer ENE) or P-VLAN Network.
Enter a Comment (optional).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The ENE is created.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-84
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Modify an ENE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Modify an ENE
When to use
User Label.
Comment.
If the User Label is modified, the new User Label must be different as one which is
already used by another ENE.
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > External Network
Elements.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify an ENE:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-85
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Modify an ENE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: Then, the External Network Element list, the tree area, and the opened
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-86
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Delete an ENE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Delete an ENE
When to use
The usage state of the ETPs belonging to the ENE must be idle.
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > External Network
Elements.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > from External Network Element > Delete or right-click the mouse and
Select Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-87
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Delete an ENE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: After confirmation, the ENEs and their ETPs are removed.
The External Network Element list, the tree area, and the opened graphical views are
updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-88
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > External Network
Elements.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Details of an ENE (p. 13-90)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-89
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Details of an ENE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Details of an ENE
Attributes of an ENE
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
Domain.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-90
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to the topic Overview about External Network Elements (p. 13-78).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > External Network
Elements.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from External Network Element > ETP List.
Result: The list window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of ETPs (p. 13-92)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-91
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Identifier.
Transport Link.
Interface Rate.
Manager Control.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-92
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Create an ETP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create an ETP
When to use
In the ENE, the amount of ETPs must not exceed the maximum. See Table B-6,
Limits for ETPs in an ENE (p. B-2)
Note: When the ENE is created, the ETP is created by default.
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > External Network
Elements.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from External Network Element > ETP List.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-93
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Create an ETP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create ETPs:
Enter the first ETP to create (The numerical value corresponding to the first ETP
number to be used).
Enter the Number of ETP to create. Valid numerical value is between 1 and the
maximum number of ETPs which can be created on a ENE. See Table B-6,
Limits for ETPs in an ENE (p. B-2)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok button.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-94
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Create an ETP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The ETP (added after the first ones automatically created at the ENE creation)
are always created with Manager Control set to Disabled.
The ETP is automatically generated by the 1350 OMS PKT and the ETP List is
updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-95
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Delete an ETP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Delete an ETP
When to use
The usage state of the ETPs belonging to the ENE must be idle.
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > External Network
Elements.
Result: The ENE list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from External Network Element > ETP List.
Result: The ETP list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > External TP > Delete or right-click the mouse and Select Delete.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-96
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Delete an ETP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, the ETPs are removed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-97
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Ethernet Physical Port List presents all the ports of the NE and their attributes.
Related information
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The NE list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from Network Element > Ethernet Physical Port List.
Result: The Ethernet Physical Port list window is shown.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Ethernet physical
ports (p. 13-99)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-98
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Label.
Domain List
Transport Link.
Lag Size
Used Bandwidth
Alarm Status.
Traffic Type
Port Number.
NAD.
Channel Type
Channel Lambda
Channel Spacing
Demarcation Role
LACP
Hash Key
Port Priority
Flow Control.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-99
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Mirror Type
OAM Enabled
Interface Type
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-100
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about ISA Equipments, refer to the topic The product family (p. 11-6).
For a description about physical ports refer to the topic NE management (p. 11-50).
The following table summarizes the different modifiable parameters and their possible
values. The table is arranged according to the type and release of the NE, and the type of
the port:
PR EA.
ES1.
ES4.
S.
4.
1.
8.
8.
3.
1.
E.
G.
F.
F.
F.
P.
T.
E.
E.
X.
E.
8FE 71GE 1.
ES16.
0.
14FE.
4GE.
port.
H.
Supported
Layer.
Client Type.
n.a. Yes.
No
(ETS
only).
No.
No.
Yes (ETS,
ETS-P, ETB).
Yes (ETS,
ETS-P, or
ETB).
n.a. Yes.
2.0: No (ETS only).
2.1: Yes (ETS, ETS-P, or
ETB).
Auto Neg
State.
Yes.
No.
Interface
Rate.
Yes.
No.
Duplex
Mode.
No.
No.
No.
No.
Notes:
1.
2.
Only if the NE is assigned to a Provider bridge domain, the ETS-P is allowed. ETS-P is a
1350 OMS PKT specific value. ETS-P allows user to assign an ETS port to the Provider
bridge domain.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-101
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The configured Interface Rate must be compatible with the port interface type.
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The NE list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from Network Element > Ethernet Physical Port List.
Result: The Ethernet Physical Port list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > Physical Port > Configure or right-click the mouse and Select
Configure..
Result: Depending on the NE type, a configuration window is displayed. For details,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-102
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Figure 13-13 Ethernet Physical Port Config. window (for PR EA or ES16 electrical
board)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: If the supported layer is MPLS, the Manager Control is set to Disabled, the
usage state is set to Idle, and Client Type is set to ETS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-103
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Figure 13-14 Ethernet Physical Port Config. window (for ES1 or ES4 electrical
board)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-104
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Figure 13-15 Ethernet Physical Port Config. window (for ES1 or ES4 optical board)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The working state is set to Configuring.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-105
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-106
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Ethernet physical port modification gives the possibility to modify the Manager
Control value of a port.
For a description about physical ports refer to the topic NE management (p. 11-50).
Before you begin
The selected port is not extremity of a Link Over Cable or an Ethernet Segment.
The Working State of the port must be normal.
The NE must not be locked (that is audit, alignment, reserve not in progress).
The NE must not be locked (that is audit, alignment, reserve are not in progress).
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The NE list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from Network Element > Ethernet Physical Port List.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-107
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > Modify or right-click the mouse and Select Modify.
Result: The modification window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The working state of the port is set to Modifying.
If Manager Control is set to Disabled, the usage state is set to Idle. If not, the usage
state is set to Not meaningful.
Then, the Ethernet Physical Port list is updated and the working state of the port is
set to Normal.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-108
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about physical ports refer to the topic NE management (p. 11-50).
For details about Network Access DomainUser Profile Management (p. 11-75).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The NE list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from Network Element > Ethernet Physical Port List.
Result: The Ethernet Physical Port list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > Physical Port > Assign NAD or right-click the mouse and Select Assign
NAD.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-109
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the desired value in the list on the left of the window.
Type the Nad Value in the NAD column separated by comma.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The NAD value is assigned to the Ethernet Physical port.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-110
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about physical ports refer to the topic NE management (p. 11-50).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The NE list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from Network Element > Ethernet Physical Port List.
Result: The Ethernet Physical Port list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Properties or right-click the mouse and Select Properties.
Result: The Ethernet Physical Port List window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Details of an Ethernet Physical Port
(p. 13-112)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-111
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Transport Link.
Traffic Type
Port Number.
NAD.
Used Bandwidth
Demarcation Role
PTM Name
Domain List
Label
Mirror Type
OAM Enabled
Interface Type
Alarm Status.
Lag Size
Flow Control.
Usage State.
Auto Negotiation State (Enabled, Disabled).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-112
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LACP
Hash Key
Port Priority
Identifier
NE Identifier
NE User Label
Mirrored Port ID
Version
Access Module
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-113
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in navigating to the Ethernet physical port view on the NE
Equipment.
Related information
For a description about physical ports refer to the topic NE management (p. 11-50).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from Network Element > Ethernet Physical Port List.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click the mouse and Select Search > Inventory from Physical Port > External
Navigation to > USM.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-114
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The equipment view of the selected NE is opened and the selected port
highlighted.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Equipment ports
(p. 13-116)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-115
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-116
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Link Aggregation (LAG) function allows to aggregate a number of parallel instances
into one single logical link. Physical links must be Full Duplex, Point to Point, and
operating at the same rate (Fast or Gigabit Ethernet).
The main targets of LAG are:
Bandwidth Increase respect to available Ethernet Standard Bandwidth (10, 100, 1000
Mbit/s).
Availability (in the sense of Protection) of Ethernet Links: the failure of one
aggregated link is protected with a fast switch time (less than 1 s).
The Link Aggregation can be managed either on UNI/IWI Terminations and on NNI
Terminations (intended as Transport Link "over Cable" Terminations).
The combination of main targets of LAG and its possible deployment, supplies a set of
four functional combinations that can be tested independently:
For feature description point of view, all those four possibilities are described in this
chapter, while for feature traceability they are independently reported as single features.
LAG scheme
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-117
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
As shown in figure, more Physical Interfaces having the same rate are aggregated in a
Logical Interface called Link Aggregation Group (LAG).
The Link Aggregation Group is a Logical concept and can be realized also by non
contiguous Physical Interfaces.
The Client Type of Link Aggregation Group can be ETS or ETB.
In a Link Aggregation Group, the nominal Bandwidth is the Bandwidth of one Physical
Interfaces multiplied by the LAG size. The size of the LAG corresponds to the number of
active aggregated links.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-118
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NE supporting LAG
The following table reports the list of Network Elements supporting the Link Aggregation
function.
Table 13-1
NE Type /
Ne
Release.
Main Characteristic.
Notes.
1850 TSS
320 R1.4.
Client Type
modification is allowed
only when LAG is
de-activated.
Applicable to FE interfaces.
Max number of LAG=1 (ES1-3FE) or 4 (ES1-8FX or
ES4-8FE).
Client Type
modification is allowed
only when LAG is
de-activated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-119
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The list shows all the LAG ports created into a NE.
Related information
For a description about LAG ports refer to the topic Description of Link Aggregation
(LAG) function (p. 13-117).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The NE list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from Network Element > Ethernet Physical Port List.
Set filter to: LAG size different from -1.
Result: The LAG Port list window is shown.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of LAG ports
(p. 13-121)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-120
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Link Aggregation (LAG) function allows to aggregate into one single logical link a
number of parallel instances. The instances member of a LAG must be links of Full
Duplex Point to Point Physical. The links must operate at the same rate (Fast or Gigabit
Ethernet).
The main targets of LAG are:
Bandwidth Increase respect to available Ethernet Standard Bandwidth (10, 100, 1000
Mbit/s).
Availability (in the sense of Protection) of Ethernet Links: the failure of one
aggregated link is protected with a fast switch time (less than one second).
User Label.
Transport Link.
LAG size.
Usage State.
Port Number.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-121
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-122
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about LAG ports refer to the topic Description of Link Aggregation
(LAG) function (p. 13-117).
LAG size and number of ports
If number of ports is less than the lag size: the LAG is in a degraded state.
If number of ports is greater than the lag size: the exceeding ports are in a stand-by
status. They provide protection to the working ports according to port priority.
The ports must be in the same NE (the same card) and are subjected to consistency checks
and NE specific restrictions.
The Ports member of a LAG are assigned to domain using normal resource assignment
procedure. In the same context of LAG creation, the user can: assign LAG port to
domain, set port attributes, set domain-specific port attributes.
Before you begin
Select Action > Packet > Construction > Create LAG Port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-123
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter the LAG size. The LAG size is the number of physical Ports that belong to the
LAG Port. When LAG size is empty the Port is a physical Port. The value zero is
admitted. LAG size value can be modified even when LAG is active.
Set the LACP (Not Meaningful, True, False). LACP can be set at creation only.
Enter the Hash key (Not Meaningful, MAC, MPLS, VLAN, IP, L4). Frame distribution
can be modified even when LAG is active.
LAG Id
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The LAG Port is created after a consistency check.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-124
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The LACP.
For a description about LAG ports refer to the topic Description of Link Aggregation
(LAG) function (p. 13-117).
Before you begin
To get a positive result, consider that each NE type is subject to specific constraints.
Task
Show the LAG port list. See: View the list of LAG ports (p. 13-120).
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > LAG Port > Modify or right-click the mouse and Select Modify.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-125
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User can modify one or more of the following fields in the Modify LAG Port window:
The LAG size. See: Task to change LAG size (p. 13-126).
The Client Type. See: Task to change Client Type (p. 13-127).
The LAG frame distribution profile (Hash Key). See: Task to change frame
distribution profile (p. 13-127).
The number of physical ports members of the LAG port. See: Task to add ports
(p. 13-128) or Task to remove ports (p. 13-128).
The priority of the physical ports members of the LAG port. See: Task to change port
priority (p. 13-129).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: A check is performed. If the check succeeded, the modification is accepted.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
In the Modify LAG Port window, to configure the size of LAG port:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: A check is performed. If the check succeeded, the new value is accepted.
When decreasing, the LAG speed must satisfy CAC: (new size) * (BW of member
port) > Allocated BW . If check fails the modification is rejected.
For details about the relation between LAG size and number of Physical Port, refer to:
LAG size and number of ports (p. 13-123).
The LAG size can be changed also when port is active.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-126
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Modify LAG Port window, to change the Client Type of LAG port:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: A check is performed. If the check succeeded, the new value is accepted.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
In the Modify LAG Port window, to change the LACP of LAG port:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: A check is performed. If the check succeeded, the new value is accepted.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
In the Modify LAG Port window, to configure the distribution profile of LAG port:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: A check is performed. If the check succeeded, the new value is accepted.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-127
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Modify LAG Port window, to increase the number of physical ports members of a
LAG port:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one or more physical ports and click the icon to accept the selection.
Result: The list of available physical ports is closed.
Click Ok.
Result: A check is performed. If the check succeeded, the new value is accepted.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
In the Modify LAG Port window, to decrease the number of physical ports member of a
LAG port:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-128
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: A check is performed. If the check succeeded, the new value is accepted.
For details about the relation between LAG size and number of Physical Port, refer to:
LAG size and number of ports (p. 13-123).
The list of available physical ports can be refreshed or quit clicking on the related
icon.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
In the Modify LAG Port window, to the priority of a port member of LAG port:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: A check is performed. If the check succeeded, the new value is accepted.
For details about the priority of Physical Port, refer to: LAG size and number of
ports (p. 13-123).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-129
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about LAG ports refer to the topic Description of Link Aggregation
(LAG) function (p. 13-117).
Before you begin
The procedure used for LAG port is the same procedure used for Physical Port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To assign a LAG port to Network Access Domain, See: Assign a Port to Network Access
Domain (p. 13-109).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-130
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about LAG ports refer to the topic Description of Link Aggregation
(LAG) function (p. 13-117).
Before you begin
The procedure used for LAG port is the same procedure used for Physical Port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To view the properties of a LAG port, See: View the details of the Ethernet physical
ports (p. 13-111).
See the following topic in this document: Details of a LAG port (p. 13-132)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-131
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Transport Link.
LAG size.
Usage State.
Port Number.
NAD.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-132
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in navigating the LAG port to view physical port members.
Related information
For a description about LAG ports, refer to the topic Description of Link Aggregation
(LAG) function (p. 13-117).
Before you begin
Show the LAG port list. See: View the list of LAG ports (p. 13-120).
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click the mouse and Select Search > Inventory from Physical Port .
Result: The Physical Port view is opened.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of LAG ports
(p. 13-134)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-133
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To view attributes of a LAG port, See: View the details of the Ethernet physical ports
(p. 13-111).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-134
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The NAD List window presents all the NADs and their attributes.
Related information
For details about Network Access DomainUser Profile Management (p. 11-75).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of NADs
(p. 13-136)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-135
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Value.
Description.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-136
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Create a NAD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create a NAD
When to use
The NAD values allow the partitioning of the network resources in set of consistent
resources that can be used by Service Management Layer products (that is 1355VPN).
For details about Network Access DomainUser Profile Management (p. 11-75).
Before you begin
The User Label must be different from any already used by other NADs.
Task
To create a NAD:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok button.
Result: The NAD is automatically generated and the NAD List is updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-137
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Modify a NAD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Modify a NAD
When to use
Description.
For details about Network Access DomainUser Profile Management (p. 11-75).
Before you begin
To modify a NAD:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select OK.
Result: Then, the NAD list is updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-138
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Delete a NAD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Delete a NAD
When to use
For details about Network Access DomainUser Profile Management (p. 11-75).
Before you begin
The usage state of the ETPs belonging to the ENE must be idle.
Task
Select Action > Network Access Domain > Delete or right-click the mouse and Select
Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, the NAD is removed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-139
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The size of the frame managed by the Legacy ISA equipment is limited to a maximum
value to optimize the internal resources (for example: internal queues). When traffics
consist in large frames (called Ethernet Jumbo frames) a specific configuration on the
equipment is required. The manager is able to configure the support of Jumbo Frames for
each interface involved in such traffic.
The management of Jumbo Frame through Navigation involves the 1850 TSS 320
releases in the following way:
The management of Jumbo frames inside a network, brings to the configuration of all (or
of a subset) infrastructures dedicated to the traffic supporting Jumbo Frames.
The management of Jumbo Frames have to be explicitly configured in End-to-End way
enabling both on Edge Ports and on Crossed Transport Links. The following figure
provides an example.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-140
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For Jumbo Frame capability, the amount of resources to be configured can cover a whole
network, a domain, or it can be done in heterogeneous way acting on a subset of
resources. The condition to fulfill is that the end-to-end configuration is guaranteed
(otherwise the Jumbo frame can be discarded by NE not properly configured).
The management of Jumbo frames has to be explicitly enabled on Ethernet Interfaces
(either UNI, NNI and IWI).
The default behavior is disabled.
In particular, both Local and Remote Ethernet Interfaces can be configured to support
Jumbo frames and allow the Jumbo traffic flowing.
The management of Jumbo frames capability is only possible when the Ethernet Interface
is not Active (that is the Ethernet Interface is not already in use by Ethernet traffic).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-141
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For details about Jumbo Frames, refer to the topic Overview about Jumbo Frames
(p. 13-140).
Before you begin
Start a navigation toward 1350 OMS EML to open on the 1350 OMS EML GUI the
interface view of the 1850 TSS 320.
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > Edge Port.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-142
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result:
Figure 13-19 Jumbo frame configuration pattern
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure the Jumbo frame capability acting on the if Mtu attribute of the 1850 TSS
Ethernet Interface. Configuration is accomplished by inserting the value of the largest
frame to be managed on the interface.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Select one Transport Link ending on at least one 1850 TSS 320.
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS Transport
Links.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-143
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Starts a navigation to open on the 1350 OMS EML GUI the right Interface view. If the
Transport Link is joining one 1850 TSS 320 NE and one ENE, open one navigation. If the
transport Link is connecting two 1850 TSS 320 equipments (one navigation for each 1850
TSS 320 equipment), open two navigations.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure the Jumbo frame capability inserting the value of the largest frame to be
managed on such interface.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-144
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This paragraph describes the procedure when a new port is created or deleted on a
1678MCC Network Element.
Related information
The procedure is started on 1350 OMS EML application with the equipment of the port
on the NE.
If the user has configured the automatic upload on the NE, 1350 OMS SDH system
learns the new configured NAPs automatically. Otherwise the new ports are learned
manually.
1350 OMS PKT receives the new NAP notification and asks automatically 1350 OMS
SDH system for the corresponding physical port.
The deleting of a port operation is manually accomplished on 1350 OMS SDH, 1350
OMS EML, and 1350 OMS PKT systems.
The first step is the deleting the NAP on 1350 OMS SDH application. The second step is
the deleting the port on 1350 OMS EML application. Eventually the deleting of the port
on 1350 OMS PKT application.
Refer to the document: [3] 1350 OMS EML Guide.
Refer to the document: [4] 1350 OMS SDH Guide.
For details about equipment view, refer to the topic Navigation to equipment
(p. 17-153).
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-145
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the tree area, select the subnetwork that contains the equipment. Click the third button
of the mouse then select Search > Map.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the node on the map and Click third button of the mouse then select Search >
Show > Equipment View.
Result: The navigation process starts and, when completed, the Show Equipment
window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the 1678MCC equipment slot in the window and double click the mouse.
Result: The board window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-146
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the one of the Allowed Equipment Types and click OK.
Result: The port is added to the NE.
1350 OMS SDH learns automatically the new port and the new NAP.
1350 OMS PKT learns automatically the new port and the new TDM termination and
the new physical port.
To verify the existence of the new TDM terminations, refer to View the list of TDM
terminations (p. 13-68). To verify the existence of the new physical ports, refer to
View the list of Ethernet Physical ports (p. 13-98).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-147
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the tree area, select the subnetwork that contains the equipment. Click third button of
the mouse then select Search > Map.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the node on the map and Click third button of the mouse then select Search >
Show > Equipment View.
Result: The navigation process starts and, when completed, the Show Equipment
window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the 1678MCC equipment slot in the window and double click the mouse.
Result: The board window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-148
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result:
Figure 13-21 Remove port on 1678MCC NE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Empty slot of the Allowed Equipment Types and click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-149
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To verify the new conditions referring to View the list of TDM terminations
(p. 13-68) and refer to View the list of Ethernet Physical ports (p. 13-98).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-150
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Web Portal window, in Application List Area, execute the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the icon for the management of the User profiles related to the EML application
that manages the board.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Double click the icon or right click the mouse and select Rise up.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-151
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If necessary, set the View of the Tree Area and set the Tools to Show >
functions/FADs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Tree Area, according to User Profile for which you want to apply the security
modification, select:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Main Area, select the Tab Edit Fad and Menu View.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Main Area, select the Tab Edit Fad and List View.
Result: The area Included FADs/Functions lists the parameter IgnoreNMLAssignment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-152
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Additional section
View the inventory of NE in a Domain
When to use
For a detailed description, refer to the topic Overview about Domains (p. 13-18).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of NEs (p. 13-40)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-153
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a detailed description, refer to the topic Overview about Domains (p. 13-18).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Transport Links
(p. 13-155)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-154
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Subnetwork.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-155
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a detailed description, refer to the topic Overview about Domains (p. 13-18).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of VT Queue
Profiles (p. 13-157)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-156
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-157
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a detailed description, refer to the topic Overview about Domains (p. 13-18).
Before you begin
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-158
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Service nodes, refer to the topic Overview about service nodes
(p. 13-34).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of NEs (p. 13-40)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-159
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function lists all the NE not assigned to 1350 OMS PKT management.
Related information
For a description about Network Elements refer to the topic Overview about Network
Elements (p. 13-37).
Before you begin
To be listed, the NE must be declared and supervised by the 1350 OMS EML.
Task
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of available NEs
(p. 13-161)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-160
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The available NE are the NE supervised by the 1350 OMS EML, not assigned to 1350
OMS PKT. The attributes displayed for each NE are:
Operator Label.
Location Name.
Type.
Version.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-161
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Assign a NE to a Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Assign a NE to a Domain
When to use
For a description about Network Elements refer to the topic Overview about Network
Elements (p. 13-37).
For a description about Domains, refer to the topic Overview about Domains
(p. 13-18).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The Network Element list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-162
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Network Elements refer to the topic Overview about Network
Elements (p. 13-37).
For a description about Domains, refer to the topic Overview about Domains
(p. 13-18).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The Network Element list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-163
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Transport Links refer to the topic Transport link management
(p. 11-53) or the topic Transport link definition (p. 14-5).
Before you begin
The NE must not be locked (that is audit, alignment, reserve are not in progress).
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > Network Element > Upload Links Over Cable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-164
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-165
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
No related information.
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, the NE working state is set to Uploading.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-166
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
No related information.
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-167
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
No related information.
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-168
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-169
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a detailed description, refer to the topic Overview about Domains (p. 13-18).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of VT Queue
Profiles (p. 13-157)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-170
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Domains, refer to the topic Overview about Domains
(p. 13-18).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The Network Element list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-171
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Domains, refer to the topic Overview about Domains
(p. 13-18).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The Network Element list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > Ethernet Physical Ports > Deassign from Domain.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
13-172
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
14
14
Transport
Link
Management
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes how to manage the transport infrastructure for Ethernet
connections.
Contents
Overview about Transport links
14-5
14-5
14-6
Concatenated VC management
14-12
14-14
Implicit configuration
14-16
14-19
14-19
14-20
14-21
14-25
14-28
14-29
14-30
14-32
14-33
14-34
14-35
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-36
14-36
14-39
14-40
14-41
14-43
14-45
14-47
14-49
14-50
14-51
14-52
Configure Split/Join
14-55
14-58
14-58
14-59
14-60
14-61
14-64
14-67
14-70
14-73
14-75
14-77
14-78
14-79
14-80
14-81
14-81
14-82
14-83
14-84
14-85
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-86
14-87
14-88
14-88
14-89
14-90
14-91
14-92
14-93
14-94
14-95
14-95
14-96
14-97
14-98
14-99
14-100
14-101
14-102
14-102
14-103
14-104
14-105
14-106
14-107
14-108
14-109
14-109
14-111
Additional section
14-112
14-112
14-114
14-115
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-116
14-117
Assign NAD
14-119
14-121
14-122
14-123
14-124
14-125
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This part provides a description of the infrastructure in term of: Link Over TDM, Link
Over Cable, Link Over MPLS. The infrastructure is used for different supported layer
MPLS or Ethernet. The infrastructure is named Transport Link.
The Transport Link can be supported by:
An SDH path. The link is called Link Over TDM. It carries directly Ethernet
Segments or VC-LSPs: The supported layer is Ethernet or MPLS.
A VC-LSP. The link is called Link Over MPLS. A Link Over TDM or a Link Over
Cable (Martini) carries it.
An Ethernet cable or a Martini cable. The link is called Link Over Cable. It connects a
NE with an ENE. If the ENE has a role inner equipment then it carries directly
Ethernet Segments or VC-LSP. The supported layer is Ethernet or MPLS. If the ENE
has a role customer Edge, the ENE is only used for the graphical view.
When the provisioning state of the Link Over TDM becomes commissioned, the
corresponding Transport link is created in the MPLS or Ethernet management domain.
Creation is done according to the supported layer Ethernet or MPLS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Link Over TDM user label defined in 1350 OMS PKT is the same as the SDH path
user label defined in 1350 OMS SDH.
Legend: in the following figures, the following symbols are used:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In this case, the effective bandwidth of the Link Over TDM is equal to:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-7
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The effective bandwidth of the Link Over TDM is equal to the minimum value between:
Ethernet port bit rate: 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or 1 Gbit/s (of the E/FE/GE NE),.
Transport bit rate by concatenation level of SDH path: (vc4, vc3, vc12) (063).
Transport bit rate by concatenation level of SDH path: (vc4, vc3, vc12) (063).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-8
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-9
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The effective bandwidth of the Link Over MPLS is defined by the Traffic Descriptor
parameters of the VC-LSP. The effective bandwidth is not explicitly calculated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-10
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The effective bandwidth of the Link Over MPLS is defined by the Traffic Descriptor
parameters of the VC-LSP. The effective bandwidth is not explicitly calculated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-11
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Concatenated VC management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Concatenated VC management
The increment of the effective bandwidth
In this example, the effective bandwidth of the Link Over TDM is: 4 x 155 Mbit/s (vc4) =
620 Mbit/s, less than 1 Gbit/s, the bit rate of the connected port.
The TDM terminations are managed in the 1350 OMS PKT with the following
characteristics:
The management of concatenated SDH path is the same both for virtual and for packet
concatenation, both for transparent and for compressed rates.
For a concatenated path, the concatenation level can increment or reduce the SDH path
bandwidth.
1350 OMS SDH notifies to 1350 OMS PKT1350 OMS PKT every modification on the
concatenation level of an SDH path.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-12
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Concatenated VC management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
After the notification has been received, it has to calculate the effective bandwidth of the
Link Over TDM. The corresponding SNMP interfaces on ISA PR EA is updated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-13
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Transport Links and extremities combinations are described in the following table:
NE.
E/FE/GE (Q3
NE).
ENE.
E/FE/GE
(Q3 NE).
PR EA, ES1,
ES4, ES16
(SNMP NE).
ENE.
1.
Is possible only between two NEs able to support MPLS (PR EA or ES16).
2.
Is possible only between a NE able to support MPLS (PR EA or ES16) and an ENE.
3.
Is possible only between a NE able to support MPLS (PR EA or ES16) and an ENE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-14
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The next table summarizes the combinations between Supported Layer, Client
Type,Protocol Type, and Manager Control :
Client Type.
none.
ETS.
ETB.
Protocol Type.
HDLC.
LAPS or GFP.
LAPS or GFP.
Supported Layer2.
MPLS.
Ethernet.
Ethernet.
Manager Control 3.
Enabled or Disabled 1
.
Enabled or Disabled 1
.
Disabled.
Notes:
1.
If the Link Over TDM is Not Consistent, the disabled value occurs.
2.
The supported layer of the Link Over TDM is deduced from the Protocol Type. The
modification of the Protocol Type involves an implicit modification of the Supported Layer.
3.
The modification of the Client Type can involve a modification of the Manager Control.
The possible modifications depend also on the involved type and release of NEs:
E/FE/GE.PR
EA.
ES1 / ES4.
ES16 R2.0.
ES16 2.1.
Protocol
Type.
LAPS, GFP.
LAPS, GFP,
HDLC.
Client
Type.
ETS, ETB.
ETS, none.
ETS, ETB,
none.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-15
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Implicit configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Implicit configuration
Uploaded parameters
At creation time, for a local (or not) Link Over TDM, an implicit configuration is
performed.
For each SNMP extremity of the Link Over TDM, the following TDM termination
characteristics are uploaded from the NE:
Protocol Type.
Client Type.
Effective Bandwidth.
Activation Status.
If both extremities are not active or if at least one extremity is not SNMP, the Link Over
TDM is updated as follow:
Protocol Type.
is set to:
HDLC if Link Over TDM Supported Layer is MPLS.
GFP or LAPS according to 1350 OMS PKT configuration file if both extremities
are ES cards.
GFP in any other case.
If extremities are activated with the same characteristics and effective bandwidth matches
the computed one, the Link is updated as follow:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-16
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Implicit configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
if the problem is linked to the Client Type, Client Type is set to undefined value.
in any other case, Client Type is set as TDM terminations Client Type.
if the problem is linked to the Protocol Type, Protocol Type is set to undefined
value.
in any other case, Protocol Type is set as TDM terminations Protocol Type.
If the Link Over TDM has at least one extremity on an SNMP NE and Manager Control
is enabled, the following operations are performed in the management domain:
If the Link Over TDM Client Type is ETB and Manager Control is disabled, a
configuration request is sent on each TDM termination, at extremities. No activation is
done in this case.
The configuration request specifies:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-17
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Implicit configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the Manager control is enabled and the Link Over TDM is used to carry traffic in
the management domain, the configuration is refused.
If the Manager control is enabled and the Link Over TDM is not used in the
management domain: the related Transport Link in Ethernet or MPLS management
domain is deactivated, a request is sent to NE at extremities to deactivate the related
SNMP interfaces. Then the manager control becomes disabled and the required
modifications are applied.
If the Manager control is disabled the required modifications are applied directly.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-18
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Link Over TDM List presents all Links Over TDM and their attributes.
Related information
For information about Transport Link, see: Overview about Transport links (p. 14-5).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Links Over
TDM (p. 14-20)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-19
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
Bandwidth (in Kbit/s) (value 0 means that the 1350 OMS SDH Transmission path is
not Commissioned).
Interface Type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-20
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Transport Link, see: Overview about Transport links (p. 14-5).
For information about how to set parameters, see: Relation among Transport Links
attributes and board releases (p. 14-15).
For information about how parameters are set after creation, see: Uploaded parameters
(p. 14-16).
Before you begin
The NEs concerned by the Link Over TDM must be managed by the 1350 OMS SDH.
The NEs concerned by the Link Over TDM must be not locked (that is audit,
alignment, reserve are not in progress).
The LAC state of NEs concerned by the Link Over TDM must not be granted.
The TDM termination of each NE must not be busy.
The Extremity A or Z must not be locked. The audit, alignment, reserve are not in
progress on the NE.
In the creation window, the TDM terminations must be compliant with the Link Over
TDM. Check the following parameters: Supported layer, bit rate, concatenation
rate, and concatenation level.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-21
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > Packet > Construction > Create Link Over TDM.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-22
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-23
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create a Link Over TDM (between two NEs managed by the 1350 OMS SDH):
Select the Extremity A Termination by using the sensitive help. Only the
terminations with usage state equal to Idle are proposed.
Select the Extremity Z by using the sensitive help.
Select the Extremity Z Termination by using the sensitive help. Only the
terminations with usage state equal to Idle are proposed.
Choose the Supported Layer (Ethernet or MPLS).
Choose the Transport Concatenation Rate (VC_12, VC_3, VC_4).
Enter the Concatenation level (priority which allows to increase the flexibility of
SDH bandwidth management from 0 to 63).
Choose the Bit Rate (1G_Rate_adaptive, 1G_Transparent, 10 MB, 100 MB,
2_MB_LO, 34_MB_LO, 140_MB_HO).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: Then, the SDH path creation window is displayed using the required NEs.
The user can execute the required SDH path creation operation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: Then, the 1350 OMS PKT computes the effective bandwidth and creates the
Link Over TDM inside its database.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-24
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If both extremities are ES16, supported Layer is configured instead of Client Type.
Configuration is accomplished by setting the Client Type and Protocol Type.
This function is used when the user needs to modify the Client Type (or Supported
Layer), and Protocol Type.
This function is used also when a Link Over TDM has its manager control disabled, to
make it operational.
For information about Transport Link, see: Overview about Transport links (p. 14-5).
For information about how to set parameters, see: Relation among Transport Links
attributes and board releases (p. 14-15).
For information about configuration process, see: Configuration phase results.
(p. 14-18).
Before you begin
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Link Over TDM.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-25
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
I f both extremities are ES16 boards: choose the Client Type (None, ETS or ETB) or
the Supported Layer (Ethernet, MPLS).
Choose the Protocol Type (GFP (Ethernet), LAPS (Ethernet), HDLC (MPLS)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-26
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then, the Links Over TDM list view is updated with the new Client Type and
Protocol Type values. The working state is set to Normal.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-27
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Transport Link, see: Overview about Transport links (p. 14-5).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Link Over TDM.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from Link Over TDM > Extremities.
Result: The list window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Link Over TDM
Extremities (p. 14-29)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-28
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Supported Layer.
Effective Bandwidth.
Extremity Z Type.
Extremity Z.
Extremity A.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-29
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function allows to assign a specific Network Access Domain (NAD) value to a Link
Over TDM.
Related information
For information about Transport Link, see: Overview about Transport links (p. 14-5).
For details about Network Access DomainUser Profile Management (p. 11-75).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Link Over TDM.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-30
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result:
Figure 14-10 Assign NAD window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Choose the NAD Value from the list on the left side of the window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The NAD value is assigned to the Link Over TDM, more than one value can
be assigned to a link.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-31
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Transport Link, see: Overview about Transport links (p. 14-5).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Link Over TDM.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Link Over TDM > Properties or Click the third key of the mouse and
select Properties.
Result: The Link Over TDM properties window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Details of a Link Over TDM (p. 14-33)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-32
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
Parent Domain.
Bandwidth (in Kbit/s) (value 0 means that the 1350 OMS SDH Transmission path is
not Commissioned).
Directionality.
Concatenation Level.
Reliability Level.
Provisioning State.
Comment.
Interface Type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-33
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function gets information about the Fault Localization of a Link Over TDM.
Related information
For information about Transport Link, see: Overview about Transport links (p. 14-5).
For details about Fault Localization, see: Fault Localization (p. 11-73).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Link Over TDM.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Selecting an entity from the list, the user can navigate to the alarmed equipment port or
the FM list.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-34
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Entity Type.
Alarm Status.
Operator
Link User.
Probable Cause.
Last Refresh.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-35
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Is called Link over Cable, the way to connect two Ethernet ports without using the SDH
layer.
Classification of Links Over Cable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-36
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a not terminated Link Over Cable, if the ENE role is Customer Edge, the Link Over
Cable interface type is UNI (external cable). An external Link Over Cable is always
managed locally by the construction domain. The aim is to present the Customer edge
equipment connected to the managed domain.
For both, terminated or not terminated Link Over Cable, the Link Over Cable type is NNI
or IWI. Terminated Link Over Cables are also called internal cable. Not terminated Link
Over Cable has Inner ENE or P-VLAN network.
For a not terminated Link Over Cable, the ETP Interface rate is deduced from the port
characteristics at the other extremity. The ETP Interface rate can be: 10 Mbit/s, 100
Mbit/s, 1 Gbit/s.
Links Over Cable creation details
.
Calculated information
The Link Over Cable is created with its given characteristics and the following
information is calculated:
Type according to the role of ENE at the extremity (external if ENE role is customer
edge or internal if ENE role is inner equipment).
The working state is set to Normal.
Ethernet portusage state and ETP usage state are set to Busy.
The Manager Control of port at the extremity of an external Link Over Cable is
disabled.
The Manager Control of port at the extremity of an internal Link Over Cable is
enabled.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-37
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Bit rate of port is not equal to the Bit rate entered for the Link Over Cable.
The Supported Layer of port is not equal to the Supported Layer of the Link Over
Cable.
An external Link Over Cable could not have an MPLS Supported Layer (ENE role
not compliant).
A Link Over Cable terminated on E/FE/GE NE could not have an MPLS Supported
Layer.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-38
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Link Over Cable List window presents all Links Over Cable and their attributes.
Related information
For information about Transport Link, see: Overview about Transport links (p. 14-5).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Links Over
Cable (p. 14-40)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-39
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
Bit Rate.
Working State.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-40
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Transport Link, see: Overview about Transport links (p. 14-5).
For more information about creation, see: Links Over Cable creation details (p. 14-37).
Important! If the user plans to expand a physical connection by a LAG, not to lose
traffic, the user must create the connection as a LAG with at least one link. Refer to
Create a LAG Link Over Cable from Links (p. 14-64) or refer to Create a LAG
Link Over Cable from extremities (p. 14-61).
Before you begin
The NE must not be isolated, not locked and LAC state must not be granted.
The usage state of the Ethernet physical port of the NE must be idle.
If the supported layer of the port is Ethernet, the Manager Control of the Ethernet
physical port of the NE must be enabled.
If the supported layer of the port is MPLS, the Manager Control of the Ethernet
physical port of the NE must be disabled.
The Usage State of the ETP of the ENE must be idle.
The Supported Layer of the Link Over Cable must be compatible with the one of the
chosen physical port and with the role of the chosen ENE.
The User Label must be different as one which is already used by another Link Over
Cable.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-41
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Select Action > Packet > Construction > Create Link Over Cable.
Result: The Link Over Cable creation window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then, select the Port User Label (A) of the NE from the available port list.
Select the Extremity User Label (Z) from the available NE list.
If the selected NE is an External NE then:
Only the ENEs that are compatible with the NE port are displayed: if the NE
extremity has its Manager Control Disabled, only Inner Equipment ENEs are
displayed. If the NE extremity has its Manager Control Enabled, only Customer
Edge ENEs are displayed.
The ETP (Z) (External Termination Point) field is enabled, select the ETP of the
ENE from the available ETP list.
If the selected NE is a defined Network Element
Select the Port User Label (Z) (External Termination Point) of the NE from the
available port list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: At the beginning of the operation, the working state is set to Creating.
The Link Over Cable List and the opened graphical views are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-42
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Comment.
For information about Transport Link, see: Overview about Transport links (p. 14-5).
Before you begin
If the User Label is modified, the new User Label must be different from any other in
use by Link Over Cable.
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Links Over Cable.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-43
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select OK.
Result: At the beginning of the operation, the working state of the concerned Link
Over Cable is set to Modifying.
If the User Label is modified, the corresponding Transport Link in (Ethernet domain
or in MPLS domain) is modified too.
At the end of the operation, the working state is set to Normal.
The Link Over Cable List and the opened graphical views are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-44
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in deleting a Link Over Cable from the 1350 OMS PKT
supervision.
Related information
For information about Transport Link, see: Overview about Transport links (p. 14-5).
Before you begin
The corresponding Ethernet Transport Link or MPLS Transport Link usage state
must be idle.
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Links Over Cable.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > Links Over Cable > Delete or right-click the mouse and Select Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, the working state of the concerned Links Over Cable is
set to removing.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the Manager Control is Enabled, the usage of the corresponding Transport Link (in
Ethernet Management domain or in MPLS domain) is checked. If Ethernet Segments
or VC-LSP are carried by Transport Link, the deletion is refused. In other case, the
corresponding Ethernet Transport Link or MPLS Transport Link must be deleted
before the Link Over Cable.
Then, the Links Over Cable are removed. If the Link Over Cable is internal then the
port usage state is set to Idle.
The Links Over Cable List and the opened graphical views are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-46
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function gets information about the extremities of a Link Over Cable.
Related information
For information about Transport Link, see: Overview about Transport links (p. 14-5).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Links Over Cable.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from Link Over Cable > Extremities.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-47
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Link Over Cable
Extremities (p. 14-49)
Figure 14-12 Link Over Cable Extremities window
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-48
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label .
Supported Layer.
ETP(Z).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-49
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Transport Link, see: Overview about Transport links (p. 14-5).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Links Over Cable.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from Link Over Cable > Properties or click the third key of
the mouse then select Properties.
Result: The Link Over Cable properties window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Details of a Link Over Cable (p. 14-51)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-50
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
Comment.
Bit Rate.
Working State.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-51
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Join operation removes the two specified Links Over Cable and create a new link.
Split operation removes the specified Link Over Cable and creates two new links.
For information about configuration, see: Configure Split/Join (p. 14-55).
For information about Transport Link, see: Overview about Transport links (p. 14-5).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Links Over Cable.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one item in the list and select Action > Split/Join > Start Join.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-52
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-53
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-54
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Configure Split/Join
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure Split/Join
When to use
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Links Over Cable.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one item in the list and select Action > Split/Join > Configure Split.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-55
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Configure Split/Join
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-56
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Configure Split/Join
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Configure Split:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-57
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Is called LAG Link over Cable, the way to connect two LAG ports.
For information about Link Aggregation (LAG) function, see: Description of Link
Aggregation (LAG) function (p. 13-117).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-58
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The function presents all LAG Links Over Cable and their attributes.
Related information
For information about Transport Link, see: LAG Link Over Cable definition (p. 14-58).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Link Over
Cables (p. 14-60)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-59
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
Bit Rate.
Working State.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-60
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create LAG Link , see also: Create a LAG Link Over Cable from Links (p. 14-64).
For information, see: LAG Link Over Cable definition (p. 14-58).
Before you begin
The NE must not be isolated, not locked and LAC state must not be granted.
The usage state of the Ethernet physical port of the NE must be idle.
If the supported layer of the port is Ethernet, the Manager Control of the Ethernet
physical port of the NE must be enabled.
If the supported layer of the port is MPLS, the Manager Control of the Ethernet
physical port of the NE must be disabled.
The Usage State of the ETP of the ENE must be idle.
The Supported Layer of the Link Over Cable must be compatible with the one of the
chosen physical port and with the role of the chosen ENE.
The User Label must be different as one which is already used by another Link Over
Cable.
Task
Select Action > Packet > Construction > Create LAG Link Over Cable from
extremities.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-61
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then, select the LAG Port (A) of the NE from the available port list.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-62
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then, select the LAG Port (Z) of the NE from the available port list.
Select the ETP (Z) from the available ETP list.
Note: If the selected NE is an External NE then:
Only the ENEs that are compatible with the NE port are displayed. If the NE
extremity has its Manager Control Disabled, only Inner Equipment ENEs are
displayed. If the NE extremity has its Manager Control Enabled, only Customer
Edge ENEs are displayed.
The ETP (Z) (External Termination Point) field is enabled, select the ETP of the
ENE from the available ETP list.
Select the Port User Label (Z) (External Termination Point) of the NE from the
available port list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The LAG Link is created.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-63
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create LAG Link , see also: Create a LAG Link Over Cable from extremities
(p. 14-61).
For information, see: LAG Link Over Cable definition (p. 14-58).
Before you begin
Select Action > Packet > Construction > Create LAG Link Over Cable from Links.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-64
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-65
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter theLACP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The LAG Link is created.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-66
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create LAG Link , see also: Create a LAG Link VCG from Links (p. 14-70).
For information, see: LAG Link Over Cable definition (p. 14-58).
Before you begin
Select Action > Packet > Construction > Create LAG Link VCG from extremities.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-67
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then, select the VCG Termination (A) of the NE from the list.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-68
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then, select the VCG Termination (Z) of the NE from the list.
Select the ETP (Z) from the list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The LAG Link VCG is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-69
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create LAG Link VCG, see also: Create a LAG Link VCG from extremities
(p. 14-67).
For information, see: LAG Link Over Cable definition (p. 14-58).
Before you begin
Select Action > Packet > Construction > Create LAG Link VCG from Links.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-70
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-71
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The LAG Link VCG is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-72
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Comment.
For information about Transport Link, see: LAG Link Over Cable definition (p. 14-58).
Before you begin
If the User Label is modified, the new User Label must be different from any other in
use by Link Over Cable.
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > LAG Links Over Cable.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-73
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select OK.
Result: At the beginning of the operation, the working state of the concerned Link
Over Cable is set to Modifying.
If the User Label is modified, the corresponding Transport Link in (Ethernet domain
or in MPLS domain) is modified too.
At the end of the operation, the working state is set to Normal.
The Link Over Cable List and the opened graphical views are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-74
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Transport Link, see: LAG Link Over Cable definition (p. 14-58).
If the Manager Control is Disabled, the deletion is authorized.
If the Manager Control is Enabled, the usage of the corresponding Transport Link (in
Ethernet Management domain or in MPLS domain) is checked. If Ethernet Segments or
VC-LSP are carried by Transport Link, the deletion is refused. In other case, the
corresponding Ethernet Transport Link or MPLS Transport Link must be deleted before
the Link Over Cable.
Before you begin
The corresponding Ethernet Transport Link or MPLS Transport Link usage state
must be idle.
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > LAG Links Over Cable.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > LAG Links Over Cable > Delete or right-click the mouse and Select
Delete.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-75
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, the working state of the concerned LAG Links Over
Cable is set to removing.
Then, the LAG Links Over Cable are removed. If the Link Over Cable is internal then
the port usage state is set to Idle.
The LAG Links Over Cable List and the opened graphical views are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-76
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function gets information about the extremities of a LAG Link Over Cable.
Related information
For information about Transport Link, see: LAG Link Over Cable definition (p. 14-58).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > LAG Links Over Cable.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from Link Over Cable > Extremities.
Result: The Link over Cable extremities window is shown.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Link over Cable
extremities (p. 14-78)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-77
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To view the attributes of a Link over Cable extremity, see: View the details of the
Ethernet physical ports (p. 13-111).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-78
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Transport Link, see: LAG Link Over Cable definition (p. 14-58).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > LAG Links Over Cable.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from Link Over Cable > Properties or click the third key of
the mouse then select Properties.
Result: The Link Over Cable properties window is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-79
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The attributes displayed for each LAG Link Over Cable are:
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
Comment.
Bit Rate.
Working State.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-80
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A Link Over WDM is the image in 1350 OMS PKT Construction domain of Transport
Links managed by the WDM manager.
Links Over WDM are managed by external applications.
Refer to the document: [5] 1350 OMS WDM Guide
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-81
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Link Over WDM List window presents all links over WDM and their attributes.
Related information
For information about Transport Link, see: MPLS/T-MPLS Transport link (p. 11-69).
For information about links over WDM, see: Overview about links over WDM
(p. 14-81).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Links Over WDM
(p. 14-83)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-82
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
Working State.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-83
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function gets information about the extremities (origin and destination) of a Link
Over WDM.
Related information
For information about Transport Link, see: MPLS/T-MPLS Transport link (p. 11-69).
For information about links over WDM, see: Overview about links over WDM
(p. 14-81).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Transport Links > Links Over WDM.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from Link Over WDM > Extremities or click the third key of
the mouse then select Extremities.
Result: The Link Over WDM Extremities window is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-84
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-85
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Transport Link, see: MPLS/T-MPLS Transport link (p. 11-69).
For information about links over WDM, see: Overview about links over WDM
(p. 14-81).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Transport Links > Links Over WDM.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from Link Over WDM > Properties or click the third key of
the mouse then select Properties.
Result: The Link Over WDM properties window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Details of a Link Over WDM (p. 14-87)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-86
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
Working State.
Traffic Contract.
CIR.
PIR.
CBS.
PBS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-87
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A Link Over MPLS is the image in 1350 OMS PKT Construction domain of a VC-LSP
managed by the MPLS manager.
A Link Over MPLS is automatically created or deleted inside the construction domain at
the implementation or de-implementation of the corresponding VC-LSP.
A Link Over MPLS is automatically modified when the corresponding VC-LSP is
modified.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-88
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Link Over MPLS List window presents all links over MPLS and their attributes.
Related information
For details about Transport Links, see: MPLS/T-MPLS Transport link (p. 11-69).
For general information about Transport Links, see: Transport link management
(p. 11-53).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Links Over
MPLS (p. 14-90)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-89
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
Working State.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-90
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function gets information about the extremities (origin and destination) of a Link
Over MPLS.
Related information
For information about Transport Link, see: MPLS/T-MPLS Transport link (p. 11-69).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Transport Links > Links Over MPLS.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from Link Over MPLS > Extremities or click the third key of
the mouse then select Extremities.
Result: The Link Over MPLS Extremities window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Link Over MPLS
Extremities (p. 14-92)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-91
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-92
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Transport Link, see: MPLS/T-MPLS Transport link (p. 11-69).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Transport Links > Links Over MPLS.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from Link Over MPLS > Properties or click the third key of
the mouse then select Properties.
Result: The Link Over MPLS properties window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Details of a Link Over MPLS (p. 14-94)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-93
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
Working State.
Traffic Contract.
CIR.
PIR.
CBS.
PBS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-94
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A Link Over T-MPLS is the image in 1350 OMS PKT Construction domain of a VC-LSP
managed by the T-MPLS manager.
A Link Over MPLS is automatically created or deleted inside the construction domain at
the implementation or de-implementation of the corresponding VC-LSP.
A Link Over MPLS is automatically modified when the corresponding VC-LSP is
modified.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-95
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Link Over T-MPLS List window presents all links over T-MPLS and their attributes.
Related information
For details about Transport Links, see: MPLS/T-MPLS Transport link (p. 11-69).
For general information about Transport Links, see: Transport link management
(p. 11-53).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Links Over
T-MPLS (p. 14-97)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-96
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
Working State.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-97
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function gets information about the extremities (origin and destination) of a Link
Over T-MPLS.
Related information
For information about Transport Link, see: MPLS/T-MPLS Transport link (p. 11-69).
Before you begin
Select: Search > Packet > Construction > Transport Links > Links Over T-MPLS.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from Link Over T-MPLS > Extremities or click the third key
of the mouse then select Extremities.
Result: The Link Over T-MPLS Extremities window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Link Over
T-MPLS Extremities (p. 14-99)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-98
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-99
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Transport Link, see: MPLS/T-MPLS Transport link (p. 11-69).
Before you begin
Select: Search > Packet > Construction > Transport Links > Links Over T-MPLS.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from Link Over T-MPLS > Properties or click the third key of
the mouse then select Properties.
Result: The Link Over T-MPLS properties window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Details of a Link Over T-MPLS
(p. 14-101)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-100
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
Working State.
Traffic Contract.
CIR.
PIR.
CBS.
PBS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-101
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The section represents the transport connection between two T-MPLS ports, whatever the
underlying transport technology (for example, cable, TDM, WDM).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-102
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The list presents all the T-MPLS sections and their attributes.
Related information
Note: A Link Over T-MPLS appears automatically in this list when a VC-LSP is
implemented.
A Link Over T-MPLS disappears automatically from this list when a VC-LSP is
de-implemented.
For details about Transport Links, see: MPLS/T-MPLS Transport link (p. 11-69).
For general information about Transport Links, see: Transport link management
(p. 11-53).
.
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of T-MPLS sections
(p. 14-104)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-103
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
Working State.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-104
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function gets information about the extremities (origin and destination) of a T-MPLS
section.
Related information
Select Search > Packet > Construction >T-MPLS > T-MPLS sections.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > T-MPLS section > Extremities or click the third key of the mouse then
select Extremities.
Result: The T-MPLS section Extremities window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of T-MPLS section
Extremities (p. 14-106)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-105
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-106
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Packet > Construction >T-MPLS > T-MPLS sections.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from T-MPLS section > Properties or click the third key of
the mouse then select Properties.
Result: The T-MPLS section properties window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Details of a T-MPLS section (p. 14-108)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-107
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
Working State.
Traffic Contract.
CIR.
PIR.
CBS.
PBS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-108
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Transport Link List window presents all Transport Links belonging to the same
domain.
Related information
For information about Transport Link, see: Overview about Transport links (p. 14-5).
For Connection Oriented management, see also: Display the Ethernet ETS Transport
Link list (p. 17-157).
For Connection Less management, see also: Display the Ethernet Bridge Transport Link
list (p. 18-22).
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-109
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Transport Links
by Domain (p. 14-111)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-110
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-111
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Additional section
Delete a Link Over TDM
When to use
This function removes a Link Over TDM from the 1350 OMS PKT supervision.
Related information
For information about Transport Link, see: Overview about Transport links (p. 14-5).
If the Manager Control is Disabled, the deletion is authorized.
If the Manager Control is Enabled, the usage state must be idle.
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Transport Links > Links Over TDM.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > Links Over TDM > Delete or right-click the mouse and Select Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, the working state of the concerned Links Over Cable is
set to removing.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-113
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Transport Link, see: Overview about Transport links (p. 14-5).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Transport Links > Links Over TDM.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > Links Over TDM > Remove Inconsistent TDM Path or right-click the
mouse and Select Remove Inconsistent TDM Path.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: The Inconsistent TDM Paths are removed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-114
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Transport Link, see: Overview about Transport links (p. 14-5).
For a description about Domains, refer to the topic Overview about Domains
(p. 13-18).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Transport Links > Links Over TDM.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > Links Over TDM > Assign Resources to Domain.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-115
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Transport Link, see: Overview about Transport links (p. 14-5).
For a description about Domains, refer to the topic Overview about Domains
(p. 13-18).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Transport Links > Links Over TDM.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > Links Over TDM > Deassign Resources from Domain.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-116
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Transport Link, see: Overview about Transport links (p. 14-5).
For information about how to set parameters, see: Relation among Transport Links
attributes and board releases (p. 14-15).
For information about configuration process, see: Configuration phase results.
(p. 14-18).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Link Over Cable.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-117
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then, the Links Over Cable list view is updated with the new Client Type and
Protocol Type values. The working state is set to Normal.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-118
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Assign NAD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Assign NAD
When to use
This function allows to assign a specific Network Access Domain (NAD) value to a Link
Over Cable.
Related information
For information about Transport Link, see: Overview about Transport links (p. 14-5).
For details about Network Access DomainUser Profile Management (p. 11-75).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Link Over Cable.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Choose the NAD Value from the list on the left side of the window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-119
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Assign NAD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The NAD value is assigned to the Link Over Cable, more than one value can
be assigned to a link.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-120
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function gets information about the Fault Localization of a Link Over Cable.
Related information
For information about Transport Link, see: Overview about Transport links (p. 14-5).
For details about Fault Localization, see: Fault Localization (p. 11-73).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Transport Link >Link Over Cable.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Selecting an entity from the list, the user can navigate to the alarmed equipment port or
the FM list.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-121
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Transport Link, see: Overview about Transport links (p. 14-5).
For a description about Domains, refer to the topic Overview about Domains
(p. 13-18).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Transport Links > Links Over Cable.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > Links Over Cable > Assign Resources to Domain.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-122
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Transport Link, see: Overview about Transport links (p. 14-5).
For a description about Domains, refer to the topic Overview about Domains
(p. 13-18).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Transport Links > Links Over Cable.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > Links Over Cable > Deassign Resources from Domain.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-123
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The function lists presents all links over Radio and their attributes.
Related information
For information about Transport Link, see: MPLS/T-MPLS Transport link (p. 11-69).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of links over Radio
(p. 14-125)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-124
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-125
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
14-126
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
15
15
MPLS
Provisioning
Management
Overview
Purpose
15-4
15-4
15-5
15-6
15-7
15-11
15-14
15-16
15-17
15-18
15-19
15-20
15-20
15-22
15-23
15-24
15-28
15-30
15-31
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
15-32
15-33
15-36
15-38
15-39
15-39
15-40
15-41
15-42
15-44
15-46
15-47
15-50
15-52
15-54
15-55
15-57
15-59
15-61
15-62
15-63
15-64
15-66
15-68
15-70
15-71
15-72
15-73
15-74
15-75
15-78
15-81
15-82
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
15-83
15-83
15-84
15-85
Create a VC-LSP
15-86
Modify a VC-LSP
15-90
Delete a VC-LSP
15-92
Implement a VC-LSP
15-94
De-implement a VC-LSP
15-96
Commission a VC-LSP
15-98
De-commission a VC-LSP
15-100
15-102
15-104
15-105
Details of a VC-LSP
15-106
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Each LSP is characterized by a Traffic Descriptor. It indicates the QoS and the traffic
parameters.
The Traffic Descriptor management tool chain gives the order in which the available
actions can be performed.
Figure 15-1 Traffic Descriptor management chain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Traffic Descriptor List window presents all the MPLS Traffic Descriptors and their
attributes.
Related information
For information about Traffic Descriptors, see: Overview about Traffic Descriptors
(MPLS) (p. 15-4).
Before you begin
Select Descriptor.
Result: The MPLS Traffic Descriptor list is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Traffic
Descriptors (p. 15-6)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in defining a Traffic Descriptor (MPLS) that can be used by LSP
tunnels and VC LSPs.
For information about Traffic Descriptors, see: Overview about Traffic Descriptors
(MPLS) (p. 15-4).
MPLS traffic contract and traffic parameters dependencies
Table 15-1
Traffic
Descriptor
parameter.
CIR.
EF.
AF.
(CIR = PIR).
&.
PIR.
> 0.
CBS.
0 1.
PBS.
> 0.
Notes:
1.
Maximum.
CIR.
0 or 64.
Up to PIR.
PIR.
64.
Up to ELR.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-7
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 15-2
(continued)
Maximum.
CBS.
0.
PBS.
> 0.
The traffic parameters of the Traffic Descriptor must be different from parameters
used by an existing Traffic Descriptor.
The User Label must be different as one which is already used by another Traffic
Descriptor.
Task
Select Action > Packet > MPLS > Create Traffic Descriptors.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-8
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result:
Figure 15-2 Traffic Descriptor Creation window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expedited Forwarding: The bandwidth requested by the user (PIR equal to CIR)
is reserved.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-9
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CBS: in bytes.
PBS: in bytes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok button.
Result: After checking the coherence of the traffic parameters values and the selected
traffic contract, the Traffic Descriptor is created.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-10
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Link Over Cable modification gives the possibility to modify Traffic Descriptor
characteristics.
Related information
For information about Traffic Descriptors, see: Overview about Traffic Descriptors
(MPLS) (p. 15-4).
Before you begin
If the User Label is modified, the new User Label must be different as one which is
already used by another Traffic Descriptor.
If the selected Traffic Descriptor is busy, Traffic Contract and Traffic Parameters
cannot be modified.
Task
Select Action > Packet > MPLS > Descriptor > Modify or Click the third key of the
mouse and select Modify.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-11
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-12
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the Traffic Descriptor is associated to an LSP tunnel or VC-LSP, only the Traffic
User Label and Comment can be modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select OK.
Result: After confirmation of the modification: the Traffic Descriptor list is updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-13
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in deleting a Traffic Descriptor (MPLS) from the 1350 OMS PKT
supervision.
Related information
For information about Traffic Descriptors, see: Overview about Traffic Descriptors
(MPLS) (p. 15-4).
Before you begin
Task
Select Action > Packet > MPLS > Descriptor > Delete or Click the third key of the
mouse and select Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-14
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-15
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Traffic Descriptors, see: Overview about Traffic Descriptors
(MPLS) (p. 15-4).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > MPLS > Descriptor > Properties or Click the third key of the
mouse and select Properties.
Result: The Traffic Descriptor properties window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Details of a Traffic Descriptor (p. 15-17)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-16
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Comment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-17
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function gets information about each LSP tunnel and VC-LSP (and their states) using
the previously selected Traffic Descriptor.
Related information
For information about Traffic Descriptors, see: Overview about Traffic Descriptors
(MPLS) (p. 15-4).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > MPLS > Descriptor > Get Inventory or Click the third key of
the mouse and Get Inventory.
Result: The inventory list is displayed.
If you select an entity (LSP Tunnel or VC-LSP) in the inventory list and click the right
button, you see a list of commands. The listed commands depend on the provisioning
state and availability status of the selected entity.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-18
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Availability Status.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-19
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For details about Transport Links, see: MPLS/T-MPLS Transport link (p. 11-69).
For general information about Transport Links, see: Transport link management
(p. 11-53).
Two kinds of Transport Link can be used as infrastructure:
based on Link Over TDM, in this case, they can be used to carry LSP Tunnel. In that
case, the extremities of the Transport Link are TDM termination and its transport type
is Link Over TDM.
based on Link Over Cable, in this case, they can be used to carry VC-LSP. In that
case, the extremities of the Transport Link are one Physical Port and one ETP and its
transport type is Link Over Cable.
Characteristic definition.
For each extremity of the Transport Link, to provision the characteristics (MPLS
Label range) and to activate them. The MPLS Label range is stored.
The Transport Link management tool chain gives the order in which the available actions
can be performed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-20
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-21
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Transport Link list window presents all the MPLS Transport Links and their
attributes.
Related information
For information about Transport Link management, see: Overview about Transport
Links (p. 15-20).
For details about Transport Links, see: MPLS/T-MPLS Transport link (p. 11-69).
For general information about Transport Links, see: Transport link management
(p. 11-53).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of MPLS Transport
Links (p. 15-23)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-22
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-23
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Transport Link management, see: Overview about Transport
Links (p. 15-20).
For details about Transport Links, see: MPLS/T-MPLS Transport link (p. 11-69).
For general information about Transport Links, see: Transport link management
(p. 11-53).
definition by involved boards
Characteristic definition of a Transport Link is made by setting MPLS label range and by
activation of the interface.
The proposed Static Range Min and Max depend on the type of the boards at the
extremities of the Transport Link:
for two ISA boards (PR EA or ES16), the Min Range is equal to 1024 and the Max
range is equal to 5119.
for one ENE (ISA PR) and one ISA PR EA, the Min Range is equal to 1024 and the
Max range is equal to 5119.
for one ENE (not an ISA PR) and one ISA ES16 board, the label range is set to
1024-5119, by automatic configuration. The user can change it by configuration of the
Transport Link manually. In this case, the Min Range is 16 and the Max range is
5119.
definition by user
The user has the possibility to change these values inside the range.
At the end, on each NE involved in the Transport Link, the physical port, or the logical
port is configured. The MPLS label range is stored in 1350 OMS PKT database, and the
1350 OMS PKT interface is activated.
If the selected Transport Link is based on Link Over Cable, the user can open the
VC-LSP creation window by ticking the Proceed with VC-LSP creation box.
If the selected Transport Link is based on Link Over TDM, the user can open the LSP
tunnel creation window by ticking the Proceed with LSP Tunnel creation box.
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Transport Link does not carry any LSP tunnel (if based on Link Over TDM) or
any VC-LSP (if based on Link Over Cable).
The NE (extremities of the Transport Link) must not be locked (that is audit,
alignment, reserve are not in progress on the NEs).
The NE (extremities of the Transport Link) LAC state must not be granted.
Task
Select Action > Packet > MPLS > Transport Link > Define Characteristics or Click the
third key of the mouse and select Define Characteristics.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-25
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result:
Figure 15-5 TL Characteristic Definition window (based on Link Over Cable)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-26
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select OK.
Result: After click Ok button, the Transport Link is updated with the following
states:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-27
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Transport Link management, see: Overview about Transport
Links (p. 15-20).
For details about Transport Links, see: MPLS/T-MPLS Transport link (p. 11-69).
For general information about Transport Links, see: Transport link management
(p. 11-53).
Before you begin
Select: Search > Packet > Transport Links > Links Over MPLS.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Packet > MPLS > Transport Link > Extremities or Click the third key of
the mouse and Extremities.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-28
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Transport Link
Extremities (p. 15-30)
Figure 15-7 Transport Link Extremities window
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-29
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-30
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Transport Link management, see: Overview about Transport
Links (p. 15-20).
For details about Transport Links, see: MPLS/T-MPLS Transport link (p. 11-69).
For general information about Transport Links, see: Transport link management
(p. 11-53).
Before you begin
Select: Search > Packet > Transport Links > Links Over MPLS.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Packet > MPLS > Transport Link > Properties or Click the third key of
the mouse and Properties.
Result: The TL properties window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Details of a Transport Link (p. 15-32)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-31
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
Directionality.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-32
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function gets information about the bandwidth load of a Transport Link.
Related information
For information about Transport Link management, see: Overview about Transport
Links (p. 15-20).
For details about Transport Links, see: MPLS/T-MPLS Transport link (p. 11-69).
For general information about Transport Links, see: Transport link management
(p. 11-53).
Before you begin
Select: Search > Packet > Transport Links > Links Over MPLS.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Packet > Bandwidth Load or Click the third key of the mouse and select
Bandwidth Load.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-33
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result:
Figure 15-8 Transport Link Over TDM Bandwidth Load window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-34
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-35
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function lists LSP tunnel and VC-LSP contained in a Transport Link.
Related information
This function gets information about each LSP tunnel and VC-LSP (and their states)
contained in the previously selected Transport Link.
For information about Transport Link management, see: Overview about Transport
Links (p. 15-20).
For details about Transport Links, see: MPLS/T-MPLS Transport link (p. 11-69).
For general information about Transport Links, see: Transport link management
(p. 11-53).
Before you begin
Select: Search > Packet > Transport Links > Links Over MPLS.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Packet > MPLS > Transport Link > Get Inventory or Click the third key
of the mouse and select Get Inventory.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-36
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If you select an entity (LSP Tunnel or VC-LSP) in the inventory list and click the right
button, you see a list of commands. The listed commands depend on the provisioning
state and availability status of the selected entity.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-37
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MPLS Label.
Availability Status.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-38
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
An LSP tunnel:
An LSP tunnel can be carried by a Transport Link not terminated. In this case one of its
extremities is an ENE.
The LSP tunnel management tool chain gives the order in which the available actions can
be performed.
Figure 15-11 27 LSP Tunnel management chain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-39
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The LSP Tunnel List window presents all the LSP tunnels and their attributes.
Related information
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of LSP Tunnels
(p. 15-41)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-40
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-41
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The LSP tunnel is created into the 1350 OMS PKT with the following states:
The Usage state of LSP tunnel changes to busy when the LSP Tunnel supports at least
one VC-LSP.
Before you begin
Task
Select Action > Packet > MPLS > Create LSP Tunnel.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-42
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The tree area, opened graphical views, and the LSP Tunnel List are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-43
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Comment.
Traffic Descriptor.
For information about LSP tunnel, see: LSP Tunnel (p. 11-70).
Before you begin
The new User Label must be not in use by another LSP tunnel.
To modify the Traffic Descriptor associated to a LSP Tunnel, the provisioning state
of the LSP tunnel must be Defined and usage state must be Idle.
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > MLSP > LSP Tunnels.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-44
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Modify the Traffic Descriptor User Label (by using the sensitive help). Modification
permitted if the provisioning state of LSP Tunnel is Defined and the usage state is
Idle.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select OK.
Result: After confirmation, the tree area and LSP Tunnel list are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-45
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in deleting an LSP tunnel from the 1350 OMS PKT supervision.
Related information
For information about LSP tunnel, see: LSP Tunnel (p. 11-70).
Before you begin
The provisioning state of the selected LSP tunnel must be set to Defined.
Task
Select Action > Packet > MPLS > LSP Tunnels > Delete or Click the third key of the
mouse and select Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, if concerned LSP tunnel is associated to a Traffic
Descriptor, a disassociation is automatically done and the LSP tunnel is removed.
Then LSP Tunnel list, the tree area, and the opened graphical views are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-46
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This operation finds a path route between the two extremities of an LSP tunnel.
Related information
For information about LSP tunnel, see: LSP Tunnel (p. 11-70).
effective bandwidth
The system calculates the effective bandwidth of the LSP tunnel according to the
associated Traffic Descriptor (see the table).
Each MPLS Transport Link of the given route must provide the effective bandwidth of
the LSP tunnel. Available Bandwidth of Transport Link is greater than or equal to
Effective bandwidth of LSP tunnel.
For all traffic contract, CIR must be less than or equal to PIR and PIR must be less than or
equal to Transport Link Total bandwidth.
Traffic contract type.
Best Effort.
0 1.
Assured Forwarding.
CIR.
Expedited Forwarding.
CIR.
Notes:
1.
In the case Best Effort traffic contract, no effective bandwidth is reserved. In this case, for
each Transport Link, a maximum number of Best Effort LSP Tunnel is checked.
Allocation route
Before the allocation operation, the user has given a complete path route in term of
constraints (MPLS Transport Link List). Constraints can optionally be associated with the
MPLS Labels. See Add a constraint to an LSP tunnel (p. 15-55).
If the LSP Tunnel is only one, the route is already defined. In this case, the constraint List
is not mandatory. The Transport Link is identified by the LSP tunnel extremities given
during the definition. Even not mandatory, it can be useful for the user to gives a specific
MPLS label.
If the user gives an MPLS Label in the constraint list, the system checks the availability
of the MPLS Label. If the MPLS Label. is used by another LSP Tunnel or VC-LSP, 1350
OMS PKT chooses and reserves automatically an available MPLS label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-47
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Allocation phase
Along the route used by the LSP Tunnel, LSP links are created. Tunnels are
referenced by an MPLS Label of each crossed Transport Link.
MPLS Label of each involved Transport Link is reserved to the LSP tunnel.
LSP Tunnel cross connections are generated.
Bandwidth of each Transport Link (used and available bandwidths) is computed in
Allocation states
The provisioning state of the selected LSP tunnel must be set to Defined.
The working state must be set to Normal (if not, an operation is running on it).
The constraint lists must be compliant with the LSP tunnel extremities.
The maximum number of Best Effort LSP tunnel for each Transport Link is not
reached.
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > MPLS > LSP Tunnels.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-48
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: At the beginning of the operation, the LSP tunnel Working state is set to
Allocating. Then, the 1350 OMS PKT checks the continuity of the route. Then, the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-49
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about LSP tunnel, see: LSP Tunnel (p. 11-70).
Deallocation phase
The 1350 OMS PKT retrieves all MPLS Transport Links used by this LSP tunnel. It
updates for each of them available and used bandwidths for the used direction. It frees the
involved MPLS Labels.
The LSP links and the LSP cross connections are also retrieved and deleted.
The LSP Tunnel is de-allocated:
Bandwidth of each Transport Links used by the LSP tunnel are updated.
If no more LSP Tunnel is carried, the Usage State of Transport Links used by the LSP
tunnel is changed to idle.
MPLS Label of each Transport Link involved in LSP links is released.
Deallocation states
The provisioning state of the selected LSP tunnel must be set to Allocated.
The working state must be set to Normal (if not, an operation is running on it).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-50
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > MPLS > LSP Tunnels.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, the LSP tunnel working state is set to De-allocating. Then,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-51
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function lists the transports links added as constraints for the selected LSP tunnel.
Related information
For information about LSP tunnel, see: LSP Tunnel (p. 11-70).
Before you begin
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > MPLS > LSP Tunnels.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select: Search > Packet > MPLS > LSP Tunnels > Constraints.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-52
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-53
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Constraint Class.
Constraint Type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-54
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about LSP tunnel, see: LSP Tunnel (p. 11-70).
Before you begin
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > MPLS > LSP Tunnels.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select: Action > Packet > MPLS > LSP Tunnel > Add Constraints.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-55
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result:
Figure 15-14 Add Constraint to an LSP tunnel window
Select OK.
Result: After confirmation, the LSP tunnel constraint is added at the end of the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-56
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > MPLS > LSP Tunnels.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select: Search > Packet > MPLS > LSP Tunnels > Constraints.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-57
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, the LSP tunnel constraints are deleted and the LSP Tunnel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-58
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about LSP tunnel, see: LSP Tunnel (p. 11-70).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > MPLS > LSP Tunnels.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select: Search > Packet > MPLS > LSP Tunnels > Constraints.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-59
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Details of a LSP Tunnel Constraint
(p. 15-61)
Figure 15-15 LSP Tunnel Constraint Properties window
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-60
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Constraint Class.
Constraint Type.
MPLS Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-61
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about LSP tunnel, see: LSP Tunnel (p. 11-70).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > MPLS > LSP Tunnels.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Packet > LSP Tunnels > Cross Connections.
Result: The list window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of LSP cross
connections (p. 15-63)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-62
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-63
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about LSP tunnel, see: LSP Tunnel (p. 11-70).
Implementation phase
Implementation states
After click Ok button, the cross connections are downloaded and then the LSP tunnel is
updated with the following states:
The provisioning state of the selected LSP tunnel must be set to Allocated or
Partially implemented.
The working state must be set to Normal (if not, an operation is running on it).
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > MPLS > LSP Tunnels.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-64
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The user chooses an LSP tunnel and requests its implementation then its working state is
set to Implementing.
Tick the square to proceed with a VC-LSP creation command after the implementation
procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select OK.
Result: After implementation, the LSP Tunnel List is updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-65
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function de-implements an LSP tunnel to remove cross connections from NEs.
Related information
For information about LSP tunnel, see: LSP Tunnel (p. 11-70).
Deimplementation phase
Each NE involved in the LSP tunnel is provisioned (from the 1350 OMS EML) as
following:
LES and LSR connections are removed from the involved NEs.
Extremities are de-activated.
Deimplementation states
After click Ok button, all the cross connections are deleted from the involved NEs. The
extremities are deactivated and then the LSP tunnel is updated with the following states:
The provisioning state of the selected LSP tunnel must be set to Implemented or
Partially implemented.
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > MPLS > LSP Tunnels.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-66
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: The user chooses an LSP tunnel and requests its de-implementation then
working state is set to de-implementing and no traffic could be carried by it.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-67
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function gets information about extremities (origin and destination) of an LSP
tunnel.
Related information
For information about LSP tunnel, see: LSP Tunnel (p. 11-70).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > MPLS > LSP Tunnels.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-68
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of LSP Tunnel
Extremities (p. 15-70)
Figure 15-17 The LSP Tunnel Extremity window
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-69
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-70
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about LSP tunnel, see: LSP Tunnel (p. 11-70).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > MPLS > LSP Tunnels.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Details of a LSP Tunnel (p. 15-72)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-71
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
Comment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-72
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function gets information about each VC-LSP (and their states) contained in the
previously selected LSP tunnel.
Related information
For information about LSP tunnel, see: LSP Tunnel (p. 11-70).
From the VC-LSP Inventory List window, when you select a VC-LSP entity, you are able
to display, with the right button, a list of commands. Commands depend on the
provisioning state and availability status of this selected entity.
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > MPLS > LSP Tunnels.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-73
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parent Subnetwork.
Working State.
Availability Status.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-74
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function gets information about the bandwidth load of an LSP tunnel.
Related information
For information about LSP tunnel, see: LSP Tunnel (p. 11-70).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > LSP Tunnels > Bandwidth Load.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-75
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result:
Figure 15-18 LSP Tunnel (Best Effort) Bandwidth Load window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-76
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-77
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function presents graphically all Transport Links used by the previously selected
LSP tunnel.
Related information
For information about LSP tunnel, see: LSP Tunnel (p. 11-70).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > MPLS > LSP Tunnels.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Packet > LSP Tunnels > Display Route.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-78
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result:
Figure 15-21 LSP Tunnel Route window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-79
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following commands are available from the graphical view, depending on the
selected object and its position on the route:
With no selection: Begin of Route and End of Route commands highlights the
NE used for the beginning or the end of the route.
With a selected entity (NE, Transport Link, ENE, Off page connector): Begin of
Route and End of Route commands are completed by other commands depending
on the selected entity.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-80
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in listing the Transport Links related to a previously selected LSP
tunnel.
Related information
For information about LSP tunnel, see: LSP Tunnel (p. 11-70).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > MPLS > LSP Tunnels.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Packet > LSP Tunnels > List Transport Links.
Result: The list window is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-81
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MPLS Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-82
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-83
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The VC-LSP List window presents all the VC-LSPs and their attributes.
Related information
For information about LSP tunnel, see: LSP Tunnel (p. 11-70).
If this list is required from the LSP Tunnel List, only the VC-LSPs supported by the
selected LSP tunnel is displayed.
Before you begin
Select: VC-LSPs.
Result: The VC-LSP list window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of VC-LSPs
(p. 15-85)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-84
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-85
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Create a VC-LSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create a VC-LSP
When to use
For information about LSP tunnel, see: LSP Tunnel (p. 11-70).
If this action is required from the Transport Link List, the Origin and the Destination
fields are filled with the information contained in the selected Transport Link.
If this action is required from the LSP tunnel List, the Origin, the Destination fields, and
LSP Tunnel user label, are filled with the information contained in the selected LSP
tunnel.
Creation state
The VC-LSP is created into the 1350 OMS PKT with the following state:
At the same time, the consumed bandwidth and used MPLS label of the VC-LSP is
reserved. And the related Traffic Descriptor is associated to this VC-LSP.
If the Usage State is idle, the Usage State of supporting LSP tunnel or Transport Link is
set to busy.
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-86
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Create a VC-LSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Conditions
if the creating VC-LSP is based on Transport Link, the provisioning state of the
concerned MPLS Transport Link must be configured. See View the list of Transport
Links (p. 15-22).
if the creating VC-LSP is based on LSP tunnel, the provisioning state of the
concerned LSP tunnel must be allocated. See View the list of LSP tunnels
(p. 15-40).
The User Label must be not in use.
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > MPLS > VC-LSPs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-87
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Create a VC-LSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result:
Figure 15-23 VC-LSP Creation window
To create a VC-LSP:
Enter a VC-LSP User label.
Enter a Comment (optional).
If the extremity is an ENE, in the Origin and Destination areas, tick the ENE box.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-88
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Create a VC-LSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Choose the Termination Identifier. The object can be the TDM termination
Identifier or ETP identifier.
Select a Traffic Descriptor User Label by using the sensitive help.
Choose the LSP Tunnel User Label. The action is only needed if the VC-LSP is
based on LSP tunnel. If this field is filled, as the LSP tunnel is unidirectional, the
origin and destination of the VC-LSP must be the same as the chosen LSP tunnel.
Select a MPLS Label (optional).
Tick the Process with VC-LSP Implementation box if you want to implement the
VC-LSP just after the VC-LSP creation; the VC-LSP is implemented.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The tree area, the opened graphical view and the VC-LSP List are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-89
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Modify a VC-LSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Modify a VC-LSP
When to use
Comment.
For information about LSP tunnel, see: LSP Tunnel (p. 11-70).
Before you begin
If the User Label is modified, the new User Label must be different as one which is
already used by another LSP tunnel.
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > MPLS > VC-LSPs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-90
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Modify a VC-LSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result:
Figure 15-24 VC-LSP Modification window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify a VC-LSP:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select OK.
Result: After confirmation, the tree area and the VC-LSP list are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-91
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Delete a VC-LSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Delete a VC-LSP
When to use
This function consists in deleting a VC-LSP from the 1350 OMS PKT supervision.
Related information
For information about LSP tunnel, see: LSP Tunnel (p. 11-70).
Before you begin
Task
Select Action > Packet > MPLS > VC-LSPs > Delete or Click the third key of the mouse
and Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, the VC-LSPs are removed.
The reserved bandwidth and MPLS label are free. If the supporting LSP tunnel or
Transport Link contains no more VC-LSP, the usage state of is set to idle.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-92
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Delete a VC-LSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The VC-LSP list, the tree area, and the opened graphical views are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-93
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Implement a VC-LSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Implement a VC-LSP
When to use
For information about LSP tunnel, see: LSP Tunnel (p. 11-70).
Implementation phase
After the implementation of the VC-LSP, the working state is set to Normal, the
provisioning state is set to Implemented, and the Consistency State is set to
Consistent.
The VC-LSP List is updated and the VC-LSP appears in the Link Over MPLS List and in
the Transport Link List.
Before you begin
The provisioning state of the selected VC-LSP must be set to Allocated or Partially
implemented.
The working state of the selected VC-LSP must be set to Normal (if not, an operation
is running on it).
If the VC-LSP is based on LSP tunnel, the Provisioning State of the associated LSP
tunnel must be Implemented.
The NE extremities must not be locked (that is audit, alignment, reserve are not in
progress).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-94
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Implement a VC-LSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > MPLS > VC-LSPs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select: Action > Packet > MPLS > VC-LSP > Implement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: The working state of the VC-LSP is set to Implemented.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-95
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
De-implement a VC-LSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
De-implement a VC-LSP
When to use
For information about LSP tunnel, see: LSP Tunnel (p. 11-70).
Deimplementation phase
Traffic Descriptor is deleted from the NE when no LSP tunnel or VC-LSP connection
use it.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-96
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
De-implement a VC-LSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > MPLS > VC-LSPs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select: Action > Packet > MPLS > VC-LSP > Deimplement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: The working state of the VC-LSP is set to Deimplemented and no traffic
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-97
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Commission a VC-LSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Commission a VC-LSP
When to use
For information about LSP tunnel, see: LSP Tunnel (p. 11-70).
Commission phase
The working state of the selected VC-LSP must be set to Normal (if not, an operation
is running on it).
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > MPLS > VC-LSPs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select: Action > Packet > MPLS > VC-LSP > Commission.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-98
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Commission a VC-LSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: The working state of the VC-LSP is set to Commissioned.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-99
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
De-commission a VC-LSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
De-commission a VC-LSP
When to use
For information about LSP tunnel, see: LSP Tunnel (p. 11-70).
Decommission phase
After de-commission, for each concerned VC-LSP, the provisioning state is set to
Implemented and the working state is set to Normal.
The VC-LSP List is updated.
Before you begin
The working state of the selected VC-LSP must be set to Normal (if not, an operation
is running on it).
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > MPLS > VC-LSPs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select: Action > Packet > MPLS > VC-LSP > Decommission.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-100
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
De-commission a VC-LSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-101
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function gets information about the extremities (origin and destination) of a VC-LSP.
Related information
For information about LSP tunnel, see: LSP Tunnel (p. 11-70).
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-102
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of VC-LSP
Extremities (p. 15-104)
Figure 15-25 VC-LSP Extremities window
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-103
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-104
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about LSP tunnel, see: LSP Tunnel (p. 11-70).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > MPLS > VC-LSPs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Details of a VC-LSP (p. 15-106)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-105
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Details of a VC-LSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Details of a VC-LSP
Attributes of a VC-LSP
User Label.
Parent SubNetwork.
Traffic Descriptor.
Comment.
MPLS Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
15-106
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
16
16
T-MPLS
Provisioning
Management
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes how to provision and monitor the T-MPLS data.
Contents
Managing T-MPLS PHB profile
16-5
16-5
16-6
16-7
16-8
16-10
16-12
16-14
16-15
16-16
16-16
16-18
16-19
16-20
16-22
16-24
16-25
16-26
16-27
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-30
16-32
16-33
16-33
16-35
16-36
16-37
16-40
16-42
16-44
16-45
16-46
16-48
16-50
16-52
16-53
16-54
16-54
16-55
16-56
16-57
Modify a PseudoWire
16-60
16-62
16-64
16-65
16-66
16-68
16-70
16-72
16-73
16-76
16-78
16-80
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-82
16-83
16-84
16-85
16-86
16-87
16-88
16-89
16-90
16-91
16-92
16-93
16-94
16-95
16-96
16-96
16-98
16-99
16-100
16-103
16-105
16-107
16-108
16-109
16-111
16-113
16-115
16-117
16-120
16-122
16-124
16-126
16-127
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-128
16-129
16-130
16-131
16-132
16-133
16-134
16-135
16-136
16-137
16-138
16-139
16-140
16-140
16-145
16-146
16-147
16-148
16-149
16-151
16-152
16-153
16-154
16-155
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about LSP PHB profiles, see: Overview about PHB profile management
(p. 16-5).
The elementary LSP PHB profiles automatically created in each NE are called
Node-PHB-Profiles. The Node-PHB-Profile exists in PKT database only if there exists an
associated implemented tunnel/PW.
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of T-MPLS PHB
Profiles (p. 16-7)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Exp-0, , Exp-7.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-7
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about LSP PHB profiles, see: Overview about PHB profile management
(p. 16-5).
PKT manages LSP PHB profile creation on domain basis.
Note: The creation affects PKT database only. The system checks that the requested
profile is compatible with the PHB profile on domain basis. The LSP PHB profile is
created in the network only at tunnel/PW implementation time, on all nodes crossed
by the tunnel. The elementary LSP PHB profiles automatically created in each NE are
called Node-PHB-Profiles and the system manages their consistency status. The
Node-PHB-Profile exists in PKT database only if there exists an associated
implemented tunnel/PW.
Before you begin
Select Action > Packet > T-MPLS > Create T-MPLS PHB profile.
Result: To create a LSP PHB profile:
Enter a Comment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok button.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-8
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: After checking the coherence of the traffic parameters values and the selected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-9
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about LSP PHB profiles, see: Overview about PHB profile management
(p. 16-5).
Before you begin
PHB profile configuration is allowed only when no traffic is supported, that is, no
associated Node-PHB-Profiles exist and no implemented tunnel/PW is associated to
the PHB profile.
Task
Select Action > Packet > T-MPLS > PHB profile > Modify or Click the third key of the
mouse and select Modify.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-10
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the PHB profile is associated to an implemented tunnel/PW, only the Traffic User
Label and Comment can be modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select OK.
Result: After confirmation of the modification: the PHB profile list is updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-11
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about LSP PHB profiles, see: Overview about PHB profile management
(p. 16-5).
PKT manages PHB profile deletion on domain basis. only PHB profiles with no
associated tunnel/PW can be deleted.
Note: The deletion affects only PKT database.
PKT manages TD deletion in the NE. The deletion affect all crossed NEs at
tunnel/PW deimplementation time. TD deletion is transparent to the operator.
Before you begin
Task
Select Action > Packet > T-MPLS > PHB profile > Delete or Click the third key of the
mouse and select Delete.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-12
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, the selected PHB profiles are removed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-13
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about LSP PHB profiles, see: Overview about PHB profile management
(p. 16-5).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS > PHB profile > Properties or Click the third key of
the mouse and select Properties.
Result: The PHB profile properties window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Details of a T-MPLS PHB Profile
(p. 16-15)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-14
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Comment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-15
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For details about Transport Links, see: T-MPLS Transport link (p. 11-69).
For general information about Transport Links, see: Transport link management
(p. 11-53).
Two kinds of Transport Link can be used as infrastructure:
based on Link Over TDM, in this case, they can be used to carry LSP Tunnel. In that
case, the extremities of the Transport Link are TDM termination and its transport type
is Link Over TDM.
based on Link Over Cable, in this case, they can be used to carry VC-LSP. In that
case, the extremities of the Transport Link are one Physical Port and one ETP and its
transport type is Link Over Cable.
Characteristic definition.
For each extremity of the Transport Link, to provision the characteristics (T-MPLS
Label range) and to activate them. The T-MPLS Label range is stored.
The Transport Link management tool chain gives the order in which the available actions
can be performed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-16
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-17
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Transport Link list window presents all the T-MPLS Transport Links and their
attributes.
Related information
For information about Transport Link management, see: Overview about Transport
Links (p. 16-16).
For details about Transport Links, see: T-MPLS Transport link (p. 11-69).
For general information about Transport Links, see: Transport link management
(p. 11-53).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of T-MPLS
Transport Links (p. 16-19)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-18
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-19
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Transport Link management, see: Overview about Transport
Links (p. 16-16).
For details about Transport Links, see: T-MPLS Transport link (p. 11-69).
For general information about Transport Links, see: Transport link management
(p. 11-53).
Characteristic definition
Characteristic definition of a Transport Link is made by setting T-MPLS label range and
by activation of the interface.
The proposed Static Range Min and Max depend on the type of the boards at the
extremities of the Transport Link:
for two ISA boards (PR EA or ES16), the Min Range is equal to 1024 and the Max
range is equal to 5119.
for one ENE (ISA PR) and one ISA PR EA, the Min Range is equal to 1024 and the
Max range is equal to 5119.
for one ENE (not an ISA PR) and one ISA ES16 board, the label range is set to
1024-5119, by automatic configuration. The user can change it by configuration of the
Transport Link manually. In this case, the Min Range is 16 and the Max range is
5119.
The user has the possibility to change these values inside the range.
At the end, on each NE involved in the Transport Link, the physical port, or the logical
port is configured. The T-MPLS label range is stored in 1350OMS-PKT database, and the
1350 OMS PKT interface is activated.
If the selected Transport Link is based on Link Over Cable, the user can open the
VC-LSP creation window by ticking the Proceed with VC-LSP creation box.
If the selected Transport Link is based on Link Over TDM, the user can open the LSP
tunnel creation window by ticking the Proceed with LSP Tunnel creation box.
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Transport Link does not carry any LSP tunnel (if based on Link Over TDM) or
any VC-LSP (if based on Link Over Cable).
The NE (extremities of the Transport Link) must not be locked (that is, audit,
alignment, ad reserve are not in progress on the NEs).
The NE (extremities of the Transport Link) LAC state must not be granted.
Task
Select: Search > Packet > Construction > Transport Links > Links Over T-MPLS.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > Packet > T-MPLS Transport Link > Define Characteristics or Click the
third key of the mouse and select Define Characteristics.
Result: The Define window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select OK.
Result: After click Ok button, the Transport Link is updated with the following
states:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-21
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Transport Link management, see: Overview about Transport
Links (p. 16-16).
For details about Transport Links, see: T-MPLS Transport link (p. 11-69).
For general information about Transport Links, see: Transport link management
(p. 11-53).
Before you begin
Select: Search > Packet > Construction > Transport Links > Links Over T-MPLS.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS Transport Link > Extremities or Click the third key of
the mouse and Extremities.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-22
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Transport Link
Extremities (p. 16-24)
Figure 16-2 Transport Link Extremities window
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-23
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-24
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Transport Link management, see: Overview about Transport
Links (p. 16-16).
For details about Transport Links, see: T-MPLS Transport link (p. 11-69).
For general information about Transport Links, see: Transport link management
(p. 11-53).
Before you begin
Select: Search > Packet > Construction > Transport Links > Links Over T-MPLS.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS Transport Link > Properties or Click the third key of
the mouse and Properties.
Result: The T-MPLS Transport Link properties window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Details of a T-MPLS Transport Link
(p. 16-26)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-25
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
Directionality.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-26
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function gets information about the bandwidth load of a Transport Link.
Related information
For information about Transport Link management, see: Overview about Transport
Links (p. 16-16).
For details about Transport Links, see: T-MPLS Transport link (p. 11-69).
For general information about Transport Links, see: Transport link management
(p. 11-53).
Before you begin
Select: Search > Packet > Construction > Transport Links > Links Over T-MPLS.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS Transport Link > Bandwidth Load or Click the third
key of the mouse and select Bandwidth Load.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-27
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result:
Figure 16-3 Transport Link Over TDM Bandwidth Load window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-28
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-29
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function gets information about each LSP tunnel and VC-LSP (and their states)
contained in the previously selected Transport Link.
Related information
For information about Transport Link management, see: Overview about Transport
Links (p. 16-16).
For details about Transport Links, see: T-MPLS Transport link (p. 11-69).
For general information about Transport Links, see: Transport link management
(p. 11-53).
If you select an entity (LSP Tunnel or VC-LSP) in the inventory list and click the right
button, you see a list of commands. The listed commands depend on the provisioning
state and availability status of the selected entity.
Before you begin
Select: Search > Packet > Construction > Transport Links > Links Over T-MPLS.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS Transport Link > Get Inventory or Click the third key
of the mouse and select Get Inventory.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-30
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-31
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
T-MPLS Label.
Availability Status.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-32
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Checks that the section constraints describe a fully connected route between the end
nodes.
Checks that the PW PHB profile is supported by the domain Egress PHB Profile.
Defines the PW and updates the T-MPLS DB allocating the PW along the constraints.
Associates the PW to a null TD (PIR=CIR=0 and PBS=CBS=0), if the user does not
specify the bandwidth parameters.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-33
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set the reserved CIR parameter equal to the TD CIR parameter. If an allocated service
is over one implemented PW, the PW reserved CIR represents the CIR required to
support the PW committed bandwidth, while the TD CIR represents the committed
bandwidth of the implemented PW.
When the supported services are implemented, TD CIR is enlarged to match the
reserved CIR. If the PW are deallocated, the reserved CIR is reduced down to the TD
CIR value.
If the user does not constrain the underlying Virtual Transport (by means of VT
parameter), the application allocates the PW on the default VT.
If the user requests Control Word enabling (CW enabling), then CW insertion is
enabled on PW terminations at implementation time.
Note: It is not possible to create the PW using other underlying PWs. Only E-LSP
PWs are supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-34
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function presents all the Virtual Transports and their attributes.
Related information
For information about Virtual Transports, see: Overview about Virtual Transports
(p. 16-33).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Virtual
Transports (p. 16-36)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-35
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Last Action.
Cration date.
CIR.
PIR.
CBS.
PBS.
Reserved CIR.
A Port ID.
Z Port ID.
A Port.
Z Port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-36
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Virtual Transport, see: Overview about Virtual Transports
(p. 16-33).
For details about the checks performed and default values assumed, refer to: Application
behavior creating T-MPLS Virtual Transport (p. 16-33).
Note: It is not possible to create the PW using other underlying PWs. Only E-LSP
PWs are supported.
When creates a Virtual Transport, the application:
Checks that the section constraints describe a fully connected route between the end
nodes.
Checks that the PW PHB profile is supported by the domain Egress PHB Profile.
Defines the PW and updates the T-MPLS DB allocating the PW along the constraints.
Associates the PW to a null TD (PIR=CIR=0 and PBS=CBS=0), if the user does not
specify the bandwidth parameters.
Set the reserved CIR parameter equal to the TD CIR parameter. If an allocated service
is over one implemented PW, the PW reserved CIR represents the CIR required to
support the PW committed bandwidth, while the TD CIR represents the committed
bandwidth of the implemented PW.
When the supported services are implemented, TD CIR is enlarged to match the
reserved CIR. If the PWs are deallocated, the reserved CIR is reduced down to the TD
CIR value.
If the user does not constrain the underlying Virtual Transport (by means of VT
parameter), the application allocates the PW on the default VT.
If the user requests Control Word enabling (CW enabling), then CW insertion is
enabled on PW terminations at implementation time.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-37
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Conditions
Task
Select Action > Packet > Construction > Create Virtual Transport.
Result: The Virtual Transport creation wizard is displayed.
PIR.
Reserved CIR.
PBS.
CBS.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: If the operation completes without errors the final PW state is allocated,
otherwise the state is defined with workingState equal to failedToAllocate.
The Usage state of Pseudo Wire changes to busy when the Pseudo Wire supports at
least one T-MPLS section.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-38
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then, the tree area, opened graphical views and the Pseudo Wire List are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-39
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Pseudo Wire, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
This function gives the possibility to modify:
User Label.
Comment.
If the User Label is modified, the new User Label must be different as one which is
already used by another Pseudo Wire.
If the provisioning state of the Pseudo Wire is Defined and usage state is Idle, the
user can modify the Traffic Descriptor associated to the Pseudo Wire.
Task
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS Virtual Transport.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-40
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select OK.
Result: After confirmation of the modification: the tree area and the Virtual Transport
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-41
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Virtual Transport, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
Before you begin
The selected Pseudo Wire must not support allocated nor implemented Pseudo
Wires.
Task
Select Action > Packet > Virtual Transports > Delete or Click the third key of the
mouse and select Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-42
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-43
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Virtual Transport, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Details of a Virtual Transport (p. 16-45)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-44
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
Comment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-45
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Virtual Transport, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
For information about LSP PHB profiles, see: Overview about PHB profile management
(p. 16-5).
Before you begin
Task
Select: Action > Packet > T-MPLS Pseudo Wire CTP > Add PHB Profile.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-46
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The operator selects the previously created PHB profile on domain basis to be associated
with that tunnel CTP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select OK.
Result: PKT associates the new PHB to the CTP in database and then, if the tunnel is
implemented, PKT creates automatically the new Node-PHB in the node and deletes
the previously associated one, if not used by any other tunnel. PKT checks that the
tunnel does not support any PW, since the operation requires tunnel deactivation and
reactivation.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-47
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Virtual Transport, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
Virtual Transport provisioning
If tunnel alarm enabling rule is on-implementation, MEPs are automatically created and
activated on tunnel terminations at this stage.
If tunnel PM enabling rule is on-implementation, PM counting is automatically started
on tunnel terminations at this stage.
If at tunnel creation time the operator specified one PHB profile (selecting from a
portfolio of profiles available on domain basis) different from default, PKT automatically
implements the corresponding Node-PHB profiles on all tunnel segments. Similarly,
based on the tunnel bandwidth parameters, PKT automatically creates in each crossed NE
the corresponding TD.
If the tunnel uses an adaptive VT, PKT automatically configures VT bandwidth as
follows:
VT Reserved CIR = Sum (LSP CIR) , where the sum spans all allocated and
implemented LSP (tunnel or PW) directly supported by the VT, including current
tunnel, is unchanged.
VT CIR = Sum (LSP CIR) , where the sum spans all implemented LSP (tunnel or PW)
directly supported by the VT, including current tunnel.
VT PIR = Max (LSP PIR) , where the max is computed for all implemented LSP
(tunnel or PW) directly supported by the VT, including current tunnel.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-48
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Select: Action > Packet > T-MPLS > Virtual Transport > Implement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select OK.
Result: After implementation, the Virtual Transport List is updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-49
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in de-implementing a Virtual Transport to remove the tunnel from
the network.
Related information
For information about Virtual Transport, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
deimplementation phase
If the tunnel were using a dedicated Node PHB profile, the PHB is automatically deleted
from the NE. If the tunnel were using a dedicated TD, TD is automatically deleted from
the NE.
If the tunnel uses an adaptive VT, PKT automatically reconfigures VT bandwidth as
follows:
VT Reserved CIR=sum(LSP CIR , where the sum spans all allocated and
implemented LSP (tunnel or PW) directly supported by the VT, including current
tunnel, is unchanged.
VT CIR=sum(LSP CIR , where the sum spans all implemented LSP (tunnel or PW)
directly supported by the VT, excluding current tunnel.
VT Reserved PIR=Max(LSP PIR , where the max is computed for all
implemented LSP (tunnel or PW) directly supported by the VT, excluding current
tunnel.
The provisioning state of the selected Pseudo Wire must be set to Implemented or
Partially implemented.
The Pseudo Wire must carry no implemented T-MPLS Pseudo Wires.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-50
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: The user chooses a Pseudo Wire and requests its de-implementation then
working state is set to allocated and no traffic could be carried by it.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-51
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function gets information about extremities (origin and destination) of a Virtual
Transport.
Related information
For information about Virtual Transport, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Virtual
Transports (p. 16-53)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-52
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-53
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Pseudo Wires are point-to-point logical connections between NNI ports. Pseudo Wires are
usable by only one service.
The route of a Pseudo Wire spans one or more T-MPLS sections and or tunnels.
The purpose of a Pseudo Wire is to carry one service across T-MPLS network.
Pseudo Wires are Label Switched Paths (LSP). The Pseudo Wire terminations correspond
to:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function presents all the Pseudo Wires and their attributes.
Related information
For information about Pseudo Wire, see: Overview about Pseudo Wires (p. 16-54).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Pseudo Wires
(p. 16-56)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-55
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Last Action.
Cration date.
CIR.
PIR.
CBS.
PBS.
Reserved CIR.
A Port ID.
Z Port ID.
A Port.
Z Port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-56
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Pseudo Wire, see: Overview about Pseudo Wires (p. 16-54).
Pseudo Wire allocation
The system checks that the section constraints describe a fully connected route between
the end nodes.
The system checks that the PW PHB profile is supported by the domain Egress PHB
Profile.
The system defines the PW and updates the T-MPLS DB allocating the PW along the
constraints.
If the operator does not specify the bandwidth parameters, the system creates the PW with
associated null TD (PIR=CIR=0 and PBS=CBS=0 ).
The reserved CIR parameter is always equal to the TD CIR parameter, except when the
services is allocated and over one implemented PW. In such case, the PW reserved CIR
represents the CIR required to support the PW committed bandwidth, while the TD CIR
represents the committed bandwidth of the implemented PW.
When the supported services are implemented, TD CIR is enlarged to match the reserved
CIR.
If the PWs are deallocated, the reserved CIR is reduced down to the TD CIR value.
If the operator does not constrain the underlying Virtual Transport (by means of VT
parameter), the system allocates the PW on the default VT.
If the operator requests Control Word enabling (CW enabling), then CW insertion is
enabled on PW terminations at implementation time.
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-57
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Conditions
Task
Select Action > Packet > T-MPLS > Create Pseudo Wire.
Result: The Pseudo Wire creation wizard is displayed.
PIR.
Reserved CIR.
PBS.
CBS.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: If the operation completes without errors, the final PW state is allocated;
otherwise the state is defined with workingState equal to failedToAllocate.
The Usage state of Pseudo Wire changes to busy when the Pseudo Wire supports at
least one T-MPLS section.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-58
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then, the tree area, opened graphical views and the Pseudo Wire List are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-59
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Modify a PseudoWire
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Modify a PseudoWire
When to use
For information about Pseudo Wire, see: Overview about Pseudo Wires (p. 16-54).
This function gives the possibility to modify:
User Label.
Comment.
If the User Label is modified, the new User Label must be different as one which is
already used by another Pseudo Wire.
If the provisioning state of the Pseudo Wire is Defined and usage state is Idle, the
Traffic Descriptor associated to the Pseudo Wire is modifiable.
Task
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS Pseudo Wires.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > Packet > T-MPLS Pseudo Wire > Modify.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-60
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Modify a PseudoWire
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select OK.
Result: After confirmation of the modification: the tree area and Pseudo Wire list are
updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-61
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Pseudo Wire, see: Overview about Pseudo Wires (p. 16-54).
Before you begin
The selected Pseudo Wire must not support allocated nor implemented Pseudo
Wires.
Task
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS Pseudo Wires.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > Packet > T-MPLS Pseudo Wires > Delete or Click the third key of the
mouse and select Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-62
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-63
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Pseudo Wire, see: Overview about Pseudo Wires (p. 16-54).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS Pseudo Wires.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS Pseudo Wires > Properties.
Result: The property window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Details of a Pseudo Wire (p. 16-65)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-64
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
Comment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-65
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Pseudo Wire, see: Overview about Pseudo Wires (p. 16-54).
PKT starts the reroute operation and reallocates the tunnel along a new route that satisfies
the updated list of constraints.
Before you begin
Task
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS Pseudo Wires.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select: Action > Packet > T-MPLS Pseudo Wire > Add Constraints.
Result: To add a new Pseudo Wire constraint:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select OK.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-66
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: After confirmation, the Pseudo Wire constraint is added at the end of the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-67
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Pseudo Wire, see: Overview about Pseudo Wires (p. 16-54).
PKT starts the reroute operation and reallocates the tunnel along a new route that satisfies
the updated list of constraints.
Before you begin
The working state must be Normal (that is, no operation is running on it).
Task
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS Pseudo Wires.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select: Search > Packet > T-MPLS Pseudo Wire > Constraints.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-68
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, the Pseudo Wire constraints are deleted and the Pseudo
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-69
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Pseudo Wire, see: Overview about Pseudo Wires (p. 16-54).
For information about LSP PHB profiles, see: Overview about PHB profile management
(p. 16-5).
The operator selects the previously created PHB profile on domain basis to be associated
with that tunnel CTP.
PKT associates the new PHB to the CTP in database and then, if the tunnel is
implemented, PKT creates automatically the new Node-PHB in the node and deletes the
previously associated one, if not used by any other tunnel. PKT checks that the tunnel
does not support any PW, since the operation requires tunnel deactivation and
reactivation.
Before you begin
Task
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS Pseudo Wires.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select: Action > Packet > T-MPLS Pseudo Wire > tunnel CTP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-70
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select: Action > Packet > T-MPLS Pseudo Wire CTP > Add PHB Profile.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select OK.
Result: Profile is added to the Pseudo Wire CTP.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-71
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Pseudo Wire, see: Overview about Pseudo Wires (p. 16-54).
Before you begin
Task
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS Pseudo Wires.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select: Action > Packet > T-MPLS Pseudo Wire > Add Layer-2 encapsulation Profile.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select OK.
Result: Profile is added to the Pseudo Wire.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-72
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This operation is performed when the user wants to find a path route between the two
extremities of a Pseudo Wire.
Related information
For information about Pseudo Wire, see: Overview about Pseudo Wires (p. 16-54).
Before the allocation operation, the user has given a complete path route in term of
constraints (T-MPLS Pseudo Wire List). Constraints can optionally be associated with the
T-MPLS Labels. See Add a constraint to an LSP tunnel (p. 15-55).
If the Pseudo Wire is only one, the route is already defined. In this case, the constraint
List is not mandatory. The Pseudo Wire is identified by the Pseudo Wire extremities given
during the definition. Even not mandatory, it can be useful for the user to gives a specific
T-MPLS label.
Pseudo Wire bandwidth
The system calculates the effective bandwidth of the Pseudo Wire according to the
associated Traffic Descriptor (see the table).
Each T-MPLS Pseudo Wire of the given route must provide the effective bandwidth of the
Pseudo Wire. Available Bandwidth of Pseudo Wire is greater than or equal to Effective
bandwidth of Pseudo Wire.
Traffic contract type.
Best Effort.
0 1.
Assured Forwarding.
CIR.
Expedited Forwarding.
CIR.
Notes:
1.
In the case Best Effort traffic contract, no effective bandwidth is reserved. In this case, for
each Pseudo Wire, a maximum number of Best Effort Pseudo Wire is checked.
For all traffic contract, CIR must be less than or equal to PIR and PIR must be less than or
equal to Pseudo Wire Total bandwidth.
If the user gives a T-MPLS Label in the constraint list, the system checks the availability
of the T-MPLS Label. If the T-MPLS Label. is used by another Pseudo Wire or T-MPLS
section, 1350 OMS PKT chooses and reserves automatically an available T-MPLS label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-73
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Allocation phase
LSP links along the route used by the Pseudo Wire are created, referenced by a
T-MPLS Label of each crossed Pseudo Wire.
The 1350 OMS PKT checks the continuity of the route.
T-MPLS Label of each involved Pseudo Wire is reserved to the Pseudo Wire.
Pseudo Wire cross connections are generated.
Bandwidth of each Pseudo Wire (used and available bandwidths) is computed in the
used direction.
If the Usage State of each T-MPLS Pseudo Wire used by the Pseudo Wire is idle, the
state change to busy.
The provisioning state of the selected Pseudo Wire must be set to Defined.
The working state must be set to Normal (if not, an operation is running on it).
The constraints on this Pseudo Wire have been previously added (except for unitary
Pseudo Wire).
The T-MPLS sections defined as constraints are contiguous.
The constraint lists must be compliant with the Pseudo Wire extremities.
The maximum number of Best Effort Pseudo Wire for each Pseudo Wire is not
reached.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-74
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS Pseudo Wires.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: The Pseudo Wire Working state is set to Allocated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-75
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Pseudo Wire, see: Overview about Pseudo Wires (p. 16-54).
deallocation phase
The 1350 OMS PKT retrieves all T-MPLS Pseudo Wires used by this Pseudo Wire. It
updates for each of them available and used bandwidths for the used direction. It frees the
involved T-MPLS Labels.
The LSP links and the LSP cross connections are also retrieved and deleted.
The Pseudo Wire is de-allocated:
Bandwidth of each Pseudo Wires used by the Pseudo Wire are updated.
If no more Pseudo Wire is carried, the Usage State of Pseudo Wires used by the
Pseudo Wire is changed to idle.
T-MPLS Label of each Pseudo Wire involved in LSP links is released.
The provisioning state of the selected Pseudo Wire must be set to Allocated.
The working state must be set to Normal (if not, an operation is running on it).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-76
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS Pseudo Wires.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, the Pseudo Wire working state is set to De-allocated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-77
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Pseudo Wire, see: Overview about Pseudo Wires (p. 16-54).
Implementation phase
The tunnel provisioning can be static, dynamic, or mixed. Static means that the tunnel is
provisioned directly by NMS. Dynamic means that the tunnel is provisioned through
control plane. In mixed provisioning, PKT manages the tunnel creation and activation,
partially in the data plane and partially in the control plane.
Each NE involved in the Pseudo Wire is provisioned as following:
If tunnel alarm enabling rule is on-implementation, MEPs are automatically created and
activated on tunnel terminations at this stage.
If tunnel PM enabling rule is on-implementation, PM counting is automatically started
on tunnel terminations at this stage.
If at tunnel creation time the operator specified one PHB profile (selecting from a
portfolio of profiles available on domain basis) different from default, PKT automatically
implements the corresponding Node-PHB profiles on all tunnel segments. Similarly,
based on the tunnel bandwidth parameters, PKT automatically creates in each crossed NE
the corresponding TD.
If the tunnel uses an adaptive VT, PKT automatically configures VT bandwidth as
follows:
VT Reserved CIR = Sum (LSP CIR), where the sum spans all allocated and
implemented LSP (tunnel or PW) directly supported by the VT, including current
tunnel, is unchanged.
VT CIR = Sum (LSP CIR), where the sum spans all implemented LSP (tunnel or PW)
directly supported by the VT, including current tunnel.
VT PIR = Max (LSP PIR), where the max is computed for all implemented LSP
(tunnel or PW) directly supported by the VT, including current tunnel.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-78
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS Pseudo Wires.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select: Action > Packet > T-MPLS Pseudo Wire > Implement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select OK.
Result: The Pseudo Wire is updated with the following states:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-79
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in de-implementing a Pseudo Wire to remove the tunnel from the
network.
Related information
For information about Pseudo Wire, see: Overview about Pseudo Wires (p. 16-54).
Deimplementation phase
PKT manages the static tunnel removal from the data plane, dynamic tunnel removal
from the control plane, or both.
If the tunnel were using a dedicated Node-PHB profile, the profile is automatically
deleted from the NE. If the tunnel were using a dedicated TD, the TD is automatically
deleted from the NE.
If the tunnel uses an adaptive VT, PKT automatically reconfigures VT bandwidth as
follows:
VT Reserved CIR = Sum (LSP CIR), where the sum spans all allocated and
implemented LSP (tunnel or PW) directly supported by the VT, including current
tunnel, is unchanged.
VT CIR = Sum (LSP CIR), where the sum spans all implemented LSP (tunnel or PW)
directly supported by the VT, excluding current tunnel.
VT PIR = Max (LSP PIR), where the max is computed for all implemented LSP
(tunnel or PW) directly supported by the VT, excluding current tunnel.
The Provisioning state of the selected Pseudo Wire must be set to Implemented or
Partially implemented.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-80
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS Pseudo Wires.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: The user chooses a Pseudo Wire and requests its de-implementation then
working state is set to allocated and no traffic could be carried by it.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-81
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function lists the T-MPLS sections acting as constraints for the selected Pseudo
Wire.
Related information
For information about Pseudo Wire, see: Overview about Pseudo Wires (p. 16-54).
Before you begin
Task
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS Pseudo Wires.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select: Search > Packet > T-MPLS Pseudo Wire > Constraints.
Result: The list window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Pseudo Wire
Constraints (p. 16-83)
Only routing constraints created by operator are displayed to the UI.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-82
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User label.
HOPLIST-ID.
PATH-ID.
HOP-ID.
Label in.
Label out.
Include mode.
Explicit mode.
Loose mode.
Hop-Ip-Address.
Note: Only routing constraints created by operator are displayed to the UI.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-83
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Pseudo Wire, see: Overview about Pseudo Wires (p. 16-54).
Before you begin
Select: Search > Packet > T-MPLS Pseudo Wire > Constraints.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS Pseudo Wires > Properties.
Result: The property windiow is shown.
See the following topic in this document: Details of a Pseudo Wire Constraint
(p. 16-85)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-84
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
Comment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-85
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Pseudo Wire, see: Overview about Pseudo Wires (p. 16-54).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS Pseudo Wires.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select: Search > Packet > T-MPLS Pseudo Wire > Constraints.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS Pseudo Wires > Cross Connections.
Result: The list window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of PW Cross
Connections (p. 16-87)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-86
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-87
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function gets information about extremities (origin and destination) of a Pseudo
Wire.
Related information
For information about Pseudo Wire, see: Overview about Pseudo Wires (p. 16-54).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS Pseudo Wires.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > Packet > T-MPLS Pseudo Wires > Extremities.
Result: The list window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of PW Extremities
(p. 16-89)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-88
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-89
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function gets information about each T-MPLS section (and their states) contained in
the previously selected Pseudo Wire.
Related information
For information about Pseudo Wire, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS Pseudo Wires.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS Pseudo Wires > T-MPLS Section Inventory.
choose one of the objects related to the tunnel:
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-90
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-91
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function gets information about the bandwidth load of a Pseudo Wire.
Related information
For information about Pseudo Wire, see: Overview about Pseudo Wires (p. 16-54).
Before you begin
Note: The overbooking ratio is computed as the ratio between the yellow
bandwidth used by all supported PWs and the yellow bandwidth made available
by the tunnel.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-92
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function presents graphically all Pseudo Wires used by the previously selected
Pseudo Wire.
Related information
For information about Pseudo Wire, see: Overview about Pseudo Wires (p. 16-54).
commands on map
The following commands are available from the graphical view, depending on the
selected object and its position on the route:
With no selection: Begin of Route and End of Route commands highlights the NE
used for the beginning or the end of the route.
With a selected entity (NE, Pseudo Wire, ENE, Off page connector): Begin of Route
and End of Route commands are completed by other commands depending on the
selected entity.
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS Pseudo Wires.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-93
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in listing the Pseudo Wires related to a previously selected Pseudo
Wire.
Related information
For information about Pseudo Wire, see: Overview about Pseudo Wires (p. 16-54).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS Pseudo Wires.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Pseudo Wires
(p. 16-95)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-94
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
T-MPLS Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-95
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Tunnels are point-to-point logical connections between NNI ports. The tunnel route spans
one or more T-MPLS sections.
The same tunnel can carry one or more PW. The tunnel purpose is to enhance scalability
of T-MPLS logical connections.
Tunnels as LSPs
Tunnels are Label Switched Paths (LSP). The Tunnel terminations correspond to:
T-MPLS manages the T-MPLS tunnel creation in the database, requested by user
(bottom-up approach) or by PW creation (top-down approach). The T-MPLS Tunnel, or
T-MPLS Path, is a logical entity that represents point-to-point connections between NNI
ports. The tunnel route can span one or more T-MPLS sections or one or more underlying
tunnels. The T-MPLS tunnel is an example of Label Switched Path (LSP).
Purpose of the tunnel
The tunnel purpose is to enhance the scalability of T-MPLS logical connections. The
tunnel can carry one or more client services (PW), it can be involved in a protection
schema (linear colon, linear plus, or MPLS Ring).
The tunnel supports OAM capabilities: the user can instantiate and enable the
Maintenance End Points (MEPs) on tunnels terminations.
System configuration of the tunnel
The system is able to configure a tunnel between NNI ports belonging to contiguous
T-MPLS domains using only the sections present in T-MPLS DB. A tunnel cannot be
created using other underlying tunnels. Only E-LSP tunnels are supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-96
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The tunnel creation can be performed by the operator using the T-MPLS GUI or
automatically during a client service definition. When creating the tunnel, the operator
can fully specify the tunnel route by means of section constraints or can specify only the
end NNI ports with, optionally, a partial or complete list of section constraints. The tunnel
creation is an operation that defines the tunnel and reserves the resources in T-MPLS DB.
When creation fails
If the operation fails, the tunnel is put in defined state with working state
failedToAllocate value and the system notifies the cause of the failure. While in
defined state, the operator can remove the tunnel or modify the input parameters (edge
points, section constraints, and so on) and perform again the creation.
Successful creation
If the creation completes successfully the tunnel is in allocated state. Tunnel creation is
the same for static, dynamic, and mixed tunnels. In all cases, the system is required to
compute the tunnel nominal route. The static case and the dynamic case differ only in the
way the nominal route is provisioned.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-97
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The T-MPLS tunnel List window presents all the T-MPLS tunnels and their attributes.
Related information
For information about T-MPLS tunnel, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of T-MPLS tunnels
(p. 16-99)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-98
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Last Action.
Cration date.
CIR.
PIR.
CBS.
PBS.
Reserved CIR.
A Port ID.
Z Port ID.
A Port.
Z Port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-99
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about T-MPLS tunnel, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
creation phase
The system checks that the section constraints describe a fully connected route
between the end nodes.
The system checks that the tunnel PHB profile is supported by the domain Egress
PHB Profile.
The system defines the tunnel and updates the T-MPLS DB allocating the tunnel
along the section constraints.
If the operator does not specify the bandwidth parameters, the system creates the
tunnel with associated null TD (PIR=CIR=0 and PBS=CBS=0 ).
If the operator does not constrain the underlying Virtual Transport (by means of VT
parameter), the system allocates the tunnel on the default VT.
The reserved CIR parameter is always equal to the TD CIR parameter, except when an
allocated PWs is over one implemented tunnel. In such case, the tunnel reserved CIR
represents the CIR required to support the PW committed bandwidth, while the TD CIR
represents the committed bandwidth of the implemented tunnel.
When the supported PWs are implemented, TD CIR is enlarged to match the reserved
CIR. If the PWs are deallocated, the reserved CIR is reduced down to the TD CIR value.
The alarms enabling rule tells if the alarm correlation for this tunnel is enabled or not. It
tells also when the correlation has been enabled, either at tunnel implementation or
subsequently by manual enabling command. In case of alarms enabling-onimplementation or manual-enabling, the system creates MEPs with default values. The
user is also allowed to set MEP attribute values.
The PM enabling rule tells whether the performance monitoring for this tunnel is started
or not. It tells also when the monitoring has been enabled, either at tunnel implementation
or subsequently by manual start command. In case of PM enabling-on-implementation
or manual-enabling after the implementation, the operator has also to specify the
granularity of the measures to be started.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-100
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The routing constraints are specified in terms of underlying T-MPLS sections. With VT
management, the constraint can also be further refined selecting the VT logical
connection over the selected T-MPLS section. The association between Tunnel and VT is
provisioned by means of TL1.
Before you begin
Task
Select Action > Packet > T-MPLS > Create T-MPLS tunnel.
Result: The T-MPLS tunnel creation wizard is displayed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-101
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reserved CIR.
PBS.
CBS.
PIR.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: If the operation completes without errors the final tunnel state is allocated;
otherwise. the state is defined with workingState equal to failedToAllocate.
The Usage state of T-MPLS tunnel changes to busy when the T-MPLS tunnel
supports at least one T-MPLS section.
Then, the tree area, opened graphical views and the T-MPLS tunnel List are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-102
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about T-MPLS tunnel, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
The T-MPLS tunnel modification gives the possibility to modify:
Comment.
If the User Label is modified, the new User Label must be different as one which is
already used by another T-MPLS tunnel.
If the provisioning state of the T-MPLS tunnel is Defined and usage state is Idle,
the Traffic Descriptor associated to the T-MPLS tunnel is modifiable.
Task
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-103
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select OK.
Result: After confirmation, the tree area and the T-MPLS tunnel list are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-104
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about T-MPLS tunnel, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
Before you begin
The selected T-MPLS tunnel must not support allocated nor implemented Pseudo
Wires.
Task
Select Action > Packet > T-MPLS tunnels > Delete or Click the third key of the mouse
and select Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-105
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-106
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about T-MPLS tunnel, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Details of a T-MPLS tunnel (p. 16-108)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-107
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
Comment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-108
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about T-MPLS tunnel, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
PKT starts the reroute operation and reallocates the tunnel along a new route that satisfies
the updated list of constraints.
Before you begin
Task
Select: Action > Packet > T-MPLS tunnel > Add Constraints.
Result: To add a new T-MPLS tunnel constraint:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select OK.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-109
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: After confirmation, the T-MPLS tunnel constraint is added at the end of the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-110
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about T-MPLS tunnel, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
PKT starts the reroute operation and reallocates the tunnel along a new route that satisfies
the updated list of constraints.
Before you begin
The working state must be Normal (that is, no operation is running on it).
Task
Select: Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS tunnels > Constraints.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-111
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, the T-MPLS tunnel constraints are deleted and the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-112
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about T-MPLS tunnel, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
For information about LSP PHB profiles, see: Overview about PHB profile management
(p. 16-5).
The operator selects the previously created PHB profile on domain basis to be associated
with that tunnel CTP.
PKT associates the new PHB to the CTP in database. If the tunnel is implemented, PKT
creates automatically the new Node-PHB in the node and deletes the previously
associated one. If the old Node-PHB must not be used by any other tunnel. PKT checks
that the tunnel does not support any PW, since the operation requires tunnel deactivation
and reactivation.
Before you begin
Task
Select: Action > Packet > T-MPLS tunnel > tunnel CTP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-113
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select: Action > Packet > T-MPLS tunnel CTP > Add PHB Profile.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select OK.
Result: The profile is added to tunnel.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-114
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about T-MPLS tunnel, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
The operator selects the previously created PHB profile on domain basis to be associated
with that tunnel CTP.
PKT associates the new PHB to the CTP in database. If the tunnel is implemented, PKT
creates automatically the new Node-PHB in the node and deletes the previously
associated one. The old Node-PHB must not be used by any other tunnel. PKT checks
that the tunnel does not support any PW, since the operation requires tunnel deactivation
and reactivation.
Before you begin
Task
Select: Action > Packet > T-MPLS tunnel > tunnel CTP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-115
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select: Action > Packet > T-MPLS tunnel CTP > Add PHB Profile.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select OK.
Result: The profile is added to the tunnel CTP.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-116
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This operation is performed when the user wants to find a path route between the two
extremities of a T-MPLS tunnel.
Related information
For information about T-MPLS tunnel, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
route
Before the allocation operation, the user has given a complete path route in term of
constraints (T-MPLS Pseudo Wire List). Constraints can optionally be associated with the
T-MPLS Labels. See Add a constraint to an LSP tunnel (p. 15-55).
The 1350 OMS PKT checks the continuity of the route.
If the T-MPLS tunnel is only one, the route is already defined. In this case, the constraint
List is not mandatory. The Pseudo Wire is identified by the T-MPLS tunnel extremities
given during the definition. Even not mandatory, it can be useful for the user to gives a
specific T-MPLS label.
If the user gives a T-MPLS Label in the constraint list, the system checks the availability
of the T-MPLS Label. If the T-MPLS Label. is used by another T-MPLS tunnel or
T-MPLS section, 1350 OMS PKT chooses and reserves automatically an available
T-MPLS label.
bandwidth
The system calculates the effective bandwidth of the T-MPLS tunnel according to the
associated Traffic Descriptor (see the table).
Each T-MPLS Pseudo Wire of the given route must provide the effective bandwidth of the
T-MPLS tunnel. Available Bandwidth of Pseudo Wire is greater than or equal to Effective
bandwidth of T-MPLS tunnel.
Traffic contract type.
Best Effort.
0 1.
Assured Forwarding.
CIR.
Expedited Forwarding.
CIR.
Notes:
1.
In the case Best Effort traffic contract, no effective bandwidth is reserved. In this case, for
each Pseudo Wire, a maximum number of Best Effort T-MPLS tunnel is checked.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-117
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For all traffic contract, CIR must be less than or equal to PIR and PIR must be less than or
equal to Pseudo Wire Total bandwidth.
allocation phase
LSP links along the route used by the T-MPLS tunnel are created, referenced by a
T-MPLS Label of each crossed Pseudo Wire.
T-MPLS Label of each involved Pseudo Wire is reserved to the T-MPLS tunnel.
T-MPLS tunnel cross connections are generated.
Bandwidth of each Pseudo Wire (used and available bandwidths) is computed in the
used direction.
If the Usage State of each T-MPLS Pseudo Wire used by the T-MPLS tunnel is idle,
the state changes to busy.
tunnel states
The provisioning state of the selected T-MPLS tunnel must be set to Defined.
The working state must be set to Normal (if not, an operation is running on it).
The constraints on the T-MPLS tunnel have been previously added (except for unitary
T-MPLS tunnel).
The T-MPLS sections defined as constraints are contiguous.
The constraint lists must be compliant with the T-MPLS tunnel extremities.
The maximum number of Best Effort T-MPLS tunnel for each Pseudo Wire is not
reached.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-118
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: At the beginning of the operation, the T-MPLS tunnel Working state is set to
Allocated. Then, the T-MPLS tunnel List is updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-119
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about T-MPLS tunnel, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
deallocation phase
The 1350 OMS PKT retrieves all T-MPLS Pseudo Wires used by the T-MPLS tunnel. It
updates for each of them available and used bandwidths for the used direction. It frees the
involved T-MPLS Labels.
The LSP links and the LSP cross connections are also retrieved and deleted.
The T-MPLS tunnel is de-allocated:
Bandwidth of each Pseudo Wires used by the T-MPLS tunnel are updated.
If no more T-MPLS tunnel is carried, the Usage State of Pseudo Wires used by the
T-MPLS tunnel is changed to idle.
T-MPLS Label of each Pseudo Wire involved in LSP links is released.
The provisioning state of the selected T-MPLS tunnel must be set to Allocated.
The working state must be set to Normal (if not, an operation is running on it).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-120
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, the T-MPLS tunnel working state is set to Defined.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-121
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about T-MPLS tunnel, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
Implementation phase
The tunnel provisioning can be static, dynamic, or mixed. Static means that the tunnel is
provisioned directly by NMS. Dynamic means that the tunnel is provisioned through
control plane. In mixed provisioning, PKT manages the tunnel creation and activation,
partially in the data plane and partially in the control plane.
Each NE involved in the T-MPLS tunnel is provisioned as following:
If tunnel alarm enabling rule is on-implementation MEPs are automatically created and
activated on tunnel terminations at this stage.
If tunnel PM enabling rule is on-implementation, PM counting is automatically started
on tunnel terminations at this stage.
If at tunnel creation time the operator specified one PHB profile (selecting from a
portfolio of profiles available on domain basis) different from default, PKT automatically
implements the corresponding Node-PHB profiles on all tunnel segments. Similarly,
based on the tunnel bandwidth parameters, PKT automatically creates in each crossed NE
the corresponding TD.
If the tunnel uses an adaptive VT, PKT automatically configures VT bandwidth as
follows:
VT Reserved CIR = Sum (LSP CIR), where the sum spans all allocated and
implemented LSP (tunnel or PW) directly supported by the VT, including current
tunnel, is unchanged.
VT CIR = Sum (LSP CIR), where the sum spans all implemented LSP (tunnel or PW)
directly supported by the VT, including current tunnel.
VT PIR = Max (LSP PIR), where the max is computed for all implemented LSP
(tunnel or PW) directly supported by the VT, including current tunnel.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-122
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
tunnel states
Task
Select: Action > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS tunnel > Implement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select OK.
Result: After implementation, the T-MPLS tunnel List is updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-123
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in de-implementing a T-MPLS tunnel to remove the tunnel from
the network.
Related information
For information about T-MPLS tunnel, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
Deimplementation phase
PKT manages the static tunnel removal from the data plane, dynamic tunnel removal
from the control plane, or both.
If the tunnel were using a dedicated Node-PHB profile, the profile is automatically
deleted from the NE. If the tunnel were using a dedicated TD, the TD is automatically
deleted from the NE.
If the tunnel uses an adaptive VT, PKT automatically reconfigures VT bandwidth as
follows:
VT Reserved CIR = Sum (LSP CIR), where the sum spans all allocated and
implemented LSP (tunnel or PW) directly supported by the VT, including current
tunnel, is unchanged.
VT CIR = Sum (LSP CIR), where the sum spans all implemented LSP (tunnel or PW)
directly supported by the VT, excluding current tunnel.
VT PIR = Max (LSP PIR), where the max is computed for all implemented LSP
(tunnel or PW) directly supported by the VT, excluding current tunnel.
Tunnel states
The user chooses a T-MPLS tunnel and requests its de-implementation. After operation,
then the working state is set to de-implementing and no traffic can be carried by it.
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-124
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Conditions
The provisioning state of the selected T-MPLS tunnel must be set to Implemented
or Partially implemented.
The T-MPLS tunnel must carry no implemented T-MPLS Pseudo Wires.
Task
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: The user chooses a T-MPLS tunnel and requests its de-implementation then
working state is set to allocated and no traffic could be carried by it.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-125
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function lists the T-MPLS sections acting as constraints for the selected T-MPLS
tunnel.
Related information
For information about T-MPLS tunnel, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
Before you begin
Task
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of T-MPLS tunnel
Constraints (p. 16-127)
Only routing constraints created by operator are displayed to the UI.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-126
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User label.
HOPLIST-ID.
PATH-ID.
HOP-ID.
Label in.
Label out.
Include mode.
Explicit mode.
Loose mode.
Hop-Ip-Address.
Note: Only routing constraints created by operator are displayed to the UI.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-127
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about T-MPLS tunnel, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
Before you begin
Select: Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS tunnels > Constraints.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Details of a T-MPLS tunnel Constraint
(p. 16-129)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-128
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User label.
HOPLIST-ID.
PATH-ID.
HOP-ID.
Label in.
Label out.
Include mode.
Explicit mode.
Loose mode.
Hop-Ip-Address.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-129
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about T-MPLS tunnel, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of T-MPLS tunnel
Cross Connections (p. 16-131)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-130
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-131
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function gets information about extremities (origin and destination) of a T-MPLS
tunnel.
Related information
For information about T-MPLS tunnel, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of T-MPLS tunnel
Extremities (p. 16-133)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-132
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-133
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function gets information about each T-MPLS section (and their states) contained in
the previously selected T-MPLS tunnel.
Related information
For information about T-MPLS tunnel, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS section Inventory.
choose one of the objects related to the tunnel:
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-134
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-135
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function gets information about the bandwidth load of a T-MPLS tunnel.
Related information
For information about T-MPLS tunnel, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-136
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function presents graphically all Pseudo Wires used by the previously selected
T-MPLS tunnel.
Related information
For information about T-MPLS tunnel, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
commands on map
The following commands are available from the graphical view, depending on the
selected object and its position on the route:
With no selection: Begin of Route and End of Route commands highlights the NE
used for the beginning or the end of the route.
With a selected entity (NE, Pseudo Wire, ENE, Off page connector): Begin of Route
and End of Route commands are completed by other commands depending on the
selected entity.
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS section Display Route.
Result: The Pseudo Wires used by the T-MPLS tunnel appears in blue.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-137
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in listing the Pseudo Wires related to a previously selected T-MPLS
tunnel.
Related information
For information about T-MPLS tunnel, see: T-MPLS tunnel description (p. 16-96).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Pseudo Wires
(p. 16-139)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-138
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
T-MPLS Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-139
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The scope of this procedure is to create an EVC over T-MPLS by the wizard.
Related Information
EVPL stands for Ethernet Virtual Private Line. In the bottom up process, the creation and
selection of the PW (pseudo wire) to associate is done by the user. See: Create EVC over
T-MPLS EVPL bottom up (p. 26-30). In the top down process, the creation and selection
of the PW (pseudo wire) to associate is done automatically. See: Create EVC over
T-MPLS EVPL top down (p. 26-56)
EVPLAN stands for Ethernet Virtual Private LAN. See: Create EVC over T-MPLS
EVPLAN (p. 26-73)
BTV stands for Broadcast Television. See: Create EVC over T-MPLS BTV (p. 26-88)
EVPLAN stands for High Speed Internet. See: Create EVC over T-MPLS HSI
(p. 26-92)
Before you begin
Select Actions > Packet > Services > T-MPLS > Create T-MPLS EVC
Result: The Create T-MPLS EVC window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-140
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Resource Sharing. It describes the resource reservation (UNI and link). (Full).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
VLAN Bundle
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Maintenance Domain.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-141
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
NAD.
External Mark.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Next.
Result: The Termination Selection window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
11
Click Next.
Result: The Termination Setting window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
Select a termination.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-142
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
Select Policy mode. (Color Blind, Color Aware). If you choose Color Aware, you can
select Color Profile.
Select Classification Mode.
Select VLAN POP Enabled. (True, False)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
15
16
In the folder Ingress Flow, select sub-older Leaf Term. (set HSI).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17
In the folder Ingress Flow, select sub-older Reuse Flows to copy and reuse flow
characteristics.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18
19
If Priority Mode is set to Color Aware, the fields Green Priority and Yellow Priority
are active.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-143
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20
21
Select Spoke.
Folder Spoke is significant only for BTV and HSI.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22
23
24
25
Select the Pseudo Wire in the list and confirm clicking the V-sign.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
26
27
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
28
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-144
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The List window shows all the T-MPLS EVC and their attributes.
Related Information
No related information.
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of T-MPLS EVC
(p. 16-146).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-145
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Provisioning State
Service State
LPT Period
LPT Priority
Working State
Domain (T.MPLS).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-146
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User is able to create, configure, and delete MAC flushing protection schemes in a
TMPLS domain.
Contents
MAC flushing protection description
16-148
16-149
16-151
16-152
16-153
16-154
16-155
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-147
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-148
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The function creates a MAC flushing protection PKT defining protection schemes in a
TMPLS domain.
Related Information
For more information, refer to:MAC flushing protection description (p. 16-148).
Before you begin
Select Action > Packet > Services > Ethernet over T-MPLS > Create MAC Flushing
Protection.
Result: The Create MAC Flushing Protection wizard is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label
Domain
The Interconnection Type is SNI when only one port is involved; it is DNI when two
ports on two different nodes are involved; it is DPI when two ports on the same node
are involved.
For each Node, the involved Port(s). The Port can be UNI or NNI. A port can be
involved in only one interconnection scheme and in only one MAC flushing
protection.
Click Add Schema
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-149
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
flushing protection is created. If not all the interconnection schemes are created, a
warning is issued.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-150
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If MAC flushing is enabled, the command issued from a T-MPLS EVC shows protections
associated to the selected EVC.
For more information, refer to: MAC flushing protection description (p. 16-148).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Services > Ethernet over T-MPLS.
Result: The Ethernet over T-MPLS menu is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-151
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Domain (T-MPLS).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-152
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information, refer to: MAC flushing protection description (p. 16-148).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Services > Ethernet over T-MPLS > MAC Flushing
Protection.
Result: The MAC Flushing Protection list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-153
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Node A.
Node B.
Select an item and expand hierarchical tree. (Click the item and click the +sign icon).
The sub-tree displays the objects belonging to the selected item:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-154
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information, refer to: MAC flushing protection description (p. 16-148).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Services > Ethernet over T-MPLS > T-MPLS EVC.
Result: The T-MPLS EVC list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The force MAC flushing state is not persisted by PKT, since after flushing, the
attribute is automatically reset to false by NE.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-155
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
16-156
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
17
17 to End Ethernet
End
Provisioning Management
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes how to provision and monitor the Ethernet data.
Contents
IP DSCP/TOS and EtherType
17-7
17-7
Managing Customer
17-10
17-10
17-11
17-12
Create a Customer
17-13
Modify a Customer
17-15
Delete a Customer
17-17
17-18
Details of a Customer
17-19
17-20
17-20
17-24
17-25
Create a Service
17-26
Service Setup
17-28
Modify a Service
17-35
Delete a Service
17-37
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-38
Details of a Service
17-40
17-41
17-41
17-43
17-47
17-48
17-49
17-52
17-54
17-56
Details of a EVC
17-58
17-59
17-60
17-61
17-63
Details of a Termination
17-65
17-66
17-69
17-70
17-71
17-72
17-72
17-73
17-74
17-75
17-79
17-82
17-83
17-85
17-87
17-87
17-88
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
T-MPLS Takeover
17-96
17-96
17-97
17-99
17-99
17-100
17-101
17-102
17-104
17-107
17-108
17-110
17-111
17-111
17-113
17-114
17-115
17-118
17-121
17-122
17-124
17-125
17-125
17-128
17-129
17-130
17-132
17-135
17-136
17-138
17-139
17-139
17-140
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-141
17-142
17-144
17-147
17-149
17-150
17-151
17-152
Navigation to equipment
17-153
17-155
17-155
17-157
17-159
17-160
17-162
17-165
17-168
17-169
17-170
17-170
17-172
17-173
17-175
17-178
17-181
17-183
17-185
17-187
17-190
17-191
17-192
17-194
17-196
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Modify a Constraint
17-197
17-200
17-201
17-203
17-205
17-207
17-209
17-211
17-215
17-216
17-217
17-218
17-220
17-222
17-222
17-223
17-224
17-225
17-228
17-230
Additional section
17-231
17-231
17-232
17-234
17-235
17-236
17-237
17-238
17-239
17-240
17-241
17-242
17-243
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Start PM on an EVC
17-244
Stop PM on an EVC
17-245
Synchronize PM on an EVC
17-246
Show PM on an EVC
17-247
17-248
17-249
17-250
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Vlan and Priority based Classification is extended with the following criteria:
IP DSCP/TOS Classification.
These new Classifications live together with existing Vlan and Priority based
Classification. So the global way to manage incoming Ethernet Frames allows the
definition of more Classification combinations.
Application context
Prio.
VlanId.
EtherType.
IP.
TOS.
DSCP.
DEFAULT.
Do not
care.
4097.
Do not care.
65.
Untagged.
8.
4096.
Do not care.
65.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-7
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Classification Type.
Prio.
VlanId.
EtherType.
IP.
TOS.
DSCP.
Untagged+EtherType.
8.
4096.
EtherType.
65.
Untagged+ NO IP.
Do not
care.
4096.
Do not care.
64.
Untagged+ NO
IP+EtherType.
Do not
care.
4096.
EthType.
64.
Untagged+DSCP+IP.
Do not
care.
4096.
IP(0x0800).
0.
VLAN.
PRIO.
VID.
Do not care.
65.
PRIO.
Range.
Do not care.
65.
Range.
VID.
Do not care.
65.
Range.
Range.
Do not care.
65.
Prio.
VID.
EthType.
65.
Prio.
Range.
EthType.
65.
Range.
VID.
EthType.
65.
Range.
Range.
EthType.
65.
Do not
care.
VID.
Do not care.
64.
Do not
care.
Range.
Do not care.
64.
Do not
care.
Full
Range.
Do not care.
64.
Do not
care.
VID.
EtherType IP.
64.
Do not
care.
Range.
EtherType IP.
64.
Do not
care.
Full
Range.
EtherType IP.
64.
VLAN+EtherType.
VLAN+NO IP.
VLAN+NO
IP+EtherType.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-8
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Classification Type.
Prio.
VlanId.
EtherType.
IP.
TOS.
DSCP.
VLAN+DSCP+EtherType.
Do not
care.
VID.
IP(0x0800).
DSCP.
Do not
care.
Range.
IP(0x0800).
Range.
Do not
care.
VID.
IP(0x0800).
Range.
Do not
care.
Full
Range.
IP(0x0800).
DSCP.
Do not
care.
Full
Range.
IP(0x0800).
Range.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-9
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Managing Customer
Overview about Customer
Customer description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-10
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Customer List window presents all the customers and their attributes.
Related Information
Select Customer.
Result: The list window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Customers
(p. 17-12)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-11
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Address.
Company.
Comment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-12
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Create a Customer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create a Customer
When to use
This function allows the user to define the characteristics of the customer.
Related Information
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-13
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Create a Customer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-14
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Modify a Customer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Modify a Customer
When to use
User Label.
Company.
Address.
Comment.
If modified, the new User Label must be different from the existing ones.
Task
On the Customer List Window, select the Customer to modify. Click the right mouse
button and select Modify on the popup menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-15
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Modify a Customer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The customer is modified.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-16
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Delete a Customer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Delete a Customer
When to use
This function consists in deleting a customer from the 1350 OMS PKT supervision.
Related Information
Task
On the Customer List Window, select the Customer to delete. Select Action > Customer
> Delete from the Action menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: The customer is deleted.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-17
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the Customer List Window, select a Customer. Select Action from Customer >
Properties from the popup menu.
Result: The property window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Details of a Customer (p. 17-19)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-18
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Details of a Customer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Details of a Customer
Attributes of a Customer
Comment (optional).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-19
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
by means of a user action. In this way, the user defines all characteristics of the new
Ethernet service.
automatically after an EVC creation. In this case, all characteristics of the service
must be derived as much as possible from the EVC characteristics. This action is
automatically performed by 1350 OMS PKT).
The Ethernet service is a concept useful to define the way in which end-to-end Ethernet
connections are organized:
Ethernet Line (E-Line): for point-to-point connectivity. E-line services are used to
create Ethernet private line services, Ethernet-based Internet access services, and
point-to-point Ethernet VPNs.
Extended EVPLAN (Extended Ethernet Virtual Private LAN Service) (p. 17-22).
HSI (High Speed Internet) (p. 17-22).
This service consists of a point-to-point EVC that uses dedicated bandwidth. Bandwidth
can be virtual concatenated Sonet/SDH channels or reserved packet bandwidth in a packet
switched network. The bottom line is that the Ethernet frames of the customer stay strictly
separated from others' at the Ethernet layer. The customer always has available the
committed or contracted bandwidth rate also known as CIR (committed information rate).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-20
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Ethernet Private Line is much like today TDM-based private lines. It offers the
benefit of a native Ethernet interface to the customer and to the network user edge
equipment. In a Private Service, no resource is sharing and no UNI Multiplexing. The
network resources used by one Service cannot be used by other Services.
EVPL (Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service)
For the Ethernet Virtual Private Line, the rules are slightly different. In this service, the
customer still gets point-to-point connectivity, but over shared bandwidth instead of
dedicated. The shared bandwidth can be a TDM channel in the transport network or the
switch fabric bandwidth of switches and routers in the packet network. Features such as
committed information rates (CIR) and excess information rates (EIR) can be offered by
the service provider. They have service performance metrics to support true SLAs. This
service is therefore similar to Frame Relay and its model of creating networks using
PVCs (permanent virtual circuits). The MEF defines the Ethernet Virtual Private Line
service as a point-to-point Ethernet Virtual Connection (EVC) between two UNIs
(subscribers). The EVPL supports a service multiplexed UNI. It means that multiple
EVCs can share a single UNI. This characteristic is useful when creating hub-and-spoke
architectures in which multiple remote offices all require access to a headquarters.
Multiple customers all require access to a POP (point of presence) of the ISP. The user
can mix connectivity services and managed services.
EVPLAN (Ethernet Virtual Private LAN Service)
EVPLAN allows any edge node to send/receive information to/from others edge nodes. It
supports every Network topology (Point to point, Point to multipoint, Multipoint to
multipoint). It can be based on Connection Oriented or on Connection Less networks
based on 802.1Q (Virtual Bridge) and/or on 802.1ad (Provider Bridge). EVPLANis a
Virtual Service as network resources used by one Service can be used by other Services.
Resource sharing and UNI Multiplexing are allowed. The Ethernet Virtual Private LAN
(EVPLAN) has gone by different names over the past two years. From Virtual Private
LAN Service (VPLS) to Transparent LAN Service (TLS), to Virtual Private Switched
Network (VPSN). Regardless of how EVPLAN is termed, the EVPLan is a network
service providing Layer-2 multipoint connectivity between Ethernet edge devices.
Customer separation is accomplished through encapsulation or Ethernet virtual
connections. The EVPLan is designed as the most cost-effective service for the carrier, as
it can leverage shared transmission bandwidth in the network. As a multipoint service, it
can be complex to administer. Customer service separation by Provider VLAN tags is not
likely to be sufficient because of the limited address space of Provider VLAN IDs (only
4096). Hence other service delivery technologies providing customer frame encapsulation
must be used such as MPLS, MAC-in-MAC, and RPR. The user must also decide how to
implement protection, bandwidth profiles, congestion management, buffering, and so on.
These properties are much more complex to be implement compared to point-to-point
services.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-21
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Extended EVPLAN allows any edge node to send/receive information to/from others
edge nodes. It supports every Network topology (Point to point, Point to multipoint,
Multipoint to multipoint). It can be based on Connection Oriented or on Connection Less
network based on 802.1D (MAC Bridge) or on 802.1Q (Virtual Bridge). This service is a
Private Service as network resources used by one Service cannot be used by other
Services. No resource is sharing and no UNI is Multiplexing.
HSI (High Speed Internet)
In the definition of Ethernet service, the used terminations are not specified, they are
defined in the Ethernet Virtual Connection (EVC) definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-22
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
customer
EthService
EVC_1
EthSegm_1
........
EVC_2
........
EthSegm_n
........
Depending on Service Type, an Ethernet service can include one or more EVCs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-23
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Ethernet Service List window presents all the Ethernet services and their attributes.
Related Information
If the list is required from Main Menu, all the Ethernet Services are displayed.
If the list is required from the Customer List, only the Ethernet services associated to
the selected customer are displayed.
If the list is required from Ethernet Transport Link List, only the Ethernet services
associated to the selected Ethernet Transport Links are displayed.
For more information about Services, refer to Ethernet Service description (p. 17-20).
Before you begin
Select Service.
Result: The list window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Services
(p. 17-25)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-24
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Type (EPL, EVPL, EVPLAN, Extended EVPL, Extended EVPLAN, HSI, Broadcast,
BTV).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-25
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Create a Service
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create a Service
When to use
If this creation window is required from the Customer List, the Customer field of the
creation window is automatically filled with the selected value.
For more information about Services, refer to Ethernet Service description (p. 17-20).
Before you begin
Task
Select Action > Packet > Services > Create Ethernet Service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Choose the Customer from the list (this field is automatically filled if this window is
required from the Customer List).
Select a Service Type (EVPL, EPTL, EPL, EVPLAN, Extended EVPL, Extended
EVPLAN, HSI, BTV, or Broadcast).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-26
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Create a Service
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The service is created.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-27
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Service Setup
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Service Setup
When to use
The wizard creates and configure at once: Service, EVC, and Ethernet Segment.
Related Information
For more information about Services, refer to Ethernet Service description (p. 17-20).
wizard results
For EVPL, EPTL, EPL, and Extended EVPL connectivity only an Automatic Setup function
can be chosen.
The wizard creates at once:
a new service.
a Point-to-Point Bi-directional EVC (named "<Service User Label > _EVC_<Id > "),.
two Ethernet Segments (named "<Service User Label > _ESG_A_Z_<Id > " and
"<Service User Label > _ESG_Z_A_<Id > ").
associate a Traffic Descriptor and a Traffic Classifier to Ethernet Segments.
Service states
The Ethernet service is created into the 1350 OMS PKT with the following state:
A correlation with the selected customer is created. Then, the tree area and the Ethernet
Service List are updated.
EVC states
One EVC is created into the 1350 OMS PKT with the following attributes:
Directionality: Bidir.
Service Setup
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Two Ethernet Segments are created into the 1350 OMS PKT with the following attributes:
Final settings
If the Transport Link is chosen by the user (case NE are not E/FE/GE), that Transport
Link is used as a constraint.
If the Transport Link is not chosen by the user, the Transport Link must be derived by one
of the two ports. Then, the retrieved Transport Link is used as constraint.
A correlation with the EVC is created.
Then, the two Ethernet Segments are allocated and then, implemented Provisioning State
set to Implemented).
At the end, the tree area and the Ethernet Segment List are updated.
A correlation with the default Traffic Descriptor is created. Correlation is based on
bandwidth parameter.
At the end, the Service State of the Ethernet service is set to 'In Service'.
Recovery consideration in case of error
Invoke a manual deletion of the partially built tree starting from the Ethernet Service.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-29
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Service Setup
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Select Action > Packet > Services > Create Ethernet Service.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-30
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Service Setup
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Choose the Customer by using the sensitive help (this field is automatically filled if
this window is required from the Customer List).
Select the Service Type (EPTL, EVPL, EPL, or Extended EVPL). If you insert EVPL or
Extended EVPL Service Type. Refer to: Task for EVPL or Extended EVPL
(p. 17-33).
Select a NAD Value from the list.
Click Next.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-31
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Service Setup
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Resources section (by using the sensitive help and menu).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-32
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Service Setup
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Segment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
If you insert EVPL or Extended EVPL Service Type, the following panel is displayed:
Choose the Customer by using the sensitive help (this field is automatically filled if
this window is required from the Customer List).
Select the Service Type (EVPL, Extended EVPL).
Enter the Reference SLA (a string) (optional).
Priority Id.
Priority Max.
Vlan Max.
Click Next.
Result: The wizard goes to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fill Resources section (by using the sensitive help and menu): this panel has the same
layout as the EPLINE Service panel.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-33
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Service Setup
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-34
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Modify a Service
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Modify a Service
When to use
For more information about Services, refer to Ethernet Service description (p. 17-20).
The service modification gives the possibility to modify one or all the following
parameters:
Service Type (only if no EVCs are currently associated to the Ethernet service).
Reference SLA.
Comment.
Task
On the Service List Window, select the Service to modify. Click the right mouse button
and select Modify on the popup menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-35
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Modify a Service
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The service is modified.
If the Service User Label is modified, after confirmation of the modification: the tree
area (in customer section) and the Service List are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-36
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Delete a Service
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Delete a Service
When to use
This function consists in deleting an Ethernet service from the 1350 OMS PKT
supervision.
Related Information
For more information about Services, refer to Ethernet Service description (p. 17-20).
Before you begin
Task
On the Service List Window, select the service to delete. Select Action > Service >
Delete from the Action menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: The service is deleted.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-37
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information about Services, refer to Ethernet Service description (p. 17-20).
Before you begin
On the Service List Window, select a Service. Select Properties from the popup menu
activated using the mouse right button.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-38
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Details of a Service (p. 17-40)
Figure 17-3 Ethernet Service Properties window
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-39
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Details of a Service
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Details of a Service
Attributes of a Service
Id
User Label.
Reference SLA
Comment
Action Type
Action Date
ETS ID label
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-40
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Ethernet Virtual Connection (EVC) specifies the connectivity among two or more
Ethernet Edge Terminations (UNIs). If they belong to the same Metro Ethernet Network,
the association of Ethernet Edge Termination is implicitly specified, too.
The following main rules govern the EVC:
The EVC is common to Connection Oriented and Connection Less management
a frame sent in the EVC can be delivered to one or more egress EVC Termination
(Ethernet Edge Termination).
a frame sent in the EVC cannot be delivered back to the ingress EVC Termination.
a frame sent in the EVC cannot be delivered to another EVC.
The EVC can be used in different topologies and can have different properties. In
particular, the EVC can be:
Point-to-point (PtoP): It connects exactly two points (that is, two Ethernet Edge
Ports). It can be unidirectional or bidirectional. It supports only Unicast traffic.
Rooted-multipoint (RMP): A multipoint EVC in which each UNI is designated as
either a Root or a Leaf. Ingress Service Frames at a Root UNI can be delivered to one
or more of any of the other UNIs in the EVC. Ingress Service Frames at a Leaf UNI
can only be delivered to one or more Root UNIs in the EVC.
Multipoint-to-multipoint (MPtoMP): It connects two or more points. It can be
unidirectional or bidirectional. It supports only traffic Unicast.
Depending on the EVC topology, every Edge Port used by a given EVC assumes a
specific Role.
In PtoP topology, the two ports assume the "both" role (that is, root + leaf).
In PtoMP topology, one port assumes the "root" role while all the others assume the
"leaf" role.
In MPtoMP topology, all ports assume the "both" role (that is, root + leaf).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-41
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure summarizes the role assumed by Edge Port for different EVCs.
Figure 17-4 EVCs and Edge Ports relationships
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-42
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When the user defines a new Service Type, an important aspect is to define the expected
usage of physical resources. In particular, the management of Resource Sharing attribute
introduced at EVC level. This parameter defines the global policy, in terms of
privacy/sharing of UNI (Edge Ports) and Transport Links.
To manage the issue related to Shared or Dedicated Transport Link usage, the Resource
Sharing attribute at EVC Level can assume following values.
Full: the EVC Service under definition can use every resource without any restriction.
Private UNI: the EVC Service under definition must use Private UNI, that is UNI
Resource Sharing
The following table reports the possible choices of Resource Sharing respect to Service
Type and respect to crossed technological domain.
Service Type.
Resource Sharing.
Full.
Private UNI.
Private Link.
UNKNOWN.
EVPL.
ETS.
Provider Bridge.
EPTL.
ETS.
EPL.
ETS.
Provider
Bridge.
EVPLAN.
Extended EVPL.
ETS.
ETS.
Provider Bridge.
Provider
Bridge.
ETS.
ETS.
ETS.
ETS.
Provider Bridge.
Provider
Bridge.
Provider
Bridge.
Provider Bridge.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-43
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Service Type.
Resource Sharing.
Extended
EVPLAN.
ETS.
ETS.
ETS.
ETS.
Provider Bridge.
Provider
Bridge.
Provider
Bridge.
Provider Bridge.
HSI.
ETS.
Provider Bridge.
BTV.
ETS.
Provider Bridge.
BROADCAST.
ETS.
ETS.
Service Type.
Type.
Traffic Type.
Resource Sharing.
EVPL.
Point-to-Point.
Unicast.
Full.
EPTL.
Point-to-Point.
Unicast.
EPL.
Point-to-Point.
Unicast.
Private UNI.
EVPLAN.
Any-to-Any.
Unicast.
Full.
Private UNI.
Private UNI and Link.
1
Extended EVPL.
Point-to-Point.
Unicast.
Full.
Private UNI.
Private UNI and Link.
1
Extended
EVPLAN.
Any-to-Any.
Unicast.
Full.
Rooted
Multipoint.
Multicast.
Private UNI.
HSI.
Rooted
Multipoint.
Unicast.
Full.
Multicast.
1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-44
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 17-1
Service Type.
BTV.
Type.
Rooted
Multipoint.
Traffic Type.
Unicast.
Rooted
Multipoint.
Resource Sharing.
Full.
Multicast.
1
Broadcast.
(continued)
Unicast.
Full.
Private UNI.
Private UNI and Link.
1
Notes:
1.
Frame delivery
Unicast Service Frame Delivery: MAC ACL configuration on Edge Ports can
influence the behavior. It verifies if the MAC ACL can be used to filter all unicast
address. For Connection Oriented EVCs transporting Unicast frames, the default
value is assumed always equal to Deliver Unconditionally. For Connection Less
EVCs, the default value is Deliver Conditionally (depending on filtering set on UNI).
The default value is modifiable and it does not affect real traffic due to the fact that
MAC ACL is not known to 1350 OMS PKT. The MAC ACL is managed through
Navigation, The full compliancy is in the user hands.
Multicast Service Frame Delivery: MAC ACL configuration on Edge Ports can
influence the behavior. It must be verified if the MAC ACL can be used to filter all
multicast address. For Connection Oriented EVCs transporting Multicast Frames, the
default value is assumed always equal to Deliver Unconditionally. For Connection
Less EVCs or when IGMP is used, the default value is Deliver Conditionally
(depending on filtering set on UNI). The MAC ACL is managed through Navigation.
The full compliancy is in the user hands.
Broadcast Service Frame Delivery: MAC ACL configuration on Edge Ports can
influence the behavior. It must be verified if the MAC ACL can be used to filter all
broadcast address. For Connection Oriented EVCs, the default value is assumed
always equal to Deliver Unconditionally. For Connection Less EVCs, the default
value is Conditional (depending on filtering set on UNI). The MAC ACL is managed
through Navigation. The full compliancy is in the user hands.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-45
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
C-VLAN Preservation ensures that each packet exiting the EVC has the same VLAN
C-VLAN CoS Preservation ensures that each packet exiting the EVC has the same
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-46
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Ethernet Virtual Connection List window presents all the EVCs and their attributes.
Related Information
This list can be required also from the Ethernet Service List, from the Ethernet Segment
List, or from the Ethernet Transport Link List. In These cases, only the EVCs associated
to the selected object are displayed.
For more information about EVC, refer to EVC description (p. 17-41).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of EVCs (p. 17-48)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-47
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-48
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information about EVC, refer to EVC description (p. 17-41).
If the EVC Creation window is required from the Service List, the Ethernet Service field
is filled with the selected value.
When no Ethernet Service reference is supplied a dummy service is created.
Before you begin
The EVC Type must be compatible with the service type of the associated Ethernet
Service.
The EVC Type must be compatible with the selected Traffic Type.
The role of each EVC termination must be compatible with the EVC Type.
Task
Select Action > Packet > Services > ConnectionOriented > Create EVC.
Result: The EVC Creation window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-49
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resource Sharing: (Full, Private UNI, Private Link, Private UNI and LINK).
C-VLAN CoS Preservation: check it to keep the Priority Bits through the EVC.
Enter an External Mark (optional). It can be used to identify external systems having
relations with the EVC (for example an ownership).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Frame Delivery parameters (see Frame delivery (p. 17-45))
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On PM Panel.
Select the following parameters
Under PM: select True if the Performance Monitoring is applied on the EVC, if true is
selected the following parameters are activated.
Granularity: select the required type of granularity (15 min, 1 h, 24 h, Not
Meaningful).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-50
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Report Output Type: select the desired output type (No Report, CSV Delta, CSV Raw,
Performance Counter Tabular, Performance Counter Graphical, Delta Counter
Tabular, Delta Counter Graphical, Not Meaningful).
Report Output Frequency: select the desired frequency for the output report (15
min, 1 h, 24 h, 1 Week, 1 Month, 1 Year, Not Meaningful).
Report Output Name: type a significant name for the output report.
Policy: select the policy for the output report management (Keep, Purge on Stop,
Purge on Delete, Not Meaningful).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-51
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information about EVC, refer to EVC description (p. 17-41).
The EVC modification function allow the user to modify:
NAD Value.
Comment.
External Mark.
If the User Label is modified, the new User Label must be different from other
already used by another EVC.
Task
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS EVCs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click the right mouse button and select from the popup menu Modify.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-52
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
C-VLAN CoS Preservation: check it to keep the Priority Bits through the EVC.
Then, the EVC list, and the opened graphical views are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-53
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function allows deleting an ETS EVC from the 1350 OMS PKT supervision.
Related Information
For more information about EVC, refer to EVC description (p. 17-41).
Before you begin
Task
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS EVCs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click the right mouse button and select from the popup menu Action from ETS EVC >
Delete.
Result: A confirmation box is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-54
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
After confirmation:
the 1350 OMS PKT checks that no Ethernet Segment is referring the EVCs.
the EVCs are dissociated from the related service (if no more EVC are associated to
the service, the service is also removed).
the EVCs are removed.
The EVC list, and the opened graphical views are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-55
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information about EVC, refer to EVC description (p. 17-41).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS EVCs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click the right mouse button and select from the popup menu Properties.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-56
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Details of a EVC (p. 17-58)
Figure 17-6 EVC Properties window
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-57
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Details of a EVC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Details of a EVC
Attributes of an EVC
Id.
User Label.
Service Id Label.
Directionality.
Service Level.
Comment.
External Mark.
Action Type.
Action Date.
ETS Id Label.
Vlan Type.
Resource sharing.
Domain Id.
Domain.
VLAN distribution.
S-VLAN Id.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-58
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The EVC Termination List window presents all the terminations of the selected EVC and
their attributes.
Related Information
If this list is required from the Ethernet Service List or from the EVC List, only the EVC
terminations associated to the selected item are displayed.
For more information about EVC, refer to EVC description (p. 17-41).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS EVCs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from ETS EVC > List EVC Terminations.
Result: The list of the EVC terminations is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of terminations
(p. 17-60)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-59
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Rate.
Network Element.
Usage State.
Ethernet Service.
VLAN Type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-60
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function allows deleting an ETS EVC termination from the 1350 OMS PKT
supervision.
Related Information
For more information about EVC, refer to EVC description (p. 17-41).
Before you begin
Task
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS EVCs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click the right mouse button and select from the popup menu Action from ETS EVC
Termination > Delete.
Result: A confirmation box is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-61
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-62
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information about EVC, refer to EVC description (p. 17-41).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS EVCs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the menu path Search > Inventory from ETS EVC > List EVC Terminations.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click the right mouse button and select from the popup menu Properties.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-63
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Details of a Termination (p. 17-65)
Figure 17-7 EVC Termination Properties window
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-64
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Details of a Termination
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Details of a Termination
Attributes of a Termination
Rate.
Network Element.
Usage State.
Ethernet Service.
VLAN Type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-65
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In case of Connection Oriented EVCs, the bandwidth profiles defined for each EVC
termination have to be intended in the following way:
It represents the bandwidth profile for the traffic at "ingress" of that UNI (Profile is
immediately checked).
It must be reflected to the corresponding Ethernet Segments (that is to the Ethernet
Segment starting from that UNI).
The affects along the Ethernet Segment route is evaluated at Ethernet Segment allocation.
This function consists in adding a new termination to an existing EVC.
For more information about EVC, refer to EVC description (p. 17-41).
Before you begin
Task
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS EVCs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-66
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the menu path Action > ETS EVC > Add Connection Oriented EVC Termination.
Result: The add termination window is displayed.
Figure 17-8 Add EVC Termination window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To add a termination:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-67
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok button.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-68
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function displays the localization of the fault present for the selected EVC.
Related Information
This function is active when EVC or Ethernet Segment associated are implemented.
For more information about EVC, refer to EVC description (p. 17-41).
For details about Fault Localization, see: Fault Localization (p. 11-73).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS EVCs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Fault
Localization (p. 17-70)
The list is not refreshed automatically, click Actualize button to refresh it.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Selecting an item in the Fault Localization list, using the popup menu the user visualize
the alarm list of the selected item.
Select one EVC in the list and click Search > External Navigation to > AS .
Result: The Fault Management window is displayed with selected EVC alarm list.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Alarms
(p. 17-71)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-69
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-70
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-71
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Ethernet Virtual Connections (EVC) span over only one domain, ETB or ETS, at a time.
It is possible to create an End-To-End EVC (E2E EVC), crossing one ETB domain and
one ETS domain, which are connected by Inter-Domain-Links.
E2E EVC Categories
Full E2E EVC is a E2E EVC that is created in the top-down way, it is defined by end
points and other EVC parameters, and the fragment EVCs are created then accordingly.
Full E2E EVC must be consistent, its fragment EVCs must match each other and the E2E
EVC itself. If, for any reason, the consistency is not kept, it becomes a raw E2E EVC.
Raw E2E EVC
Raw E2E EVC is an E2E EVC that is created in the bottom-up way, there are fragment
EVCs, which are joined to create the raw E2E EVC. It is used mainly in the Takeover,
having in the network already existing groups of EVCs, which can be joined into E2E
EVCs. Raw E2E EVC does not have to be consistent with its fragment EVCs. Raw E2E
EVC can be created also from a full E2E EVC, which is not consistent any more. If a raw
E2E EVC reaches a level of full consistency, it can become a full E2E EVC.
EVC Prevented Actions
When an EVC is a part of a Full E2E EVC, any direct modification of its attributes may
affect the E2E EVC it belongs to, and also other fragment EVCs that belong to the same
E2E EVC. Therefore only the EVC attributes User Label, Comment and External Mark
can be modified. The EVC cannot be deleted.
In order to do any of these actions, directly to the EVC, the parent E2E EVC must be
changed to be a Raw E2E EVC, and then all the actions are allowed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-72
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
The Ethernet Virtual Connection List window presents all the EVCs and their attributes.
Related Information
This list can be required also from the Ethernet Service List, from the Ethernet Segment
List, or from the Ethernet Transport Link List. In These cases, only the EVCs associated
to the selected object are displayed.
For more information about EVC, refer to EVC description (p. 17-41).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of EVCs (p. 17-74)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-73
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
User Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-74
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Select Action > Packet > Services > Create E2E EVC.
Result: The Create E2E EVC window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select a Type (Point to Point, Routed Multipoint, Any to Any (also called Multipoint
to multipoint)). if allowed.
Select a Traffic Type (Unicast, Multicast), the selection of the parameter depends on
the selected type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-75
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Select a Resource Sharing (Full, Private UNI, Private Link, Private UNI and LINK).
See Overview (p. 17-43).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter s-Vlan Id the range of the VLAN over SDH path, an equal value can go on the
same domain.
Select the Standard Vlan Type (8100).
Select the Frame Delivery parameters (see Frame delivery (p. 17-45))
Enabled: to remind that the IGMP snooping protocol is not used on top of the
created EVC:
enable the IGMP snooping immediately after having implemented the EVC.
disable the IGMP snooping immediately before de-implemented the EVC.
Disabled: to remind that the IGMP snooping protocol is not used on the created
EVC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To set all the fields in the form with the same value at once:
Select Put entire set to and choose one of the following values:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-76
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
C-VLAN CoS Preservation: check it to keep the Priority Bits through the EVC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-77
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enter an External Mark (optional). It can be used to identify external systems having
relations with the EVC (for example an ownership).
Enter Comment (optional).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: A check is performed. If the check succeeded, the EVC is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-78
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
This function consists in creating a full end to end Ethernet Virtual Connection.
Related Information
Select Action > Packet > Services > Create Full E2E EVC.
Result: The E2E EVC Full Creation window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Choose an existing Ethernet Service by using the sensitive help. If this window
is required from the Service List, this field is automatically filled.
Choose a Service Type (EVPL, EPTL, EPL, EVPLAN, Extended EVPL, Extended
EVPLAN, HSI, BTV, Broadcast).
According to the choice, Type, Traffic Type, and Resource Sharing are assigned as
indicated in Table 17-1, Connection Oriented Service Type relations (p. 17-44).
Select a Type (Point to Point, Routed Multipoint, Any to Any (also called Multipoint
to multipoint)). if allowed.
Select a Traffic Type (Unicast, Multicast), the selection of the parameter depends on
the selected type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-79
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Select a C-VLAN CoS Preservation to keep the Priority Bits through the EVC.
(see: C-VLAN and CoS Preservation (p. 17-46)).
Enter an External Mark (optional). It can be used to identify external systems having
relations with the EVC (for example an ownership).
Enter Comment (optional).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter a value for the VLAN Bundle or a range for the parameter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the NE or the ENE user label by using the sensitive help. (The NEs belonging to
the selected domain are listed).
Select an Edge Port user label by using the sensitive help.
Select the Role of the termination (Root, Leaf, Both).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: A check is performed. If the check succeeded, the EVC is created. The tree
area and the EVC List are updated.
The EVC is created with the following states: Provisioning State set to Defined,
Working State set to Normal.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-80
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-81
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
This function consists in creating a raw end to end Ethernet Virtual Connection.
Related Information
Select Action > Packet > Services > Create Raw E2E EVC.
Result: The E2E EVC Raw Creation window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter an External Mark (optional). It can be used to identify external systems having
relations with the EVC (for example an ownership).
Enter a list of EVC terminations by using Add EVC Termination button. The EVC can
be Connection Oriented or Connection Less. To remove an EVC from the list, use the
Remove EVC button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: A check is performed. If the check succeeded, the EVC is created. The tree
If the User Label is modified, the new User Label must be different from other
already used by another EVC.
Task
Click the right mouse button and select from the popup menu Modify.
Result: The EVC modification window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-83
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The EVC list, the tree area, and the opened graphical views are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-84
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
From the Multi Service GUI Main view, follow the path Action > Packet > Services >
Join E2E EVC.
Result: The Join E2E EVC window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click the EVC List icon to list all the EVCs defined into the domain.
Note: The EVCs can be added to or removed from the list by the icons under EVC List
menu.
Note: Repeat this step for all the needed EVC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-85
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Result: Selected EVCs are listed in the Join E2E EVC window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: A check is performed. If the check succeeded, the join is accomplished.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-86
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-87
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When the PKT is deployed in a network where Network Elements and Ethernet
Connectivity (network wide) are already in place, then the need to take in charge such
Ethernet Connectivity is a must for PKT Network Manager.
Related information
The Full EVC Takeover Online procedure is applicable to all kind of Connection
Oriented, Connection Less and T-MPLS based EVCs and covers all managed topologies.
1. Connection Oriented EVC:
The Takeover is applied at Ethernet Segment Level. The Takeover is applied on all
Ethernet Segments types, unicast and multicast : the EVC which contains them are
automatically updated;
2. Connection Less EVC:
The Takeover is applied directly to the desired EVC. The Takeover is done on all
EVC types
3. Connection T-MPLS EVC:
The Takeover is applied directly to the desired EVC. The Takeover is done on all
EVC types
Note: The usage of the Offline Takeover procedure forces the shutdown and the
subsequent restart of PKT processes in order to let the Takeover Procedure work.
Using this procedure, there is no need to shutdown the services.
Before you begin
Following steps should be done to execute correctly the Takeover with online command:
From MS-GUI main window:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create one or more domains that corresponds to the scenario already acting in field : from
the Construction application
Select Action > Packet > Costruction > Create Domain.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-88
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Insert the User Label, Domain Type, Bridge Type and STP Type compliant with the
attributes already present.
Figure 17-9 Create Domain
Define the Network Elements to the PKT environment : from the Construction
application.
Select Action > Packet > Costruction > Define NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-89
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Insert the User Label, Working Mode and STP Type compliant with the attributes already
present.
Figure 17-10 Define NE
Select the Network Elements to be added from the list, click the confirm button. The
Defined Network Element List updated. When the NEs are added, assign the resources
already present or create them.
Select Action > Packet > Costruction > Assign Resources to Domain.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-90
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The list Network Element window is shown with new NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the Customer is not yet created, create it now, repeat the same operation for Traffic
Description and Traffic Classifier
Select Action > Packet > Services> Create Customer.
Select Action > Packet > Services> Create Traffic Descriptor.
Select Action > Packet > Services> Create Traffic Classifier.
Insert the information compliant with the attributes already present.
Result: The Customer list is shown with new elements.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create one or more EVC (with the Service in automatic mode) that corresponds to the
scenario already acting in field :
Select Action > Packet > Services > (ETS,ETB and T-MPLS)> Create EVC.
Insert the parameters compliant with the attributes already present.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-91
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Important! Define one or more allocated services that should Takeover, the service
must have exactly the same characteristics as the service to Takeover.
Figure 17-11 Create EVC
Perform the Audit and Reservation on all interested Network Elements : select the
interested NEs and from the main menu
Select Action > Packet > Audit Align Reservation> Start AAR procedure.
Insert the information compliant with the attributes already present.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Perform the Audit and Reservation on all interested Network Elements : from the NEs for
Auditlist select the interested NEs and start NE Audit.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-92
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select all interested NEs:Search > Packet > Audit Align Reservation> NEs for
Audit>Start NE Audit.
Insert the information compliant with the attributes already present.
Perform the same operation for Reservation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Perform the Align Up procedure for the Takeover on the involved ports.
Select Action > Packet > Audit Align Reservation> Service Align Up.
Figure 17-12 Align Up window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-93
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Ethernet Segments involved or the EVCs in case of connection less connection
should be in Allocated state.
Start the Takeover procedure:
Select Action > Packet > Services> Takeover>Enable Takeover.
Figure 17-13 Enable Takeover
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-94
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The full Takeover online procedure runs on the allocated services created in
10
Implement the Ethernet Segments or EVCs to complete the Takeover procedure: From the
Ethernet Management application.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Verify that the Takeover is successfully done, the service should be now in Implemented
state.
Note: Verify that the Takeover is successfully done, the service should be now in
Implemented state.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-95
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
T-MPLS Takeover
T-MPLS Takeover description
T-MPLS Takeover Key features:
Define via NPR the physical/logical connectivity supporting T-MPLS, i.e., ethernet
physical-connections or SDH paths. This will result in the definition of links-over-cable /
links-over-SDH in PKT.
Assign via PKT these links to T-MPLS domain. This will result in the definition of
T-MPLS nodes and sections inside PKT database.
Start Takeover operation from T-MPLS domain OR, if only a small part of the network is
involved, from one of the T-MPLS nodes (in this latter case, choice is left to operator
whether to discover all circuits or only those terminating in the node).
This will result (if the circuit were defined correctly in the network) in the tunnels/PWs
objects (in implemented state) inside PKT database.
Check in the lists that tunnels/PWs have been uploaded
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-96
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The procedure permit to take in charge Network Elements and Connectivity when the
PKT is deployed in a network where (network wide) such connectivity is already in place.
Related information
For more information refer to: T-MPLS Takeover description (p. 17-96)
For general procedure description, refer to: Description of main steps (p. 17-96)
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Link Over Cable.
Assign Links Over Cable to T-MPLS domain.
For details refer to the procedure Assign a Link Over Cable to a Domain (p. 14-122).
Result: The selected Links Over Cable are assigned to T-MPLS domain
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-97
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DB.
To check the object creation, refer to the procedure View the list of T-MPLS tunnels
(p. 16-98).
To check the object creation, refer to the procedure View the list of Pseudo Wires
(p. 16-55).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-98
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Color Profile allows the user to define a priority in accepting or rejecting incoming
frames (Red/Yellow/Green). This rule applies when Traffic Descriptor is Regulated and
Policy Control is not Color Blind.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-99
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Color Profile List window presents all the Color Profiles and their attributes.
Related Information
If this list is required from the Ethernet Segment List, only the Color Profiles associated
to the selected Ethernet Segment are displayed.
For more information, refer to Overview about Color Profiles (p. 17-99).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Color Profiles
(p. 17-101)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-100
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-101
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in defining a Color Profile used to describe the flow of Ethernet
frames over an Ethernet Segment.
Related Information
For more information, refer to Overview about Color Profiles (p. 17-99).
Before you begin
Task
Select Action > Packet > Services > Create Color Profile.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the Create Color Profile Window, the following data must be entered.
To create a customer:
If DSCP Mode is selected, Code Point 1 to Code Point 4 Tabs must be set up,
selecting a color (Green, Yellow, or Red).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok button.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-102
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-103
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information, refer to Overview about Color Profiles (p. 17-99).
The Color Profile modification gives the possibility to modify one or all the following
parameters:
If the User Label is modified, the new User Label must be different as one which is
already used by another Color Profile.
The Color Profile must not be associated to any Ethernet Segment or could be
associated to Ethernet Segments in Defined provisioning state.
Task
On the Color Profile List, select the Color Profile to modify. Select with the right mouse
button the path Action from Color Profile > Color Profile Modification.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-104
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If DSCP Mode is selected, Code Point 1 to Code Point 4 Tabs must be set up,
selecting a color (Green, Yellow, or Red).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-105
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok button.
Result: The Color Profile is modified.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-106
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information, refer to Overview about Color Profiles (p. 17-99).
Before you begin
The Color Profile must not be associated to any Ethernet Segment or could be
associated to Ethernet Segments in Defined provisioning state.
Task
On the Color Profile List Window, select the Color Profile to delete. Select with the right
mouse button from the popup menu Action from Color Profile > Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: The Color Profile is deleted.
After confirmation, the Color Profiles are removed and the Color Profile List is
updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-107
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information, refer to Overview about Color Profiles (p. 17-99).
Before you begin
On the Color Profile List Window, select a Color. Select with the right mouse button from
the popup menu Properties.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-108
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Details of a Color Profile (p. 17-110)
Figure 17-15 Color Profile Properties window
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-109
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Id
User Label.
Priority 0 Priority 7.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-110
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Three Traffic Descriptors are created by default during the 1350 OMS PKT installation.
Class of services dependencies
Table 17-2
Traffic
Descriptor
parameters.
CIR.
Best Effort.
Guaranteed.
Regulated.
0.
PIR.
> 0.
CBS.
0.
PBS.
> 0.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-111
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 17-3
Minimum.
Maximum.
Minimum.
Maximum.
CIR.
0 or 8.
Up to PIR.
0 or 64.
Up to PIR.
PIR.
8.
Up to ELR.
64.
Up to ELR.
CBS.
0.
16384.
0.
PBS.
> 0.
16384.
> 0.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-112
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Traffic Descriptor List window presents all the Traffic Descriptors and their
attributes.
Related Information
If this list is required from the Ethernet Segment List, only the Traffic Descriptors
associated to the selected Ethernet Segment are displayed.
For more information, refer to Traffic Descriptor description (p. 17-111).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Traffic
Descriptors (p. 17-114)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-113
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-114
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Traffic Descriptor is used to describe the flow of the Ethernet frames over an Ethernet
Segment.
For more information, refer to Traffic Descriptor description (p. 17-111).
Before you begin
The traffic parameters of the Traffic Descriptor must be different from an existing
ones Traffic Descriptor.
The User Label must be different from the already used by other Traffic Descriptors.
Task
Select Action > Packet > Services > Traffic Descriptor Creation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-115
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the Create Traffic Descriptor Window, the following data must be entered.
To create a Traffic Descriptor:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-116
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter a CBS value (set automatically to '0' if the selected Class of Service is 'Best
Effort').
Enter a PBS value (if the selected Class of Service is 'Guaranteed', PBS value is
automatically set to CBS value - but could be modified).
Click Ok button.
Result: After checking the coherence of the traffic parameters values, the Traffic
Descriptor is created.
The Traffic Descriptor List is updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-117
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the User Label is modified, the new User Label must be different from the one
used by another Traffic Descriptor.
The Traffic Descriptor must not be associated to any Ethernet Segment or could be
associated to Ethernet Segments in Defined provisioning state.
Task
On the Traffic Descriptor List, select the Traffic Descriptor to modify. Select with the
right mouse button the path Modify.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-118
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-119
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok button.
Result: After confirmation of the modification, 1350 OMS PKT checks the
consistence of the traffic parameter values and then, the Traffic Descriptor list is
updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-120
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Traffic Descriptor must not be associated to any Ethernet Segment or could be
associated to Ethernet Segments in Defined provisioning state.
Task
On the traffic descriptor List Window, select the traffic descriptor to delete. Select with
the right mouse button from the popup menu Action from Traffic Descriptor > Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, the Traffic Descriptors are removed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-121
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the Traffic Descriptor List Window, select a TD. Select with the right mouse button
from the popup menu Properties.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-122
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Details of a Traffic Descriptor (p. 17-124)
Figure 17-17 Traffic Descriptor (Ethernet Management) Properties window
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-123
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Id
User Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-124
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When a VlanTag+Priority criteria is defined two flows are considered different if they
have different (or different sets of) VLAN Ids and/or VLAN Priorities.
A classification with IP DSCP/TOS criteria allows to identify distinct flows (at UNI/IWI)
basing on IPv4 frame.
The EthertType classification criteria is based on type/len field of Ethernet frame when it
assumes the Type meaning.
Each Ethernet Segment is characterized by a set of Traffic Classifiers that, in combination
with classification mode (Priority/DSCP), univocally determine which frames belongs to
it.
Each Provider Bridge Ingress Flow is characterized by a set of Traffic Classifiers that, in
combination with Classification Mode ("Priority"/"DSCP"), univocally determine which
frames passes through it. See also IP DSCP/TOS and EtherType (p. 17-7)
Classification criteria are not mutually excluded therefore some combinations of they are
allowed
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-125
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 17-4
Vlan
Priority
DSCP
Specific
or Range
Specific or
Range
Any
value
(except
Don't
care)
Don'tCareSpecific
or Range
EtherType
Don'tCare Any
value
IP
(0x0800)
Note
Priority
Classification Type
SPECIFIC VLAN CLASSIFIER
SPECIFIC VLAN CLASSIFIER +
ETHTYPE
Dscp
Don'tCare Don'tCareSpecific
or Range
or
NotIpPacket
Untagged
Untagged
Any
value
(except
Don't
care)
Don'tCareNotIpPacket
Any
value
Don'tCare Any
value
Tagged
Untagged
UNTAGGED CLASSIFIER
UNTAGGED CLASSIFIER +
ETHTYPE
NotIpPacket
UNTAGGED + NO IP CLASSIFIER
UNTAGGED + NO IP CLASSIFIER +
ETHTYPE
SPECIFIC VLAN + NO IP
SPECIFIC VLAN + NO IP + ETHTYPE
Default
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-126
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-127
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Traffic Classifier List window presents all the Traffic Classifiers and their attributes.
Related Information
If this list is required from the Ethernet Segment List (or VLAN Constraint List), only the
Traffic Classifiers associated to the selected items are displayed.
For more information, refer to Traffic Classifier description (p. 17-125).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Traffic
Classifiers (p. 17-129)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-128
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
VLAN Identifier.
VLAN Max.
Priority Identifier.
DSCP Max.
EtherType.
Priority Max.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-129
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in defining a Traffic Classifier that can be associated to an Ethernet
Segment.
Related Information
Task
Select Action > Packet > Services > Create Traffic Classifier.
Result: The Create Traffic Classifier windows opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-130
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter a VLAN Max (value between 0 and 4095). It represents the maximum value of
VLAN range (0 if a range is not used).
Enter a value for IP DSCP Max (value between 0 and 63).
Select the EtherType.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok button.
Result: After checking the coherence of the traffic parameters values, the Traffic
Classifier is created.
The Traffic Classifier List is updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-131
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The new User Label must be not in use by another Traffic Classifier.
The Traffic Classifier is not in use by any Ethernet Segments.
The Traffic Classifier is associated to one or more Ethernet Segments in the Defined
provisioning state.
Task
On the Traffic Classifier List, select the Traffic Classifier to modify. Select with the right
mouse button the path Modify.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-132
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok button.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-133
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: After confirmation of the modification, 1350 OMS PKT checks the
consistence of the traffic parameter values and then, the Traffic Classifier list is
updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-134
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
On the Traffic Classifier List Window, select the traffic descriptor to delete. Select with
the right mouse button from the popup menu Action > Traffic Classifier > Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, the Traffic Classifier are removed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-135
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the Traffic Classifier List Window, select a Traffic Classifier. Select with the right
mouse button from the popup menu Properties.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-136
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Details of a Traffic Classifier (p. 17-138)
Figure 17-19 Traffic Classifier Properties window
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-137
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Id.
User Label.
Ethernet Segment.
VLAN Max.
Priority Identifier.
Priority Max.
EtherType.
VLAN Id.
DSCP Max.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-138
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Ethernet edge physical ports represent the border of the network managed by the
1350 OMS PKT.
They are the extremities of Ethernet Services, EVCs, and Ethernet Segments and they
represent UNIs and IWIs.
An Ethernet edge physical port is in the Ethernet Domain, the image of an Ethernet
Physical Port (PPT) or an External Termination Point (ETP) in the Construction Domain.
Ethernet edge physical port attributes
The Activation State that tells whether the port is active or not. If active, the port can
carry traffic/is carrying traffic.
The VLAN Type (that identifies the VLAN Tag protocol Type used to distinguish
tagged and untagged frames and to form new VLAN Tags using push operations).
Ethernet edge physical port cannot be explicitly created or deleted by the user: Port is
automatically created when a proper PPT or ETP is created. Port is automatically deleted
when the related Construction object is deleted.
Ethernet edge physical port and VLAN
Whenever a new Ethernet edge physical port is created, it comes with an Activation State
and a VLAN Type that is aligned with what defined in the NE to which the Edge port
belongs. If the edge port is ETP then the Activation State is Down and the VLAN Type is
the default one (that is, 8100 hexadecimal).
In the scope of MEF alignment, a set of attributes is added to Ethernet Edge Port
(intended as UNI).
The Edge ports support the VLAN Type according to the board they belong to. The
boards like ISA PR EA supports any VLAN Type. The boards like ISA PR ES supports
only the standard VLAN. The boards like ISA E/FE/GE and ISA ES1/4 do not support
any VLAN.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-139
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Edge Port List window presents all the edge ports and their attributes.
Related Information
For more information, refer to Ethernet edge physical ports description (p. 17-139).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of ETS Edge Ports
(p. 17-141)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-140
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Network Element.
Rate.
VLAN Type.
Interface Type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-141
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information, refer to Ethernet edge physical ports description (p. 17-139).
Details when modifying the edge port characteristics:
Max Number of EVC: the number of EVC that must be allowed on that UNI. ( > = 1).
Default value:
Yes for ETS, ETS_P, ETB (Virt).
This attribute is checked against the other attributes like: Max Number of EVC,
Bundling and AllToOneBundling. The check is performed at attribute set and at UNI
usage.
Bundling: checked if the EVC can be mapped with one or more VLAN, not checked
The edge port must be not active (for example: activation state equal to Down).
The edge port must not be an ENE edge port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-142
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS Edge Ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the Edge Port List, select the Edge Port to modify. Select with the right mouse button
the path Modify or Action > Modify from the main menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Service Multiplexing.
Bundling.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok button.
Result: After confirmation of the modification: the new attribute values are
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-143
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in configuring the VLAN type of a selected edge port.
Related Information
For more information, refer to Ethernet edge physical ports description (p. 17-139).
Before you begin
The edge port must not be active (for example: activation state equal to Down).
The edge port can be involved in defined Ethernet Segments only.
The edge port must not be an ENE edge port.
Task
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS Edge Ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the Traffic Classifier List, select the Traffic Classifier to modify. Follow the path
Action > ETS Edge Port > Edge Port Configuration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-144
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Vlan Type: Insert the Vlan Type selecting it from the defined Vlan type list.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-145
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok button.
Result: After confirmation of the modification: the VLAN type is downloaded to the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-146
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information, refer to Ethernet edge physical ports description (p. 17-139).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS Edge Ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the ETS Edge Port List Window, select an Edge Port. Select with the right mouse
button from the popup menu Properties.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-147
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Details of an ETS Edge Port (p. 17-149)
Figure 17-22 Edge Port Properties window
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-148
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Network Element.
Rate.
VLAN Type.
Interface Type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-149
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Traffic Parameter List window presents all the information about the traffic
parameters of the selected edge port.
Related Information
This list is filled only when the Edge port is involved in an Ethernet Segment and
contains Traffic Classifier and Traffic Descriptor.
For more information, refer to Ethernet edge physical ports description (p. 17-139).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS Edge Ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the ETS Edge Port List Window, select an Edge Port. Select with the right mouse
button from the popup menu Action from Ets Edge Port > Traffic Parameter List.
Result: The Traffic Parameter List window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Traffic
Parameters (p. 17-151)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Selecting a Traffic Parameter in the list, the corresponding properties window can be
displayed selecting with the right mouse button the item Properties from the popup
menu.
Result: The property window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Details of Traffic Parameters (p. 17-152)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-150
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ethernet Flow.
PIR.
EIR.
VLAN Identifier.
VLAN Range.
Priority Identifier.
Priority Range.
CIR.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-151
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ethernet Flow.
PIR.
EIR.
VLAN Identifier.
VLAN Range.
Priority Identifier.
Priority Range.
CIR.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-152
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Navigation to equipment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Navigation to equipment
When to use
This procedure permits to navigate to the Equipment starting from Edge Port List, with
port selection.
Related Information
For more information about Edge Port, refer to Ethernet edge physical ports description
(p. 17-139).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS Edge Ports.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from Edge Port > External Navigation to > GUI.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-153
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Navigation to equipment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-154
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Ethernet Transport Link represents the elementary link that supports the connectivity
provisioned by the Ethernet Traffic Management Domain, that is, Ethernet links (and by
extensions EVCs and Services).
An Ethernet Transport Link is the image, on the Ethernet Domain, of a Transport Link of
the Construction Domain.
The Ethernet Transport Link cannot be explicitly created or deleted by the user. The
Ethernet Transport Link is automatically created when a Transport Link dedicated to
Ethernet is created and is automatically deleted when the related Transport Link is
deleted.
Transport Link attributes
Important attributes for a Transport Link are the Configuration State and, considering its
extremities, the Activation State and the VLAN Type.
To be able to transport Ethernet traffic, the extremities of the Transport Link must be
"activated", that is, a specific configuration must be performed on the NEs that host
terminations to activate them.
For this reason, at creation time, the Activation State of the Transport Link terminations is
checked (uploading it from the corresponding NEs) and each non-active termination is
activated.
To manage VLAN tagged frames, a port (and in particular an end point of a Transport
Link) must be configured with a proper VLAN Tag Protocol Type (used to distinguish
tagged and untagged frames and to form new VLAN Tags using push operations).
The VLAN Type attribute of the Transport Link extremities is managed in two ways:
at creation time, the VLAN Tag Protocol Type for each Transport Link extremity is
uploaded from the related NEs and the VLAN Type attribute is set. If in the 1350
OMS PKT there is no VLAN Type equivalent of the uploaded VLAN Tag Protocol
Type, a new VLAN Type (with a proper user label) is created to model the latter.
an operation is provided to configure the VLAN Tag Protocol Type of the extremities
of a Transport Link after its creation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-155
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
At any time, the configuration state of an Ethernet Transport Link could be recalculated
and set to:
Configured: If both extremities are active and are configured with the same VLAN
Partially Configured: If only one extremity is active or when both extremities are
active but are configured with two different VLAN Tag protocol types.
Not Configured: If both extremities are not active.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-156
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Ethernet Transport Link List window presents all the Ethernet Transport Links and
their attributes.
Related Information
If this list is required from the Ethernet Segment List, only the Transport Links associated
to the selected Ethernet Segment is displayed.
If this list is required from the VLAN type list, only Transport Links whose edge ports are
associated to the selected VLAN type is displayed.
For details see Overview about Ethernet Transport Links (p. 17-155).
Before you begin
The Transport Link must not be in use by an Ethernet Segment (Its usage state must
be Idle).
The Transport Link must have a SDH or Cable technology.
Task
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-157
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of ETS Transport
Links (p. 17-159)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-158
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Subnetwork.
Guaranteed Bandwidth.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-159
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function permits to change the VLAN Protocol Type of Transport Link extremities.
Related Information
The VLAN Type is not an attribute of the Transport Link. The VLAN Type is an attribute
of its extremities (that is, Transport Link terminations). So, VLAN Type is displayed in
the extremity window of the Transport Link.
For these reasons, while the Edge port modification command acts on one Edge port (and
its attributes), the Transport Link configuration command acts only on the Transport Link
terminations (that is, a shortcut for the user, to avoid him to configure separately the two
terminations.
For details see Overview about Ethernet Transport Links (p. 17-155).
Transport Link states
After confirmation, the Configuration state of the Transport Link is recalculated and set
to:
Configured: if both extremities are active and are configured with the same VLAN
Partially Configured: if only one extremity is active (while the other is not active) or
when both extremities are active but are configured with two different VLAN Tag
Protocol Types.
Not Configured: if both extremities are not active.
The ports at the extremities of the Transport Link are active and configured with the
VLAN Type:
They recognize as tagged only the Ethernet frames that are tagged with the same
VLAN type.
Any push operation (that is, VLAN constraint of type "Push") defined on them uses
the specified VLAN type to create (and push) new VLAN tags.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Conditions
The Transport Link must not be in use by an Ethernet Segment (Its usage state must
be Idle).
The Transport Link must have a SDH or Cable technology.
Task
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS Transport
Links.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the Traffic Classifier List, select the Traffic Classifier to modify. Follow the path
Action > Transport Link > Transport Link Configuration.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select a VLAN Type (by using the sensitive help) or select True for the
Set standard VLAN Type (8100).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok button.
Result: The Transport Link configuration state is changed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-161
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For details see Overview about Ethernet Transport Links (p. 17-155).
Before you begin
The Transport Link must not be in use by an Ethernet Segment (Its usage state must
be Idle).
The Transport Link must have a SDH or Cable technology.
Task
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS Transport
Links.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the Traffic Classifier List, select the Traffic Classifier to modify. Follow the path
Action > Transport Link > Extremities.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-162
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-163
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok button.
Result: After confirmation the extremities data are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-164
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For details see Overview about Ethernet Transport Links (p. 17-155).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS Transport
Links.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the Transport Link List, select the Transport Link to see the properties. Follow the
path Action > Properties.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-165
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-166
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-167
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Id.
User Label.
Subnetwork Id Label.
Subnetwork.
Directionality.
Ethernet Segment.
A END Id label.
Z END Id label.
Forward cost.
Backward cost.
Guaranteed Bandwidth.
Consistency State.
VLAN Id.
VLAN Type.
NAD.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-168
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function gets information about the bandwidth load of a Transport Link.
Related Information
For details see Overview about Ethernet Transport Links (p. 17-155).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS Transport
Links.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the Traffic Classifier List, select the Traffic Classifier to modify. Follow the path
Action Transport Link > Bandwidth Load.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-169
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-170
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following bandwidth checks are executed for SDH and Cable Transport Link:
The sum of all CIR of Ethernet Segments allocated using the Transport Link must be
less or equal the total bandwidth of the Transport Link; this check is executed
separately for forward and backward direction.
The PIR of Ethernet Segment must be less than or equal to of the total bandwidth.
The number of best effort Ethernet Segments must be less than or equal to the
configuration limit.
The PIR, CIR, CBS and PBS of Ethernet Segment must be less than or equal to the
same values associated to Transport Link.
The bandwidth check for multicast connections is executed taking this connection type in
account. If more Ethernet Segments use the same Transport Link, the bandwidth
reservation is considered only for one Ethernet Segment.
For the extremities of the Ethernet Segment, the following bandwidth checks are
executed:
For Aend and Zend: The sum of CIR of the Ethernet Segment that uses the port as
Aend/Zend + the CIR of the Ethernet Segment that is allocating <= rate of the port.
Another check that must be executed is: only one Color Profile can be defined on the
same port; the Color Profile is managed based on port granularity, when a same port is
used by different Ethernet Segment, the same Color Profile must be defined.
A VLAN compatibility check is also performed (that is, verify that the same termination
ingress of connection with the same VLAN is not used more than once).
The Transport Link usage state is set to busy the first time that Transport Link is used by
one Ethernet Segment.
The bandwidth parameters of all involved Transport Links are updated taking into
account the bandwidth configured for the Ethernet Segment; the available bandwidth
(guaranteed) is decreased of the CIR value associated to the Ethernet Segment.
Then, the Ethernet Segment List is updated with, for each selected Ethernet Segment,
Provisioning state set to Allocated.
The provisioning state of the related EVC is updated in Allocated or Partially Allocated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-171
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Ethernet Segment List window presents all the Ethernet Segments and their
attributes.
Related Information
If this list is required from the Ethernet Service, Traffic Descriptor, Traffic Classifier, or
Color Profile list, only the Ethernet Segments associated to the selected the object is
displayed..
See Ethernet Segment description (p. 17-170).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Ethernet
Segments (p. 17-173)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-172
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-173
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Subnetwork.
EVC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-174
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Color Blind: Policy is enabled and based only on Traffic Descriptor parameters.
Color Aware: Policy is enabled and based both on Traffic Descriptor parameters and
on Color Profile.
Color Profile
Traffic Descriptor
Policy Mode = Color Blind: the Traffic Descriptor must be Best Effort or Guaranteed.
Priority Mode
Priority Mode depends on the Policy Mode:
If Policy Mode is Color Blind, choose the Priority Id value between 0 and 7,
Untagged, Do not care. The Priority Id is priority of all the packets after the push.
If Policy Mode is Color Aware, choose Green Priority and Yellow Priority for all
green and yellow outgoing packets.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Conditions
At least, one EVC, one Color Profile, one Traffic Descriptor, and two Edge Physical
Ports must exist.
The User Label must be not in use.
The Edge Physical Port can be in use by another Ethernet Segment provided that it
belongs to the same Ethernet service.
Task
Select Action > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > Create Ethernet
Segment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Choose the EVC Termination or ENE on side "A" and on side "Z" by using the
sensitive help (each termination is composed of 'Network Element'+'User
Label'+'Role').
Choose a Traffic Descriptor by using the sensitive help. See Traffic Descriptor
(p. 17-175).
Select a Policy Mode (Disabled, Color Blind, Color Aware). See Policy Mode
(p. 17-175).
Define a Color Profile by using the sensitive help (Regulated, Best Effort,
Guaranteed). See Color Profile (p. 17-175).
Select the Classification Mode (Priority, DSCP).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Specify a list of Traffic Classifiers references by using the icon that lists the Traffic
Classifier.
Select one or more Traffic Classifier.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-176
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select a Policy Mode (Disabled, Color Blind, Color Aware). See Policy Mode
(p. 17-175).
Select the Priority Id (0, ,7, Untagged, Do not care,Green Priority,Yellow
Priority).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The Ethernet Segment is created into the 1350 OMS PKT with the following
state:
If the usage state of each EVC termination is idle, the usage state is marked busy.
The tree area, the Ethernet Segment list, and the EVC list are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-177
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Traffic Descriptor.
Comment.
If the User Label is modified, the new User Label must not be in use by another
Ethernet Segment.
Task
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > Ethernet
Segments.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-178
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the Ethernet Segment List Window, select the Segment to modify. Click the right
mouse button and select Modify on the popup menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-179
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Choose a new Traffic Descriptor by using the sensitive help, according to the Policy
Mode.
Modify the Color Profile, by using the sensitive help, according to the Policy Mode.
Modify the Classification Mode (Priority, DSCP).
Modify the Comment (optional).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The segment is modified.
If the Ethernet User Label is modified, the tree area, the Ethernet Segment list, and
the opened graphical views are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-180
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in deleting an Ethernet Segment from the 1350 OMS PKT
supervision.
Related Information
Task
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > Ethernet
Segments.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the Traffic Classifier List Window, select the traffic descriptor to delete. Select with
the right mouse button from the popup menu Action > Ethernet Segment > Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, the Ethernet Segments are deleted.
If the Ethernet Edge Physical Port terminating the deleted Ethernet Segments is no
more used by any other Ethernet Segment, the Ethernet Edge Physical Port is marked
as "not busy" (Usage State set to idle).
The provisioning state of parent EVC is recalculated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-181
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Ethernet Segment list, the tree area, and the opened graphical views are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-182
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
From the Multi Service GUI Main view, follow the path Search > Packet > Services >
Connection Oriented (ETS) > Ethernet Segments.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the path Action > ETS Ethernet Segment > Associate Traffic Classifier.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-183
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok button.
Result: After confirmation, the Traffic Classifier is associated to the Ethernet
Segment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-184
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > Ethernet
Segments.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the path Action > ETS Ethernet Segment > Disassociate Traffic Classifier.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-185
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Choose a Traffic Classifier by using the sensitive help (only the associated Traffic
Classifiers to the concerned Ethernet Segment are displayed).
Click Ok button.
Result: After confirmation, the Traffic Classifier is disassociated from the Ethernet
Segment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-186
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > Ethernet
Segments.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the path Action > ETS Ethernet Segment > Add Constraint to an Ethernet
Segment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-187
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-188
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select a Policy Mode (Disabled, Color Blind, Color Aware). See Policy Mode
(p. 17-175).
Select the Priority Id (0, ,7, Untagged, Do not care,Green Priority,Yellow
Priority).
Click Ok button.
Result: If the Constraint List is opened, this window is updated with the new added
constraint.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-189
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in getting the list of constraints related to an Ethernet Segment.
Related Information
Task
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > Ethernet
Segments.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from Ethernet Segment > List Constraints.
Result: The list window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Constraints
(p. 17-191)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-190
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-191
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > Ethernet
Segments.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the traffic Ethernet Segment list Window, select the Ethernet Segment to which the
constraint belongs. Follow the path Search > Inventory from Ethernet Segment > List
Constraints.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-192
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: After confirmation, the Ethernet Segment constraints are dissociated from the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-193
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > Ethernet
Segments.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the path Search > Inventory from Ethernet Segment > List Constraints, select
the constraint in the list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select with the right mouse button from the popup menu Properties.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-194
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Details of an Ethernet Segment Constraint
(p. 17-196)
Figure 17-32 Ethernet Segment constraint properties window
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-195
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Id.
Constrained Class.
Replication Factor.
VLAN Id.
Yellow Priority.
Green Priority.
Priority Mode.
Constraint Class.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-196
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Modify a Constraint
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Modify a Constraint
When to use
VLAN Identifier.
Policy Mode.
Priority Id.
Green Priority.
Yellow Priority.
Task
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > Ethernet
Segments.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the path Search > Inventory from Ethernet Segment > List Constraints, select
the constraint in the list.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-197
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Modify a Constraint
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select with the right mouse button from the popup menu Modify.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-198
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Modify a Constraint
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On Pop Panel.
Execute the following step:
Choose a Traffic Classifier by using the sensitive help and Add button to insert it.
On Push Panel.
Execute the following steps:
Enter a new VLAN Id.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-199
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Vlan Push/Pop mechanism is extended to ETS domain, to allow the encapsulation of
untagged or C-Vlan Tagged Ethernet frames, with a Provider VLAN Tag. This behavior is
used to route the traffic in segregated way either only internally to the managed network
or for inter-working purpose. The difference for this operation is that the definition of
VLAN constraint is performed before the segment allocation. Early definition allows the
VLAN stacking on NNI.
See Ethernet Segment description (p. 17-170).
Sequence of operations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-200
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in finding a route between the end physical ports of the Ethernet
Segment.
Related Information
Task
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > Ethernet
Segments.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-201
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 1350 OMS PKT checks the 'validation' of the Transport Links to be used in term
of traffic type, bandwidth, and continuity of the chosen Transport Links.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-202
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in finding a route between the end physical ports of the Ethernet
Segment.
Related Information
deletion of the VLAN constraints related to each Ethernet Segment is done (no more
VLAN constraint is associated to them).
Then the Ethernet Segment List is updated with provisioning state set to Defined.
The provisioning state of related EVC is updated in Defined or Partially Allocated.
The bandwidth parameters of all involved Transport Links are updated taken into
account the bandwidth freed by the de-allocation.
If the de-allocated segment is the last using the Transport Link, the Transport Link
usage state is set to Idle.
Task
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > Ethernet
Segments.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-203
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 1350 OMS PKT checks the 'validation' of the Transport Links to be used in term
of traffic type, bandwidth, and continuity of the chosen Transport Links.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-204
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The provisioning state of the related EVC is also updated to Implemented or Partially
Implemented.
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-205
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > Ethernet
Segments.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, the 1350 OMS PKT implements the Ethernet Segments.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-206
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The provisioning state of the related EVC is also updated in Allocated or Partially
Implemented.
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-207
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > Ethernet
Segments.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, the 1350 OMS PKT de-implements the Ethernet
Segments.
The Ethernet Segment List is updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-208
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in configuring an Ethernet Segment, that is, assigning a traffic
descriptor to the Ethernet Segment.
Related Information
Task
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > Ethernet
Segments.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-209
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok button.
Result: After confirmation, the traffic descriptor is associated to the Ethernet
Segment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-210
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > Ethernet
Segments.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the path Search > Inventory from Ethernet Segment > Extremities.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-211
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Ethernet Segment
Extremities (p. 17-215)
Figure 17-35 Ethernet Segment Extremities window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify a segment extremity Click Modify Button, for the Origin A following window
is displayed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-212
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Choose a Traffic Classifier by using the sensitive help and Add button to insert it.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-213
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-214
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Rate (A).
Rate (Z).
VLAN Id.
Priority Mode.
Green Priority.
User Label.
Committed Rate.
Rate.
Network Element.
Usage State (Idle, Busy).
Vlan Type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-215
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > Ethernet
Segments.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-216
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Subnetwork.
EVC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-217
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function gets graphical information about the Transport Links used (crossed) by an
Ethernet Segment.
Related Information
With no selection: Begin of Route and End of Route commands allow to highlight the
NE used for the beginning or the end of the route.
With a selected entity (NE, Transport Link, ENE, Off page connector): Begin of
Route and End of Route commands are completed by other commands depending on
the selected entity.
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > Ethernet
Segments.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-218
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-219
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function gets graphical information about the connectivity view of an Ethernet
Segment.
Related Information
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > Ethernet
Segments.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-220
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-221
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The VLAN type entity models the VLAN Tag Protocol Type allowing the user to give a
name (user label) to a specific VLAN Tag Protocol Type (either standard or not) to ease
its subsequent usage in the scope of VLAN management.
The VLAN can be associated to an Ethernet edge port or a Provider Network before the
creation of the Ethernet Segment (mapping model). If VLAN is associated to an Ethernet
Segment (tunneling model), association induces the propagation to the edge ports. A
VLAN Protocol type value could be duplicated according to its usage.
Note: The creation and modification of a VLAN Tag Protocol Type over an active
Ethernet interface has an influence on the active traffic. Only if the Ethernet Interface
is not affected by Active traffic, this operation is allowed. The provisioning state of all
EVCs and all Ethernet Segments using the interface is checked.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-222
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function gets graphical information about the connectivity view of an Ethernet
Segment.
Related Information
Select VLAN.
Result: The list window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of VLAN Types
(p. 17-224)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-223
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-224
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in defining a VLAN Type and a user label to identify it (for
example in the operations of association to Edge Ports).
Related Information
To give maximum flexibility to the user, creation of two or more VLAN types with the
same VLAN Tag Protocol Type is possible.
See Overview about VLAN types (p. 17-222).
Before you begin
Task
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > VLANs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-225
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-226
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter a VLAN Tag Protocol Type (hexadecimal value between 05dd a ffff ).
If Protocol Type is equal to 8100 (hex), Role attribute is set to Customer otherwise Role is
set to Provider.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-227
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the User Label is modified, the new User Label must be not in use by another
VLAN Type.
The VLAN type must not be not in use by any Provider Network, Edge Port,
Transport link, or Transport link end point.
Task
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > VLANs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-228
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If new VLAN Tag Protocol Type is equal to 8100 (hex), Role attribute is set to Customer
otherwise Role is set to Provider.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-229
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in deleting a VLAN type from the 1350 OMS PKT supervision.
Related Information
The VLAN type must not be used. It must not be associated to any provider network,
edge port, or Transport Link end point.
Task
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > VLANs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the traffic VLAN list Window, select the VLAN Type to delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, the VLAN types are removed and the VLAN Type List is
updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-230
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Additional section
Display the Services of a Customer
When to use
If the list is required from Main Menu, all the Ethernet Services are displayed.
If the list is required from the Customer List, only the Ethernet services associated to
the selected customer are displayed.
If the list is required from Ethernet Transport Link List, only the Ethernet services
associated to the selected Ethernet Transport Links are displayed.
For more information about Services, refer to Ethernet Service description (p. 17-20).
Before you begin
Select Service.
Result: The list window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Services
(p. 17-25)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-231
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
No related information.
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > Domains.
Result: The Domain list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of OAM MDs
(p. 17-234)
See the following topic in this document:
Description of the list of OAM MDs (p. 17-234).
Description of the list of OAM MAs (p. 17-235).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-232
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-233
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-234
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-235
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-236
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-237
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information about EVC, refer to EVC description (p. 17-41).
Before you begin
Follow the menu path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS
EVCs.
Result: The ETS EVC list is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the EVC in the list and follow the path Action > ETS EVC > Allocate.
Result: The confirmation box is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: The EVC is allocated.
The EVC list, the tree area, and the opened graphical views are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-238
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information about EVC, refer to EVC description (p. 17-41).
Before you begin
Follow the menu path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS
EVCs.
Result: The ETS EVC list is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the EVC in the list and follow the path Action > ETS EVC > Deallocate.
Result: The confirmation window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: The EVC is deallocated.
The EVC list, the tree area, and the opened graphical views are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-239
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information about EVC, refer to EVC description (p. 17-41).
Before you begin
Follow the menu path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS
EVCs.
Result: The ETS EVC list is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the EVC in the list and follow the path Action > ETS EVC > Implement.
Result: The confirmation box is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: The EVC is Implemented.
The EVC list, the tree area, and the opened graphical views are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-240
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information about EVC, refer to EVC description (p. 17-41).
Before you begin
Follow the menu path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS
EVCs.
Result: The ETS EVC list is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the EVC in the list and follow the path Action > ETS EVC > Deimplement.
Result: The confirmation window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: The EVC is deallocated.
The EVC list, the tree area, and the opened graphical views are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-241
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information about EVC, refer to EVC description (p. 17-41).
Before you begin
Follow the menu path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS
EVCs.
Result: The ETS EVC list is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the EVC in the list and follow the path Action > ETS EVC > Commission.
Result: The confirmation box is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: The EVC is commissioned.
The EVC list, the tree area, and the opened graphical views are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-242
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information about EVC, refer to EVC description (p. 17-41).
Before you begin
Follow the menu path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS
EVCs.
Result: The ETS EVC list is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the EVC in the list and follow the path Action > ETS EVC > Decommission.
Result: The confirmation window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: The EVC is decommissioned.
The EVC list, the tree area, and the opened graphical views are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-243
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Start PM on an EVC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Start PM on an EVC
When to use
For more information about EVC, refer to EVC description (p. 17-41).
For more information about PM, refer to Quality of service: PM management
(p. 11-73).
Before you begin
Select Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS EVCs or Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge
EVCs.
Result: The EVC list is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the EVC in the list and follow the path Action > EVC > Start PM.
Result: The PM is started on the EVC.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-244
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Stop PM on an EVC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Stop PM on an EVC
When to use
For more information about EVC, refer to EVC description (p. 17-41).
For more information about PM, refer to Quality of service: PM management
(p. 11-73).
Before you begin
Select Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS EVCs or Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge
EVCs.
Result: The EVC list is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the EVC in the list and follow the path Action > EVC > Stop PM.
Result: The PM is Stopped on the EVC.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-245
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Synchronize PM on an EVC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Synchronize PM on an EVC
When to use
For more information about EVC, refer to EVC description (p. 17-41).
For more information about PM, refer to Quality of service: PM management
(p. 11-73).
Before you begin
Select Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS EVCs or Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge
EVCs.
Result: The EVC list is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the EVC in the list and follow the path Action > EVC > Synchronize PM.
Result: The PM is Synchronized on the EVC.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-246
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Show PM on an EVC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Show PM on an EVC
When to use
For more information about EVC, refer to EVC description (p. 17-41).
For more information about PM, refer to Quality of service: PM management
(p. 11-73).
Before you begin
Select Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS EVCs or Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge
EVCs.
Result: The EVC list is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the EVC in the list and follow the path Search > EVC > Show > PM.
Result: The PM related to the EVC is shown.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-247
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function Shows Performance Monitoring (PM) on a Connection Oriented Edge Port
or Connection Less Edge Port.
Related Information
For more information about Edge Port, refer to Ethernet Edge Port management
(p. 11-54).
For more information about PM, refer to Quality of service: PM management
(p. 11-73).
Before you begin
Select Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS Edge Ports or Connection Less (Bridge) >
Bridge Edge Ports.
Result: The Edge Ports list is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Edge Ports in the list and follow the path Search > Edge Port > Show > PM.
Result: The PM related to the Edge Port is shown.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-248
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function starts Routing Display on a Connection Oriented EVC or Connection Less
EVC.
Related Information
For more information about EVC, refer to EVC description (p. 17-41).
Before you begin
Select Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS EVCs or Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge
EVCs.
Result: The EVC list is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the EVC in the list and follow the path Search > EVC > Routing Display.
Result: The Routing Display is started on the EVC.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-249
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information about Edge Port, refer to Ethernet edge physical ports description
(p. 17-139).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS Edge Ports.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Edge Port > Show > External Termination Point.
Result: The External Termination Point list is shown.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
17-250
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
18
18
Bridge
Network
Management
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes how to set up a Connection Less network (Provider Bridge).
Contents
Connection Less Networks
18-4
18-4
18-6
18-8
VLAN management
18-10
18-11
18-13
18-16
18-18
18-22
18-22
18-24
18-25
18-29
18-32
18-33
18-35
18-36
18-36
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-37
18-38
18-43
18-46
18-48
18-50
18-51
18-53
18-56
18-57
Navigation to AS
18-58
18-60
18-60
18-61
18-62
18-71
18-73
18-75
18-77
18-78
18-78
Create a Domain
18-80
Add NE to a Domain
18-82
Domain Configuration
18-85
Domain Modification
18-87
18-89
18-91
18-93
Create a Customer
18-96
18-99
18-101
18-103
18-105
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-105
Function Description
18-106
Service Delimiting
18-111
18-111
18-113
18-113
18-114
18-115
18-116
18-117
18-118
18-119
18-120
18-121
18-122
18-123
18-124
18-126
18-127
18-128
18-129
18-130
18-131
18-132
18-133
18-134
18-135
18-136
18-139
18-140
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A provider bridge network brings the following main added values with respect to a
virtual bridge one:
If different customers use the same C-VLAN, for each customer a different P-VLAN
is stacked over that C-VLAN. Stacking segregates the traffic sourced by one customer
from the one sourced by the other, inside the provider network.
It is possible to perform in the NE traffic classification and traffic description of the
ingress frames at the edge of the provider domain:
Traffic classification allows sharing an IWI interface among different customers.
The introduction of the ISA ES family allows offering Ethernet bridging functionality
over SDH network and cables.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network construction.
Bridge infrastructure management including: Transport link activation/deactivation.
Bridge traffic management including:
EVC association to bridge infrastructure.
Manual or automatic VLAN distribution inside 1350 OMS PKT resources.
Maintenance management.
Utilities.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Bridge EVC
One EVC is an elementary EVC that spans the scope of a single bridge domain. In case of
MAC domain, no VLAN are managed and there exists at most only one EVC for the
domain. In case of Virtual or Provider domain, more EVC can insist on the same domain.
The EVC is associated to a set of edge ports of a bridge domain. EVC association to
domain is automatic for MAC or when the edge ports are specified at EVC creation-time:
the terminations of one EVC must correspond to edge ports belonging to the same bridge
domain. All or a subset of the domain edge ports can be selected as EVC terminations (all
by default in a MAC domain).
In case of Virtual or Provider domain, one EVC is optionally characterized by one VLAN
bundle, that is, a group of VLAN. Moreover, in case of Provider domain, we have to
distinguish the outer VLAN, that is, the C-VLAN, from the inner VLAN carried inside
the domain, namely the P-VLAN. This distinction is expressed by means of a
C-VLAN/P-VLAN mapping. The C-VLAN/P-VLAN mapping is defined at EVC level
since it must be uniform for all EVC terminations. Any given inner VLAN can be
associated to only one EVC supported by the same domain.
EVC Terminations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
One Ethernet interface (either local or remote) in case of MAC Bridge Termination.
One set of ETB virtual ports insisting on the same Ethernet interface in case of Virtual
Bridge Termination. This set the set of ETB virtual ports corresponding to the
C-VLAN of the EVC ( One ETB virtual port correspond to one C-VLAN).
One ETS flow or set of ETS flows in case of Provider Bridge Termination. The flow
or set of flows referenced by the Traffic Classifiers is associated with the C-VLAN of
the EVC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-7
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In Connection Less networks based on Bridge solution, the risk of network loop and
packet flooding can lead to network congestion. The usage of Spanning Tree Protocols
adds robustness to the network, as the active topology is automatically recalculated by the
ISA boards after the detection of one of the following conditions:
Network congestion can be avoided supplying a tree topology to the internal used
resources. The tree topology can be obtained in two different ways:
Manually by the user: the user statically shapes a tree in the network manually
configuring Transport Links to be used.
Automatically by ISA Boards: the user configures and enables the usage of Spanning
Tree Protocols inside a given Domain (STP/RSTP/PVSTP/MSTP) to let ISA Boards
to autonomously determine an active tree shape (also called active topology) inside
the network.
STI resources
The spanning tree instance (STI) is the set of NE, ENE and Ports carrying control frames
(BPDU) that participate to the same distributed computation. The spanning tree NE
(ST-NE) represents the image of one NE or ENE in the scope of the STI.
Each ST-Termination is characterized by a port state and a port forced state. The port state
tells whether the port is forwarding or discarding data frames in the scope of the STI. The
port forced state tells whether the control on the port state is delegated to the network
(dynamic forced state) or manually constrained by user (blocked or forwarding forced
state). The ST-termination port forced state can be configured acting on the ST-link, that
means, configuring both end-points with one single operation.
Port configuration
On a per-STI basis, configuring the port forced state to forced blocking. One or more
ST-links can be manually excluded from the data forwarding process. On the other hand,
configuring the port forced state to forced forwarding implies that the ST-link is
constrained to participate to packet forwarding.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-8
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In both cases, either configuring the port forced state to forced blocking or forwarding,
the ST-links are manually excluded from the network computation: these links belong or
not to a static tree topology due to the constraints of the user. A failure on forced
forwarding links is not recovered by the spanning tree protocol.
The active STI is constituted by NE, ENE and Ports carrying both BPDU and customer
data frames. The Ports belonging to the spanning tree instance (STI) are NNI interfaces
carrying control frames (BPDU): the active NNI interfaces carry both customer data
frames and control frames. A distributed computation (control frame forwarding)
determines dynamically which interfaces must actually forward data frames. The active
spanning tree is a dynamic snapshot of the network status.
Static tree topology
A static tree topology is a subset of the active STI, built by user forcing manually the
control plane port forced state to forwarding for all ST-Terminations in the tree. The user
can statically determine part or all of the STI active topology. A static tree topology can
introduce loops in the network.
The number of spanning tree instances for a domain depends on the associated STP type:
Each STI represents a control plane, namely a virtual infrastructure dedicated to the
transport of control frames (that is, the BPDU carrying the spanning tree computation). A
dedicated set of BPDU is exchanged for each STI.
By design choice, the EVC is always associated to a single spanning tree instance (STI),
whatever STP type is running. to have a service exploiting different spanning tree
instances, we must define different EVC for that service. The associated STI can be
shared with other EVC. As a consequence, in case of PVSTP, the EVC must be
characterized by a single VLAN.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-9
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
VLAN management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VLAN management
Overview
Virtual LANs are introduced for segmenting the network into different broadcast (or
multicast) domains. The VLAN-Id is used to forward Ethernet traffic only toward those
Ethernet ports (UNI) that are members of a given VLAN, ensuring that the tagged frames
are only accessible by the proper end-user and therefore realizing traffic segregation.
4096 different VLAN can be used in one Ethernet network.
VLAN management helps solving security and privacy, bandwidth management, and
increasing the performance.
The use of VLAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-10
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Each EVC spanning the scope of a bridge domain has an associated data plane and active
topology. The EVC data plane is the set of NE, ENE and Ports enabled to carry user data
frames belonging to that EVC. It contains the set of NE and Ports where the set of VLAN
characterizing the EVC has to be distributed.
The EVC active topology is the set of NE, ENE and Ports belonging to the same Domain
and actually carrying user data frames. For example, the active topology differs from the
data plane when a link is blocked by the spanning tree computation to avoid loops. In
fact, the EVC active topology is actually the projection of the EVC data plane onto the
active topology of the STI supporting the EVC: the data path for the EVC is therefore
obtained keeping into account both the VLAN distribution and the dynamic computation
of the associated STI.
The EVC data plane and active topology are also virtual entities since they are specific
for the VLAN bundle characterizing the EVC and, therefore, are specific for that EVC.
Data frames characterized by different VLAN Id can generally follow different data paths
across the bridge network, but data frames belonging to same EVC are constrained, by
design choice, to follow the same data path to allow QoS management on a per-EVC
basis.
When edge ports (that is, UNI or IWI interfaces) are associated to the EVC, they belong
to the EVC data plane but not to the active STI topology, since control frames coming
from CE or from another domain must be filtered or tunneled. UNI and IWI interfaces are
not allowed to enter the active STI topology.
On the other hand, NNI Transport Links can belong to both EVC data plane and active
STI topology: they can carry both data frames and control frames.
Active topology
The Ports belonging to the EVC active topology are therefore characterized by:
The VLAN characterizing the EVC are in the Port member set.
Forced port state equal to forced forwarding (namely they are part of the STI static
active Topology) or.
Forced port state equal to dynamic and port state equal to forwarding (namely, they
are part of the STI dynamic active topology).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-11
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Following table summarizes the port forced-state relation with EVC active topology.
Forced-state/ Plane.
Control frame
forwarding.
Data frame
forwarding.
EVC Active
Topology.
Forced-blocking.
No.
No.
No.
Forced-forwarding.
No.
Yes.
Yes.
Dynamic.
Yes.
Decided by network
computation.
Decided by network
computation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-12
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The EVC life cycle is tightly related to the life cycle of the associated EVC data plane
and that of the supporting STI.
At Domain activation time, the default STP protocol type is enabled on all NE and also
the NNI Ports are activated. This activations implies that control frames are allowed to
flow in the network. In case of STP/RSTP/MSTP, the default STI is therefore
implemented in the network. The default STI is referred as the CIST (Common Instance
Spanning Tree) in case of MSTP. We extend this terminology also to the case of
STP/RSTP, where it represents the only instance available.
In case of MAC Domain, only one EVC is created automatically by the system at Domain
activation time. In case of Virtual or Provider Domain, the EVC must be explicitly
created by user and more than one EVC can insist on the same Domain.
EVC creation or modification
At creation/modification time, the EVC is associated to a set of edge ports and, in case of
Virtual or Provider Domain, to a set of VLAN. Association to edge ports implies the
automatic association with the underlying Domain. The EVC is characterized by a
full-mesh/ not full-mesh attribute used to drive the VLAN distribution inside 1350 OMS
PKT resources (at EVC data plane allocation time). In case of Provider Bridge, user must
specify a C-VLAN/P-VLAN mapping.
At EVC Termination creation/modification time, user can optionally specify a default
user priority on a per-Port basis (in case of MAC Bridge or Virtual Bridge edge port). In
case of Virtual Bridge only, the user can also specify an 801.2p priority bit regeneration
table.
The EVC data plane is one-to-one with the EVC and is automatically defined at EVC
creation time. Similarly, the EVC data plane is automatically deleted at EVC deletion
time. to allow EVC allocation, the EVC data plane must be allocated first. EVC data
plane allocation means defining the physical infrastructure for the data plane. The system
must include the VLAN in the EVC bundle in the VLAN member set of the ports that are
part of the virtual data plane specific for that EVC. All VLANs in the EVC share the same
virtual data plane.
EVC data plane allocation implies VLAN distribution to Edge Ports, corresponding to the
VLAN distributed on EVC Terminations. The UNI/IWI association to EVC data plane is
therefore automatically established by the system. The VLAN of each EVC Termination
is allocated on the respective UNI/IWI.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-13
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The VLAN in the EVC bundle have to be uniformly allocated to the NNI. The NNI
association is performed either manually (not full-mesh case) or automatically (full-mesh
case).
In case of full-mesh, the association is performed at EVC data plane allocation-time: the
system automatically distributes the VLAN in 1350 OMS PKT MIB to all Transport
Links (that is, NNI Ports) in the Domain. In case of not full-mesh, the user must use a
specific function to add/remove a set of Transport Links to the allocated EVC data plane.
EVC allocation
To summarize, when a full-mesh EVC Data Plane is allocated, all VLAN in the bundle
are distributed to all edge ports and Transport Links in the domain. In case of not
full-mesh, the allocation operates only on edge ports, while the user has to add the
selected set of Transport Links; then the system automatically and uniformly distributes
all VLAN in the bundle to the selected Transport Links. to perform a non-uniform VLAN
allocation over the Transport Links used by a service, the user is therefore required to use
different EVC.
EVC allocation means to select a supporting STI and to associate the selected STI to the
set of VLAN characterizing the EVC. The way to select a STI for the EVC depends on
the domain STP type:
None: spanning tree instance is not supported and the infrastructure must be a tree
topology. The user must ensure that the topology is loop-free.
STP/RSTP: the default spanning tree instance (the CIST) is implicitly selected by the
system. The CIST is automatically implemented at domain activation time.
PVSTP: for the single VLAN characterizing the EVC, a new STI is automatically
allocated by the system at EVC allocation time.
MSTP.
In this case, the user has two possibilities:
Allocate the EVC over an existing STI (the CIST by default).
Require to allocate the EVC over a new STI to be automatically created and
allocated by the system.
Provisioning details
EVC de-allocation implies losing the relation with the supporting STI. If the STI is not
the CIST, at de-allocation time of the last EVC, the supporting STI is automatically
deleted. The CIST is automatically de-implemented at bridge domain deactivation time.
The EVC Data Plane de-allocation can be performed individually or cascaded
automatically after EVC de-allocation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-14
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The EVC Data Plane de-allocation is a pre-condition for EVC deletion. The EVC Data
Plane de-allocation consists in removing of the VLAN characterizing the EVC from the
Edge Ports (that is, UNI/IWI Ports) and from all associated Transport Links (that is, NNI
Ports). Therefore, the EVC data plane de-allocation behaves in the same way both in case
of full-mesh and not full-mesh EVC. In case of not full-mesh EVC, the user can remove
one or more Transport Links from the allocated EVC data plane, before implementing it.
To allow EVC implementation, the supporting STI and the EVC data plane must be
implemented first.
STI implementation means that any new STI is instantiated on the ISA NE (only in case
of MSTI) and that the STP parameters are provisioned on the ISA NE (only NNI Ports).
The CIST is automatically implemented at bridge domain activation time.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-15
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The user optionally defines, on EVC basis, which control Protocol must be tunneled or
discarded. Such configuration must be propagated to all EVC terminations to ensure that
all EVC terminations use the same Tunneling criteria. A check is needed also toward
Layer-2 Control Protocol Processing defined at UNI level. This check allows a congruent
management of Control protocols crossing the EVC.
In case of Connection Oriented EVC, the value defined for the EVC is predefined to
Tunnel for all L2 Control Protocols and this value is propagated to contained Ethernet
Segments.
In case of Provider Bridge based EVC, the value can be freely defined by the user for the
EVC. The value is propagated to all EVC Terminations.
In case of MAC Bridge or Virtual Bridge based EVC, the EVC is always tunneling (the
UNI setting is fully operative).
If the Layer-2 Protocol Processing is not defined at EVC level, then this definition is
delegated to each single EVC Termination (for Provider Bridge Based EVCs) while for
Ethernet Segment (Connection Oriented EVCs) is fixed to Tunnel for all L2 Protocols.
This way to operate is maintained as backward compatible with previous 1350 OMS PKT
releases but is not considered as MEF compliant because do not ensure that at EVC level
a common policy on Control Protocols is applied.
During EVC Definition, for each used UNI, a check is performed respect to the Max
Number of EVC defined on each UNI.
L2 Control Protocols
L2 Control Protocols
Control Protocol.
Discard.
Tunnel
(default
for all
protocols).
Data Frames.
Yes.
Yes.
Yes.
Yes.
Notes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-16
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 18-1
L2 Control Protocols
Control Protocol.
(continued)
Discard.
Tunnel
(default
for all
protocols).
Yes.
Yes.
Slow Protocols.
Yes.
Yes.
802.1X PAE.
Yes.
Yes.
Provider GVRP.
Yes.
Yes.
Bridge Management.
Yes.
Yes.
Customer GMRP.
Yes.
Yes.
Customer GVRP.
Yes.
Yes.
Notes.
Bandwidth profiles
The bandwidth profiles defined for each EVC termination have to be intended in the
following way:
In case of Connection Less EVCs based on Provider Bridge, the bandwidth profiles
defined for each EVC termination represents the bandwidth profile for the traffic at
the ingress of that UNI (and it is immediately checked).
In case of Connection Less EVCs based on Virtual Bridge, the bandwidth profiles
defined for each EVC are automatically defined as Best Effort Class Of Service
having the PIR fully equal to the UNI rate.
In case of Connection Less EVCs based on MAC Bridge, the bandwidth profiles
defined for each EVC are automatically inherited from UNI characteristics (in fact all
UNI of a MAC Bridge supports only the Bandwidth Profile per UNI) and the traffic
parameters.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-17
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Each Bandwidth Profile configured on a given UNI represent the way the traffic entering
in ingress to that UNI is shaped and managed in term of Bandwidth. The following
possible values for Bandwidth Profile are manageable at UNI level:
Bandwidth Profile per UNI (p. 18-18). Bandwidth description is shared for all
connection starting from this ingress UNI.
Bandwidth Profile per EVC (p. 18-18). Bandwidth description is shared for all
connection starting from this UNI in the scope of this EVC. Each EVC has one or a
group of VLAN.
Bandwidth Profile per CoS (p. 18-18). The bandwidth applies to traffic defined by
one or a group of VLAN and one Priority bit.
The Bandwidth Profile is configured with a bandwidth description on the edge port before
having created any service on this port. In this case, all the services that start on this UNI
share this bandwidth (in the limits described in the profile). The provisioning is
accomplished by means of the management of the FlowGroup concept. For each EVC
Connection Oriented based starting from this UNI, the UNI Bandwidth profile is
propagated along the used route (the pseudo CAC implemented at 1350 OMS PKT level
takes into account either current per flow Traffic Descriptors and FlowGroup Traffic
Descriptor). In case of UNI belonging to MAC bridges, traffic parameters are
automatically defined as Best Effort CoS with the PIR value equal to the UNI rate.
Bandwidth Profile per EVC
The bandwidth profile is supplied during each termination addition describing the
bandwidth usable and shared for all the connection of the considered EVC. This setting
applies on the added termination only; that is, one port used by the EVC can work in per
EVC mode and another port used by the same EVC can work in per Cos mode. The
provisioning is accomplished by means of the management of the FlowGroup concept.
For each EVC Connection Oriented based starting from this UNI, the UNI Bandwidth
profile is propagated along the used route (the pseudo CAC implemented at 1350 OMS
PKT level takes into account either current per flow Traffic Descriptors and FlowGroup
Traffic Descriptor).
Bandwidth Profile per CoS
The bandwidth profile is described by one VLAN or group and one Priority bit or set of
bits. This profile is applicable for one EVC termination: so the EVC termination is used
per Cos or is used per EVC. The description of the bandwidth profile is done by the way
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-18
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
of one Traffic Descriptor composed of Bandwidth profile attributes (CIR, PIR, CBS,
PBS) and also one QoS attribute, standing for the description of the PHB (Per Hop
Behavior), that is, the internal NE mode for managing the traffic. The PHB (Per Hop
Behavior), represents, on equipment base, the QoS expected by a Customer at EVC level
(that is, on Per Network Behavior).
The QoS definition
The QoS attribute can be automatically determined by the 1350 OMS PKT from the
bandwidth parameter values supplied in the profile. This behavior is the default behavior
but, to remain as flexible as the equipment (introducing 8 QoS following the same
formula for the profile values), the user can force this value to a specific one according to
the equipment formula.
In addition to the Traffic Descriptor, two other concepts complete the QoS definition:
the Policy mode: such management is today aligned with IETF and whose extension
in the scope of MEF compliancy is in the scope of 1350 OMS PKT.
The Color Profile: such management is aligned with IETF concepts for Color Aware
traffic management. This management is not considered MEF. The Color Profile
management, is maintained unchanged in respect to previous 1350 OMS PKT
releases. The user must plan the usage or not.
The Bandwidth Profile per UNI is one of the possible management definable on UNI
basis relatively to MEF compliancy.
The Bandwidth Profile Per UNI is described by the following attributes:
This management is mutually exclusive with the two other possible management
(Bandwidth Profile per EVC and Bandwidth Profile per EVC per Cos). The Bandwidth
Profile per UNI must be defined on a given UNI in two ways:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-19
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following table reports the known operations at NE configuration or at Port upload.
Table specify the manual operation needed or the predefined default operation.
UNI Configuration.
Bandwidth (BWD)
Profile allowed.
Default Value.
Modification
Allowed.
ETS.
/.
ETS (Provider
Bridge).
/.
Per UNI.
CIR=PIR=Port
Rate.
NO.
Per UNI.
CIR=PIR=Port
Rate.
NO.
After having configured a UNI supporting a Bandwidth Profile per UNI, each EVC using
that port inherits, from that UNI the same Bandwidth profile for traffic entering from that
UNI. All the EVCs instantiated as entering from that UNI use the same Bandwidth
profile).
From the traffic point of view, all traffic entering in a UNI (from a CE) is in competition
with other traffics for the probability to be transmitted in the transport network.
An EVC using a UNI being configured with a Bandwidth Profile per UNI can use other
UNIs having different Bandwidth Profiles configured (either per UNI, Per EVC, Per
CoS).
EVC provisioning
When an EVC lying on an ETS domain uses a UNI defined to support a Bandwidth
Profile per UNI, the Ethernet Segment starting from that UNI inherits (as Traffic
Descriptor Definition) the information defined in that Bandwidth profile.
When the EVC is allocated, this implying the allocation of contained Ethernet Segments,
that TD (reflecting the BwdProfilePerUNI) is propagated along the route of the Ethernet
Segment.
When the EVC is Implemented, this implying the implementation of contained Ethernet
Segments, that TD (reflecting the BwdProfilePerUNI) is provisioned on all affected NEs
along the route of the Ethernet Segment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-20
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When an EVC lying on an ETB Provider Bridge domain uses a UNI defined to support a
Bandwidth Profile per UNI, the EVC Termination (reflecting the traffic entering from that
UNI) inherits (as Traffic Descriptor Definition) the information defined in that Bandwidth
profile.
This inheritance can happen both at EVC Definition and during EVC Termination
Adding.
The Traffic Descriptor reflecting the BwdProfilePerUNI is defined and associated to the
EVC Termination.
When the EVC is Implemented, this implying the implementation of EVC Termination,
the TD that reflects the BwdProfilePerUNI, is provisioned on the affected NEs.
ETB Virtual and MAC Bridge Case:
When an EVC lying on an ETB Virtual or MAC Bridge domain uses a UNI defined to
support a Bandwidth Profile per UNI, the EVC Termination (reflecting the traffic entering
from that UNI) inherits (as Traffic Descriptor Definition) the information defined in that
Bandwidth profile.
This inheritance can happen both at EVC Definition and during EVC Termination
Adding.
The TD reflecting the BwdProfilePerUNI is defined and associated to that EVC
Termination.
When the EVC is Implemented, nothing happens on NEs, because in the scope of Virtual
and MAC bridge no provisioning is possible in terms of Traffic Descriptors.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-21
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Ethernet Transport Link List window presents all the Ethernet Transport Links and
their attributes.
Related Information
If this list is required from the VLAN type list, only Transport Links whose edge ports are
associated to the selected VLAN type, are displayed.
For general information about Transport Links, see: Transport link management
(p. 11-53).
Before you begin
The Transport Link must not be in use by an Ethernet Segment (Its usage state must
be Idle).
The Transport Link must have an SDH or Cable technology.
Task
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-22
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Bridge Transport
Links (p. 18-24)
Figure 18-1 Connection Less Transport Link List
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-23
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The attributes displayed for each Bridge (Connection less) Transport Link are:
User Label.
Subnetwork.
Total Bandwidth.
Domain.
Domain Type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-24
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function permits to change the VLAN Protocol Type of Transport Link extremities.
Related Information
For information about Transport Link management, see: Overview about Transport
Links (p. 15-20).
The VLAN Type is not an attribute of the Transport Link. The VLAN Type is an attribute
of its extremities (that is, Transport Link terminations). So, VLAN Type is displayed in
the extremity window of the Transport Link.
For these reasons, while the Edge port modification command acts on one Edge port (and
its attributes), the Transport Link configuration command acts only on the Transport Link
terminations. The command is a shortcut for the user, not to configure separately the two
terminations.
The ports at the extremities of the Transport Link are active and configured with the
VLAN Type and, hence:
They recognize as tagged only the Ethernet frames that are tagged with this VLAN
type.
Any push operation (that is, VLAN constraint of type "Push") defined on them uses
the specified VLAN type to create (and push) new VLAN tags.
PCP Table Profile possible values are As Container, 5P3D, 6P2D, 7P1D, 8P0D; to be
assigned in compliance with the NE, as listed:
On node basis, ES1/4 admits the values: 5P3D (default on node basis), 8P0D.
On node basis, ES16 admits the values: 5P3D (default on node basis), 8P0D.
On port basis, ES1/4 does not admit any PCP Port table profile.
On port basis, ES16 admits the values: as Container (This value is the default on Port
Basis [default=0] mirroring the value defined on Node basis), 5P3D, 6P2D, 7P1D,
8P0D.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Conditions
The Transport Link must not be in use by an Ethernet Segment (Its usage state must
be Idle).
The Transport Link must have an SDH or Cable technology.
Task
follow the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less > Transport Link.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-26
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PVID.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-27
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PCP Table Profile. See PCP Table Profile compliant with NE (p. 18-25).
Select a VLAN Type (by using the sensitive help) or set the Set standard VLAN Type
(8100) value to true.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok button.
Result: After confirmation, the Configuration state of the Transport Link is
Configured: if both extremities are active and are configured with the same
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-28
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Transport Link management, see: Overview about Transport
Links (p. 15-20).
Before you begin
Follow the path: Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less > Transport Link.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the path Search > Inventory from Transport Link > Extremities.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-29
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Transport Link
extremities (p. 18-32)
Figure 18-3 Transport Link Extremities window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-30
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Change parameters.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok button.
Result: The Transport Link extremities attributes are changed consequently.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-31
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network Element.
Activation State.
PVID.
VLAN Type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-32
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Transport Link management, see: Overview about Transport
Links (p. 15-20).
Before you begin
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less > Transport Link.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-33
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Details of an ETB Transport Link
(p. 18-35)
Figure 18-4 Transport Link Properties window
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-34
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Id.
User Label.
Subnetwork Id Label.
Subnetwork.
A END Id label.
Z END Id label.
VLAN Id.
VLAN Type.
Domain Id.
Domain.
Domain Type.
STI Id label.
EVC Id.
Total Bandwidth.
NAD.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-35
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Ethernet Virtual Connection List window presents all the EVCs and their attributes.
Related Information
If this list is required from the Ethernet Service List (or from the Ethernet Segment List or
from the Ethernet Transport Link List), only the EVCs associated to the selected service
(or Ethernet Segment or Ethernet Transport Link) are displayed.
For information about Connection Less EVC, see: Bridge Traffic Management
(p. 18-6).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Bridge EVCs
(p. 18-37)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-36
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Service Type.
Domain.
Bridge Type.
Service State.
Domain.
For more attributes, refer to EVC attributes to support ELP (p. 34-37).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-37
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If this action is required from the Service List, the Ethernet Service field of the EVC
Creation window, is filled with the service selected in the Service List.
For information about Connection Less EVC, see: Bridge Traffic Management
(p. 18-6).
Service Type, Type, Resource Sharing relations
Table 18-2
Service Type.
Type.
Traffic Type.
Resource Sharing.
EVPL.
Point-to-Point.
Unicast.
Full.
EPTL.
Point-to-Point.
Unicast.
EPL.
Point-to-Point.
Unicast.
Private UNI.
EVPLAN.
Any-to-Any.
Unicast.
Full.
Private UNI.
Private Link.
Private UNI and Link.
1
Extended EVPL.
Point-to-Point.
Unicast.
Full.
Private UNI.
Private Link.
Private UNI and Link.
1
Extended
EVPLAN.
Any-to-Any.
Unicast.
Full.
Rooted
Multipoint.
Multicast.
Private UNI.
Private Link.
HSI.
Rooted
Multipoint.
Unicast.
Full.
Multicast.
1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-38
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 18-2
Service Type.
BTV.
Type.
Rooted
Multipoint.
Traffic Type.
Unicast.
Rooted
Multipoint.
Resource Sharing.
Full.
Multicast.
1
Broadcast.
(continued)
Unicast.
Full.
Private UNI.
Private Link.
Private UNI and Link.
1
Notes:
1.
The User Label must be different from any in use by another EVC.
Only one Root termination is authorized.
The EVC Type must be compatible with the service type of the associated Ethernet
Service.
The EVC Type must be compatible with the selected Traffic Type.
The role of each EVC termination must be compatible with the EVC Type.
Task
Follow the path Action > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Create
Bridge EVC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-39
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
General Panel.
Service:
Two different choices are possible:
Choose an already created Ethernet Service by using the sensitive help (this field
is automatically filled if this window is required from the Service List).
Choose a Service Type (EVPL, EPTL, EPL, EVPLAN, Extended EVPL,
Extended EVPLAN, HSI, BTV, Broadcast).
The parameters: Type and Resource Sharing are assigned according to the chosen
Service Type as indicated in: Table 18-2, Service Type, Type, Resource Sharing
relations (p. 18-38).
Select a Type (Point to Point, Routed Multipoint, Any to Any (=Multipoint to
multipoint)). if allowed.
Select a Traffic Type (Unicast, Multicast), the selection of the parameter depends on
the selected type.
Select a Service Level (Premium, Gold, Silver, Bronze).
Resource Sharing: to manage the issue related to Shared or Dedicated Transport Link
usage, the Resource Sharing attribute at EVC Level can assume following values.
Full: the EVC Service under definition can use every resource without any
restriction.
Private UNI: the EVC Service under definition must use Private UNI, that is, the
UNI is uniquely used by the EVC Service.
Private Link: The EVC Service under definition must use Private Links, that is,
Transport Links uniquely used by the EVC Service.
Private UNI and LINK: The EVC Service under definition must use Private UNI
and Private Links, that is, chosen Transport Links and UNIs are uniquely used by
that EVC Service.
Select a Domain Label.
Select a Service Level (Premium, Gold, Silver, Bronze).
C-VLAN CoS Preservation: check it to keep the Priority Bits through the EVC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-40
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Detail Panel.
Enter s-Vlan Id the range of the VLAN over SDH path, an equal value can go on the
same domain.
Define IGMP Snooping State (Not Meaningful, Enabled, Disabled).
This option is available only for EVPLAN, Extended EVPLAN and BTV EVC types
and can optionally be defined as:
Enabled: to remind that the IGMP snooping protocol is used on top of the created
EVC. The IGMP is enabled immediately after the implementation of the EVC and
the IGMP is disabled immediately before the de-implementation the EVC.
Disabled: to remind that the IGMP snooping protocol is not used on the created
EVC.
Select the Frame Delivery parameters (see Frame delivery (p. 17-45))
Unicast Service Frame Delivery.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the entire set has the same value, then select the first parameter Put entire set to
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The single L2 protocol can have different values, select a value for each protocol
selecting between Tunnel, Not Meaningful, and Discard.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-42
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The EVC modification gives the possibility to modify parameters and relative values.
Related Information
If the User Label is modified, the new User Label must be different from the one which
is already used by another EVC.
For information about Connection Less EVC, see: Bridge Traffic Management
(p. 18-6).
Before you begin
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge EVCs.
Result: The Connection Less EVC list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click the right mouse button and select Modify from the popup menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
C-VLAN CoS Preservation: check it to keep the Priority Bits through the EVC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-44
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-45
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in deleting an EVC from the 1350 OMS PKT supervision.
Related Information
For information about Connection Less EVC, see: Bridge Traffic Management
(p. 18-6).
After confirmation, the following checks are performed:
the 1350 OMS PKT checks that no Ethernet Segment is referring the EVCs.
the EVCs are dissociated from the related service (if no more EVC are associated to
the service, the service is also removed).
the EVCs are removed.
Task
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge EVCs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the Bridge EVCsr List Window, select the EVC to delete. Select Action > Bridge EVC
> Delete from the Action menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-46
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The EVC list, the tree area, and the opened graphical views are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-47
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For general information about Transport Links, see: Transport link management
(p. 11-53).
Before you begin
Select the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge EVCs.
Result: The Bridge EVC list is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Main Menu follow the path Action > Properties.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-48
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Details of a Bridge EVC (p. 18-50)
Figure 18-6 EVC Properties window
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-49
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Id.
User Label.
Service Id Label.
Directionality.
Service Level.
Comment.
External Mark.
Action Type.
Action Date.
ETS Id Label.
Vlan Type.
Resource sharing.
Domain Id.
Domain.
VLAN distribution.
S-VLAN Id.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-50
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The configuration of an EVC consists in associating a Traffic Descriptor to the EVC. This
function is available for Connection Oriented and Connection Less EVCs.
Related Information
Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge EVCs
Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > ETS EVCs
Result: The EVC list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the path Action > Bridge EVC > EVC Configuration.
Result: The EVC Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-51
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-52
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function allows the user to display the localization of alarms on an EVC.
Related Information
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge EVCs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-53
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Fault
Localization (p. 18-56)
Figure 18-7 EVC Fault Localization window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select an alarmed port on the list, navigate to the Equipment View of the NE by issuing
Search > External Navigation to > USM.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-54
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-55
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-56
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-57
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Navigation to AS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Navigation to AS
When to use
Starting from an implemented EVC, the corresponding alarm list can be displayed in AS
window.
Related Information
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge EVCs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the path from the popup menu Search > External Navigation to > AS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-58
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Navigation to AS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Fault Management window is displayed with the alarms concerning the
selected EVC.
Figure 18-9 AS window for EVC Alarms
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-59
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The EVC Termination List window presents all the terminations of the selected EVC and
their attributes.
Related Information
From list, the user displays the extremity of an EVC or deletes EVC.
If the list is required from the Ethernet Service List (or from the EVC List), only the EVC
terminations associated to the selected service (or EVC) are displayed.
For information about Connection Less EVC, see: Bridge Traffic Management
(p. 18-6).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge EVCs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the path Search > Inventory from Bridge EVC > List EVC Terminations.
Result: The list window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of EVC
Terminations (p. 18-61)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-60
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Rate.
Network Element.
Usage State.
VLAN Type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-61
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Connection Less EVC, see: Bridge Traffic Management
(p. 18-6).
Before you begin
Task
Select the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge EVCs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Bridge EVC in the list where the termination must be added.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the path Action > Bridge EVC > Add Connection Less EVC Termination.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-62
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-63
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Add Termination window has four different panels: General, Ingress Flow, Egress
Flow, and Layer-2 Control Protocol.
On the General Panel, insert following data:
Select a NE or ENE using the popup list window with available NEs.
Select an Edge Port using the popup list window with available Edge Ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-64
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-65
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-66
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Class of Service (if Same as Ingress Flow not selected).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-67
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the Layer-2 Control Protocol Panel the control protocol is set for the termination. The
selection which control Protocol must be tunneled or discarded can be made also at
termination level.
If the entire set has the same value, then select the first parameter Put entire set to
A check is needed also toward Layer-2 Control Protocol Processing defined at UNI level.
This check allows a congruent management of Control protocols crossing the EVC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-68
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The single L2 protocol can have different values. Select a value for each protocol
selecting between Tunnel, Not Meaningful, and Discard.
Figure 18-12 Add EVC termination window (L2 Control Protocol Panel)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-69
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-70
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in deleting an EVC termination from the 1350 OMS PKT
supervision.
Related Information
For information about Connection Less EVC, see: Bridge Traffic Management
(p. 18-6).
Before you begin
Task
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge EVCs.
Result: The bridge EVC list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the bridge EVC in the list where the termination is to delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the path Search > Inventory from Bridge EVC > List EVC Terminations.
Result: The EVC termination list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the Bridge EVCs termination List Window, select the EVC termination to delete.
Select Action > EVC Port > Delete from the Action menu.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-71
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: The EVC termination is deleted.
After confirmation:
the EVC terminations are dissociated from the related EVC.
the EVC terminations are removed.
The EVC Termination list is updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-72
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Connection Less EVC, see: Bridge Traffic Management
(p. 18-6).
Before you begin
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge EVCs.
Result: The EVC list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the path Search > Inventory from Bridge EVC > List EVC Terminations.
Result: The EVC Termination list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the termination to configure in the list and follow the path Action > EVC Port >
EVC Termination Configuration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-73
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select a Traffic Descriptor using the list of the available Traffic Descriptors
displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The Traffic Descriptor is assigned to the EVC termination.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-74
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Connection Less EVC, see: Bridge Traffic Management
(p. 18-6).
Before you begin
Select the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge EVCs.
Result: The Bridge EVC list is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To display the EVC terminations, select the path Search > Inventory from Bridge EVC >
List EVC Terminations.
Result: The EVC Termination list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Main Menu follow the path Action > Properties.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-75
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Details of an EVC Termination (p. 18-77)
Figure 18-14 EVC Termination Properties window
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-76
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Id.
Rate.
NE Id Label
Network Element.
Usage State.
Type
Service Id Label
Ethernet Service
VLAN Id
VLAN Type.
VLAN Bundle
Policy Mode
Traffic Descriptor
Color Profile
VLAN Pop
Class Of Service
VLAN Id
Green Priority
Yellow Priority
EVC Id
Role (Root, Leaf, Both).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-77
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The workflow to manage bridge is part of the more general workflow for the Ethernet
Service management.
For information about bridge network, see: Bridge Network Management (p. 18-4).
Spanning Tree Protocol is a control protocol running inside a Bridge Network able to
build tree based Active Topologies. The following Spanning Tree Protocols are available:
STP, RSTP, PVSTP, MISTP.
For information about Spanning Tree, see: Spanning Tree Instance Management
(p. 18-8).
Domain definition
A Domain is a distributed infrastructure made of NE, ENE, Transport Links and Edge
Ports managed together to supply a Connection Less infrastructure. Its main properties
are the bridge type (MAC, Virtual or Provider) and the STP type (STP, RSTP, PVSTP,
MSTP or none). For Connection Oriented infrastructures, a default domain encompassing
all such entities is considered existing by definition.
There can be two ways of defining a domain:
Define a unique domain that includes all the NE and ENE that supplies the same
service or.
Define more domains that includes NE and ENE that supplies the same service, but
are subdivided for example by customer.
The ETS domain is the default domain and is equal to the MAC domain.
The Domain List window presents all the domains and their attributes.
The domain ETS is created by defaults and cannot be deleted.
Domain configuration
The Provider Bridge operation Mode allows to define the global QoS policy to be applied
to all Ethernet Ports of a given Provider Bridge. Such value is mirrored on all Ports when
each Port has configured the PCP Port Table Profile with its default value (that is, 0).
The Provider Bridge Operation Mode can be configured on NE basis.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-78
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The new attribute Provider Bridge Operation Mode (5P3D, 8P0D, 7P1D, 6P2D,
CustomerDefined) is added to the Domain.
The value is derived from the corresponding value set at NE level, from all NEs contained
in the Provider Bridge Domain. In particular, if all NEs have a homogeneous
configuration of Provider Bridge Operation Mode, then the Domain reflects a real value,
in all other cases, the value for the domain is set to "None".
The Attribute can be configured at any time, this implying the automatic provisioning of
the chosen value on all NEs contained in the Provider Bridge Domain. This operation
forces all the ETB ports present in each Provider Bridge to be reset at the same Bridge
NE PbOperationMode value and must be made paying attention.
This attribute is meaningful only in case of Domain configured as Provider Bridge.
The management performed at Domain level, ensures that all NEs contained inside the
Provider Bridge domain really use the same QoS management. In fact, when all NEs are
defined to use the same Priority Code Point All incoming Ethernet frames are interpreted
in the same way: a defined meaning is assigned to each received sequence of Priority bits
and such meaning/behavior is made common to a whole domain.
NE configuration
The Provider Bridge operation Mode allows to define the global QoS policy to be applied
to all Ethernet Ports of a given Provider Bridge. Such value is mirrored on all Ports when
each Port has configured the PCP (priority code point) Port Table Profile with its default
value (that is, 0).
The Provider Bridge Operation Mode can be configured on NE basis.
The configuration of the Provider Bridge Operation Mode on a Network Element is
possible as described in the procedureConfigure a Network Element (p. 18-89).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-79
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Create a Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create a Domain
When to use
This function allows the operator to define a domain in the managed network.
Related Information
Task
Follow the path Action > Packet > Construction > Create Domain.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter a Bridge Type (None, MAC, Virtual, Provider, Not Meaningful, No Bridge).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-80
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Create a Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-81
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Add NE to a Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Add NE to a Domain
When to use
Follow the path Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the path Action > Network Element > Assign Network Element to Domain.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-82
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Add NE to a Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-83
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Add NE to a Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the desired domain and Click the check sign to confirm it.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The NE is assigned to the Domain previously created. This operation is
repeated for all the NEs that must be assigned to a domain. The domain must be the
same or a different domain as explained in previous paragraph.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-84
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Domain Configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Domain Configuration
When to use
This function allows the configuration of the Provider Bridge Operation mode of a
provider domain.
Related Information
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge
Domains.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-85
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Domain Configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the Operation mode must be propagated to NEs belonging to the domain, select true;
otherwise, select false.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The Domain is configured consequently.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-86
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Domain Modification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Domain Modification
When to use
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge
Domains.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-87
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Domain Modification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the Set Standard VLAN Type (8100) is set to False, select the VLAN TYPE from the list
of defined VLAN Types.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the Set Standard VLAN Type (8100) is set to True, the VLAN TYPE is already set.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The Domain is modified consequently.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-88
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge NEs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-89
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Choose the Provider Bridge Operation Mode (As Container, 5P3D, 8P0D).
If the operation mode must be propagated to the edge ports associated to NE, choose
True for Propagate to Edge Ports parameter; in any other case, choose False.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The Network Element is configured consequently.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-90
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the path Search > Packet > Construction > Link Over TDM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the path Action > Link Over TDM > Configure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-91
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The Link Over TDM is configured consequently.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-92
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The NE Ethernet physical ports (local ports) are configured as ETS-P in a provider bridge
configuration.
Related Information
Follow the path Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the path Search > Inventory from Network Element > Ethernet Physical Port
List.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-93
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Ethernet Physical Port list of the selected Network Element is displayed, select the
port to configure and from the popup menu the item Configure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-94
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-95
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Create a Customer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create a Customer
When to use
This function allows the user to define the characteristics of the owner (=customer) of one
or more NE(s) to allow the usage of services defined across the boundaries of the
managed network.
Related Information
The first step to perform in EOT User Interface is the Customer creation to be able to
create the desired Ethernet Service.
For information, see: Overview about Workflow (p. 18-78).
Before you begin
Task
Follow the path Action > Packet > Services > Create Customer.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-96
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Create a Customer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-97
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Create a Customer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create a customer:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The customer is created.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-98
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If this list is required from the Customer List, the Customer field of this creation window
is automatically filled with the customer value selected in the Customer List.
For general information, see: Overview about Workflow (p. 18-78).
Before you begin
Task
Follow the path Action > Packet > Services > Create Ethernet Service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Customer from the available customer list, which opens when you enter the
Customer field.
Select the Service Type Extended EVPL.
No other data are required.
Click Ok.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-99
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The service is created.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-100
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the path Action > Packet > Services > Create Traffic Descriptor.
Result: The creation window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-101
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-102
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To complete the Provider Bridge Workflow: create a Connection Less EVC, allocate, and
implement it.
Related Information
Follow the menu path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge
EVCs.
Result: The Bridge EVC list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the EVC in the list and follow the path Action > Bridge EVC > Allocate.
Result: The allocation window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The EVC is allocated.
Select again the EVC in the list and follow the path Action > Bridge EVC > Implement.
Result: The implementation window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-103
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-104
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The possibility to change dynamically the bandwidth assigned to an active (that is,
implemented) Ethernet connectivity is one of the most important capabilities in the scope
of Data Network Management.
The dynamic change (increment/decrement) of bandwidth is possible for:
All EVC Terminations are balanced that is, have the same bandwidth parameters
definitions.
All EVC Terminations are not balanced that is, have different bandwidth
parameters definitions; in this case it is possible that new parameters cause the
bandwidth increment for some EVC termination and the reduction for some other.
Ethernet Segments for Connection Oriented Networks, when the bandwidth of a
single specific flow is changed.
EVC Terminations for Connection Less Networks, Provider Bridge based when the
bandwidth of a specific EVC termination is changed.
LSP Tunnel for MPLS networks, when the LSP Tunnel bandwidth is changed.
VC-LSP for MPLS networks, when the VC-LSP bandwidth is changed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-105
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Function Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Function Description
Object status applicability
When all contained Ethernet Segments are implemented, acting at EVC level significantly
simplifies the effort for the user that is requested to provide only once the new bandwidth
parameters, either to enlarge or to reduce current values.
Acting at EVC level, the bandwidth change is propagated to all contained Ethernet
Segments; in particular:
When the bandwidth change is successfully propagated to all Ethernet Segments, the
EVC continue to be Implemented.
The new Class of Service must be compliant with the one in use by contained
Ethernet Segments (in particular, if the EVC is realized by non homogeneous Class
Of Services, then to avoid errors, the user must proceed on Ethernet Segment basis).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-106
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Function Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In case of errors, the procedure is immediately stopped and one of the following
situation are identified:
the EVC provisioning state is put in partially Implemented: this case occurs when
at least one Ethernet Segment become partially Implemented because of
unrecoverable errors during provisioning.
The EVC provisioning state remain as implemented: this case occurs when an
Ethernet Segment has no room to allocate new bandwidth parameters. In this case
the Ethernet Segment remain implemented with old bandwidth parameters.
When all contained Ethernet Segments are Allocated, acting at EVC level significantly
simplifies the effort for the user that is requested to provide only once the new bandwidth
parameters, either to enlarge or to reduce current values.
Acting at EVC level, the bandwidth change is propagated to all contained Ethernet
Segments; in particular:
The EVC must be Allocated (this implying that all Ethernet Segments are allocated).
The bandwidth change is applied on each Ethernet Segment.
Acting at EVC level significantly simplifies the effort for the user that is requested to
provide only once the new bandwidth parameters, either to enlarge or to reduce current
values.
Acting at EVC level, the bandwidth change is propagated to all contained EVC
Terminations; in particular:
Care must be taken about the new Class of Service that must be compliant with the
one in use by contained EVC Terminations. If the EVC is realized by non
homogeneous Class Of Services, then to avoid errors, the user must proceed on EVC
Termination basis.
The EVC can be implemented, if all EVC Terminations are activated, or allocated, if
the bandwidth change for EVC Terminations is accomplished only inside 1350 OMS
PKT database.
The bandwidth change is applied on each contained EVC Termination.
In case of errors, the procedure is immediately stopped. The EVC provisioning state
remain with the previous provisioning state. The following situation is identified:
if provisioning state was implemented, it remains implemented. This case occurs
when the provisioning for an EVC termination fails (that is the EVC termination
remain active with old bandwidth parameters).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-107
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Function Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In this case the EVC become made by non homogeneous (in terms of
bandwidth) EVC Termination.
if provisioning state was allocated, it remains allocated. The EVC become made
with non homogeneous EVC terminations Bandwidth characteristics.
The bandwidth change is only admitted in the scope of the same QoS (for example:
change from BE to Guaranteed is not allowed as well as other mixed possibilities).
The bandwidth change is performed through the Ethernet Segment modification: the
parameter modified is the Traffic Descriptor reference, so allowing the Ethernet
Segment to point toward another TD.
The bandwidth change is allowed, without restrictions, on all Transport Links types
(that is Link Over TDM, Link Over Cable and Link Over MPLS).
In case of increment, an internal check is performed along the Ethernet Segment
following the current routing verifying that enough bandwidth is available. In
particular:
In case of reduction, no internal checks are needed and the operation is accepted; In
particular:
The Ethernet Segments starts pointing to another Traffic Descriptor, that reflects
the new bandwidth parameters.
If a reduction on Guaranteed parameter is required, the values of used/available
bandwidth values are updated on used Transport Links and Edge Ports.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-108
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Function Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The behavior for bandwidth reduction is performed on the Network, starting from
first NE and proceeding in forward way along the Ethernet Segment routing.
In case of error during provisioning operation, the global operation is stopped and
the Provisioning state is set to partially implemented.
only admitted in the scope of the same QoS (for example: change from BE to
Guaranteed is not allowed as well as other mixed possibilities).
performed through the Ethernet Segment modification: the parameter modified is the
Traffic Descriptor reference, so allowing the Ethernet Segment to point toward
another Traffic Descriptor.
allowed, without restrictions, on all Transport Links types (that is Link Over TDM,
Link Over Cable and Link Over MPLS).
In case of increment, an internal check is performed along the Ethernet Segment
following the current routing, verifying that enough bandwidth is available. In
particular:
In case of reduction, no internal checks are needed and the operation is accepted; In
particular:
The Ethernet Segments starts pointing to a Traffic Descriptor that reflects the new
bandwidth parameters.
The values of used/available bandwidth values must be updated on used Transport
Links and Edge Ports if a reduction on Guaranteed parameter is required.
EVC Terminations
The EVC Termination starts pointing to another Traffic Descriptor that reflects the
new bandwidth parameters.
Only in case of Implemented EVCs, a specific behavior is started to propagate the
modification toward NEs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-109
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Function Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The behavior for bandwidth change is performed on the Network, acting on the NE
containing the EVC Termination.
On NEs, a specific Traffic Descriptor creation is needed if a reusable one compliant
with new bandwidth characteristics not exist.
In case of error during provisioning operation, the global operation is stopped and the
Provisioning state of the EVC does not change.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-110
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Service Delimiting
Vlan Push/Pop On Provider Bridge UNI/IWI Management
Definition
The Service Delimiting allows the finalization of Vlan Push/Pop operations also at EVCs
UNI/IWI based on Provider Bridge technology.
This function enhances EVC Termination characteristics definition. For this reason, all
the following consideration must be taken into account:
For each EVC termination, the user can define, in addition to existing characteristics,
an optional POP operation to be performed on Ethernet Traffic in the Provider Bridge
Domain at ingress (that is, at UNI/IWI).
For each EVC termination, the user can define, for traffic egress the Provider Bridge
domain (that is, at UNI/IWI):
Define in following way:
One or more Cos.
A PUSH operation for a given Cos.
For each EVC termination, the user must define at least one Input Ethernet Flow or at
least one Output Ethernet Flow.
This operation allowing to cover all following cases:
Definition of "Source" EVC Termination point in Broadcasting Topologies in case
that only Input Ethernet Flows are defined.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-111
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the created EVC is empty, then all EVC Termination characteristics definition is
delegated to the operation: Add EVC Termination.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-112
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Additional section
View the list of bridge NEs
When to use
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge).
Result: The Connection Less menu is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Bridge NEs
Result: The list window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Bridge NEs
(p. 18-114)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-113
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Domain.
Network Element.
PTM Name.
MAC Address.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-114
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function lists the External Network Elements of connection less type.
Related Information
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge).
Result: The Connection Less menu is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Bridge ENEs
(p. 18-116)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-115
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The attributes displayed for each Bridge (Connection less) ENE are:
User Label.
Domain.
Network Element.
PTM Name.
MAC Address.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-116
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the menu path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge
EVCs.
Result: The Bridge EVC list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the EVC in the list and follow the path Action > Bridge EVC > Allocate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: If the command is confirmed, The EVC is allocated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-117
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the menu path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge
EVCs.
Result: The Bridge EVC list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the EVC in the list and follow the path Action > Bridge EVC > Deallocate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: If the command is confirmed, The EVC is deallocated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-118
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the menu path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge
EVCs.
Result: The Bridge EVC list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the EVC in the list and follow the path Action > Bridge EVC > Implement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: If the command is confirmed, The EVC is Implemented.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-119
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the menu path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge
EVCs.
Result: The Bridge EVC list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the EVC in the list and follow the path Action > Bridge EVC > Deimplement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: If the command is confirmed, The EVC is Deimplemented.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-120
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the menu path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge
EVCs.
Result: The Bridge EVC list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the EVC in the list and follow the path Action > Bridge EVC > Commission.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: If the command is confirmed, The EVC is Commissioned.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-121
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the menu path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge
EVCs.
Result: The Bridge EVC list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the EVC in the list and follow the path Action > Bridge EVC > Decommission.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: If the command is confirmed, The EVC is decommissioned.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-122
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Connection Less EVC, see: Bridge Traffic Management
(p. 18-6).
Before you begin
Task
Select the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge EVCs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the path Action > Bridge EVC > Add Transport Link to EVC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-123
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Connection Less EVC, see: Bridge Traffic Management
(p. 18-6).
Before you begin
Task
Select the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge EVCs.
Result: The EVC list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Bridge EVC and select the path Search > Bridge EVC > Transport Link.
Result: The list shows the Transport Links belonging to the selected EVC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the path Action > Transport Link > Remove Transport Link from EVC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-124
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: If the command is confirmed, The Transport Link is disassociated from EVC.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-125
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Connection Less EVC, see: Bridge Traffic Management
(p. 18-6).
Before you begin
Task
Select the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge EVCs.
Result: The EVC list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Bridge EVC and select the path Search > Bridge EVC > Transport Link.
Result: The list shows the Transport Links belonging to the selected EVC.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-126
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Connection Less EVC, see: Bridge Traffic Management
(p. 18-6).
Before you begin
Select the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge EVCs.
Result: The EVC list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Bridge EVC and select the path Search > Bridge EVC > Provider bridge
Flows.
Result: The list shows the flows belonging to the selected EVC.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-127
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Select the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge EVCs.
Result: The EVC list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Bridge EVC and select the path Search > Bridge EVC > Show Spanning Tree
Instance.
Result: The Spanning Tree Instance belonging to the selected EVC is shown.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-128
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Connection Less EVC, see: Bridge Traffic Management
(p. 18-6).
Before you begin
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge).
Result: The Bridge menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Bridge Edge
Ports (p. 18-130)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-129
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Rate.
Network Element.
Usage State.
VLAN Type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-130
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Connection Less EVC, see: Bridge Traffic Management
(p. 18-6).
Before you begin
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge Edge
Ports.
Result: The list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-131
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Connection Less EVC, see: Bridge Traffic Management
(p. 18-6).
Before you begin
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge Edge
Ports.
Result: The list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-132
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Connection Less EVC, see: Bridge Traffic Management
(p. 18-6).
Before you begin
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge
Transport Links.
Result: The list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-133
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about Connection Less EVC, see: Bridge Traffic Management
(p. 18-6).
Before you begin
Follow the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge
Transport Links.
Result: The list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-134
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about STI, see: Spanning Tree Instance Management (p. 18-8).
Before you begin
Select the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge).
Result: The Connection Less menu is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-135
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the menu path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) >
Spanning Tree Instance.
Result: The Spanning Tree Instance list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Spanning Tree Instance in the list and follow the path Action > Spanning Tree
Instance > Configure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-136
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-137
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-138
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the menu path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) >
Spanning Tree Instance.
Result: The Spanning Tree Instance list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Spanning Tree Instance in the list and follow the path Action > Spanning Tree
Instance > Implement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: If the command is confirmed, the Spanning Tree Instance is Implemented.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-139
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the menu path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) >
Spanning Tree Instance .
Result: The Spanning Tree Instance list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Spanning Tree Instance in the list and follow the path Action > Spanning Tree
Instance > Deimplement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: If the command is confirmed, the Spanning Tree Instance is Deimplemented.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
18-140
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
19
19
Provider
Backbone Bridge
Network Management
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes how to set up a Provider Backbone Bridge (PBB) network.
Contents
Provider Backbone Bridge (PBB) Networks
19-5
19-5
19-8
19-11
19-12
Network Configuration
19-12
19-13
Define NE
19-16
Provisioning
19-19
19-19
Transport link
19-23
19-24
19-27
ERP configuration
19-33
19-33
19-41
Backbone VLAN ID
19-49
B-VID configuration
19-49
19-55
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-55
19-59
19-59
19-62
19-63
19-64
19-65
19-66
19-68
19-70
19-72
19-74
19-76
19-78
19-79
19-80
19-82
19-83
19-85
19-87
19-88
19-89
B-VID Management
19-90
19-91
19-92
19-93
19-95
19-96
19-97
19-98
19-100
19-102
19-104
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-107
19-110
19-112
19-113
19-116
19-119
19-120
19-121
19-122
19-124
19-125
19-127
19-128
19-129
19-130
19-131
19-133
19-134
19-135
19-136
19-138
19-139
19-140
19-142
19-144
19-146
19-147
19-149
19-149
19-151
Add NE to a Domain
19-152
19-154
ERP provisioning
19-156
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure B-VID
19-158
19-159
19-169
19-170
19-172
In Band Management
19-174
19-175
19-184
19-203
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FDB-size scalability. The MAC addresses of all customer equipment that passes
through a core node must be learned and/or looked-up in the FDB. If FDB is full,
addresses cannot be learned, so return traffic is flooded and not unicasted: Bandwidth
inefficiency. A backbone MAC destination and source address pair is added to each
frame for forwarding between PBB Nodes. This header hides the Customer
Destination Address and Customer Source Address fields.
PBB frames
The PBB header may take multiple different forms, but the main components of the
header are:
Backbone component:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Bridges learn based on the B-SA and ingress port value and hence is completely unaware
of the customer MAC addresses. I-SID allows to distinguish the services within a PBB
domain.
PBB Services Types
Port based: All untagged and priority tagged frames I-SID. This service type can be
used to connect 802.1Q or 802.1D bridges to a CNP. All S-Tagged frames are
dropped.
S-tagged one-to-one: Frames with a single specific S-VID I-SID.
S-tagged bundled many-to-one: Frames with an S-VID in a specific set of N values
I-SID.
S-tagged bundled all-to-one: Frames with any non-zero S-VID I-SIDcomplement
of Port Based service.
Note: 1350 OMS implementation of some service types is less rigid. For example
Port-based does not necessarily discard all S-tagged frames.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The frames are split in more than one service, each mapped to its own I-SID.
Service Types that are incompatible with Service Multiplexing:
E-Tree: Not supported within PBB: Requires non-standard additions to PBB toolset.
E-TREE service requires that traffic between Leaves is blocked.
Service Multiplexing: E-LINE and E-LAN services can be multiplexed on same CNP
port. Restriction: S-VID to I-SID mapping constraints.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-7
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-8
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-9
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The figure shows that the only provisioning needed to implement an EVC over PBB is
the one done at its EVC Terminations (both the one directly related to the EVC
Termination itself and the one related to the association of the I-SID to the B-VID that is
perfomed on the NNIs of the B-VID in the same NE of the EVC Termination).
Ethernet Ring Protocol (ERP) (p. 19-11)
To implement an EVC over PBB, the system only perform provisioning on the NEs that
host EVC Terminations for that EVC.
This is true only if the EVC is not under OAM.
If the EVC is under OAM, things are different.
In general, OAM is possible for the I-SID (to monitor the single EVC) and for the B-VID
(in order to monitor the virtual infrastructure common to more EVCs).
I-SID monitoring, as for the standard, only takes into account the points where the EVC is
provisioned. This means that internal points are not taken into consideration: link trace is
not so meaningful in that case.
The choice done for PKT is a bit different: we choose to monitor only the I-SID (so, no
B-VID monitoring) but, willing to see also the intermediate points in the network, we
provision the I-SID also wherever the B-VID is, so that a link trace, for example, will
report all the NEs crossed by the traffic.
The provisioning of an EVC under OAM requires the distribution of the I-SID to all the
places wherever the B-VID is distributed (for example: to all the NNIs in the network that
are in NEs that do not host any Termination of the monitored EVC). The distribution of
the I-SID is done in addition to any other I-SID distribution.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-10
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Switch behavior [Revertive/Not Revertive]: revert or not to the main resource when
failure clears.
Wait Time to Restore [0..12 Minutes in step of 1 minute]: meaningful only in case the
swicthing behavior is revertive, is the time the main resource must be free of failures
before reverting to.
Hold-Off time [0..1000 millisec in step of 10 millisec]: time to wait, after failure
detection, before starting protection in order to see if other protection recovers the
failure
Guard Time [10..2000 millisec in step of 10 millisec]: during guard time RPL owner
discards the received R-APS OAM frames. It s started according to the ERP state
machine specifications (see ERP specifications for more details)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-11
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network Configuration
Network Configuration
PBB Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-12
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The scope of this procedure is to create a PBB Domain. In Connection Less Networks,
the Domain represents an homogeneous set of Network Elements dedicated to MAC,
Virtual Provider or Provider Backbone Bridging.
Related Information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-13
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar select Actions > Packet > Construction > Create Domain.
Figure 19-2 Actions>Packet>Construction>Create Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-14
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-15
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Define NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Define NE
When to use
Issue a search of the NEs available following the path Search > Packet > Construction
> Network Elements > Available NEs.
Figure 19-4 Search>Packet>Construction>Network Elements>Available NEs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-16
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Define NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the involved Network Element and follow the path Actions > Define Network
Element from the popup menu.
Figure 19-5 Available NE: Actions>Define Network Element
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-17
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Define NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar select Search> Packet > Construction > Network Elements >
Defined NEs.
The list of the defined NEs is displayed.
Figure 19-7 Defined NE list
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-18
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisioning
Provisioning hardware reference
When to use
The scope of this procedure is to give a reference for port create. For more detail refer to
the equipment User Provisioning Guide
Related Information
Once 1850 TSS is supervised, navigation to the ZIC GUI management application is
allowed selecting the TSS Network Element in the list and from the popup menu Search
> Show Equipment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-19
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Show Equipment, navigate the left-h-side tree and select the termination.
The physical real image is shown in the right-h-side after bar down scrolling.
Figure 19-9 Show Equipment: select the termination
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-20
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click twice on the termination. In the right-hand box click Save to confirm.
Figure 19-10 Module setting
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-21
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The module setting is the same as above described for the originating NE.
Figure 19-11 Show Equipment view of the terminating NE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Node list select the node involved in hardware recent change and follow the
path Actions > Physical > Synchronize > Synchronize NE
Figure 19-12 Node: Actions>Physical>Synchronize>Synchronize NE
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-22
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Transport link
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Transport link
Transport link introduction
A TDM path. The link is called Link Over TDM. It carries directly Ethernet
Segments, Tunnels or PWs.
A Tunnel/PW. The link is called Link Over (T-)MPLS. A Link Over TDM or a Link
Over Cable (Martini) carries it.
An Ethernet cable. The link is called Link Over Cable.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-23
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the map view, select the nodes to connect and follow the path Actions > Physical >
Create Physical Connection
Figure 19-13 Actions>Physical>Create Physical Connection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-24
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The second step is customized according to the Connection Type selected (here below
Ethernet physical link creation window is shown):
Only NEs with Ethernet Ports are proposed as possible choices to user.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-25
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Only free ports of selected NE and with rate compatible with the link rate are proposed as
possible choices to user.
Select the end nodes, if not already selected, click on A-node and Z-node empty box,
then select the node from the selection list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-26
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The scope of this procedure is to assign a Link over Cable to PBB domain.
Related Information
From the main menu bar follow the path Search > Packet > Construction > Transport
Links > Links over Cable
Figure 19-16 Search>Packet>Construction>Transport Links>Links over Cable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-27
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Link over Cable to assign and follow the path Actions > Assign Resources to
Domain
Figure 19-18 Link over Cable: Actions>Assign Resources to Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-28
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-29
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Link over Cable list you can verify that the relevant Link over Cable has the
domain attribute accordingly.
Figure 19-20 Link over Cable list
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-30
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Link over Cable to delete in the list and follow the path from the popup menu
Actions > Delete.
Figure 19-21 Link over Cable:Actions>Delete
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-31
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the related Physical Connection and follow the path from the popup menu Actions
> Remove.
Figure 19-22 Physical Connection:Actions>Remove
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-32
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ERP configuration
Create ERP Ring
When to use
The scope of this procedure is to configure major ring and sub-rings by selecting the links
in the map.
Related Information
From the physical topology view (physical map) the user configures major ring and
sub-rings by selecting the links in the map.
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar follow the path Actions > Packet > ERP > Create ERP Ring.
Figure 19-23 Actions>Packet>ERP>Create ERP Ring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-33
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Transport Links to associate to ERP ring. Click the selection icon, the
following list is displayed.
Select all Transport Links.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-34
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The multiple selection is allowed by means of the mouse small wheel.
Figure 19-25 Bridge Transport Links
The selected Transport Links are now displayed in the Create ERP Ring main window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-35
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-36
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To verify the successful creation follow the path Search > Packet > ERP > Rings
Figure 19-27 Search>Packet>ERP>Rings
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The list of the ERP Rings is shown below, containing the ERP ring which has been just
created.
Figure 19-28 List of ERP Rings
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-37
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the ring which has just been created and follow the path from the popup menu
Actions > Implement ERP Ring
Figure 19-29 ERP ring: Actions>Implement ERP Ring
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-38
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the ERP Ring you can search the nodes on the ring.
Figure 19-31 ERP Ring:Search>Nodes
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-39
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
From the ERP Ring you can search the physical links belonging to the ring.
Figure 19-33 ERP Ring:Search>Physical Links
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-40
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Before creating a new instance, it is opportune to search the existing instances on the
involved ring.
On the same ERP ring many instances can be created, according to the customer traffic
needs.
Select the ERP ring in the list and follow the path on the popup menu Search > ERP
Instances.
Figure 19-35 ERP ring: Search>ERP Instances
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
A search of the ERP instances can be done also fro Show Equipment of an involved NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-41
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ERP 1 has 2 instances, one per port and one per VLAN.
ERP2 has no instance.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The user can display the ERP Instances for a PBB domain.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-42
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the PBB domain in the domain list and follow the path on the popup menu Search
> ERP Instances.
Figure 19-37 PBB domain:Search>ERP Instances
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar follow the path Actions > Packet > ERP > Create ERP
Instance
Figure 19-38 Actions>Packet>ERP>Create ERP Instance
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-43
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
R-APS VLAN ID Insert a value between 1 and 4093, the value is unique per ring or
RPL (ring protection link) Owner It is the NE that has the master role on ERP instance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-44
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-45
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Signal Degrade
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-46
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Create ERP Instance wizard, click Apply or OK to confirm the creation.
Figure 19-42 Create ERP Instance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-47
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the ERP Instance and follow the path on the popup menu Actions > Implement
ERP Instance
Figure 19-43 ERP Instance: Actions>Implement ERP Instance
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-48
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
B-VID configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Backbone VLAN ID
B-VID configuration
When to use
The scope of this procedure is to define a B-VID in a PBB domain and to associate it to
the ERP instance:
The B-VID is the VLAN.
Related Information
The configuration of NEs, Transport Links, ERP ring, ERP Instance has been previously
completed with success.
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar follow the path Actions > Packet > Services >
ConnectionLess(Bridge) > Create B-VID
Figure 19-44 Actions>Packet>Services>ConnectionLess(Bridge)>Create B-VID
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-49
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
B-VID configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
VLAN distribution
You can select:
Manual. In this case the user will specify all relevant Transports Links.
Domain Wide. In this case the VLAN is distributed over all Transport Links of all
rings belonging to the Domain.
Select Manual.
Click ERP. Select the ERP ring to which the B-VID is to be assigned.
Select the ERP instance. The selected ERP instance is now contained in the bottom box.
Figure 19-45 Create B-VID wizard step1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-50
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
B-VID configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-51
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
B-VID configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
After selecting all ERP and Transport Links, click Apply or OK to confirm the creation.
Figure 19-47 Create B-VID
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To verify the successful creation, from the main menu bar follow the path Search >
Packet > Services > Connection Less(Bridge) > B-VIDs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The B-VID list is displayed, containing the B-VID which has been just created (status =
defined).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-52
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
B-VID configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the B-VID which has been just created and follow the path from the popup menu
Actions > Allocate.
Figure 19-48 B-VID list
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-53
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
B-VID configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-54
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The scope of this procedure is to define Additional Info on PM, QoS and Managing
Traffic Descriptor.
Related Information
MEG Identifier: made by a Format and a Name. Format can be (to be confirmed by
NE which will be implemented).
String
Dns-Like Name
MAC Address
integer
Associated Maintenance Domain
MIP creation policy [none, All points, Lower-level MEP exists]: which policy is used
inside MEG for MIP Creation. Default is inherited from Maintenance Domain. See
next step.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-55
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For each EVC termination the user defines the traffic classification rules by associating a
Traffic Classifier and QoS attributes.
Traffic Classifier allows to specify classification rules based on:
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-56
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Another step towards the MEF alignment is provided by possibility to display bandwidth
parameters following both IETF definitions (as already available) and MEF definitions.
For reminder, the following definitions are applicable for IETF: CIR, PIR, PBS, CBS
while the following one are applicable for MEF: CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS.
The existing relationships are described as in the following:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-57
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The range of the supported classes of service (CoS, also named forwarding classes) is
extended from the basic set (best effort, regulated and guaranteed) to the enhanced set
(best effort and background, four types of regulated, two types of guaranteed).
The frame association to a CoS is performed at the ingress port.
Differentiated quality of service (QoS) management is implemented mapping each CoS to
a specific output queue at the egress port.
Color management allows also frame prioritization within a given forwarding class.
The frame per hop behavior (PHB) is therefore implemented by CoS and color
management.
Figure 19-53 Traffic Descriptor create step2
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-58
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Bridge EVC list select the EVC to which a termination must be added and
follow the path on the popup menu Search > EVC Termination..
The list of the terminations is displayed.
Figure 19-54 EVC Termination list
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-59
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Bridge EVC list select the EVC to which a termination must be added and
follow the path on the popup menu Actions > Add Connection Less EVC Termination..
Figure 19-55 Actions> Add Connection Less EVC Termination
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Add Connection Less EVC Termination window the EVC is already selected.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-60
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
By means of the usual selection mechanism select the Network Element and the Edge
Port to add.
Figure 19-56 Add Connection Less EVC Termination dialog box
To verify that the new termination has been added successfully, refresh the EVC
Terminations list. The new termination is displayed.
Figure 19-57 The new termination has been added
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-61
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about PBB EVC, Refer toPBB Ethernet Virtual Connection (p. 19-7)
Before you begin
From the EVC Termination list select the termination to remove and issue the pop-up
menu Actions> Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-62
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-64
19-65
19-66
19-68
19-70
19-72
19-74
19-76
19-78
19-79
19-80
19-82
19-83
19-85
19-87
19-88
19-89
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-63
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The PBB Ethernet Virtual Connection List window presents all the PBB EVCs and their
attributes.
Related Information
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of PBB EVCs
(p. 19-65)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-64
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Domain Type.(Backbone)
B-VID
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-65
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The user specifies the characteristics of the EVC (userlabel, type, terminations, flows,
etc.) and, in addition:
I-VID
I-SID
Broadcast Domain Containment. (Enabled, Disabled). Refer to PBB EVC Broadcast
Domain Containment (p. 19-82)
exist;
be in the Domain specified for the EVC;
have been created by the operator (B-VIDs created by ERP BB are not allowed).
The I-SID must not have been already used by another EVC in the same Domain.
The allowed values for the Resource Sharing attribute are FULL or PRIVATE UNI.
The allowed types for a PBB EVC are:
EPL
EVPL
EPLAN
EVPLAN
BROADCAST
If the specified B-VID has a non empty I-SID Bundle, the I-SID specified for the EVC
must be within that bundle.
The creation of the EVC is similar to the creation of PB EVC, except for the fact that the
association between the EVC, I-SID and B-VID is stored.
For information about PBB EVC, Refer toPBB Ethernet Virtual Connection (p. 19-7).
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Select Connection Less (Bridge) > Create PBB EVC. See workflow Create a PBB EVC
(p. 19-159)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-67
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The allocation of a PBB EVC is possible only if the B-VID is at least allocated and is
rejected in all other cases (i.e. when the B-VID is defined).
In no case, a PBB EVC can have an EVC Termination on one NE that is not embraced by
it's B-VID (either through a TL or through a ring). In other words: if no TL or ring
associated to a B-VID reaches/crosses a NE, the latter can't host any EVC Termination
served by that B-VID.
Since no private use of Transport Links is allowed (Resource Sharing only admitted
values are FULL and PRIVATE UNI), no check on Transport Links sharing is performed.
The allocation, that for the most part (EVC Terminations and Flows) is identical to the
one of a PB EVC, specifically concerns:
the allocation of the association between each Port supporting an EVC Termination
and the I-SID
the allocation of the association between the B-VID, the I-SID and all the NNIs,
belonging to NEs where there are EVC Terminations, associated to the B-VID of the
EVC;
for each flow, the allocation of a cross connection that has, as a server at one side, the
I-SID;
if the EVC is under OAM, the I-SID has to be distributed also in all the places where
the B-VID is.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-68
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Follow the menu path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge
EVCs.
Result: The Bridge EVC list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the EVC in the list and follow the path Action > Bridge EVC > Allocate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: The EVC is allocated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-69
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The deallocation, that for the most part (EVC Terminations and Flows) is identical to the
one of a PB EVC, specifically concerns:
the deallocation of the associations between the Ports of the EVC Terminations and
the I-SID;
the deallocation of the associations between the B-VID, the I-SID and the NNIs
associated to the B-VID of the EVC;
if the EVC is under OAM, its I-SID has to be un-distributed also in all the places
where the B-VID has been.
Follow the menu path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge
EVCs.
Result: The Bridge EVC list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the EVC in the list and follow the path Action > Bridge EVC > Deallocate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-70
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-71
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The implementation of a PBB EVC is possible only if the B-VID is implemented and is
rejected in all other cases (included partially implemented B-VID).
The implementation, that for the most part (EVC Terminations and Flows) is identical to
the one of a PB EVC, specifically concerns:
the implementation of the association between the B-VID, the I-SID and all the NNIs,
belonging to NEs where there are EVC Terminations, associated to the B-VID of the
EVC (opticsIMPbbInstanceTable);
for each flow, the implementation of a cross connection that has as a server at one side
the I-SID (i.e. opticsIMETSInFlowServiceType = PBB and opticsIMETSInFlowServiceID = index of row of opticsIMPbbInstanceTable for the I-SID, for either
opticsIMETSInFlowTable or opticsIMETSOutFlowTable);
if the EVC is under OAM, the I-SID has to be distributed also in all the places where
the B-VID is.
For information:
Refer toPBB Ethernet Virtual Connection (p. 19-7).
Refer to PBB EVC provisioning (p. 19-8).
Before you begin
Follow the menu path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge
EVCs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-72
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the EVC in the list and follow the path Action > Bridge EVC > Implement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: The EVC is implemented.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-73
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The deimplementation, that for the most part (EVC Terminations and Flows) is identical
to the one of a PB EVC, specifically concerns:
Follow the menu path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge
EVCs.
Result: The Bridge EVC list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the EVC in the list and follow the path Action > Bridge EVC > deimplement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-74
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-75
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
implementation of the association between the Termination's Port supporting and the
I-SID (opticsIMPbbInstanceTable);
(only if does not exist an implemented Termination of the same EVC in the same NE)
implementation of the association between the B-VID, the I-SID and all the NNIs,
belonging to the Termination's NE, associated to the B-VID of the EVC
(opticsIMPbbInstanceTable).
Select the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge EVCs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the EVC in the list where the termination must be added.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the path Action > Bridge EVC > Add Connection Less EVC Termination.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-76
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-77
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about PBB EVC, Refer toPBB Ethernet Virtual Connection (p. 19-7).
Before you begin
Select the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge EVCs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the EVC in the list where the termination must be removed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the path Action > Bridge EVC > Remove Connection Less EVC Termination.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-78
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge EVCs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the path Action > Bridge EVC > Configure PBB EVC.
Result: The Configuration window is displayed. The user can change:
EVC.
Traffic descriptor.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-79
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge EVCs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the path Action > Bridge EVC > Bridge Flows.
Result: The List Bridge Flow is displayed.
EVC
Edge Port
Policy Mode
Traffic Descriptor
Color Profile
VLAN Pop
Classification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-80
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Edge Port
Class Of Service
VLAN Id
Priority Mode
Green Priority
Yellow Priority
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-81
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
get all the EVC Terminations and determine the paths between each pair of them (in
other words: given a pair of EVC Terminations, determine a path between them
(inside the involved B-VID, of course), in terms of the rings and/or single TLs that
must be crossed to reach one from the other);
enrich the set of rings and TLs, determined at the previous step, by adding all the
main rings for any sub-ring that is already included in the set;
take all the NEs of the rings and TLs of the set and provision the I-SID there (if not
yet provisioned because of an EVC Termination) associating to it the NNI ports of the
involved B-VID in that NE that are linked to another NE of the set.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-82
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function activates the broadcast domain containment on an EVC , regardless of EVC
Provisioning State.
Related Information
The operator may enable the broadcast domain containment on an EVC by simply
invoking the modify (in case of defined or allocated EVC) or the configure (in all other
cases) of the EVC.
Within the form of modify/configure the operator is able to change the Broadcast Domain
Containment attribute from "Disabled" to "Enabled".
If the EVC is in defined or allocated state, the impacts are only within the PKT (i.e. DB).
If the EVC is in implemented state, the impacts are both on DB and on the involved NEs.
Refer toPBB EVC Broadcast Domain Containment (p. 19-82).
If the EVC is under OAM, the I-SID modifications/provisioning for broadcast domain
containment replace the ones existing for OAM.
Before you begin
Select the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge EVCs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-83
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the tab Details and set Enable Broadcast Domain Containment to Enabled.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-84
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The operator may disable the broadcast domain containment on an EVC by simply
invoking the modify (in case of defined or allocated EVC) or the configure (in all other
cases) of the EVC.
Within the form of modify/configure the operator is able to change the Broadcast Domain
Containment attribute from "Enabled" to "Disabled".
If the EVC is in defined or allocated state, the impacts are only within the PKT (i.e. DB).
If the EVC is in implemented state, the impacts are both on DB and on the involved NEs.
Refer to PBB EVC Broadcast Domain Containment (p. 19-82).
If the EVC is under OAM, the I-SID situation on DB/NE is restored as if on the EVC was
just put under OAM. This is needed since previous broadcast domain containment
enabling could have removed some of the I-SID instances on some NE and modified
other ones.
Before you begin
Select the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge EVCs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-85
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the tab Details and set Enable Broadcast Domain Containment to Disabled.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-86
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
At EVC definition time, by default, the EVC termination is associated to the default VT,
only for those cards that support VT management.
The operator can specify at EVC definition time or modify at EVC configuration time,
the reserved bandwidth (ISID-CIR/ISID-PIR) associated to a given EVC termination.
If the reserved bandwidth (ISID-CIR/ISID-PIR) has been not specified by operator at
EVC definition time, then the system assumes:
ISID-CIR = 0
ISID-PIR = VT-PR
At allocation time, each egress I-SID is automatically associated to the default VT of the
ETS-P UNI interface.
When a PBB EVC is allocated, the reserved VT-CR of the default VT is automatically
increased by an amount equal to: ISID-CIR
The reserved VT-PR of the default VT is automatically updated to take into account the
contribution of: ISID-PIR
For the default VT, VT-CR, VT-Reserved-CR, VT-PR and VT-Reserved-PR are
automatically computed according to ANY aggregation criterion in Table 2 of PKT 9.1
QOS Management Technical Functional Specification.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-87
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The operator is allowed to manually define (during EVC definition) or modify (during
EVC configuration) the association between the I-SID and the VT at the ETS-P UNI (i.e.
the association between an EVC Termination and a VT).
The operator has to specify at EVC definition time and can modify at EVC configuration
time, the reserved bandwidth (ISID-CIR/ISID-PIR) associated to a given EVC
termination. By default, the system assumes that:
ISID-CIR = 0
ISID-PIR = VT-PR
The system checks that the required bandwidth is available on the user VT.
When a PBB EVC is allocated, the reserved VT-CR of the user VT is automatically
increased by an amount equal to:
ISID-CIR
The reserved VT-PR of the user VT is automatically updated to take into account the
contribution of:
ISID-PIR
For the user VT, VT-Reserved-CR and VT-Reserved-PR are automatically computed
according to the following parameters checks:
VT-CR >= VT-Reserved-CR = Fixed-VT ISID-CIRi , over all ISID using the VT.
VT-PR>= VT-Reserved-PR = Max (ISID-PIRi) , over all ISID using the VT.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-88
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The operator specifies a PBB NNI port (PNP client type) and tells whether he wants to
activate or deactivate the DEI bit support.
The system configures the port accordingly.
Activating the DEI bit support means that from that port will be possible to manage 8
CoS each with two colors (green and yellow), thus giving a different meaning to the PCP
attribute on the same port: 8P0D means, in fact, 8P8D.
Activating the DEI bit is meaningful (and useful) only for PCP = 8P0D .
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-89
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-VID Management
Overview
Purpose
19-91
19-92
19-93
19-95
19-96
19-97
19-98
19-100
19-102
19-104
19-107
19-110
19-112
19-113
19-116
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-90
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The PBB B-VID List window presents all the B-VIDand their attributes.
Related Information
For information about PBB EVC, Refer toPBB Ethernet Virtual Connection (p. 19-7).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of PBB B-VIDs
(p. 19-92)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-91
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
VLAN Id
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-92
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The function creates a PBB B-VID. B-VID is used as an infrastructure for EVCs.
Related Information
I-SID spcify the bundle of I-SIDs allowed to be supported by this B-VID. An empty
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Enter a Userlabel.
Enter VLAN ID. (A value from 1 to 4094, a unique value in the Domain).
For each ring, select one or more ERP instances from list.
Click Transport link and select one or more Transport links from list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-94
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The function deletes a PBB B-VID. B-VID is used as an infrastructure for EVCs.
Related Information
A B-VID can only be deleted when is in Defined state and does not support any EVC.
A B-VID created by ERP BB can only be deleted by ERP BB.
A B-VID created by the USM can only be deleted by the USM.
Before you begin
Select the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > B-VIDs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-95
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This phase consists in the creation, on DB, of the VLAN Distribution information (for
each NE on which terminates/passes a TL/Ring associated to the B-VID).
A B-VID created by ERP BB can only be allocated by ERP BB.
A B-VID created by the USM can only be allocated by the USM.
Before you begin
Select the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > B-VIDs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-96
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This phase consists in the removal of the DB objects created during the allocation .
A B-VID can't be de-allocated if it supports one or more EVCs that are allocated: all the
EVCs supported by a B-VID (if any) must be all in defined state in order for the B-VID to
be deallocated.
A B-VID created by ERP BB can only be de-allocated by ERP BB.
A B-VID created by the USM can only be de-allocated by the USM.
Before you begin
Select the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > B-VIDs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-97
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The function provisions the elementary objects involved with a PBB B-VID.
Related Information
Provisioning on the involved NEs (i.e. the ones identified during the allocation phase) of
the (in this order):
1. creation of the B-VID instance and of the associations B-VID - Port;
2. associations B-VID - ERP (for any non-per-Port ERP).
Step 1 involves the creation of a row in the opticsIMPbbInstanceTable, in each involved
NE, that contains among the other things the ports to be associated to the B-VID instance
(i.e. the ports, in that NE, belonging to TLs or Rings associated to the B-VID). This
provisioning is requested by EoT to Adaptation.
Step 2 involves the request to ERP BB to perform the association for each involved ERP
(only in case of per-VLAN ERP). Step 2 is not performed for B-VIDs created by ERP BB
(the association, in fact, is provisioned by the ERP BB before invoking the B-VID
implementation; This avoids deadlocks between ERP BB and EoT BB (both being single
threaded processes).
A complete failure on step 1 causes the B-VID to remain in Allocated state.
A partial failure on step 1 or a failure during step 2 causes the B-VID to go in Partially
Implemented state.
Before you begin
Select the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > B-VIDs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-98
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-99
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The function releses the elementary objects involved with a PBB B-VID.
Related Information
Un-provisioning on the involved NEs (i.e. the ones identified during the allocation phase)
of the objects provisioned during the implementation with the same interactions of EoT
with other BBs.
This means:
1. removal of associations B-VID - ERP (for any non-per-Port ERP), requested to ERP
BB by EoT BB;
2. removal of the B-VID instance (with automatic removal of B-VID - Port associations)
performed by Adaption on behalf of EoT.
Step 1 is not performed for B-VIDs created by ERP BB (the association, in fact, is
un-provisioned by the ERP BB after invoking the B-VID de-implementation; This avoids
deadlocks between ERP BB and EoT BB (both being single threaded processes).
A complete failure on step 1 causes the B-VID to remain in Implemented state.
A partial failure on step 1 or a failure during step 2 causes the B-VID to go in Partially
Implemented state.
Before you begin
Select the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > B-VIDs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-100
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-101
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The function associates all the Rings and Transport Links of a Domain to a B-VID.
Related Information
This procedure applies when the operator requires an existing B-VID in Defined state to
be Domain-Wide distributed.
This operation causes the B-VID to be associated to all the Rings and TLs of the Domain,
as if it was been created with VLAN Distribution = "Domain Wide".
Allocated case
This procedure applies when the operator requires an existing B-VID in Allocated or
Partially Implemented state (in any case, no provisioning is performed) to be
Domain-Wide distributed.
This operation causes the B-VID to be associated to all the Rings and TLs of the Domain,
as if it was created with VLAN Distribution = "Domain Wide" and then immediately
allocated.
This operation could also be seen as an equivalent of a series of ring association
(allocated case) and transport link association (allocated case) in order to associate all TLs
and Rings (only one Ring per Bundle) not associated to the B-VID.
Implemented case
This procedure applies when the operator requires an existing B-VID in Implemented
state to be Domain-Wide distributed.
This operation causes the B-VID to be associated to all the Rings and TLs of the Domain,
as if it was been created with VLAN Distribution = "Domain Wide" and then immediately
allocated and implemented.
This operation could also be seen as an equivalent of a series of ring association
(implemented case) and transport link association (implemented case) in order to
associate all TLs and Rings (only one Ring per Bundle) not associated to the B-VID.
As a result of this operation the B-VID can be either in Implemented (if each TL/Ring
association either failed completely or succeeded) or Partially Implemented (if at least
one TL/Ring association failed half-way) and can be associated to all Rings and TLs of
the Domains or not (in case at least one TL/Ring associated failed completely).
In case of unsuccessful operation the operator is informed of which TLs/Rings where not
associated properly or not associated at all.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-102
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > B-VIDs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the path Action > B-VIDs > Distribute VID domain-wide.
Result: VLAN ID is distributed in the domain.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-103
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
the B-VID
the Ring
an ERP instance on that Ring
no other Ring of the same Bundle is already associated to the B-VID (a Ring can't be
associated to a B-VID if another Ring of the same Bundle is already associated to it:
only one ring per bundle can be associate to a B-VID)
B-VID and Ring must belong to the same Domain
B-VID and Ring must not be already associated
If all checks are ok the B-VID is associated to the specified Ring and ERP instance.
Allocated case
This is almost the same case of ring association defined case, in addition the allocation of
the B-VID - Ring association is performed:
This case applies both to allocated and partially implemented B-VIDs (in any case, no
provisioning is performed).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-104
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Implemented case
This is almost the same case of ring association in allocated case, in addition part of the
implementation of the B-VID and of all the implemented EVCs that the former supports
is performed:
for each NE of the Ring in which the B-VID instance has not yet been provisioned:
creation of the B-VID instance and of the associations B-VID - Port
for each NE of the Ring in which the B-VID instance already exists: modification of
the member set of the B-VID instance to include the two ports of the Ring for that NE
request to ERP BB to provision the association between the B-VID and the specified
ERP (only in case of per-VLAN ERP);
for each EVC supported by the B-VID:
Select the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > B-VIDs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-105
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-106
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This is almost the same case of ring dissociation (defined case); in addition, before the
removal of the B-VID - Ring association, its de-allocation is performed:
de-allocation of the I-SID Distribution information, for each allocated EVC supported
by the B-VID in all the NEs that will no longer belong to the B-VID once the ring is
removed
de-allocation of the VLAN Distribution information (for each NE involved, the two
involved Ports are dissociated from the B-VID).
In no case a ring can be dissociated from a B-VID if this action leaves an EVC of the
B-VID with an EVC Termination on a NE that is no more used by the B-VID.
In other words: if an EVC Termination belonging to the involved B-VID, is on one of the
NEs of the ring, and, on that NE, there are no other Transport Links or rings associated to
the involved B-VID, the latter can't be dissociated from the ring.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-107
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Implemented case
This is almost the same case of ring dissociation (allocated case), in addition, before the
de-allocation of the B-VID - Ring association, its de-implementation and the
de-implementation of the involved part of implemented and partially implemented EVCs
supported by that B-VID is performed:
Select the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > B-VIDs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-108
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-109
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The function moves a defined B-VID from a ring of a bundle to another ring of the same
bundle.
Related Information
the B-VID
the associated Ring
the Ring to be associated
Select the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > B-VIDs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the path Action > B-VIDs > Change ERP instance.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-110
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-111
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about ERP , see: Ethernet Ring Protocol (ERP) (p. 19-11).
Before you begin
Select the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > B-VIDs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the path Action > B-VIDs > List ERP instances from B-VID.
Result: The list window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of ERP (p. 19-121).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-112
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
the B-VID
If all checks are ok the B-VID is associated to the specified Transport Link.
Allocated case
This is almost the same case of transport link association (defined case), in addition:
in case the EVC is under OAM: the I-SID must be distributed at each extremity of
the TL
This case applies both to allocated and partially implemented B-VIDs (in any case, no
provisioning is performed).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-113
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Implemented case
This is almost the same case of transport link association (allocated case), in addition part
of the implementation of the B-VID and of all the implemented EVCs that the former
supports is performed:
for each NE at the extremities of the TL in which the B-VID instance has not yet been
provisioned: creation of the B-VID instance and of the associations B-VID - Port
for each NE at the extremities of the TL in which the B-VID instance already exists:
modification of the member set of the B-VID instance to include the extremity of the
TL in that NE;
for each EVC supported by the B-VID:
for each implemented EVC Termination residing on a NE at the extremities of the
TL: provisioning of the association Port - B-VID - I-SID, that can either mean
creation of a row in opticsIMPbbInstanceTable (if the row did not existed) or
modification of a row in opticsIMPbbInstanceTable (if the row did existed)
if the EVC is implemented and under OAM: the I-SID of the EVC has to be
provisioned also in all the NEs at the extremities of the TL that do not contain an
implemented EVC Termination.
Select the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > B-VIDs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the path Action > B-VIDs > Associate/Disassociate Transport Link.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-114
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-115
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
the B-VID
For a Transport Link to be dissociated from a B-VID, the following must be true:
If all checks are ok the B-VID is dissociated to the specified Transport Link.
Allocated case
This is almost the same case of transport link dissociation (defined case), in addition,
before the B-VID - TL association is removed, its de-allocation is performed:
In no case a TL can be dissociated from a B-VID if this action leaves an EVC of the
B-VID with an EVC Termination on a NE that is no more used by the B-VID.
In other words: if an EVC Termination ,of an EVC belonging to the involved B-VID, is
on one of the NEs at the extremity of the TL, and, on that NE, there are no other
Transport Links or rings associated to the involved B-VID, the latter can't be dissociated
from the Transport Link.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-116
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Implemented case
This is almost the same case of transport link dissociation (allocated case), in addition,
before the B-VID - TL association is de-allocated, part of the de-implementation of the
B-VID and of all the implemented or partially implemented EVCs that the former
supports is performed:
Select the path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > B-VIDs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the path Action > B-VIDs > Associate/Disassociate Transport Link.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-117
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-118
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This document describes the functionality needed to manage ITU-T G.8032 Ethernet
Ring Protection v2 (ERP) protocol inside 1350 OMS PKT product.
Contents
View the ERP ring list
19-120
19-121
19-122
19-124
19-125
19-127
19-128
19-129
19-130
19-131
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-119
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The ERP List window presents all the rings and their attributes.
Related Information
For information about ERP , see: Ethernet Ring Protocol (ERP) (p. 19-11).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of ERP (p. 19-121).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-120
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Def.Time.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-121
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ring Types:
A major ring is a ring that is self-containing, i.e. it has no need to use tunneling of
R-APS through other rings.
A sub-ring is a ring that is closed by a tunnel connectivity provided by other rings
(either major rings or sub-ring).
Links list
Topological view
Common Map
Select Action > Packet > ERP > Create ERP Ring.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-122
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK
Result: The ring is created
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-123
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about ERP , see: Ethernet Ring Protocol (ERP) (p. 19-11).
A physical ring can be deimplemented only if no ERP instances are active on it. No check
is done respect to the usage of the links for traffic.
Before you begin
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-124
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about ERP , see: Ethernet Ring Protocol (ERP) (p. 19-11).
Before you begin
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select an item in the list and select Action > ERP Switch Command.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-125
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-126
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about ERP , see: Ethernet Ring Protocol (ERP) (p. 19-11).
Before you begin
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select an item in the list and select Search > ERP Port Inst on NE.
Result: The Port list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-127
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about ERP , see: Ethernet Ring Protocol (ERP) (p. 19-11)
The function applies to both defined or implemented ring.
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-128
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about ERP , see: Ethernet Ring Protocol (ERP) (p. 19-11).
The function applies to both defined or implemented ring.
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-129
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When more rings are present on a given set of NEs, it is necessary to define the stacked
ring bundle (bundle).
Bundle can be composed by major rings or sub-rings (no mix of major and sub ring is
possible).
PKT automatically creates a bundle of rings as soon as two rings are created on the same
set of NEs. Name of the bundle is assigned by default to Bundle x where x is a number
that univocally identifies the bundle.
Before you begin
Select Action > Packet > ERP > Create ERP Ring bundle.
Result: The creation window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK
Result: The bundle is created
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-130
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ring is of the same type (major/sub) of already grouped rings (this condition is
automatically verified if the previous condition is true, but can be useful to filter the
list of rings to be proposed to operator)
VLANs registered on the ring cannot be assigned to ring already grouped in the
bundle.
Removal of a ring from a bundle is always possible: operator has to take care of avoiding
registering VLAN on the ring after the removal: PKT cannot perform consistency checks
to avoid traffic loop.
PKT automatically add a ring to an existing bundle created on the same set of NEs.
PKT automatically remove a ring from an existing bundle when ring is deleted. This is
true independently from the way the ring has been assigned to the bundle (i.e. either
manually or automatically).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > ERP > ERP Ring bundle.
Result: The creation window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-131
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK
Result: The ring is added.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-132
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This document describes how to manage ITU-T G.8032 Ethernet Ring Protection v2
(ERP) instances inside 1350 OMS PKT product.
Contents
View the ERP instance list
19-134
19-135
19-136
19-138
19-139
19-140
19-142
19-144
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-133
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The ERP Instance List window presents all the rings and their attributes.
Related Information
For information about ERP , see: Ethernet Ring Protocol (ERP) (p. 19-11).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of ERP instances
(p. 19-135).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-134
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
VLAN Id. VLAN used to tag R-APS PDU for this ERP instance.
WTR Time. Wait time to restore (minutes) in case of switch mode is revertive. If
Switch behavior is revertive default is 5; If Switch behavior is not revertive
default is not meaningful and not modifiable.
Guard Time. During guard time RPL owner discards the received R-APS OAM
frames.
Switch Behaviour(Revertive, Non Revertive). Behavior of switch following clear of
failure.
ERP State. (deactivated, idle, protection, manualSwitch, forcedSwitch, pending).
Status of the ERP protection.
Maintenance Entity Level. Maintenance Entity Level of the ERP instance.
Hold Off Time. Time to wait, after failure detection, before starting ERP protection.
Switch On Ploc. (False, True). Include/exclude Partial loss of capacity (LAG) alarm
Def.Time.
Comment
Availability Status. (Normal, Degraded, Failure).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-135
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
R-APS VLAN Id must be inside the bundle of VLAN assigned to ERP for the domain
ERP instance is defined
R-APS VLAN id must not be used for in-fiber/in-band management channel: this
check could be implicitly passed if management VLAN is not part of bundle of
VLAN reserved for ERP.
R-APS VLAN Id cannot have already been assigned to other ERP instances on the
same ERP physical ring or by ERP instance on sub-rings that uses the current ring to
close the virtual channel for R-APS
Just one per-port ERP can be defined on a given physical ring
If ring Id is different from default it must be unique inside the ERP instances of a
given physical ring.
Select Action > Packet > ERP > Create ERP instances.
Result: The creation window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter the User Label. Unique identifier of ERP instance inside PKT.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-136
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter the R-APS PCP. Priority of R-APS PDU for this ERP instance.
Enter the Maintenance Entity Level. Maintenance Entity Level of the ERP instance.
Select the PBB Domain from list. Domain where ERP instance is defined.
Select the ERP Ring from list. Ring to be controlled by ERP instance.
Select the RPL Owner from list. NE having the RPL-owner role.
Select the RPL from list. Link/Port blocked by the ERP instance in nominal condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK
Result: The ring is created
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-137
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about ERP , see: Ethernet Ring Protocol (ERP) (p. 19-11)
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-138
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about ERP , see: Ethernet Ring Protocol (ERP) (p. 19-11).
Before you begin
Select the ERP Instance and select Associate OAM to ERP Instance.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For each item in the ERP Link List, select the following attributes:
Click Associate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-139
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about ERP , see: Ethernet Ring Protocol (ERP) (p. 19-11).
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-140
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result:
Figure 19-58 ERP Graphical View example
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-141
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In case the Ring or the scope has to be changed it is necessary to delete the ERP instance
and create a new one.
As a particular case the modification of RPL Owner requires to reset the RPL, so operator
has to select RPL again.
Before you begin
Enter the User Label. Unique identifier of ERP instance inside PKT.
Enter theR-APS VLAN Id. VLAN used to tag R-APS PDU for this ERP instance.
Enter the R-APS PCP. Priority of R-APS PDU for this ERP instance.
Enter the Maintenance Entity Level. Maintenance Entity Level of the ERP instance.
Select the RPL Owner from list. NE having the RPL-owner role.
Select the RPL from list. Link/Port blocked by the ERP instance in nominal condition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-142
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK
Result: The ring is created
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-143
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attributes that can be modified for an implemented ERP instance are attributes that can be
changed on the NE with no need to deactivate the ERP instance.
Before you begin
Enter the User Label. Unique identifier of ERP instance inside PKT.
Enter the R-APS PCP. Priority of R-APS PDU for this ERP instance.
Select the RPL Owner from list. NE having the RPL-owner role.
Select the RPL from list. Link/Port blocked by the ERP instance in nominal condition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-144
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK
Result: The ring is created
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-145
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Fault Localization allows the user to determine the list of elementary alarms affecting
a managed resource.
Contents
PBB Fault Localization and navigation to AS
19-147
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-146
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function displays information about the fault present on the selected object.
Related Information
Show the list of the objects. Select one of the following paths:
Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge EVCs. Select
backbone EVCs.
Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > B-VIDs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select an item in the list and select Search > Fault Localization.
Result: The Fault Localization list window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Fault Localization (p. 11-73).
The list is not refreshed automatically, click Actualize button to refresh it.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select an item in the list and click Search > External Navigation to > AS .
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-147
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Fault Management window is displayed with the alarm list.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Alarms
(p. 18-57)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-148
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The workflow to manage PBB is part of the more general workflow for the Ethernet
Service management.
Transport Link Overwiew
1350OMS does support the provisioning of the infrastructure in term of TDM Links,
WDM and Ethernet cables and (T-)MPLS links.
The infrastructure is used for different supported layer (T-)MPLS or Ethernet.
The infrastructure is named Transport Link.
The Transport Link can be supported by:
A TDM path. The link is called Link Over TDM. It carries directly Ethernet
Segments, Tunnels or PWs.
A Tunnel/PW. The link is called Link Over (T-)MPLS. A Link Over TDM or a Link
Over Cable (Martini) carries it.
An Ethernet cable or a Martini cable. The link is called Link Over Cable.
A WDM link. The link is called Link Over WDM.
Domain overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-149
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ETS
Bridge
T-MPLS
STP
RSTP
PVSTP
MSTP
none
The list of possible Bridge types depends on the selected Domain type
The list of possible Control protocols depends on the selected Bridge type
In case of PBB the only possible choice for Control Protocol is ERP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-150
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function allows the user to define a domain in the managed network.
Related Information
Follow the path Action > Packet > Construction > Create Domain.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The domain is created.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-151
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Add NE to a Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Add NE to a Domain
When to use
It is possible to assign a group of NE in a single operation. See Action > Packet >
Construction > Assign Resources to Domain
Follow the path Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the path Action > Network Element > Assign Network Element to Domain.
Result: The assign window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the PBB domain and Click the check sign to confirm it.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-152
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Add NE to a Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-153
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
It is possible to assign a group of Transport Link in a single operation. See also Action >
Packet > Construction > Assign Resources to Domain
When the user assigns Transport Links, the related NE are automatically uploaded and
associated to the domain.
For information, see: Overview about Workflow (p. 19-149).
Before you begin
Follow the path Search > Packet > Construction > Transport Link.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the path Action >Transport Link> Assign Transport Link to Domain.
Result: The assign window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the PBB domain and Click the check sign to confirm it.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-154
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The NE is assigned to the Domain previously created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-155
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
ERP provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ERP provisioning
When to use
comment.
RPL Owner (NE that has the master role on ERP instance).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-156
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
ERP provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ring Port.
MEP.
Note: If Loss of Continuity defect or Link OAM Critical Events are used as Switch
Criteria it is necessary to assign Down MEPs to Ring Ports (on all the NEs inside the
ring).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-157
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Configure B-VID
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure B-VID
When to use
The function allows to define a B-VID in a PBB domain and to associate it to the ERP
instance.
Related Information
Follow the path Action > Packet > ... > Configure B_VID.
Result: The configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-VID distribution:
Crossed rings: B-VID is distributed on all the NEs of rings selected by user.
ERP instance, used to protect B-VID, is assigned for each crossed ring.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-158
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information about PBB EVC, see: PBB Ethernet Virtual Connection (p. 19-7).
Before you begin
Follow the path Action > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Create
Bridge EVC.
Result: The creation window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
User label.
Service Type [EVPL, EPTL, EPL, EPLAN, EVPLAN, HSI, BTV, Broadcast].
Network Access Domain (optional): Network Access Domain (NAD) can be used to
partition the network into different administrative domains. A possible use is to limit
the user to use only a set the of the networks resources (NEs, ports, links).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-159
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set Standard VLAN type (0x8100) [True, False] (identifier for VLAN tagged frames
at UNI).
IGMP Snooping State [Not Meaningful, Enabled, Disabled] (to mark if IGMP
snooping is enabled/disabled on the EVC).
Configure the Storm Control:
Service frame delivery assumes one of the following values: Deliver
unconditionally, Deliver conditionally, Discard. Fill the following fields:
Unicast Service Frame Delivery.
The user can use the fields in the info panel to enter comments or other information.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select PM panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
creates a MA with identifier equal to the EVC user label with MA_ prefix.
enables CC with default period of 1 second, no intermediate points (MIP).
Select Priority.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-160
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When checked, it ensures that each packet exiting the EVC (at some egress UNI) has the
same VLAN Id & Priority Bits information that it had when it entered the EVC (at some
ingress UNI).
This Attribute must be defined at EVC definition and is modifiable before EVC
allocation.
These two attributes are not meaningful for the relevant NEs. C-VLAN push/pop is
configured on flow level.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Next
Result:
Figure 19-59 Create PBB EVC: Termination Selection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select node and port for both originating and terminating sides.
Click Next
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-161
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result:
Figure 19-60 Create PBB EVC: Termination Settings
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Click traffic descriptor button. Select the traffic descriptor from the selection box
and confirm.
Select the policy mode. If you select color aware, you will select color profile.
Select the classification priority-code 0-7 / DSCP code 0-63.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-162
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-163
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
You can monitor that the Ingress flow has been created: the relevant traffic descriptor is
displayed in the bottom of the window
Figure 19-62 Ingress Flow: create monitoring
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-164
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-165
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can monitor that the Egress flow has been created: the relevant traffic descriptor is
displayed in the bottom of the window
Figure 19-63 Egress Flow: Push
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-166
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-167
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16
To verify the successful creation, follow the path Search > Packet > Connection
Less(Bridge) > Bridge EVC
Figure 19-65 Search>Packet>Connection Less(Bridge)>Bridge EVC
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-168
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For each EVC termination, user defines the traffic classification rules by associating a
Traffic Classifier and QoS attributes.
Related Information
Follow the menu path Action > Packet > Services > Create Traffic Classifier.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Payload type
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CoS and bandwidth profile are specified associating a Traffic Descriptor. See Traffic
Descriptor Definition (p. 19-170)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-169
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the path Action > Packet > Services > Create Traffic Descriptor.
Result: The creation window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-170
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-171
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To complete the Provider Bridge Workflow: create a Connection Less EVC, allocate, and
implement it.
Related Information
Follow the menu path Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less (Bridge) > Bridge
EVCs.
Result: The Bridge EVC list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the EVC in the list and follow the path Action > Bridge EVC > Allocate.
Result: The allocation window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The EVC is allocated.
Select again the EVC in the list and follow the path Action > Bridge EVC > Implement.
Result: The implementation window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-172
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-173
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In Band Management
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the procedure for the configuration of the In Band Management for
the TSS160C and TSS10 Network Element in the PBB (Provider Backbone Bridge)
Network when protected using the ERP protection schema.
Contents
Address Configuration of the Network Elements
19-175
19-184
19-203
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-174
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Network Element is correctly provisioned with the full set of boards required for the
configuration of the PBB Core Network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-175
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Using the ZIC configure the System ID, the LAN interface (if the NE is a Gateway NE)
and (for TSS160C) enable the OSPF for the node.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Figure 19-67 TSS160C System ID Configuration
From Communication > DCN Phys. If > IP Address menu open the view for the
configuration of the System ID.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-176
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Figure 19-68 TSS160C System ID Configuration form
In the form fill the IP address field and the Subnet mask field.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-177
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Figure 19-69 TSS160C Q LAN Configuration (Gateway NE)
If the TSS160C is a Gateway NE, configure and enable also the Q LAN Interface.
From Communication > DCN Phys. If > LAN menu open the view and configure the Q
LAN.
Note the configuration:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-178
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Channel (MNGPLANE)
OSPF (Disabled) (N) (This parameter refers to the enabling of the OSPF protocol on
the LAN interface and as far as we know no OSPF should be configured on that
network)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Figure 19-70 TSS160C Export of the Route
Some network topologies could require the export of routes (or static route) between
routing protocols. For example, may need to export the static route to OSPF.
To enable the reporting of the routes between different protocol open the ULC view from
Communication > OSI ULC Report menu.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-179
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
Figure 19-71 Tss160C OSI Routing Configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-180
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6
Figure 19-72 TSS10 System ID Configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-181
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
From Communication > System IP Address menu, configure the System IP Address
Figure 19-73 TSS10 System IP Address
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-182
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7
Figure 19-74 Tss10 LAN Interface Details
If the TSS10 is a Gateway NE, configure and enable also the Q LAN (LAN1) Interface.
From Communication > DCN LAN Interface menu open the view and configure the
LAN1.
Note the configuration:
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-183
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For the NNI ports that are designed to carry on also the management frame, the LAG port
(normally used NNI side to close the Ethernet Ring), must be configured by ZIC
(enabling the In Band Management) and uploaded by the NMS once the NE is reachable
(the upload is automatically performed during the NE Define action performed by PKT).
Refer to the following procedures:
The Network Element is correctly provisioned with the full set of boards required for the
configuration of the PBB Core Network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-184
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Figure 19-75 TSS160C Link Aggregation Group Management
From the Link Aggregation Group Management tab, go to the bottom of the page and fill
the fields related to:
Size (e.g. 2)
Name (just the LAG ID, i.e. the numerical identifier) (e.g. 1)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-185
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Once the LAG has been created, select the LAG port and set the Client Type as NNI:
Figure 19-76 Tss160C LAG Configuration (Client Type)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-186
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-187
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Once the port has been enabled configure the In Band Management selecting the In Fiber
In Band tab:
Figure 19-78 Tss160C In Fiber In Band
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-188
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-189
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Bind the ports in the LAG repeating the following steps for each port that is designed to
be member of the LAG:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-190
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the local port and set the Client Type as linkagg.
Figure 19-81 Tss160C port member of LAG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-191
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on Configure LAG link in order to open the view for the aggregation of the port to
the LAG created before:
Figure 19-82 Tss160C port member of LAG configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-192
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Once the view is opened select the Actor Admin Key of the LAG you want to associate:
Figure 19-83 Tss160C port member of LAG Actor
Note: For the TSS160C V1.12.04, note the following: In that release the bind of the
port (the action before) fails. In order to bind the ports with the LAG follows the
special procedure provided by NE team. See Task for TSS160C V1.12.04
(p. 19-194)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-193
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For the TSS160C V1.12.04 note the following: In that release the bind of the port (the
action described in Task for TSS160C (p. 19-185)) fails. In order to bind the ports with
the LAG follows the special procedure provided by NE team.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connect to the CLI of the NE using the following command (by an PC or UNIX station
that is able to reach the NE):
telnet ip address of ne 1123
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port
InterfaceType
ClientType
ServiceStatus
AdminStatus
Traffic
================================================================================
r1sr1sl13d0p1
eth (6)
linkagg (3)
0
down
(2)
down (2)
r1sr1sl13d0p2
eth (6)
ets (1)
0
down
(2)
down (2)
r1sr1sl13d0p3
eth (6)
linkagg (3)
0
up
(1)
up (1)
r1sr1sl13d0p4
eth (6)
linkagg (3)
0
up
(1)
up (1)
r1sr1sl13d0p6
eth (6)
pnp (5)
0
up
(1)
up (1)
r1sr1sl13d0p7
eth (6)
linkagg (3)
0
up
(1)
up (1)
r1sr1sl13d0p8
eth (6)
ets (1)
0
down
(2)
down (2)
r1sr1sl13d0p9
eth (6)
ets (1)
0
down
(2)
down (2)
r1sr1sl13d0p10 eth (6)
ets (1)
0
down
(2)
down (2)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-194
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
---------
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
2
3
1
''
enable (1)
3
''
enable (1)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-195
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Figure 19-84 TSS10 Link Aggregation Group Management
From the Link Aggregation Group Management tab, go to the bottom of the page and fill
the fields related to:
Size (e.g. 2)
Name (just the LAG ID, i.e. the numerical identifier) (e.g. 1)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-196
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Once the port has been created enable the In Band Management:
Figure 19-85 Tss10 Enable the In Band Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-197
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the In-band Management tab and check the configuration (click on save if you
need to modify the Management Plan Label)
Figure 19-86 TSS60 In Fiber In Band Configuration
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Bind the ports in the LAG repeating the following steps for each port that is designed to
be member of the LAG:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-198
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the local port and set the Client Type as LAG:
Figure 19-87 Tss10 portInLAG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-199
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on Configure LAG link in order to open the view for the aggregation of the port to
the LAG created before:
Figure 19-88 Tss10 port member of LAG configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-200
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Once the view is opened select the Actor Admin Key of the LAG you want to associate:
Figure 19-89 Tss10_portInLAGconfigActor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-201
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Complete the configuration enablig the Admin State of the member port.
Figure 19-90 Tss10_portInLAGadminState
In order to reach the nodes from the NMS it is now required to configure the ip
network in the middle (between node and NMS) according to the DCN topology and
the addresses plan.
For a simple test, if the NMS is in the same sub network of the Q LAN interface of a
gateway NE (e.g. a TSS160C), is possible to configure a static route on the NE (as
explained before) and a static route on the NMS and verify if the node inside the ring
are reachable from the NMS (ping).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-202
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create the Network Elements NE Manager side, set the right addresses and verify that
NMS is able to reach the nodes in the ring.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-203
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Once the Network Elements are reachable via NMS, it is possible to start the Supervision.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Figure 19-91 NMS Start Supervision
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-204
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Once the supervision starts, select the Nodes Physical Manager side and ask for
Synchronize NE.
Figure 19-92 NMS Synchronize NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-205
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Physical Manager, if you need, you can add the node in the MAPs.
Figure 19-93 NMS add Node In Map
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-206
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Physical Manager, create the Physical Connections, one for each Link Member
of the LAG.
Figure 19-94 NMS Create Physical Connection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-207
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Once the full set of Physical Connections related to the Links composing the LAG has
been created, the next step is the definition of the nodes PKT side.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-208
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the node you need to define from the Available NE list of the PKT and ask for
Define NE.
Figure 19-96 NMS Define NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-209
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: During the Define NE operation the Ethernet Local Ports, the LAG Ports, and
the Physical Links (defined from the Physical Manager on the ports member of the
LAGs) will be automatically uploaded.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For each node, ask for Ethernet Local Ports and verify the presence of the LAG port
defined before via ZIC:
Figure 19-97 NMS Ethernet Physical Port list
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-210
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In order to build the Link Over LAG, select Action > Packet > Construction > Create
LAG Link Over Cable From Extremities as depicted in the snapshot:
Figure 19-98 NMS_createLinkOverLAG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-211
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the nodes in the wizard, and the LAG ports extremities of the Link Over LAG and
commit the creation:
Figure 19-99 Create Link Over Cable
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
The Link Over LAG will be created using the LAG ports created before via ZIC and
uploaded NMS side.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-212
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Moreover it will refer to the Links built before using the Physical Manager (the links
using as extremities the ports member of the LAG).
Figure 19-100 NMS Link Over LAG list
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-213
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
19-214
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
20
20
Broadcast
TV Service
Management
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the BTV service emulation in the scope of Ethernet Connection
Oriented and Connection Less management.
Contents
Introduction
20-3
20-3
20-4
20-5
20-7
20-8
20-11
20-14
20-16
20-17
20-18
20-19
20-20
20-23
20-25
20-25
20-26
20-29
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-33
Create a Customer
20-33
20-35
20-37
20-42
20-42
20-43
20-45
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction
Overview about Broadcast TV
Broadcast TV description
This chapter describes the BTV service emulation in the scope of Ethernet Connection
Oriented management.
The user defines an EPLAN or an EVPLAN service. The choice depends on whether the
SDH partially terminated path is shared or not with other services. The user is suggested
to use the comment field to state that the service is a BTV service.
The 1350 OMS PKT user defines an EVC belonging to an EPLAN or an EVPLAN
service with the following characteristics:
Multipoint to multipoint.
Unicast.
The EVC termination is chosen among the Ethernet Physical ports available on real
NEs ending the SDH broadcast path.
The 1350 OMS PKT user defines a set of Ethernet Segments having common TD, TC,
and Color Profile (if needed).
The user is requested to define one Ethernet Segment for each Link Over TDM taking
care about the assigned directionality:
For SDH broadcast path sources: each Ethernet Segment must start from a real NE
and must end on the ENE playing the BTV role.
For SDH broadcast path sinks: each Ethernet Segment must start from the ENE
playing the BTV role and must end on a real NE.
Then, all built Ethernet Segments can be Allocated and Implemented, allowing the
Broadcast traffic flowing.
Note: Operations are in users hands. No specific congruence checks are performed by
1350 OMS PKT for EPLINE or EVPLINE services emulating BTV services.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The BTV Element management, part of the network construction, consists in:
ETP list.
properties.
The BTV Element management chain gives the order in which the available actions can
be performed.
Figure 20-1 BTV Element management chain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Broadcast TV Element list presents all the ENEs managed (that is, already defined)
by the 1350 OMS PKT, and their attributes.
Related information
For a description about BTV Elements, refer to the topic Managing Broadcast TV
Elements (p. 20-4).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined External NEs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The list window is shows all the available ENEs and their attributes according
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-7
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in making visible for the 1350 OMS PKT a NE or a set of NEs not
managed by the 1350 OMS PKT.
Related information
For a description about BTV Elements, refer to the topic Managing Broadcast TV
Elements (p. 20-4).
The user is authorized to create a BTV Element in the main parent subnetwork (called
MEN by default).
Not managed NE are NE contained in an adjacent subnetwork not accessible for the 1350
OMS PKT.
Before you begin
Task
Select Action > Packet > Construction > Create External Network Element.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-8
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result:
Figure 20-3 Broadcast TV Element Creation window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create an ENE:
Enter a Domain: choose a Provider Domain for BTV Service on Provider Bridge in
Connection Less networks.
Choose the ENE Role: BTV.
Enter a Comment (optional).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-9
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The BTV Element is created with an amount of ETPs, which are
automatically created. See Table B-6, Limits for ETPs in an ENE (p. B-2)
The tree area, the BTV Element list and the opened graphical views are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-10
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about BTV Elements, refer to the topic Managing Broadcast TV
Elements (p. 20-4).
The BTV Element modification gives the possibility to modify:
If the User Label is modified, the new User Label must be different as one which is
already used by another ENE.
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined External NEs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-11
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result:
Figure 20-4 External Network Element Modification window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-12
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: Then, the Broadcast TV Element list, the tree area, and the opened graphical
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-13
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in deleting a BTV Element and its ETPs from the 1350 OMS PKT
supervision.
Related information
For a description about BTV Elements, refer to the topic Managing Broadcast TV
Elements (p. 20-4).
Before you begin
The usage state of the ETPs belonging to the BTV Element must be idle.
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined External NEs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > from External Network Element > Delete or right-click the mouse and
Select Delete.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-14
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, the BTV Elements and their ETPs are removed.
The Broadcast TV Element list, the tree area, and the opened graphical views are
updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-15
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about BTV Elements, refer to the topic Managing Broadcast TV
Elements (p. 20-4).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined External NEs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Details of a BTV Elements (p. 20-17)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-16
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Parent Subnetwork.
Domain.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-17
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about BTV Elements, refer to the topic Managing Broadcast TV
Elements (p. 20-4).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined External NEs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from External Network Element > ETP List.
Result: The broadcast TV NE ETP list is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of BTV ENE
inventory (p. 20-19)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-18
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Identifier.
Transport Link.
Interface Rate.
Manager Control.
NAD.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-19
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in creating ETPs that represent Ethernet ports located in the
selected BTV Element.
Related information
For a description about BTV Elements, refer to the topic Managing Broadcast TV
Elements (p. 20-4).
Before you begin
In the ENE, the amount of ETPs must not exceed the maximum. See Table B-6,
Limits for ETPs in an ENE (p. B-2)
Note: When the BTV Element is created, the ETP is created by default.
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined External NEs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-20
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create ETPs:
Enter the first ETP to create (That is a numerical value corresponding to the first
ETP number to be used).
Enter the Number of ETP to create. Valid numerical value is between 1 and the
maximum number of ETPs which can be created on a ENE. See Table B-6,
Limits for ETPs in an ENE (p. B-2)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok button.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-21
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The ETPs (added after the first ones automatically created at the ENE
creation) are always created with Manager Control set to Disabled.
The ETPs are automatically generated by the 1350 OMS PKT and the ETP List is
updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-22
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in deleting ETPs from a previously selected BTV Element.
Related information
For a description about BTV Elements, refer to the topic Managing Broadcast TV
Elements (p. 20-4).
Before you begin
The usage state of the ETPs belonging to the ENE must be idle.
Task
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined External NEs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Inventory from External Network Element > ETP List.
Result: The ETP list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-23
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > External TP > Delete or right-click the mouse and Select Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: After confirmation, the ETPs are removed from BTV Element.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-24
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The first operation for BTV Service Management is the path creation on 1350 OMS SDH
application.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-25
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in making visible for the 1350 OMS PKT a NE or a set of NEs not
managed by the 1350 OMS PKT.
Related information
For a description about BTV Elements, refer to the topic Managing Broadcast TV
Elements (p. 20-4).
Not managed NE are NE contained in an adjacent subnetwork not accessible for the 1350
OMS PKT.
Before you begin
Task
Select Action > Packet > Construction > Create External Network Element.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-26
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result:
Figure 20-7 Broadcast TV Element Creation window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create an ENE:
Enter a Domain: choose a Provider Domain for BTV Service on Provider Bridge in
Connection Less networks.
Choose the ENE Role: Broadcast TV.
Enter a Comment (optional).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-27
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
Result: The BTV Element is created with an amount of ETPs, which are
automatically created. See Table B-6, Limits for ETPs in an ENE (p. B-2)
The tree area, the BTV Element list and the opened graphical views are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-28
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about BTV Elements, refer to the topic Managing Broadcast TV
Elements (p. 20-4).
Before you begin
Select Action > Packet > Construction > Create Link Broadcast TV.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-29
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-30
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Extremity A Termination by using the sensitive help (only the terminations
with usage state equal to Idle are proposed).
Select the Extremity Z by using the sensitive help.
Select the Extremity Z Termination by using the sensitive help (only the terminations
with usage state equal to Idle are proposed).
Choose the Supported Layer: Ethernet.
Choose the Transport Concatenation Rate: VC_4.
Enter the Concatenation level (priority which allows to increase the flexibility of
SDH bandwidth management from 0 to 63).
Insert the 1350 OMS SDH Path Id.
Choose the Client Type: ETS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-31
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 1350 OMS SDH Path Id is read from 1350 OMS SDH path window selecting the
path > Show set attributes > Miscellaneous.
Figure 20-9 1350 OMS SDH Path Id
The 1350 OMS SDH Path Id is assigned to every Link Over TDM created for the
BTV Service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-32
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Create a Customer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function allows the user to define the characteristics of the owner of one or more
BTV Elements.
Related information
After definition, the owner is permitted to use the services that are defined across the
boundaries of the managed network.
For a description about BTV Elements, refer to the topic Managing Broadcast TV
Elements (p. 20-4).
For a description about customers, refer to the topic Customer description (p. 17-10).
Before you begin
Task
To create a customer:
Enter a User Label.
Enter a Company (optional).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-33
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Create a Customer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok button.
Result: The customer is created.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-34
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about BTV Elements, refer to the topic Managing Broadcast TV
Elements (p. 20-4).
For a description about customers, refer to the topic Ethernet Service description
(p. 17-20).
If the creation action is required from the Customer List, the Customer field of this
creation window is automatically filled with the selected Customer.
The Ethernet Service can also be created using the wizard. The wizard automatically
create the Connection Oriented EVC associated to the service.
Before you begin
Task
Select Action > Packet > Services > Ethernet Service Creation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-35
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Comment field, the user indicates that the service is a BTV Service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok button.
Result: The Ethernet Service is created.
The tree area and the Ethernet Service list are updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-36
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about BTV Elements, refer to the topic: Managing Broadcast TV
Elements (p. 20-4).
For a description about the Connection Oriented EVC, refer to the topic: Overview about
ETS Ethernet Virtual Connections (p. 17-41).
If this action is required from the Service List, the Ethernet Service field of the EVC
Creation window, is filled with the service selected Service.
To select the right Ethernet Service and EVC Type fields, report you to the Error!
Reference source not found.
If Termination part is not or partially filled, the user has the possibility to add EVC
terminations from the Add EVC Termination menu.
Before you begin
The EVC Type must be compatible with the service type of the associated Ethernet
Service.
The EVC Type must be compatible with the selected Traffic Type.
The role of each EVC termination must be compatible with the EVC Type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-37
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
Select Action > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > Create EVC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-38
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-39
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select an Edge Port user label by using also the sensitive help.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok button.
Result: The EVC is created.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the chosen Traffic Descriptor is Regulated, choose a Color Profile (by using the
sensitive help) which is associated to each Ethernet Segment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Taking into account the EVC Type, the Traffic Type, the directionality, and the number of
terminations provided, all the needed Ethernet Segments are automatically created.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-40
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Connection Oriented EVC is created and the EVC list consequently
updated.
The Ethernet Segment created directly from EVC must be allocated and implemented.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-41
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The management of Broadcast TV services, when the network is Connection Less based,
is achieved by means of following steps: the building of Ethernet connectivity on the top
of Provider Bridge and the optional configuration of IGMP Snooping on the desired
Network Elements.
The Workflow is the same as that explained in previous paragraphs Workflow for BTV
construction (p. 20-25) and Workflow for BTV Service Management (p. 20-33) with
following differences:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-42
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) is a protocol designed to connect users
to a multicast tree for multimedia applications. IGMP is carried over IP. The IGMP
Snooping is only supported on Domain where the Bridge Type of contained NEs is
Provider, Virtual, or MAC Bridge.
The IGMP Snooping is managed through navigation toward 1350 OMS EML. Each
broadcast-channel supplier has one C-VLAN and one S-VLAN.
Before you begin
Define the bridge domain and assign the 1850 TSS 320 equipment to the domain.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Choose one S-VLAN for each video-service supplier (the C-VLAN is chosen by the
router).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create the EVC for the video-service supplier. The EVC characteristics are:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-43
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Add one EVC termination for each host or DSLAM served by the video supplier
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Associate to the termination a Traffic Descriptor that selects the C-VLAN of the video
supplier3.
For the defined BSR, EVC termination Must provide the POP operation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For each 1850 TSS 320 , start the navigation toward 1350 OMS EML:
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-44
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To remind the user to perform Navigation toward NEs only after having implemented
the EVC supporting the IGMP Snooping.
To remind the user to perform Navigation toward NEs before De-Implementing an
EVC supporting the IGMP Snooping. This action also prevents errors during the
de-implementation phase.
EVC Definition
At EVC definition level, the user can optionally define the value of igmpSnooping
attribute. This operation is available only for EVPLAN, Extended EVPLAN, and BTV
EVC types.
In these cases, the possible values are:
Enabled. Just to remind that the user has the intention to use the IGMP snooping
Disabled. Just to remind that the user does not want to use the IGMP on that EVC.
EVC Implementation
When the user starts the EVC Implementation operation, and the attribute igmpEnabled is
set to Enabled, a pop-up window is raised to remind the user to perform a navigation
toward affected NE.
This operation is available only for Extended EVPLAN and BTV EVCs.
The pop-up window must be acknowledged by the user without further affect the
implementation procedure.
EVC De-Implementation
When the user starts the EVC De-Implementation operation and the attribute
igmpEnabled is set to Enabled, a pop-up window is raised to remind the user to perform a
navigation toward affected NE.
This operation is available only for Extended EVPLAN and BTV EVC types.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-45
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Acknowledged by the user with the option STOP the de-implementation procedure,
letting the user complete all the needed navigation.
Acknowledged by the user with the option CONTINUE the de-implementation
procedure, when the user is aware that all Navigation Issues are already
accomplished.
EVC Modification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
20-46
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
21
Network Supervision
21
Overview
Purpose
21-2
21-2
21-3
21-4
21-6
21-9
21-10
21-12
21-14
21-14
21-16
21-17
Specific Behavior
Client Signal Fail Alarm Management
21-18
21-18
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
21-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Supervision
Managing alarms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Managing alarms
Overview about alarms
Manage elementary alarms
1350 OMS PKT provides the following services to manage elementary alarms (see
Management Layers (p. 11-5), Application Positioning (p. 11-6) and Network
architecture overview (p. 11-8)):
In the following, is given information about the probable cause of the alarm to understand
their meaning and origin:
LOS (Loss of Signal) alarm covers the defects that occur in the following cases:
Loss of electrical or optical power,.
Failed Auto-negotiation process (LOS defect),.
No synchronization (LOS defect),.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
21-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Supervision
Managing alarms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the following table is given the list of elementary alarms generated by ISA E/FE/GE
boards and the mapping with elementary objects inside 1350 OMS SDH and 1350 OMS
PKT.
Such alarms must be managed through 1350 OMS SDH.
Table 21-1
Alarm [Default
severity = Path
alarm ASAP].
Loss of GFP[MAJ].
Probable Cause.
Loss of frame.
[TDM termination].
AIS Alarm Indication
Signal[NAL].
AIS.
GDataTransportCTPbid.
NAP.
SignalLabelMismatch[MAJ].
SignalLabelMismatch.
GDataTransportCTPbid.
Loss of Signal[MAJ].
Loss of Signal.
GMauTTP[Ethernet Port].
PORT.
URU on Physical
Interface[MAJ].
Underlying Resource
Unavailable.
GMauTTP[Ethernet Port].
PORT.
[TDM termination].
NAP.
[TDM termination].
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
21-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Supervision
Managing alarms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the following table, the list of elementary alarms is given. These alarms are generated
by ISA ES1/4 boards. The mapping with elementary objects inside 1350 OMS PKTis also
given in the table.
Such alarms must be managed directly from NE through SNMP.
Table 21-2
Alarm/Notif.
[Default
severity =
Path alarm
ASAP].
Board
Release.
Loss of
GFP[MAJ].
1.0.
TSF[MAJ].
1.0.
Probable
Cause.
Loss of frame.
NE object.
[1350 OMS
PKT object].
GFP interface.
[TDM
termination].
GFP interface.
[TDM
termination].
TSF[MAJ].
1.0.
LAPS interface.
[TDM
termination].
Loss of Signal.
1.0.
Loss of Signal.
[MAJ].
ETHERNET
Local.
[Ethernet port].
GTM[MIN].
PLM[MAJ].
Notes.
1.0.
1.0.
GFP Type
Mismatch.
GFP interface.
Payload
Mismatch.
GFP interface.
[TDM
termination].
[TDM
termination].
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
21-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Supervision
Managing alarms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 21-2
Alarm/Notif.
[Default
severity =
Path alarm
ASAP].
PLM[MAJ].
DEG[NAL].
Board
Release.
1.0.
1.0.
Probable
Cause.
(continued)
NE object.
[1350 OMS
PKT object].
Payload
Mismatch.
LAPS interface.
Degrade.
GFP interface.
[TDM
termination].
[TDM
termination].
DEG[NAL].
1.0.
Degrade.
LAPS interface.
[TDM
termination].
CSF.
1.2.
Client Signal
Fail.
Notes.
GFP interface.
[TDM
termination].
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
21-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Supervision
Managing alarms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the following table is given the list of elementary alarms generated by ISA ES16 board
and the mapping with elementary objects inside 1350 OMS PKT.
Such alarms must be managed directly from NE (through SNMP).
Table 21-3
Alarm/Notif.
[Default
severity =
Path alarm
ASAP].
Board
Release.
Loss of
GFP[MAJ].
2.0.
TSF[MAJ].
2.0.
Probable
Cause.
Loss of frame.
NE object.
[1350 OMS
PKT object].
GFP interface.
[TDM
termination].
GFP interface.
[TDM
termination].
TSF[MAJ].
2.0.
HDLC interface.
[TDM
termination].
TSF[MAJ].
2.0.
LAPS interface.
[TDM
termination].
Loss of Signal.
[MAJ].
Notes.
2.0.
Loss of Signal.
ETHERNET
Local.
[Ethernet port].
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
21-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Supervision
Managing alarms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 21-3
Alarm/Notif.
[Default
severity =
Path alarm
ASAP].
GTM[MIN].
PLM[MAJ].
PLM[MAJ].
PLM[MAJ].
DEG[NAL].
Board
Release.
2.0.
2.0.
2.0.
2.0.
2.0.
Probable
Cause.
(continued)
NE object.
[1350 OMS
PKT object].
GFP Type
Mismatch.
GFP interface.
Payload
Mismatch.
GFP interface.
Payload
Mismatch.
HDLC interface.
Payload
Mismatch.
LAPS interface.
Degrade.
GFP interface.
[TDM
termination].
[TDM
termination].
[TDM
termination].
[TDM
termination].
[TDM
termination].
DEG[NAL].
2.0.
Degrade.
HDLC interface.
[TDM
termination].
DEG[NAL].
2.0.
Degrade.
Notes.
LAPS interface.
[TDM
termination].
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
21-7
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Supervision
Managing alarms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 21-3
Alarm/Notif.
[Default
severity =
Path alarm
ASAP].
CSF.
Board
Release.
2.1.
Probable
Cause.
Client Signal
Fail.
(continued)
NE object.
[1350 OMS
PKT object].
GFP interface.
[TDM
termination].
Notes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
21-8
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Supervision
Managing alarms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SDH Path,.
Link Over TDM.
Table 21-4
Alarm.
1350
OMS
SDH
Object.
Major.
Path.
Probable Cause.
TransportFailure.
Derived from
alarms on
1350 OMS SDH
element
object.
NAP,.
Boundary CTP,.
DATA PORT.
Major.
Path.
TransportIncomingFailure.
Boundary CTP.
Major.
Path.
ExBer.
NAP.
Major.
Path.
TransportOutgoingFailure.
Boundary CTP,.
Notes.
DATA NAP.
Minor.
Path.
BandwidthReduced.
DATA NAP.
Major.
PAth.
LCASProtocolError.
DATA NAP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
21-9
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Supervision
Managing alarms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows the 1350 OMS PKT entities affected by NE or 1350 OMS
SDH alarms.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
21-10
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Supervision
Managing alarms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
21-11
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Supervision
Managing alarms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure is entirely related to 1350 OMS PKT and shows:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
21-12
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Supervision
Managing alarms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
21-13
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Supervision
Managing Fault Localization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in displaying alarms for a Link Over TDM, a Link Over Cable, an
Ethernet Segment or an LSP Tunnel.
Related information
Task
Search > Packet > Construction > Transport Links > Links Over TDM (Sdh/Sonet).
Search > Packet > Construction > Transport Links > Links Over Cable.
Search > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented (ETS) > Ethernet Segments.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
21-14
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Supervision
Managing Fault Localization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
21-15
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Supervision
Managing Fault Localization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Entity type.
Operator Label
NE User Label
Probable Cause.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
21-16
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Supervision
Managing Fault Localization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function allows the user to re-synchronize, on NE basis, all alarms currently existing
on a given NE. The operation can be started by the user.
Related information
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Defined NEs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the NE and issue Action > Network Elements > Alarm Synchronization.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: If the operation is confirmed, all existing alarms for the selected NE are
resynchronized toward Fault Management application and inside 1350 OMS PKT
application.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
21-17
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Supervision
Specific Behavior
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Specific Behavior
Client Signal Fail Alarm Management
When to use
Following conditions must be verified when the CSF alarm feature is activated:
Service is EPLINE, built upon a single SDH path with transparent GFP or EPLAN
emulating BTV services.
ISA NE at extremities supports CSF alarms and consequent actions (ES1/4 1.2, ES16
2.1).
Autonegotiation must be enabled on local ports (Reminder: Autonegotiation is not
supported on GE interfaces. In consequence, CSF cannot be enabled if GE is
involved).
Note: No check is done by the 1350 OMS PKT from this point of view because
everything is managed by the user during Navigation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
21-18
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Supervision
Specific Behavior
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: For each retrieved Edge Port, a Navigation toward 1350 OMS EML is started
For each retrieved TDM termination, a Navigation toward 1350 OMS EML is started
to configure the CSF Capability Support (CSF bidirectional propagation).
In case of BTV service emulation, the TDM termination interested to VC-AIS
propagation are connected to Broadcast SDH path acting as Sources.
After this scenario, GFP-CSF frame insertion (or VC-AIS propagation) and
consequent actions are automatically configured on the PEs accordingly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the service is implemented or commissioned, the CSF feature and consequently action
can be enabled or disabled.
Service implementation.
Result: CSF consequent action disabling (Mandatory for resetting the possible CSF
If the service is de-implemented, the CSF feature and consequently action can be
disabled.
Result: CSF consequent action disabling.
Service de-implementation.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
21-19
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Supervision
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
21-20
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
22
Network Utilities
22
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes how to use NE audit, alignment, force alignment, reservation, and
recovery.
Contents
Audit, Alignment, Reservation, Recovery
22-3
22-3
NE Audit tool
22-6
Results of Audit
22-8
Reservation tool
22-13
22-15
22-16
22-17
22-18
22-19
Perform an audit on a NE
22-20
22-22
22-23
22-24
Perform an alignment on a NE
22-26
NE Alignment tool
22-27
22-27
22-29
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Perform a reservation on a NE
22-31
22-33
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
Audit, Alignment, Reservation, Recovery
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The aim of these tools is to check and maintain the consistency between the network and
the 1350 OMS PKT database.
The utilities supplied are Audit, Alignment, and Force Alignment, and Reserve and
Recovery.
Audit (p. 22-3) is in charge of detecting the differences between the network and
the databases.
Alignment (p. 22-4) and Force Alignment (p. 22-4) are in charge to fix
discrepancies between the network and the databases.
Reservation (p. 22-4) and Recovery (p. 22-5) are in charge to re build in the
database, objects created without 1350 OMS PKT or before 1350 OMS PKT
installation.
The utilities apply on all the network, one or a set of subnetworks, one or a set of NE.
The tools works into a session. The session begins with the Start command and ends with
the Stop command.
Start procedure: The user has the possibility to start an audit, an alignment, or a
The Audit identify the differences between the NE MIB in the network and the database
of the PKT. The Audit reports differences in a text file.
The Audit performs comparison on a per-functional domain basis. For each domain
comparison is done on a per-elementary object basis.
The Audit applies on a NE or list of NEs. Only SNMP board can be Audited.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
Audit, Alignment, Reservation, Recovery
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Audit builds a file that contains all managed entities presenting differences between
the network and the database. Differences are detected by NE. The audit file contains:
The objects that exist in the database but not in the NE.
The objects that exist in NE but not in database.
The objects present both in the database and in the NE but having different setting.
The result of the audit procedure is stored in a text file available to the user. The user is in
charge to display the results and proceed with the operations of align, force align, reserve,
or recovery.
For details on Audit tool, refer to NE Audit tool (p. 22-6).
Alignment
The user can activate the Force Alignment on the audited NEs.
The Force Alignment procedure affect the traffic existing on the network.
The Force Alignment:
Adds to NE the entities contained in 1350 OMS PKT database and not contained in
the NE.
Deletes the objects in the NE not contained in 1350 OMS PKT.
Updates in the NE the objects presenting discrepancies in respect to the 1350 OMS
PKT setting.
The Force Alignment aligns the characteristics of Transport Link, Traffic Descriptors,
Traffic Classifiers, cross connections, LERconnections, and LSR connections. The
specific data, like indexes, related to the NE and stored only in the 1350 OMS PKT
database are update in the database.
Reservation
Network Utilities
Audit, Alignment, Reservation, Recovery
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The network resources (terminations, MPLS labels, Transport Link bandwidth) are
reserved. This reservation is visible by the operator by the fact that one or more
terminations are no more available for creating new paths (Ethernet Segments, LSPs), and
by a portion of reserved bandwidth consumed on the Transport Links. The associated
objects are created inside the database (Traffic descriptors (MPLS and Ethernet), Traffic
Classifier, Colour Profiles, Ethernet cross connections, LSR connections, and LER
connections). A part from the connections, those objects are visible and usable by the
operator after the reservation phase.
The Reserve provides the discovery of an existing Ethernet network:
The NEs are retrieved defining the EML to which 1350 OMS PKT is connected and by
1350 OMS SDH (for E/FE/GE Q3 boards).
This information is stored in 1350 OMS PKT database. This information is available for
MPLS infrastructure or directly for Ethernet Service usage (Link Over TDM for Ethernet
Segments and Ethernet physical ports). MPLS infrastructure is Link Over TDM devoted
to MPLS. Ethernet Service usage involves Link Over TDM, Ethernet Segments, and
Ethernet physical ports.
Note: The Ethernet physical port can be used also to build the cable (or Martini cable
or Ethernet cable).
For details on Reservation tool, refer to Reservation tool (p. 22-13).
Recovery
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
Audit, Alignment, Reservation, Recovery
NE Audit tool
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NE Audit tool
Overview
The NE MIB Audit function available from 1350 OMS PKT can basically detect and then
report two categories of misalignments:
Delta+ misalignments.
Delta+ misalignments refer to resources existing in 1350 OMS PKT DB but not in
the NE MIB.
The case occurs when 1350 OMS PKT implements Ethernet Services on a given ISA
Board and then the Board itself must be replaced. The case occurs also when a MIB
restore is launched to recover a previously stored MIB Backup. Alternatively, the case
occurs when 1320CT and 1350 OMS EML users remove services or resources
previously provisioned by 1350 OMS PKT.
Delta- misalignments.
Delta- misalignments refer to resources existing in the NE MIB but not in 1350
OMS PKT DB.
The case occurs when 1350 OMS PKT de-implements Ethernet Services on a given
ISA Board and then the Board itself is replaced. The case occurs also when a MIB
restore is launched to recover a previously stored MIB Backup. Alternatively, the case
occurs the case when 1320CT and 1350 OMS EML users create new services or
resources (bypassing security controls).
Delta misalignments.
Delta misalignments refer to resources existing in both NE MIB and 1350 OMS
PKT DB, but with different attribute values.
The case occurs when 1320CT and 1350 OMS EML modify directly services or
resources in the NE MIB bypassing security mechanism.
If a misalignment exists between the 1350 OMS PKT and NEs, the audit feature provides
the user with a means to detect. This situation happens in different cases:
After a long period during which the 1350 OMS PKT has been disconnected from the
network.
After the local access control (LAC) has been granted on a NE.
If the network has been configured without using the 1350 OMS PKT, operating the
1350 OMS EML or the Craft Terminal directly.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
Audit, Alignment, Reservation, Recovery
NE Audit tool
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Audit operation consists in comparing the content of the NE MIB with the content of
the 1350 OMS PKT database.
The user selects one or more NEs and requests the audit.
On the basis of the NE data uploaded from the NE MIB and the NE data stored in the
database, the 1350 OMS PKT performs a comparison. The differences are classified as
follow:
1. Data existing in the NE and missing in 1350 OMS PKT.
2. Data missing in the NE and existing in 1350 OMS PKT.
3. Different data using the same resources in NE and 1350 OMS PKT.
The result of the audit procedure is stored in a text file that is made available to the user.
On the basis of the information provided in the text file, the user can proceed with one of
the following operations:
Forced alignment to resume the situation described 3. Alternatively the situation can
be resumed as follow: the user can directly manage the conflict operating the 1350
OMS EML or the Craft Terminal.
When an audit is started on a NE, this NE is locked to avoid any modification of its MIB
during the procedure life time. On a locked NE:
The locked NE information is stored in database. At the end of the procedure, the NEs
locked in this procedure are unlocked.
The audit result is stored in a text file in XML format.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-7
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
Audit, Alignment, Reservation, Recovery
Results of Audit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Results of Audit
Per domain comparison
Here are the domains compared during an audit (and for each domain, a list of concerned
entities and their compared attributes):
Construction domain
Protocol type.
Supported layer.
Interface type.
Interface rate.
Duplex mode.
Supported layer.
Aggregation Id.
Aggregation Ports.
Client type .
Bridge type.
Ethernet domain
Attributes of interfaces entities for Edge ports and Ethernet end points:
Interface MIB index.
Effective bandwidth.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-8
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
Audit, Alignment, Reservation, Recovery
Results of Audit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Identifier.
COS.
CIR.
PIR.
CBS.
PBS.
Inflow Identifier.
Classifier Identifier.
VLAN Identifier.
VLAN Max.
Priority.
Priority MAX.
Inflow Identifier.
Policy Mode.
VLAN Pop,.
VLAN push (VLAN Id, Priority mode, Green priority, Yellow priority),.
Outflow Identifier.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-9
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
Audit, Alignment, Reservation, Recovery
Results of Audit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Color Profile.
VLAN Pop.
VLAN push (VLAN Id, Priority mode, Green priority, Yellow priority).
Policy mode.
MPLS domain
Label.
Service Type.
Effective bandwidth.
Traffic type or Qos (BE, EF, AF, traffic parameters (PIR, CIR, PBS, CBS).
Connection role.
Cast type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-10
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
Audit, Alignment, Reservation, Recovery
Results of Audit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cast type.
Policy mode (enabled, disabled).
LER connection (termination identifier, Lower PLS label, Upper MPLS label).
Activation status (up or down) attributes.
T-MPLS domain
Attributes of Nodes:
Five Classes.
Attributes of Ports:
Access ID.
Administrative State.
Access ID.
Administrative State.
Segment Dir.
Trail Layer.
In Label.
Out Label.
Mep Enabling.
Access ID.
Administrative state.
Segment Dir.
Trail Layer.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-11
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
Audit, Alignment, Reservation, Recovery
Results of Audit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
COS.
CIR.
PIR.
CBS.
PBS.
Attributes of Mep:
Access ID.
Cv TX.
Cv RX.
Access ID.
HoldOffTime.
RevertTime.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-12
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
Audit, Alignment, Reservation, Recovery
Reservation tool
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reservation tool
Overview
The reservation operation prevent the use of resources and allow the Recovery tool to
insert in the 1350 OMS PKT database the resources discovered in the NE MIB and not
present in the 1350 OMS PKT database:
Traffic Descriptors.
Traffic Classifiers.
Color Profiles.
Ethernet connections.
MPLS connections.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-13
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
Audit, Alignment, Reservation, Recovery
Reservation tool
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The user can recover and use the Traffic Descriptor used or not used by connections. The
deletion of the Traffic Descriptor removes it from the 1350 OMS PKT database but leave
it in the NE. A default user label is generated by the MPLS recovery component.
In the LSP Tunnel connections, the used MPLS labels are marked reserved for the
Transport Link in the 1350 OMS PKT database.
If two connections at the extremities of the path share the same MPLS label, the MPLS
label consumed only once.
The consuming bandwidth is affected on the corresponding Transport Links. For an LSR,
the Transport Links affected are two. For a LER, the Transport Link affected is one.
If two connections at the extremities of the path concern the same Transport Link
bandwidth is consumed only once.
In the VC-LSP connections, the used MPLS labels are marked reserved for the
Transport Link in the 1350 OMS PKT database.
If two connections at the extremities of the same LSP tunnel share the same MPLS label,
the MPLS label is consumed only once.
The consuming bandwidth is affected on the corresponding LSP tunnel or Transport Link.
If two connections at the extremities of the same LSP tunnel share the same Transport
Link, the bandwidth is consumed only once.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-14
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
Audit, Alignment, Reservation, Recovery
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Align Up function allows a selective (user driven) realignment between 1350 OMS
PKT and NE content.
The scope of this function is generic and can be applied in the contexts:
after a Network Manager migration to import from NE (overwriting data in the 1350
OMS PKT) the running value of the introduced Attribute.
on user demand.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-15
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
Audit, Alignment, Reservation, Recovery
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in preparing the 1350 OMS PKT to perform audit, alignment,
reserve actions.
Related information
For a description about Audit, Alignment, and Reservation, refer to the topic The AAR
procedure (p. 22-3).
Before you begin
Select Action > Packet > Audit Align Reserve > Start AAR Procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: If the operation is confirmed, a lock of NEs is done just before starting the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-16
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
Audit, Alignment, Reservation, Recovery
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Audit, Alignment and, Reservation, refer to the topic The AAR
procedure (p. 22-3).
Before you begin
Select Action > Packet > Audit Align Reserve > Stop AAR Procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: If the operation is confirmed, the audited NEs are unlocked.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-17
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
Audit, Alignment, Reservation, Recovery
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The function presents all the NEs that are available for audit.
Related information
For a description about Audit, Alignment and, Reservation, refer to the topic The AAR
procedure (p. 22-3).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of auditable NEs
(p. 22-19)
Note: If a NE is already locked by another user, it does not appears in this list.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-18
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
Audit, Alignment, Reservation, Recovery
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
LAC State.
Lcation Name.
Operational State.
Working State.
Consistency State.
Bridge Type.
Comment.
Version.
IP Address.
Type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-19
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
Audit, Alignment, Reservation, Recovery
Perform an audit on a NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Perform an audit on a NE
When to use
This function consists in starting the audit on the previously selected NEs.
Related information
For a description about Audit, Alignment and, Reservation, refer to the topic The AAR
procedure (p. 22-3).
For more details about audit on a NE, see: NE Audit tool (p. 22-6).
For information about attributes compared in an Audit, see Results of Audit (p. 22-8).
After confirmation, NE per NE, the 1350 OMS PKT uploads the NE MIB content and
compares it with the 1350 OMS PKT database.
In each domain, if an error occurs, the audit is stopped in this domain nevertheless the
audit in the other domains goes on.
If an audit is Partially done, the actions alignment and reservation are not available. Only
a new audit is possible.
During the same session, the user can audit again the same NE; In this case, only the
latest audit result is at the user disposal. This new audit allows the user to target a new
alignment (the alignment is allowed only once after an audit).
The audit results are temporally stored into audit files. They are automatically deleted
when the user stops the audit, alignment, reserve procedure.
One file per audited NE is stored. The file contains the compared domains.
When the audit is completed on all selected NEs, a message is displayed in the status bar.
The main steps of the audit are listed into the 1350 OMS PKT Log file. If errors or
warning occur, they are listed in this file too and in an error message window.
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-20
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
Audit, Alignment, Reservation, Recovery
Perform an audit on a NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Conditions
Unlocked.
Locked (due to an audit, alignment, reserve procedure launched on the NEs by the
user himself).
Task
Select Action > Packet > Network Element > Network Element > NE for Audit.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
Result: When the audit is in progress on a selected NE, the NE is locked. Operations
that affect the NE are not authorized (For example: delete the NE, delete the
transmission paths that has at least one NE concerned by audit, alignment session,
).
When the audit is completed on all selected NEs, a message is displayed in the status
bar.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-21
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
Audit, Alignment, Reservation, Recovery
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
After having performed an audit, this function displays the result of this audit.
Related information
For a description about Audit, Alignment and, Reservation, refer to the topic The AAR
procedure (p. 22-3).
When the AAR procedure is stopped, the information about audited NEs is lost.
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Audited NEs
(p. 22-23)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-22
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
Audit, Alignment, Reservation, Recovery
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Creation Date.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-23
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
Audit, Alignment, Reservation, Recovery
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function consists in starting the audit on the previously selected NEs.
Related information
For a description about Audit, Alignment and, Reservation, refer to the topic The AAR
procedure (p. 22-3).
For information about attributes compared in an Audit, see Results of Audit (p. 22-8).
When the AAR procedure is stopped, the information about audit results is lost.
Before you begin
Unlocked.
Locked (due to an audit, alignment, reserve procedure launched on the NEs by the
user himself).
Task
Select Search > Packet > Network Elements > Network Element.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-24
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
Audit, Alignment, Reservation, Recovery
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The files are automatically deleted when the user stops the audit, alignment, reserve
procedure.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-25
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
Audit, Alignment, Reservation, Recovery
Perform an alignment on a NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Perform an alignment on a NE
When to use
This function consists in starting the alignment on the previously audited NEs.
Related information
For a description about Audit, Alignment and, Reservation, refer to the topic The AAR
procedure (p. 22-3).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Audited NEs.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-26
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NE Alignment tool
Workflow to align up Ethernet Data
When to use
This function consists in starting the alignment on the previously audited NEs.
Related information
For a description about Audit, Alignment and, Reservation, refer to the topic The AAR
procedure (p. 22-3).
Before you begin
Start the Audit, Align, Reserve session from the Construction GUI.
Select Action > Packet > Audit Align Reserve > Start Procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Choose the NE (or the NEs) to be Audited from the Auditable Network Element List in
the Construction GUI and select Start NE Audit from the popup menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the need is to perform an Align Up operation on Ethernet objects, start the Align Up
operation from the Ethernet GUI.
Select Action > Packet > Audit Align Reserve > Align Up.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-27
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
NE Alignment tool
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the Align Up windows, select one or more objects that must be realigned and confirm
the choice with OK button.
Result: At that moment the Align Up function realign the 1350 OMS PKT database to
the NE image.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
After having realigned all needed objects, close the Align Up Window from Ethernet
GUI.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
End the Audit, Alignment, Reserve session from the Construction GUI.
Select Action > Packet > Audit Align Reserve > Stop Procedure.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-28
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
NE Alignment tool
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The procedure describes the main steps needed to replace an ISA board that supports
customer service or traffic under the supervision of 1350 OMS EML and 1350 OMS PKT
systems.
Related information
For a description about Audit, Alignment and, Reservation, refer to the topic The AAR
procedure (p. 22-3).
For more details, refer to the topic Align Up of Ethernet Domain Data (p. 22-15).
Before you begin
The faulty ISA Board has been replaced with a new one, the MIB is void in the new
Board.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ISA MIB is restored on the new Board through NE. The MIB stored at 1350 OMS EML
is not fully aligned with the current status of 1350 OMS PKT DB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS PKT launches the Audit operation against the involved ISA. The Audit report
identifies a set of mismatches.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Per each D- difference detected in the Audit report the user can:
1. Reserve the resource in the 1350 OMS PKT DB, acknowledging the NE configuration
is OK.
2. Remove the resource from NE MIB through NE, acknowledging the NE configuration
is not OK.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-29
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
NE Alignment tool
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Per each D difference detected in the Audit report the user can:
1. Perform 1350 OMS PKT operations to realign 1350 OMS PKT to NE, acknowledging
the NE configuration is OK.
2. Perform 1350 OMS EML operations to realign NE to 1350 OMS PKT,
acknowledging the NE configuration is not OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Per all D+ difference detected in the Audit report the user can:
1. Align Down the 1350 OMS PKT configurations to the NE, acknowledging the 1350
OMS PKT configuration is OK.
2. Remove the resources from 1350 OMS PKT DB (through GUI or DB access),
acknowledging the 1350 OMS PKT configuration is not OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Perform a final audit for a further alignment check. If any difference (D+ or D-) is found
again, repeat the steps from Step 4 to Step 6 until a full alignment is obtained.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-30
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
NE Alignment tool
Perform a reservation on a NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Perform a reservation on a NE
When to use
This function consists in starting the reservation on the previously selected NEs.
Related information
For a description about Audit, Alignment and, Reservation, refer to the topic The AAR
procedure (p. 22-3).
For more details about the reservation, refer to chapter Reservation tool (p. 22-13).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements > Audited Network
Elements.
Result: The list window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-31
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
NE Alignment tool
Perform a reservation on a NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-32
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
NE Alignment tool
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The procedure describes the main steps to Restore the MIB for an ISA board that supports
customer services or traffic. The board is supposed to be under the supervision of 1350
OMS EML and 1350 OMS PKT systems. The MIB is supposed to be saved in 1350 OMS
EML repository.
All the actions described in the previous ISA Board Replacement Procedure
(p. 22-29) are still applicable, except the point Step 1 associated to the physical
replacement of the ISA Board.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-33
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Network Utilities
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
22-34
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
23
23
Operation,
Administration,
and Maintenance (OAM)
Management
Overview
Purpose
23-3
23-3
23-7
23-8
23-9
23-10
Details of OAM MD
23-11
23-12
23-13
23-14
23-15
23-16
23-17
Maintenance Associations
23-17
23-18
23-19
23-20
23-21
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-22
23-24
23-26
Deimplement OAM MA
23-27
23-28
23-29
Maintenance Activation
Maintenance Activation on EVC
Loopback
Loopback activation
Linktrace
Linktrace activation
Delay measurement and Loss measurement
23-30
23-30
23-32
23-32
23-34
23-34
23-36
23-37
23-38
23-39
23-41
23-42
23-43
23-44
23-45
23-47
23-49
23-50
23-51
23-53
23-55
23-57
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Ethernet OAM
OAM main functions
OAM Introduction
The Ethernet OAM Continuity Check (OAM CC) allows determining the reachability
between groups of associated Ethernet Resources.
The Ethernet OAM CC is a tool for pro-active maintenance; in fact as soon as the OAM
CC tool is set up over Ethernet resources, such Ethernet Resources start exchanging
autonomously OAM Continuity Check Messages (OAM CC PDU) and specific Alarms
are sent by NEs whenever the reach ability between that Ethernet Resources is
interrupted.
Ethernet OAM Continuity Check is the base for other OAM activities:
The Set up of Ethernet OAM Continuity Check tool can be done on top of the following
Technologies:
T-MPLS Domains.
a combination of the above (E2E)
The Ethernet OAM CC is realized according to ITU Y.1731 and IEEE 802.1ag Standards.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
The terminologies adopted by the two Standards are slightly different, and the following
table reports a comparison between the two.
Table 23-1
Terminology Mapping
MD
Maintenance
Domain
MD
Maintenance Domain
MEG
Maintenance Entity
Group
MA
Maintenance
Association
MEG Level
Maintenance Entity
Group Level
MA Level
Maintenance
Association Level
MEP
MEP
MA End Point
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Monitored object.
Monitored object can be one of the following:
(only for Virtual Bridge, Provider Bridge and ETS) VLAN: it can be the CVLAN
in case of Virtual Bridge or the SVLAN in case of Provider Bridge
Ethernet Domain
NE
E2E EVC
EVC
EVC termination
Transport Link
Transport Link Termination
Edge Port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
For more information, refer to: OAM main functions (p. 23-3)
Maintenance domain can be defined by user:
To define a domain different from the default one used by all Maintenance
associations related to EVCs, links, ports
To define maintenance levels different from the one assigned by default (0 on links
and edge ports, 2 on EVC)
implemented in the NEs as soon as the first monitored object requires it.
Deimplemented when no more monitored object requires it.
From the main menu bar select Actions > Packet > OAM CC> Create OAM MD.
Result: The creation window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
intermediate points).
Click OK button to confirm the operation.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-7
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
For more information, refer to: OAM main functions (p. 23-3)
Before you begin
From the main menu bar select Search > Packet > OAM CC> OAM MDs.
Result: The list window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of OAM MD
(p. 23-9)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-8
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Format
intermediate points).
Provisioning State (Defined, Implemented)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-9
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
For more information, refer to: OAM main functions (p. 23-3)
Before you begin
From the main menu bar select Search > Packet > OAM CC> OAM MDs.
Result: The list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one item in the list and select Actions > Properties.
Result: The Property window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Details of OAM MD (p. 23-11)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-10
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Details of OAM MD
Attributes of an OAM MD
Format
intermediate points).
Provisioning State (Defined, Implemented)
Id
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-11
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
From the main menu bar select Search > Packet > OAM CC> OAM MDs.
Result: The list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one item in the list and select Actions > Modify.
Result: The modify window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
intermediate points).
Click OK button to confirm the operation.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-12
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
From the main menu bar select Search > Packet > OAM CC> OAM MDs.
Result: The list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one item in the list and select Actions > OAM MD > Configure.
Result: The configure window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Maintenance Domain .
intermediate points).
Click OK button to confirm the operation.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-13
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
From the main menu bar select Search > Packet > OAM CC> OAM MDs.
Result: The list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one item in the list and select Actions > OAM MD > Deimplement.
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-14
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
The scope of this procedure is to list OAM items related to a Maintenance Domain.
Related Information
For more information, refer to: OAM main functions (p. 23-3)
Before you begin
From the main menu bar select Search > Packet > OAM CC> OAM MDs.
Result: The list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one item in the list and select Search > OAM MD.
Result: The search menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
MA
MEP
MIP
Result: The list of the contained objects is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-15
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
For more information, refer to: OAM main functions (p. 23-3)
Before you begin
From the main menu bar select Search > Packet > OAM CC> OAM MDs.
Result: The list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one item in the list and select Search > OAM MD.
Result: The search menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-16
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Maintenance Associations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information, refer to: OAM main functions (p. 23-3)
Monitored Association (MA) instances:
EVC
Link
Edge Port
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-17
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
For more information, refer to: OAM main functions (p. 23-3)
Before you begin
From the main menu bar select Search > Packet > OAM CC> OAM MDs.
Result: The list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one item then select Search > Packet > OAM MA
Result: The OAM MA list is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of OAM MA
(p. 23-19)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-18
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
OAM MD
Format
intermediate points).
CCM Interval.
Priority.
OAM Enabled.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-19
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
The scope of this procedure is to list all the Maintenance Associations properties.
Related Information
For more information, refer to: OAM main functions (p. 23-3)
Before you begin
From the main menu bar select Search > Packet > OAM CC> OAM MDs.
Result: The list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one item then select Search > Packet > OAM CC> OAM MAs.
Result: The list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Details of the OAM MA (p. 23-21)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-20
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
OAM MD
Format
intermediate points).
CCM Interval.
Priority.
OAM Enabled.
Id.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-21
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
For more information, refer to: OAM main functions (p. 23-3)
See also: Configure Maintenance Association (MA) (p. 23-24)
Before you begin
From the main menu bar select Search > Packet > OAM CC> OAM MDs.
Result: The list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one item then select Search > Packet > OAM CC> OAM MAs.
Result: The list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
intermediate points).
CCM Interval.
Priority.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-22
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-23
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
For more information, refer to: OAM main functions (p. 23-3)
See also: Modify OAM Domain (p. 23-12)
Before you begin
From the main menu bar select Search > Packet > OAM CC> OAM MDs.
Result: The list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one item then select Search > Packet > OAM CC> OAM MAs.
Result: The list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Maintenance Association.
VLAN Id (0-4095).
intermediate points).
CCM Interval.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-24
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-25
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
From the main menu bar select Search > Packet > OAM CC> OAM MDs.
Result: The list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one item then select Search > Packet > OAM CC> OAM MAs.
Result: The list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one item then select Action > Enable or Action > Disable.
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-26
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Deimplement OAM MA
When to use
From the main menu bar select Search > Packet > OAM CC> OAM MDs.
Result: The list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one item then select Search > Packet > OAM CC> OAM MAs.
Result: The list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one item in the list and select Actions > OAM MA > Deimplement.
Select one of the options in the confirmation box. Refer to the procedure Confirm the
action (p. 11-43).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-27
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
For more information, refer to: OAM main functions (p. 23-3)
Before you begin
From the main menu bar select Search > Packet > OAM CC> OAM MDs.
Result: The list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one item then select Search > Packet > OAM CC> OAM MAs.
Result: The list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one item in the list and select Search > OAM MA.
Result: The search menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
MD
MEP
MIP
Result: The list of the contained objects is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-28
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
For more information, refer to: OAM main functions (p. 23-3)
Before you begin
From the main menu bar select Search > Packet > OAM CC> OAM MDs.
Result: The list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one item then select Search > Packet > OAM CC> OAM MAs.
Result: The list window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one item in the list and select Search > OAM MA.
Result: The search menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
NEs
EVC
Link
Edge Port
Result: The list of the contained objects is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-29
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Maintenance Activation
Maintenance Activation on EVC
When to use
on an implemented EVC
EVC
Link
Edge Port
For more information, refer to: OAM main functions (p. 23-3)
Before you begin
From the main menu select Search > Packet > Services > Connection Less EVC
(Bridge) > Bridge EVCs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Priority. (from 0 to 7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-30
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-31
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Loopback
Loopback activation
When to use
For more information, refer to: OAM main functions (p. 23-3)
Before you begin
From the main menu bar select Actions > Packet >
List one of the objects
EVC termination
Transport Link Termination
Edge Port
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Transport Link.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-32
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Priority.
Time out.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-33
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Linktrace
Linktrace activation
When to use
For more information, refer to: OAM main functions (p. 23-3)
Before you begin
From the main menu bar select Actions > Packet >
List one of the objects:
EVC termination
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Time to Live.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-34
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Date
LtmSent
NE UL
Port UL
Transport Link UL
MAC Address
Ltm Behaviour
Priority
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-35
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
The tool measures the delay time and the packet loss on Ethernet and T-MPLS services.
Contents
Packet Delay measurement
23-37
23-38
23-39
23-41
23-42
23-43
23-44
23-45
23-47
23-49
23-50
23-51
23-53
23-55
23-57
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-36
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
EVC
T-MPLS Tunnel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-37
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Ethernet Services
Tunnel T-MPLS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-38
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Select Search > Packet > MPLS and T-MPLS > T-MPLS Tunnels.
Result: The tunnel list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one item in the list. Select Action > Configure Maintenance End Points.
Result: The Configure Maintenance End Points window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Configure Tunnel for Connectivity Verification, Packet Loss measurement, set the
following attributes:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-39
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select DM Period
Select DM PHB
Packet Length:
Select one of the following options:
Click the box Random Packet Length
Select DM Policy
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok button.
Result: Tunnel OAM parameters are configured.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-40
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
The List window shows all the ETH DM Tools and their attributes.
Related Information
Select one item in the list. Select Search > ETH DM Tools.
Result: The list window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list ETH DM Tools
(p. 23-42)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-41
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
User Label.
EVC.
MD Name
MA Name
CCM Priority
CCM Interval
Frame Size
PM 15M
PM 24H
PM Policy
Provisioning State
Availability State
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-42
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
The List window shows all the ETH SLM Tools and their attributes.
Related Information
Select one item in the list. Select Search > ETH SLM Tools.
Result: The list window is displayed.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list ETH SLM Tools
(p. 23-44)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-43
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Session Identifier.
EVC.
MD Name
MA Name
CCM Priority
CCM Interval
PM Unidir 15M
PM Unidir 24H
PM Bidir 15M
PM Bidir 24H
PM Policy
Provisioning State
Availability State
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-44
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
This function creates ETH DM Tool for ETH over T-MPLS EVC.
Related Information
Select Search > Packet > Ethernet over T-MPLS > T-MPLS EVCs.
Result: The EVC list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one item in the list. Select Action > Create ETH DM Tool.
Result: The Create ETH DM Tool window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Frame Length:
Select one of the following options:
Click the box Random Frame Size
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-45
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Select PM 15Min
Select PM 24H
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok button.
Result: DM Tool is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-46
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
This function creates ETH SLM Tool for ETH over T-MPLS EVC.
Related Information
Select Search > Packet > Ethernet over T-MPLS > T-MPLS EVCs.
Result: The EVC list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one item in the list. Select Action > Create ETH SLM Tool.
Result: The Create ETH DM Tool window is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Configure Tunnel for Connectivity Verification, Packet Loss measurement, set the
following attributes:
Select Interval (100 microsec, 500 microsec, 1 ms, 3.33 ms, 10 ms, 100 ms)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-47
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok button.
Result: SLM Tool is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-48
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-49
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Select Search > Packet > OAM CC> ETH SLM Tool.
Result: The list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-50
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
ETS EVC
Bridge EVC
EVC Terminations
OAM MA
OAM MEP
T-MPLS EVC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-51
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-52
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Select Search > Packet > OAM CC> ETH SLM Tool.
Result: The list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ETS EVC
Bridge EVC
EVC Terminations
OAM MA
OAM MEP
T-MPLS EVC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-53
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-54
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Frame Length:
Select one of the following options:
Click the box Random Frame Size
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-55
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Select PM 15Min
Select PM 24H
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Ok button.
Result: DM Tool is modified.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-56
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Select Search > Packet > OAM CC> ETH SLM Tool.
Result: The list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-57
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Click Ok button.
Result: SLM Tool is modified.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
23-58
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
24
24
Circuit
Emulation Service
Management
Overview
Purpose
This document describes the management of circuit emulation capable devices in the
scope of packet transport networks.
Contents
CES Overview
24-4
24-4
24-9
24-10
24-12
24-13
24-15
24-18
24-20
24-21
Loopback management
24-22
24-23
24-25
24-26
24-28
24-29
24-36
24-39
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-41
24-47
24-49
24-50
24-52
24-54
24-56
CES Procedures
24-57
24-57
24-60
24-61
24-62
24-63
24-64
24-66
24-67
24-68
24-69
24-70
24-71
Details of CES NE
24-72
24-73
24-75
24-76
24-77
24-78
24-79
24-80
24-81
24-83
24-84
24-87
24-88
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-89
24-90
24-91
24-92
24-93
24-94
24-96
24-97
24-98
24-99
24-100
24-102
24-103
24-104
24-105
24-106
24-107
24-108
24-109
24-110
24-111
24-112
24-113
24-121
24-122
24-129
24-133
Configure CES
24-134
24-137
24-138
24-139
24-141
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CES Overview
Circuit Emulation Services definition
Supported network scenarios
Circuit emulation services are typically deployed in the scope of mobile back-hauling
network scenarios.
Figure 24-1 Mobile back-hauling scenario
The packet radio domain covers the access network, while the aggregation network can
be:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network layering
The circuit emulation layer is a service layer that uses the Ethernet layer as underlying
transport layer in the access network, where the physical transport is based on
microwaves.
Figure 24-2 Network layers in case of unterminated CE service
PKT manages both E1 terminated services covering the first scenario and also
unterminated services covering the latter.
When the access network does not need radio links, the T-MPLS domain may cover both
the access and the aggregation networks.
CES infrastructure
Circuit Emulation Services can be transported over Packet Radio technology or, over
T-MPLS technology. To prepare the transport infrastructure, the user has to assign the
transport resources (links or ports) to the relevant transport domain (Packet Radio or
T-MPLS). Then, the system automatically configures the resources for Circuit Emulation
Service support.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The resources available as infrastructure at the CES layer, are shown as follows:
the Link over Radio/Link over Cable or Link over T-MPLS is mirrored into CES
transport link
the PDH or Ethernet Port is mirrored into CES port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TSS-5C R1.0
TSS-5C R7.x
TSS-320 R4.0
External Interfaces
The packetized TDM traffic is encapsulated according to one of the following standards:
MEF 8
IETF SAToP
Comparing MEF8 and SATOP encapsulation types, it is clear that - from the switching
point of view - the ECID label plays the role of the PW label, while the SVLAN plays the
role of the LSP tunnel label.
The transport of end-to-end TDM service in the Packet Radio network is based on MEF 8
encapsulation.
In case of MEF8 encapsulation, the ECID identifies the emulated circuit being carried.
This separates the identification of the emulated circuit from the Ethernet layer. ECID
have local significance only, and are associated with a specific MAC address.
In case of MEF8 over Packet Radio, the mapping between ECID and VLAN is 1:1.In
case of MEF8 over 802.1ad, the packet can have single or double VLAN tag
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-7
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-8
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Synchronization between CES terminations is needed at the termination where the TDM
signal is reconstructed from the packets, using the following alternative options:
clock recovered from the TDM network interface (TDM line timing)
external reference clock source (External timing)
recovering the clock from the packet network interface (Packet line timing). Timing
recovery from Packet line relies on Synchronous Ethernet boards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-9
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Because of the change in the port naming rule, the user is recommended to avoid setting
up protections before the radio links are taken in charge by NMS. If it is required to setup
the protection after link creation in the NMS, the following user procedure must be used
as workaround:
Manually deassign the radio link from CE domain (automatic unlock sent to NPR)
Manually remove the radio link from NPR (object deletion sent by NPR to PKT) -> if
needed, PKT automatically deletes the radio link
Manually resynchronize ports from NPR: unprotected port is deleted and protecting
port is created
Manually resynchronize ports from PKT: unprotected port is deleted and protecting
port is created
Manually create radio link in NPR (object creation sent by NPR to PKT): PKT
automatically creates the protecting radio link (since it is a protecting one, assignment
to CE domain is forbidden)
Protection schemes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-10
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-11
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The modification of the CAC tolerance implies to update the homonymous attribute on all
domain nodes. The modification of the CAC tolerance impacts the way CAC checks are
performed on radio ports, in accordance with the modulation mode, as summarized by the
following picture.
Figure 24-5 CES Relation between CAC tolerance and modulation mode
The loose CAC tolerance is meaningful only in case of adaptive radio modulation mode.
In such case, CAC for TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH traffic is performed with respect to
the peak bandwidth.
In case of loose CAC tolerance, if the effective bandwidth is reduced to the minimum
capacity, all TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH traffic is disconnected and only ETH2ETH
traffic is preserved.
In case of adaptive modulation mode and strict CAC tolerance, CAC for TDM2TDM
and TDM2ETH traffic is performed with respect to the 4QAM bandwidth, while the peak
bandwidth is exploited only by ETH2ETH services.
In all cases, ifSpeed reports the correct capacity value for CAC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-12
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The user selects one MPR PDH or Ethernet port and assigns it to Packet Radio domain.
The assigned port is automatically inserted in the scope of the Packet Radio domain as
edge port. In case of Ethernet physical port, it is automatically activated by the system.
The following table summarizes the port technologies that can be assigned at the edge of
a Packet Radio domain.
Port technology
Ethernet
Yes
Radio
No
PDH
Yes
The user selects one MPR PDH or Ethernet port and deassigns it from Packet Radio
domain. The deassigned port is automatically removed from the scope of the Packet
Radio domain as edge port. PKT checks that there are no supported services using that
port, i.e. that the used bandwidth is zero for this port. The used bandwidth is set by the
manager that is responsible for service provisioning on this port.
Transport Link assignment to Packet Radio domain
The user selects one link over radio or link over cable and assigns it to Packet Radio
domain. The assigned link is automatically inserted in the scope of the Packet Radio
domain as transport link. One protecting radio link (as recognized by means of the
naming rule) cannot be assigned to the Packet Radio domain.
In case of link over cable, its Ethernet terminations are automatically activated by the
system (if not already active).
When the manager allocates one service over the TL, it increments the link reserved CIR
in order to lock the link and prevent its deletion.
Transport Link deassignment from Packet Radio domain
The user selects one link over radio or link over cable and deassigns it from Packet Radio
domain. The deassigned link is automatically removed from the scope of the Packet
Radio domain as transport link. PKT checks that no services use that transport link. In
case of link over cable, its Ethernet terminations are not automatically deactivated by the
system, since it is not known if they support inband DCN.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-13
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-14
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The user selects one TSS-5C PDH port and assigns it to T-MPLS domain; then it is
inserted as CES port under the T-MPLS domain. No change with respect to common TSS
behavior is foreseen about the assignment of TSS-5C Ethernet physical ports and SDH
terminations to T-MPLS domain.
TSS-5C ETH Port assignment to T-MPLS domain
In case of Ethernet physical port, it is a port shared for Ethernet and CE services and
therefore it is inserted both as ETH edge port and CES port under the T-MPLS domain.
PKT manages the reserved bandwidth for Ethernet and CE services:
PKT sums up the reserved CIR allocated by each manager and locks the port preventing
deassignment from T-MPLS domain. It is up to the user to ensure that the bandwidth
reserved for EVC and for CES do not exceed the interface rate.
The following table summarizes the different services that are supported at the edge of a
T-MPLS domain
Port technology
Ethernet
PDH
The user selects one TSS-5C PDH or Ethernet port and deassigns it from T-MPLS
domain. PKT checks that there are no supported services using that port.
The deassigned port is automatically removed from the scope of the T-MPLS domain as:
CES port and T-MPLS edge port, in case of Ethernet physical port
CES port, in case of PDH port
When one T-MPLS PW gets implemented, it is automatically inserted in the list of Links
over T-MPLS.
Each link over T-MPLS must be used alternatively either for EVC or for CES.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-15
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The management of the following attributes must be introduced in the Link over
T-MPLS:
when the supported service is EVC: it is inserted in the Ethernet transport link list
when the supported service is CES: it is inserted in the CES transport link list and
T-MPLS PW terminations are inserted into CES port list (with interface type =
T-MPLS)
When allocating the CES over the Link over T-MPLS, PKT updates the reserved
CIR/PIR/CBS/PBS as follows:
reserved PIR = reserved CIR = CES CIR , where the sum extends to all CES
allocated over this Link
reserved PBS = reserved CBS = CES CBS , where the sum extends to all CES
allocated over this Link
When the reserved bandwidth parameters are different from zero, the T-MPLS PW can
not be deimplemented, therefore preventing CES transport link removal.
Management of T-MPLS PW control word and supported service
The supported service can be configured by user at any time, even when the T-MPLS PW
is implemented. The supported service is meaningful only inside PKT scope:
when the supported service is EVC, the corresponding Link over T-MPLS is notified
only to Ethernet manager
when the supported service is CES, the corresponding Link over T-MPLS is notified
only to CES manager
From PKT architecture point of view, changing the supported service implies to move the
Link over T-MPLS from one managers scope to the other. Therefore, the supported
service cannot be modified if any of the Link over T-MPLS bandwidth parameters
(reserved CIR, reserved PIR, reserved CBS, reserved PBS) is different from zero.
When the supported service is EVC, the user has the option to configure also the control
word enabling/disabling, independently of the T-MPLS PWs configuration status
(allocated or implemented).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-16
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
the PW bandwidth parameters are pre-filled by PW creation wizard with the following
default values (the user can modify them):
CIR = PIR = 2432 Kbit/s
The above values allow to support one CE service for all possible values of payload size
(independently from the underlying layer).
The control word is provisioned to the NE via TL1 only to the T-MPLS PW termination
segments.
TSS-5C NE configure timestamp frequency
The system supports the configuration of the RTP timestamp frequency, used by CE
services with differential timing mode and RTP enabled. The system checks that there are
no implemented CES on the TSS NE to be configured. The TSS-5C timestamp frequency
supported range is:
77.76 MHz
25 MHz (default)
16.384 MHz
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-17
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PKT manages reports the elementary alarms generated by MPR and also correlates them
to transport resources. The alarm correlation can be:
horizontal: the originating alarmed resource is an elementary object and the correlated
resource is a transport object at the same layer
vertical: the originating alarmed is resource is a transport object and the correlated
resource is a transport object at the client layer
Figure 24-6 Horizontal and vertical alarm correlation in Packet Radio domain
Both horizontal and vertical correlation are always enabled on Packet Radio domain.
The availability status of the client transport object has the value:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-18
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Since R1.4 MPR sends URU in the following cases and on the following objects:
PKT correlates the URU to the impacted CE services according to the following
propagation chain:
Horizontal: URU on PDH port (PDH card failure) -> CES transport failure
Vertical: URU on Radio/ETH port (Radio card failure or SFP failure) -> Radio/Cable
link transport failure -> VLAN tunnel server transport failure -> CES server transport
failure
PKT receives via CSG the elementary alarms on PDH ports and persists them in database.
At PKT startup the PDH elementary alarms are automatically resynchronized.
The Underlying Resource Unavailable (URU) alarm represents equipment failures (e.g.
card missing) that affect services.
Alarms on PDH ports are synchronized from active problem table
PKT correlates horizontally the PDH port failure to the impacted CES
Since MPR R2.1, the LosCesFrame alarm is supported on PDH port. The LosCesFrame
alarm replaces the LOF alarm on CES termination supported by MPR R1.4.
Elementary alarms on 9500MPR radio ports
PKT receives via CSG the elementary alarms on radio ports and persists them in database.
At PKT startup the radio elementary alarms are automatically resynchronized.
PKT correlates vertically the Radio elementary alarms to the impacted CE services
according to the following propagation chain:
alarm (e.g. cableLoss) on Radio port -> Radio link transport failure -> VLAN tunnel
server transport failure -> CES server transport failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-19
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The operator can enable PM on a given CES at creation time or manually later, specifying
the desired granularity: 15min or 24h. The enabling is performed via navigation to JUSM.
MPR supports current and historical counters on the PDH ports for monitoring both the
incoming and outgoing E1 signal. They are persisted in NE agent cache memory. The
management has to start/stop one counter for each direction. So PM counters are available
to monitor the signal in both directions at the edge of the MPR network in case of PDH
edge port.
PDH measures are currently stored by NMS in the same database as SDH measures,
different from the Ethernet database. An architectural evolution of the CPM component
for PKT is required to manage PDH PM.
9500MPR Radio port performance monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-20
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The operation of the radio protection group switch position is managed via navigation to
JUSM
Switch position synchronization of single radio protection group
The operator is allowed to select one protection group and to start manually the
synchronization operation of the switch position for the selected protection group. PKT
retrieves and updates the current active switch position, the current switch command, the
current switch criteria and re-triggers alarm correlation for the involved radio links and
supported services.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-21
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Loopback management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loopback management
9500MPR Loopback management
PDH loopback is a loop and continue -> only one traffic direction is impacted. When the
PDH loopback is activated, MPR sends an event telling which is the involved port, the
direction and the type (internal, external).
Radio loopback is a simple loop -> both traffic directions are affected. When the Radio
loopback is activated on ODU300 access, MPR sends an event telling which is the
involved radio port, the direction and the type (internal, external).
In order to alert the operator that the loopback operation has affected the traffic:
In case of simple loop, MPR sends LOF on the CES termination that does not receive
the signal (loop and AIS insertion - so that AIS alarm would be raised on egress PDH
port - is not supported)
In case of loop and continue, no alarm is raised but the port state reports on JUSM the
active loopback (the loopback activation event is not managed by PKT)
The operator is allowed to select one protection group and to start manually the
synchronization operation of the switch position for the selected protection group. PKT
retrieves and updates the current active switch position, the current switch command, the
current switch criteria and re-triggers alarm correlation for the involved radio links and
supported services.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-22
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PKT manages reports the elementary alarms generated by TSS and also correlates them to
transport resources. The alarm correlation can be:
horizontal: the originating alarmed resource is an elementary object and the correlated
resource is a transport object at the same layer
vertical: the originating alarmed is resource is a transport object and the correlated
resource is a transport object at the client layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-23
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The availability status of the client transport object has the value:
The system supports the configuration of the degrade thresholds, that are used to generate
and clear the degrade alarm on PDH ports. The system checks that there are no
implemented CES on the TSS NE to be configured. The supported ranges and default
values are:
The raise threshold must be strictly higher than the clear threshold.
Elementary alarms on TSS-5C PDH ports
PKT receives via CSG the elementary alarms on PDH ports and persists them in database.
At PKT startup the PDH elementary alarms are automatically resynchronized.
PKT correlates horizontally the PDH port failure to the impacted CES, e.g.:
PKT receives via CSG the elementary alarms on Ethernet ports and persists them in
database. At PKT startup the Ethernet elementary alarms are automatically
resynchronized.
PKT correlates vertically the ETH elementary alarms to the impacted CE services
according to the following propagation chain:
Edge port: alarm (e.g. LOS) on ETH port -> CES server transport failure
Link over cable : alarm (e.g. LOS) on ETH port -> Cable link transport failure ->
Tunnel server transport failure -> CES server transport failure
PKT correlates elementary PDH interface alarms to link over PDH, if any.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-24
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The configuration of specific PDH interface characteristics that are independent of the CE
service are supported via navigation to MPR JUSM.
The configuration of all Radio interface characteristics that are independent of the CE
service are supported via navigation to MPR JUSM.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-25
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Packet Radio domain can physically interwork with other domains either at the PDH
or Ethernet level.
Table 24-1
Link technology
Interface type
NNI
IWI
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
In particular, a link over cable or a link over PDH can be used as the domain
inter-working interface in the cases described by the following RATS.
PKT is requested to manage inter-working Ethernet cable links between Packet Radio
domain and ETS domain.
PKT is requested to manage inter-working Ethernet cable links between Packet Radio
domain and T-MPLS domain.
PKT is requested to manage inter-working Ethernet cable links between Packet Radio
domain and PB domain.
PKT is requested to manage inter-working PDH cable links between Packet Radio
domain and SDH domain. The SDH domain is managed by SDH application. The
PDH IWI cable is uploaded from NPR.
PKT manages the upload via NPR-NBI of PDH links that terminate e.g. on 9500MPR or
on TSS NEs. The upload is triggered manually by operator, as in the link over cable case.
NPR creates the PDH IWI link characterizing it with PDH technology. The NPR message
response contains, for each extremity, the node userlabel and the port userlabel. PKT
ensures that in DB both nodes that terminate the PDH link are present: one of them is e.g.
the MPR/TSS NE, while the other could be any OMSN NE or other not-managed NE.
PKT gets via NPR-NBI also the NE type and Node ID of the not-managed NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-26
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When the operator assigns one PDH port as edge port to the Packet Radio domain, the
network role has the following values:
CE manager must be aware of the PDH network role since this network role is reported in
the CES routing display.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-27
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PKT is requested to manage inter-working PDH cable links between T-MPLS domain and
SDH domain. The SDH domain is managed by SDH application. The PDH IWI cable is
uploaded from NPR.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-28
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port segregation is supported by MPR both on Ethernet and radio ports. If more than two
ports must be segregated, one MIB entry is created for each segregated port pair.
Generic Circuit Emulation Service creation and allocation
A Circuit Emulation Service is a transport connection between remote E1 ports, where the
PDH stream is segmented and encapsulated into Ethernet packets.
The service can be terminated by PDH ports at both ends or unterminated: in the latter
case the PDH stream is not reconstructed at one service termination and the PDH traffic is
forwarded to the client equipment either encapsulated into Ethernet packets or into
channelized STM-n.
The service CIR is automatically computed by PKT:
based on interface type, service profile and clock source in case of MEF-8
based on payload size in case of SATOP, CBS is not managed in case of MEF-8.
The Tunnel is the object that represents the transport route within a given domain.
The CES itself is the transport object that can represent the routing across different
domains:
Two different Tunnels associated to distinct domains (no e2e Tunnel is created) can be
manually joined or stitched to the CES in order to realize one e2e CES:
Join is possible if one Tunnel already supporting CES and the Tunnel being joined are
connected by one transport link
Stitch is possible if one Tunnel already supporting CES and the Tunnel being stitched
share one logical port
Because of Tunnel join or stitching, one CES can be supported by one or many Tunnels
and one Tunnel can support one or more CES.
Tunnel joined to CES: after join, the CES is supported by one tunnel in each crossed
domain and the two tunnels are connected by one transport link
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-29
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Tunnel stitched to CES: after stitching, the CES is supported by one tunnel in each
crossed domain and the two tunnels share the same logical E1 port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-30
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
After tunnel join or stich, no new e2e CES object is created, but the e2e CES preserves
the identity of the CES across a single domain:
When the CES is supported by one single Tunnel, then it is a CES fragment
When the CES is supported by many Tunnels (i.e. it joins or stitches different Tunnel
fragments), then it is an e2e CES
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-31
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The encapsulation type and transport type are automatically computed by PKT depending
on the underlying transport domain:
Table 24-2
Domain
Transport type
Encapsulation type
Packet Radio
CesOverPacketRadio
MEF8
T-MPLS
CesOverT-MPLS
SATOP
The CES CoS specified by operator at CES creation time must be compatible with the
PHB Profile of the supporting T-MPLS PW aka Link over T-MPLS. In fact, if a
5-classes PHB Profile was associated to the T-MPLS PW, then not all CoS are not
supported.
Table 24-3
CoS
G2
R1
R(2)
R3
R4
BE
BK
the requested CES CoS is compatible with the supported CoS of the selected Link
over T-MPLS (bottom-up CES creation)
the automatically created Link over T-MPLS supports the requested CES CoS
(top-down CES creation)
If the operator chooses one CoS that is not supported by the T-MPLS PW, then the CES
traffic will be treated as belonging to the nearest lower supported CoS when forwarded in
the T-MPLS network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-32
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
in case of MEF8 over Packet Radio domain, PKT creates Packet-Radio Tunnel
in case of SATOP over T-MPLS domain, PKT creates T-MPLS Tunnel
in case of MEF8 over 802.1ad or T-MPLS domain (where it corresponds to one p2p
EVC), PKT creates Ethernet Tunnel
in case of PDH over SDH domain (where it corresponds to one SDH Path), PKT
creates SDH Tunnel
The operator can open the graphical routing display of one CES.
PKT shows the CES routing display in two layers:
Tunnel layer: it shows all crossed link over radio or link over cable or link over
T-MPLS
CES terminations
Tunnel termination segments
Tunnel
Radio links (in case of 1+1 protection, the radio link with working protection role is
displayed) or cable links or T-MPLS links:
Tunnel segments (termination and intermediate)
Cross-connections between tunnel segments
PKT shows graphically the above resources by means of a dedicated icon: clicking on the
icon, the resource properties are displayed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-33
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-34
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PKT manages the unreservation of database resources for selected CE service and the CE
service removal from database. The CES deallocation triggers the automatic Tunnel
deallocation. The CES deletion triggers the automatic Tunnel deletion.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-35
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TDM2TDM
TDM2ETH
TDM services are switched on local MAC address basis (each PDH board is assigned an
internal MAC address). The default service profile that is proposed to the operator is:
In case of underlying radio infrastructure, the operator can select any service profile. In
case of underlying Ethernet physical infrastructure (link over cable or edge port), only the
TDM2ETH service profile is admitted.
The TDM2TDM service is characterized by one specific VLAN on network basis. MPR
supports TDM2TDM services with proprietary encapsulation, i.e. not MEF-8. For this
reason a TDM2TDM service profile must be terminated at the edge of the MPR network.
Therefore, in case of unterminated CES, the TDM2ETH service profile must be used and
the MAC DA of the Ethernet frame outgoing from one GE interface must manually
configured by operator.
Details
The main service characteristic is the VLAN ID (in the range 2..4080): it is selected by
operator or it can be automatically selected by the system. VLAN ID must be unique per
service in all MPR network, otherwise loss of E1 signal could occur.
In case of TDM2TDM service profile, the PW label (aka ECID) is automatically
computed by MPR and is 1:1 with the service VLAN. In case of TDM2ETH service
profile, the ECID can be selected by operator for each service direction.
The following CES attributes can always be modified upon operator request:
userlabel
service group
comment1/comment2/comment3
text1/text2/text3
signal mode to framed/unframed
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-36
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following CES attributes can be modified only when the CES is defined:
ECID A->Z
ECID Z->A
Destination MAC address
All MEF8 CES terminations of all PDH ports belonging to the same card must be
configured with the same TDM clock source type.
The service creation fails if another service already exists that terminates on the same E1
card and has a different type. Two ports belong to the same card if their slot number x is
the same; the card slot number is represented in the ports ifIndex: 60 x nn.
The NE MAC address is used as source address in case of TDM2ETH service profile and
is configured by the management system as destination address of the remote NE. In case
of TDM2TDM NE MAC address is never used.
MPR does not support one MAC address per Ethernet interface.
The TDM clock source has to be configured in the NE at XC creation time.
The ECID Tx identifies uniquely the PDH destination port in the scope of the card. In
fact, the core unit switches packets based on VLAN, while the PDH card switches packets
based on ECID Tx.
Each CES has an associated Packet-Radio tunnel, representing the Ethernet infrastructure
for circuit emulation.
In case of MPR NE, the association between CES and Tunnel is 1:1.
PKT is requested to apply admission control checks at allocation time. The bandwidth
reserved on a given port depends on port technology and also on service characteristics.
A new MIB object has been introduced representing the allocated bandwidth for one E1
service over one radio interface: cesCfgBandwidth on opticsIMCESoEthMIB. This MIB
object is used to provide the E1 bandwidth occupation vs the radio interface.
In general, however, the bandwidth reserved by the service on each interface depends on
interface type, service profile and TDM clock source according to the following table.
Table 24-4
Interface
Service Profile
Service CIR
[Mbit/sec]
Radio
TDM2TDM
Differential
22.852
Radio
TDM2ETH
Differential
22.569
Radio
TDM2ETH
Adaptive
21.844
Ethernet
TDM2ETH
Differential
25.443
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-37
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 24-4
(continued)
Interface
Service Profile
Service CIR
[Mbit/sec]
Ethernet
TDM2ETH
Adaptive
24.482
The TDM2TDM encapsulation occupies more bandwidth than TDM2ETH one, since it
incorporates also some protection overhead.
In particular, in case of TDM2ETH service profile, E1 service bandwidth occupation
depends also on RTP presence or not. RTP presence depends on TDM clock source value:
The bandwidth reserved by one E1 signal is different for ODU300 and MPT ODU. The
bandwidth occupied by one E1 signal is computed from a configuration table, using as
inputs the following parameters:
Table 24-5
Interface type
Service Profile
Radio ODU300
TDM2TDM
Differential
22.852
Radio ODU300
TDM2ETH
Differential
22.569
Radio ODU300
TDM2ETH
Adaptive
21.844
Radio MPT
TDM2TDM
Differential
21.667
Radio MPT
TDM2ETH
Differential
22.579
Radio MPT
TDM2ETH
Adaptive
21.853
Ethernet
TDM2ETH
Differential
25.443
Ethernet
TDM2ETH
Adaptive
24.482
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-38
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following picture shows the relationships between E1 and PW tables depending on
NE type both in case of MEF-8 and SATOP services.
Figure 24-12 SNMP MIB relationships between E1 and PW tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In case of TSS NE, it is manager (PKT, ZIC) responsibility to maintain 1:1 association
between pwEntry and pwCTDMCfgEntry. Therefore PKT will be in charge of explicit
pwCTDMCfgEntry deletion. If ZIC allows to reuse the same pwCTDMCfgEntry for two
different pw entries, this will cause a failure when PKT tries to deimplement (i.e. delete in
the NE) one those services.
PKT operator workaround to overcome failure:
run an audit: the failed service connection will be recognized as allocated (i.e. deleted
in the NE)
retry the deimplementation of the failed service: the deimplementation will be
successful the second time
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-40
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When implementing the MEF-8 service, PKT is requested to configure the following flow
connections in the 9500MPR NE:
PDH to Radio
Radio to Radio
Radio to Ethernet
PDH to Ethernet
creation of Ethernet ingress flow associated to PDH port (service ID = PDH port
ifIndex, service type = Ethernet) and corresponding to tunnel termination
creation of TC associated to the VLAN assigned by operator that has to be pushed
and represented by the corresponding tunnel segment attribute
creation of CES over Ethernet profile corresponding to the service profile pointing
to the ingress flow and represented by the corresponding tunnel segment attribute
Tunnel Segment Creation via SNMP:
creation of Ethernet egress flow associated to Radio port (server ID = Radio port
ifIndex, service type = Ethernet) and corresponding to tunnel segment
creation of cross-connection between tunnel segments
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In case of MPR NE, the system automatically performs the following provisioning steps:
creation of CES over Ethernet profile corresponding to the service profile pointing
to the ingress flow and to the PW entry (CESCfgPwIndex is set to point to
pwIndex) and characterized by tunnel segments service profile attribute.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-42
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In case of TSS NE, the system will perform automatically the following provisioning
steps:
creation of a PW entry (fixed type = E1SATOP, ifIndex of the PDH port) -> as a
side effect, the NE creates automatically one PW TDM entry that PKT has to
configure (TDMboundPWlabel = ECID Rx, PSNboundPWlabel = ECID Tx, PW
TDM CFG reference to previously created entry) according to corresponding CES
termination attributes
Tunnel Termination Segment Configuration via SNMP:
CESCfgPwIndex is set to point to pwIndex
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-43
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
creation of Ethernet egress flow associated to Radio port (server ID = Radio port
ifIndex, service type = Ethernet) and corresponding to tunnel segment
creation of cross-connection between tunnel segments
CES termination profile creation via SNMP: nothing to be provisioned
The provisioning sequence is the same as above with the exception that ECID Tx/Rx
values must not be provisioned (NE configures automatically the zero value).
MPR requires the configuration of TDM clock source, payload size and RTP header also
on transit nodes: these attributes are conventionally aligned in the scope of the XC object
(only in case of transit node and TDM2ETH service profile).
Radio To Ethernet Traffic Flow
The provisioning sequence is the same as for the PDH-Radio cross-connection with the
addition of the destination MAC address provisioning in the PW table and with the
exception that ECID Tx/Rx values must not be provisioned (NE configures automatically
the zero value).
PDH To Ethernet Traffic Flow
The provisioning sequence is the same as for the PDH-Radio cross-connection with the
addition of the destination MAC address provisioning in the PW table.
Ethernet To Radio Traffic Flow
MPR does not allow to configure a VLAN range at an Ethernet input port for association
to one service flow, but only one single specific VLAN.
Ethernet to Radio connection is allowed in case of TDM2ETH service profile. It is a
MEF-8 encapsulation with VLAN tag (EtherType 0x8100).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-44
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
upload the available bandwidth of the radio port, when the radio link is notified to the
Packet Radio domain
automatically synchronize the available bandwidth of the radio port during audit
operation
For a TDM2TDM CES, PKT allows the configuration of the following CES attributes:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-45
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ECID A->Z/ Z->A and destination MAC address are reconfigured in both CES
terminations.
TDM clock source is reconfigured in both CES terminations.
MEF8 CES termination configuration
PM enabling/granularity
For a defined CES of TDM2ETH service profile, PKT allows additionally to configure
the following PW termination attributes:
ECID Tx/Rx and TDM clock source are reconfigured only on CES basis.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-46
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When implementing the SATOP service, PKT is requested to configure only the
following flow connections in the TSS-5C NE:
PDH TO T-MPLS
T-MPLS TO PDH
It is assumed that the operator has already provisioned via PKT the required T-MPLS
infrastructure for transporting the service across the T-MPLS domain; this implies that
PKT has already performed via TL1 the PW segment creation with the following
characteristics:
The PW is requested to be verified as not already used by Ethernet over T-MPLS services.
The system automatically performs the following provisioning steps:
1. PDH port configuration, consisting of below settings (without ordered sequence)
consisting of below settings (without ordered sequence)
[only in case of TSS-5C] Signal mode provisioning to a value different from
disabled via SNMP
Administrative status provisioning to up via SNMP
2. CES profile entry creation (pwCTDMCfgTable) if not already existing - with setting
of payload size, clock source and other profile parameters
3. CES termination creation
consisting of below settings:
pwIndex retrieval via SNMP GET-NEXT operation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-48
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PKT manages the PDH port alarms horizontal correlation to CES. In case of unterminated
CES, PKT manages the Ethernet port alarm vertical correlation to CES.
Correlation of CES termination alarms to service
PKT manages the horizontal correlation of CES terminations loss of frame to CES
availability status transport failure.
CES fault localization
In case of faulty CE service, PKT manages the inventory of elementary alarms affecting
the service. The fault localization operates in the reverse direction of the correlation
process.
The CES fault localization must take into account the value of the CES availability status.
In case of transport failure, the root cause is a PDH port alarm or a CES termination
alarm.
In case of server transport failure, the root cause could be:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following table shows the elementary alarms managed on the MEF8 CES
termination.
Table 24-6
SNMP table
CESoETHCfgTable
NE Probable
Cause
Description
PKT
object
opticsIMAlarmLossOfFrameRaise
Loss of
frame
CES
termination
PKT Probable
Cause
LOF
PKT severity
(fixed ASAP)
Major
PKT manages the horizontal correlation of CES termination alarms towards the impacted
CES:
Unprotected link over radio failure -> server transport failure on VLAN tunnel ->
server transport failure on CES
Unprotected link over radio degrade -> server transport degrade on VLAN tunnel ->
server transport degrade on CES
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-50
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LossProt on main radio port -> server transport failure on VLAN tunnel -> server
transport failure on CES
The CES is degraded only if there is NOT a LossProt on main radio port and if there is a
degrade on both main and spare radio links:
Link over radio double degrade (or single failure + single degrade) -> server transport
degrade on VLAN tunnel -> server transport degrade on CES
Link over radio single failure -> no propagation to VLAN tunnel and CES
Link over radio single degrade -> no propagation to VLAN tunnel and CES
PKT triggers the vertical correlation from radio link transport failure to client VLAN
tunnels and CES as follows:
Link over radio double failure -> server transport failure on VLAN tunnel -> server
transport failure on CES
Link over radio double degrade (or single failure + single degrade) or single failure ->
server transport degrade on VLAN tunnel -> server transport degrade on CES
In the last case, the CES degrade must be interpreted as a warning for the user to perform
the fault localization to check if the CES is really impacted or not, since the NE does not
notify if the active link is faulty or not.
LossProt alarm on protected Radio port
Since R2.1 and in case of radio link protection, MPR supports the LossProt alarm on
main radio port.
The LossProt alarm is not propagated to the radio link. PKT reports this alarm on the
radio port and correlates it directly to the client VLAN tunnel and CES.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-51
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following table shows the elementary alarms managed on the SATOP CES
termination
Table 24-7
SNMP
table
NE
Probable
Cause
Description
pwCTDMTable
(NOT
SUPPORTED)
opticsIMAlarmJitterBufferOverrunRaise
pwCTDMTable
opticsIMAlarmJitterBufferUnderrunRaise
pwCTDMTable
opticsimAlarmMalformedFramesRaise
pwCTDMTable
PKT
PKT
object
Probable
Cause
PKT
severity
(fixed
ASAP)
CES
termination
JBO
Major
CES
termination
JBU
Major
CES
termination
MAF
Major
opticsIMAlarmStraypacketsRaise
CES
termination
SPKT Major
pwCTDMTable
opticsIMAlarmExcessivepacketLossRaise
CES
termination
ELOP Major
pwCTDMTable
opticsIMAlarmRemotepacketlossRaise
CES
termination
RLOP Major
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-52
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 24-7
(continued)
SNMP
table
NE
Probable
Cause
Description
pwCTDMTable
opticsIMAlarmInvalidTdmDataRaise
PKT
PKT
object
Probable
Cause
CES
termination
PKT
severity
(fixed
ASAP)
INTD Major
PKT manages the horizontal correlation of CES termination alarms towards the impacted
CES, e.g.:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-53
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PKT compares the resource attributes in database with the NE attributes and marks the
resource consistency status according to the comparison result:
normal
not-aligned
CE node
CE port
CE ports include
CE edge ports (PDH or Ethernet)
CE transport link extremities (Ethernet only)
Tunnel XC
Tunnel XCs include:
Tunnel segments
Tunnel cross-connects
CE service terminations
For audit purposes, all Tunnel segment and CES termination attributes are mirrored in the
tunnel XC.
Audit of TSS-5C NE
CE node
For audit purposes, all CES termination attributes are mirrored in the tunnel XC.
Audit: ATM Xconn upload
During the audit operation, the upload involves the cross-connection with ATM2ATM or
ATM2ETH service profile, that are synchronized and stored in PKT database.
The retrieved ATM Xconns are visualized in the Xconn list retrievable from the
containing Packet Radio node.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-54
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The operator can then inspect the VLANID used by each ATM Xconn.
ATM Xconns are ignored by force-align down and Takeover operations.
Alignment: 9500 MPR NE align down
PKT creates in the NE resources that are missing in the NE and present in the database.
PKT marks the resource consistency status according to the alignment result:
normal
failed-to-align
PKT creates in the NE resources that are missing in the NE and present in the database
and, in case of conflicting values related to resources present in both databases, aligns the
NE value to the NMS value. PKT marks the resource consistency status according to the
alignment result:
normal
failed-to-align
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-55
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PKT creates in database resources that are present in the NE and missing in NMS
database. PKT marks the consistency status of the uploaded resources as reserved.
Reservation: TSS-5C NE
Starting from CES NE, the user can retrieve all discovered XCs: the XC attributes include
the SNMP PW attributes uploaded from NE.
MEF8 CES Takeover
PKT is requested to upload MEF8 CES connectivity already implemented in the network
and to display it to the user. The Takeover procedure works in PKT database exploiting
the reserved resources. At the end of the procedure, those resources that have been
successfully recognized as components of the recovered CES connectivity are marked as
normal.
The Takeover operation can be started on:
CES port: the system discovers automatically all services crossing the port
CES node: the system discovers automatically all services crossing the node
The algorithm pursues on VLANID and service profile basis the discovered
cross-connections in that port (or node) continuing the discovery in the adjacent node,
until an edge port is reached.
SATOP CES Takeover
The Takeover procedure is applied to SATOP CES, assuming that the T-MPLS PW
infrastructure has been already discovered and assigned to CES Domain.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-56
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CES Procedures
Circuit Emulation Service graphical inventory
E2E PDH: Navigation toward SDH manager
The operator can navigate from one CES towards the associated SDH path if the
following conditions are verified:
In order to start the navigation towards SDH GUI server and open the SDH path routing
display, the operator has to open the CES routing display, select the SDH network icon
and right-click.
The navigation command is enabled only if the above conditions are true.
Show properties of Tunnel
Table 24-8
PKT attr
name
Comment
Description
Userlabel
String
Friendly name
Configuration
state
{defined, allocated,
implemented}
Availability
status
{normal,
server-transportfailure}
Type
{Packet-Radio,
T-MPLS, Ethernet,
Sdh}
Alarm status
Tunnel type
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-57
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
feb-80
Comment
Operator: not modifiable after
service creation.
Description
Ethernet tunnel identifier
Tunnel label.
Listing of tunnels
The inventory is started selecting the tunnel and then right-click to open the desired target
list.
Show properties of tunnel segment
Tunnel segments can be retrieved from dedicated inventory (from transport link extremity
or from edge port) or tunnel routing display
PKT manages the display of CE termination properties listed in:
Table 24-10
PKT attr
name
Configuration
state
{defined, allocated,
implemented}
Alarm status
{normal,
server-transport-failure}
Consistency
status
{normal, not-aligned,
failed-to-align}
Comment
Description
Target configuration
state
Alarm status
MIB alignment
between NMS and
NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-58
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Master
SNMP
table
SNMP
attr
name
SNMP
attr
val
Description
Configuration state
{defined, allocated,
implemented}
PKT
Target
configuration state
Consistency
status
{normal,
not-aligned,
failed-to-align}
PKT
MIB alignment
between NMS and
NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-59
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of CES Domains
(Packet Radio) (p. 24-61)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-60
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
CAC tolerance. (strict, loose). Connection admission control policy. Meaningful only
in case of CES over Packet Radio.
Transport type. (CesOverPacketRadio, CesOverT-MPLS). Server Transport
technology.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-61
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Details of CES Domain (Packet Radio)
(p. 24-63)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-62
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
CAC tolerance. (strict, loose). Connection admission control policy. Meaningful only
in case of CES over Packet Radio.
Transport type. (CesOverPacketRadio, CesOverT-MPLS). Server Transport
technology.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-63
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Inventory from Packet Radio domain
PKT manages the inventory of resources contained in one Packet Radio domain:
CES nodes
Transport links
CES edge ports
Select Search > Packet > Services > Circuit Emulation > CES Domain.
Result: The CES Domain list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CES nodes
Transport links
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-64
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-65
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-66
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ethernet Port
Link Over Cable
Link Over Radio
For a description about the action, refer to the topicResource assignment to Packet Radio
domain (p. 24-13).
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-67
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about the action, refer to the topicResource assignment to T-MPLS
domain (p. 24-15).
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-68
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PKT manages the list of all nodes supporting CES, filterable by domain.
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of CES NEs
(p. 24-70)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-69
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Operational State.
Takeover Active
only in case of CES over Packet Radio. The CAC tolerance represents whether NE
CAC checks are performed wrt minimum or maximum radio interface capacity. PKT
displays this information to inform the user that the traffic implemented on this NE
can be dropped in case of bandwidth degradation and in case of loose tolerance.
Consistency State.(normal, not-aligned, failed-to-aligned). Alignment beetwen
NMS and NE.
MAC Address. L2 address.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-70
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Services > Circuit Emulation > CES NE.
Result: The Circuit Emulation Services NE list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Details of CES NE (p. 24-72)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-71
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Details of CES NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Details of CES NE
Attributes of a CES NE
User Label.
Operational State.
Takeover Active
only in case of CES over Packet Radio. Supported only by MPR NE.
The CAC tolerance represents whether NE CAC checks are performed wrt minimum
or maximum radio interface capacity. This information informs the user that the traffic
implemented on this NE can be dropped in case of bandwidth degradation and in case
of loose tolerance.
Loose= CAC disabled. Value meaningful only in case of radio adaptive modulation
mode
TSS NE only
PDH deg clear thr. (Range 0-1000 errors; 20 default). Supported by TSS NE only
PDH deg raise thr. (Range 0-1000 errors; 30 default). Supported by TSS NE only
Note that:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-72
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Inventory from CES node
PDH ports
Ethernet ports
Radio ports (radio link extremities)
T-MPLS ports (T-MPLS link extremities)
Protection groups
Xconn
Select Search > Packet > Services > Circuit Emulation > CES NE.
Result: The Circuit Emulation Services NE list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-73
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PDH ports
Ethernet ports
Protection groups
Xconn
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-74
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Inventory from Protection Group
Radio ports
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-75
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of CES Transport
Links (p. 24-77)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-76
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Domain.
Transport Type
PseudoWire Id.
CIR
CBS
PIR
PBS
Reserved CIR
Reserved CBS
Reserved PIR
Reserved PBS
VLAN Id.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-77
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Services > Circuit Emulation > CES Transport Links.
Result: The list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Details of the CES Transport Link
(p. 24-79)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-78
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Comment
Description
Userlabel
string
Friendly name
Bandwidth
Mb/s
Peak bandwidth
Mb/s
Available bandwidth
on NE
Mb/s
Used CIR
Mb/s
Reserved CIR
Mb/s
Transport
technology
{radio, cable}
Transport technology
Transport type
Transport type
The underlying technology of one CE transport link can be radio or Ethernet cable or link
over T-MPLS. In case of radio link protection, there is only one CE transport link.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-79
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Inventory from CES Transport Link
PKT manages the inventory of resources contained in one CES Transport Link:
The extremity underlying technology can be Ethernet physical or radio or T-MPLS port.
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Services > Circuit Emulation > CES Transport Link.
Result: The CES Transport Link list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For attributes description refer to Description of the list of CES Port (p. 24-91)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-80
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Inventory from CES Transport Link extremities
PKT manages the inventory of resources contained in one CES Transport Link
extremities:
the supported Tunnel segments. Show properties of tunnel segment (p. 24-58)
The CE transport link extremities are displayed together with the CE edge ports in a
single CE port list.
In case of NNI port type, only the CE transport link extremity inventories are meaningful.
Before you begin
List CES Transport Link extremities. Refer to the procedure Inventory from CES
Transport Link (p. 24-80)
Result: The CES Transport Link extremity list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-81
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the type of resources related to one CES Transport Link extremity:
SDH Terminations
T-MPLS PW Terminations
CES nodes
Tunnel segments
Result: The resources are shown according to the selected type.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-82
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of CES PDH Ports
(p. 24-84)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-83
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Depending on the used underlying infrastructure, for the attributes description, refer to
Table 24-13, 9500MPR PDH port attributes (p. 24-84) or Table 24-14, TSS-5C PDH
port attributes (p. 24-85).
Table 24-13
PKT attr
name
Master
SNMP
table
SNMP
attr
name
Description
userLabel
String
NE: uploaded
by Core
see 1
ifMib::ifIndex
InterfaceIndex:
INTEGER
Friendly
name
technology
PDH
NE: uploaded
by Core
ifTable
ifMib::ifType
Characteristic
technology
interfaceRate
Integer
NE: uploaded
by Core &
exported to
CEM
ifTable
ifMib::ifSpeed
2048 Kbit/s
Net
bandwidth
signal mode
{framed,
unframed,
disabled}
PKT. This
attribute is
managed by
CES
E1pPITTPTable
e1pPITTPSignalMode
INTEGER
alarm status
TDM
frame
type
Computed by
PKT
Alarm
status
Alarm
severity
assignment
profile
ASAP profile
Pointer to fixed
ASAP
Severity
assigned by
PKT
Network role
{UNI, E-NNI}
PKT
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
Network
role
TDM rate
{e1, ds1}
NE: uploaded
by Core
ifTable
ifMib::ifType
ds1 (18) or
e1(19)
TDM
service
rate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-84
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 24-13
PKT attr
name
Master
Consistency
status
{normal,
not-aligned,
failed-to-align}
Encapsulation
type
(continued)
SNMP
table
SNMP
attr
name
Description
MIB
alignment
between
NMS and
NE
E1pPITTPTable
e1pPITTPEncapsType
Notes:
1.
The port userLabel is computed, starting from the retrieved integer value, using the UFL library (User
Friendly Label) according to the naming rule of the 9500MPR NE.
Table 24-14
PKT attr
name
PKT attr
val
SNMP
table
SNMP attr
name
Description
ifMib::ifIndex
InterfaceIndex:
INTEGER
Friendly name
userLabel
String
NE:
uploaded by
Core
technology
PDH
NE:
uploaded by
Core
ifTable
ifMib::ifType
e1 (19)
Characteristic
technology
interfaceRate
Integer
NE:
uploaded by
Core &
exported to
CEM
ifTable
ifMib::ifSpeed
2048 Kbit/s
Net bandwidth
signal mode
{unframed,
disabled
(default),
framedFAS,
framedCRC}
PKT. This
attribute is
shown in the
associated
CES port
E1pPITTPTable
e1pPITTPSignalMode
INTEGER
alarm status
Computed by
PKT
Alarm status
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-85
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 24-14
PKT attr
name
PKT attr
val
SNMP
table
(continued)
SNMP attr
name
Description
Alarm severity
assignment
profile
ASAP profile
Pointer to
fixed
ASAP
Severity
assigned by
PKT
Network role
{UNI,
E-NNI}
PKT
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
Network role
TDM rate
{e1, ds1}
NE:
uploaded by
Core
ifTable
ifMib::ifType
ds1 (18) or
e1(19)
TDM service
rate
Consistency
status
{normal,
not-aligned,
failed-toalign}
Administrative status
{up,
down}
Loopback
status
PKT:
{disabled(default),
Managed
line,
read-only by
internal}
Core (NE
supports also
loopback
configuration).
MIB alignment
between NMS
and NE
PKT.
Managed by
CEM at CES
implementation time
ifTable
ifAdminStatus
up(1), down(2)
E1pPITTPTable
e1pPITTPLoopback
disabled(0),
line(1),
internal(2)
Administrative
status
Loopback status
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-86
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Services > Circuit Emulation > CES Ports.
Result: The CES Port list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Details of CES PDH Port (p. 24-88)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-87
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Interface Technology.
Interface Type.
Network Element .
Transport Type
Transport Link.
Reserved Capacity.
Used Bandwidth
Signal Mode
Administrative State
Consistency State
Alarm Status
MAC Address
CBS
PIR
PBS
Reserved CBS
Reserved PIR
Reserved PBS
Domain.
Maximum Capacity.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-88
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Inventory from PDH Port
Selecting one PDH port, PKT supports the inventory of the supported CES, if any.
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > ... > CES PDH Port.
Result: The PDH Port list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Container CES
Result: The resources are shown according to the selected type.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-89
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PKT manages the list of all CES edge ports, filterable by domain.
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of CES Port
(p. 24-91)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-90
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The CES port merges the attributes of CES edge port and CE transport link extremity.
The CE transport link extremity properties are displayed together with the CE edge port
properties. In case of NNI port type, only the CE transport link extremity properties are
meaningful.
Table 24-15
Comment
userlabel
String
Friendly name
network role
{ENNI, UNI}
Network role
technology
Underlying technology
admin status
{up, down}
Administrative status
ASAP profile
consistency status
{normal, not-aligned,
failed-to-align}
DCN label
integer
peak bandwidth
Number
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-91
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Services > Circuit Emulation > CES Ports.
Result: The CES Port list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Details of CES Port (p. 24-93)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-92
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The CES port merges the attributes of CES edge port and CE transport link extremity.
Transport Link extremity
The extremity underlying technology can be Ethernet physical or radio or T-MPLS port.
The CE transport link extremity properties are displayed together with the CE edge port
properties: in case of NNI port type, only the CE transport link extremity properties are
meaningful.
Edge Port
The CE edge port properties are displayed together with the CE transport link extremity
properties. In case of UNI port type, only the CE edge port properties are meaningful.
The underlying technology can be PDH or Ethernet physical.
In case of Ethernet physical underlying technology, the edge port is characterized by the
additional attributes.
Table 24-16
Description
Filtering based on frame tag
NOT MANAGED
Port VLAN ID
0-4094
NOT MANAGED
Port priority
0-7
NOT MANAGED
VLAN member set
VLAN range
NOT MANAGED
admin status
{up, down}
Administrative status
Alarm status
Alarm status
ASAP profile
Consistency status
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-93
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Inventory from CES Edge Port
From GUI perspective, the CE edge ports are displayed together with the CE transport
links in a single CE port list: in case of UNI port type, only the CE edge port inventories
are meaningful.
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Services > Circuit Emulation > CES Port.
Result: The Edge Port list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CE Service terminations
CES Nodes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-94
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-95
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PKT displays the list of all links over radio, filtered by domain.
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of CES Links Over
Radio (p. 24-97)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-96
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Comment
Description
Userlabel
string
Computed by NPR
Friendly name
Rate
Mb/s
Peak rate
Mb/s
Protection role
{none, working,
protecting}
Protection type
{unprotected, 1+1}
Protection type
Availability status
{normal, in-failure}
Alarm status
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-97
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Details of CES Link Over Radio
(p. 24-99)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-98
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Comment
Description
Userlabel
string
Computed by NPR
Friendly name
Rate
Mb/s
Peak rate
Mb/s
Protection role
{none, working,
protecting}
Protection type
{unprotected, 1+1}
Protection type
Availability status
{normal, in-failure}
Alarm status
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-99
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Inventory from CES Link Over Radio
supported CES
peer radio link (in case of 1+1 link protection)
supported Tunnels
selecting the desired link over radio and then right-click to open the supported VLAN
tunnel list
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-100
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Supported CES
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-101
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-102
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of CES Radio Ports
(p. 24-104)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-103
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
userLabel
String
Friendly name
technology
RADIO
Characteristic technology
Modulation mode
{preset, adaptive}
Modulation
Modulation type
Channel spacing
Channel spacing
Capacity
130.56Mb/s
Maximum capacity
130.56Mb/s
Bandwidth
129158Kbit/s
Peak bandwidth
Kbit/s
Tx Frequency
10.8GHz
Transmit frequency
Rx Frequency
11.33GHz
Receive frequency
Shifter
530.0MHz
Alarm status
Alarm status
ASAP profile
Available bandwidth on NE
Mb/s
Consistency status
{normal, failed,
notAligned}
{ODU300, MPT}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-104
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Details of CES Radio Port (p. 24-106)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-105
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
userLabel
String
Friendly name
technology
RADIO
Characteristic technology
Modulation mode
{preset, adaptive}
Modulation
Modulation type
Channel spacing
Channel spacing
Capacity
130.56Mb/s
Maximum capacity
130.56Mb/s
Bandwidth
129158Kbit/s
Peak bandwidth
Kbit/s
Tx Frequency
10.8GHz
Transmit frequency
Rx Frequency
11.33GHz
Receive frequency
Shifter
530.0MHz
Alarm status
Alarm status
ASAP profile
Available bandwidth on NE
Mb/s
Consistency status
{normal, failed,
notAligned}
{ODU300, MPT}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-106
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Inventory from CES Radio Port
Radio Link
Radio Link
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-107
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of CES VLAN
Paths (p. 24-109)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-108
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Tunnel Type
Working State.
Availability Status
Configuration State.
Service State.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-109
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Packet > Services > Circuit Emulation > Circuit Emulation Services.
Result: The Circuit Emulation Services list is shown
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-110
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-111
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
The service CIR is automatically computed by PKT:
based on interface type, service profile and clock source in case of MEF-8
based on payload size in case of SATOP, CBS is not managed in case of MEF-8.
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of Circuit Emulation
Services (p. 24-113)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-112
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label.
Service Group
Domain.
NAD Value.
Working State
Configuration State
Service Profile
Availability State
Ecid A-Z
Ecid Z-A
MAC Address AZ
Service Group Id
Encapsulation Type
Transport Type
CIR
CBS
PIR
PBS
Class Of Service
Signal Type.
Service State.
Payload Suppression
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-113
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Master
Description
Service group
string
Userlabel
string
Friendly name
Comment1,
Comment2,
Comment3
string
User comment
Text1, Text2,
Text3
string
User text
Availability
status
{normal, degraded,
transport-failure,
server-transport-failure,
server-transport-degrade}
Computed automatically by
PKT. It tells whether the service
has been affected by failure of
any used resource
Alarm status
Service rate
e1 (2048 Kb/s)
Service rate
CoS
Class Of Service
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-114
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 24-21
PKT attr
name
(continued)
Master
Description
Transport
type
{CesOverPacketRadio,
CesOverT-MPLS}
Automatically computed by
PKT based on domain type
Transport type
Encapsulation
type
{MEF8, SATOP}
Automatically computed by
PKT based on domain type
Encapsulation type
Configuration
state
Automatically computed by
PKT. It tells whether the needed
resources has been reserved or
not, in database only or also in
the network
Target configuration
state
PM enabling
{false, true}
Performance
monitoring enabling
PM
granularity
{15min, 24h}
PM counter
granularity
CIR
Kb/s
It is automatically computed by
PKT
Service committed
rate
CBS
Bytes
It is automatically computed by
PKT. It is not managed in case
of MEF-8
MEF8 attributes
PKT attr
val
Signal mode
{framed,
unframed}
Description
TDM frame
type
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-115
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 24-22
PKT attr
name
PKT attr
val
(continued)
Comment
Description
Service
profile
Frame
encapsulation
type
Payload size
121, 256
Size of TDM
payload in bytes
TDM clock
source
{adaptive,
differential}
TDM clock
source
feb-80
ECID Z->A
feb-80
Destination
MAC address
00 22 fa bd
a3 b6
VLAN-ID
feb-80
Tunnel label.
Emulated circuit
(PW) identifier
in the A->Z
direction
Emulated circuit
(PW) identifier
in the Z->A
direction
MAC address of
CE remote peer
Ethernet tunnel
identifier
Note that:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-116
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Master
When
modifiable
Description
Signal mode
{unframed,
framedFAS,
framedCRC}
not modifiable
TDM frame
type
Payload size
Bytes: 128,
256(default)
Operator.
modifiable only
when CES is in
defined state
Size of
TDM
payload in
bytes
modifiable also
at run-time
when the service
is implemented
TDM clock
source
TDM clock
source
{adaptive,
differential,
tdmLine,
system(default)}
Operator.
RTP header
used
TRUE
NE
Not
configurable
Usage of
RTP header
Jitter buffer
depth
Microseconds:
range from 1000
us (default) to
16000 us in step
of 125 us
Operator
configurable
only when the
service is in
defined or
allocated state
Size buffer
(in
microseconds)used
to
accommodate to the
PSNspecific
packet
delay
variation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-117
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 24-23
PKT attr
name
(continued)
Master
When
modifiable
Description
Packet replace
policy
{allOnes(default), Operator
implementationSpecific}
modifiable also
at run-time
when the service
is implemented
Packet
replace
policy
Packet filler
pattern (NOT
SUPPORTED)
(0..255):
modifiable also
at run-time
when the service
is implemented
Packet filler
pattern
Payload
suppression
{enable,
disable(default)}
Operator
modifiable also
at run-time
when the service
is implemented
Payload
suppression
Average packet
loss time
window
Milliseconds:
integer
1000(default)
Operator
modifiable also
at run-time
when the service
is implemented
Average
packet loss
time
window
Excessive
packet loss
threshold
[0..100]: 10
(default)
Operator
modifiable also
at run-time
when the service
is implemented
Excessive
packet loss
threshold
Alarm raising
threshold
Milliseconds:
unsigned32
NE
modifiable also
at run-time
when the service
is implemented
Time of
defect
detection
for alarm
reporting
NE
modifiable also
at run-time
when the service
is implemented
Time of
defect
undetection
for alarm
clearing
255 (default)
3000(default)
Alarm clearing
threshold
Milliseconds:
unsigned32
10000(default)
Stray packets
detection
{false(default),
true}
Operator
modifiable also
at run-time
when the service
is implemented
Stray
packets
detection
Stray packets
threshold
[1..300]:
Operator.
modifiable also
at run-time
when the service
is implemented
Stray
packets
threshold
300 (default)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-118
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 24-23
PKT attr
name
Malformed
packets
threshold
[1..300]:
Buffer overrun
threshold
[1..300]:
Master
When
modifiable
Description
Operator.
modifiable also
at run-time
when the service
is implemented
Malformed
packets
threshold
Operator.
modifiable also
at run-time
when the service
is implemented
Buffer
overrun
threshold
Operator.
modifiable also
at run-time
when the service
is implemented
Buffer
underrun
threshold
Operator.
modifiable also
at run-time
when the service
is implemented
Remote
packet loss
threshold
Operator.
modifiable also
at run-time
when the service
is implemented
Packet loss
threshold
300 (default)
300 (default)
Buffer
underrun
threshold
[1..300]:
Remote packet
loss threshold
[1..300]:
300 (default)
300 (default)
Packet loss
threshold
[1..300]:
(continued)
1 (default)
Timestamp
frequency
(NOT
SUPPORTED)
{0[default],
77760kHz,
25000kHz,
16384kHz}
Operator.
configurable
only when the
service is in
defined or
allocated state
Timestamp
frequency
per session
Expected
ingress RTP
payload type
[0..127]:
Operator.
modifiable also
at run-time
when the service
is implemented
Expected
RTP
payload
type of
incoming
packets
Operator.
modifiable also
at run-time
when the service
is implemented
RTP
payload
type of
outgoing
packets
101(default)
Egress RTP
payload type
[0..127]:
101(default)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-119
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
There are no specific T-MPLS Tunnel attributes. All T-MPLS transport attributes are
managed via TL1 and reported in the properties of the T-MPLS PW corresponding to the
Link over T-MPLS.
There are no specific T-MPLS Tunnel segment attributes. All T-MPLS transport segment
attributes are managed via TL1 and reported in the properties of the T-MPLS PW
termination corresponding to the Link over T-MPLS termination.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-120
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).CES PW terminations are the same as CES terminations.
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Services > Circuit Emulation > Circuit Emulation Services.
Result: The CES list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following topic in this document: Description of the list of CES
Terminations (p. 24-122)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-121
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CE service terminations can be retrieved via dedicated inventory (from CES or from edge
port) or via CES routing display.
Attributes are described in the following:
The following table shows the specific MEF8 service termination attributes.
Generic CES termination attributes
Comment
Description
Userlabel
String
Port ifIndex
TDM rate
e1 (2Mb/s)
TDM rate
Transport type
Transport type
Encapsulation type
{MEF8, SATOP}
Encapsulation type
PM enabling
{false, true}
Performance
monitoring enabling
PM granularity
{15min, 24h}
PM counter granularity
Consistency status
{normal, not-aligned,
failed-to-align}
MIB alignment
between NMS and NE
The following table shows the specific MEF8 service termination attributes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-122
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 24-25
PKT attr
name
PKT attr
val
Comment
Description
Service
profile
Frame encapsulation
type
ECID Tx
feb-80
ECID Rx
feb-80
Destination
MAC address
00 22 fa bd
a3 b6
MAC address of CE
remote peer
TDM clock
source
{adaptive,
differential}
Payload size
121, 256
RTP header
used
{false, true}
Note that:
The following table shows the specific Packet-Radio tunnel segment attributes.
PKT attr name
VLAN
Comment
VLAN tunnel identifier
Description
VLAN tunnel identifier
The following table shows the specific SATOP CES termination attributes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-123
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 24-26
PKT attr
name
SNMP MIB
Description
Payload size
128,
256(default)
pwCTDMCfgPayloadSize
Size of
TDM
payload in
bytes
TDM clock
source
{adaptive,
differential,
tdmLine,
system(default)}
pwCTDMCfgClockSource
TDM clock
source
RTP header
used
TRUE
pwCTDMCfgRtpHdrUsed
Usage of
RTP header
Jitter buffer
depth
[1000-16000]
pwCTDMCfgJtrBfrDepth
Size buffer
used to
accommodate to the
PSNspecific
packet delay
variation
(1000 us
default)
Packet
replace
policy
pwCTDMCfgPktReplacePolicy
Packet
replace
policy
Packet filler
pattern
(NOT
SUPPORTED)
[0..255]
pwCTDMCfgPktFiller
Packet filler
pattern
255 (default)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-124
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 24-26
PKT attr
name
(continued)
Comment
SNMP MIB
Description
Payload
suppression
{enable,
disable(default)}
pwCTDMCfgPayloadSuppression
Payload
suppression
Average
packet loss
time
window
Integer:
1000(default)
pwCTDMCfgAvePktLossTimeWindow
Average
packet loss
time
window
Excessive
packet loss
threshold
[0..100]:
pwCTDMCfgExcessivePktLossThreshold
Excessive
packet loss
threshold
pwCTDMCfgAlarmThreshold
Time of
defect
detection for
alarm
reporting
pwCTDMCfgClearAlarmThreshold
Time of
defect
undetection
for alarm
clearing
pwCTDMCfgStrayPacketDetect
Stray
packets
detection
10 (default)
Alarm
raising
threshold
Milliseconds:
unsigned32
3000(default)
Alarm
clearing
threshold
Milliseconds:
unsigned32
10000(default)
Stray
packets
detection
{true,
false(default)}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-125
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 24-26
PKT attr
name
Stray
packets
threshold
300 (default)
Malformed
packets
threshold
[1..300]
300 (default)
Buffer
overrun
threshold
[1..300]:
Buffer
underrun
threshold
[1..300]:
Remote
packet loss
threshold
[1..300]:
300 (default)
300 (default)
300 (default)
(continued)
Comment
SNMP MIB
Description
pwCTDMCfgStraypacketsThreshold
Stray
packets
threshold
pwCTDMCfgMalformedPacketsThreshold
Malformed
packets
threshold
pwCTDMCfgBufferOverrunThreshold
Buffer
overrun
threshold
pwCTDMCfgBufferUnderrunThreshold
Buffer
underrun
threshold
pwCTDMCfgRemotePacketLossThreshold
Remote
packet loss
threshold
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-126
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 24-26
PKT attr
name
(continued)
Comment
SNMP MIB
Description
Packet loss
threshold
[1..300]:
1(default)
Packet loss
pwCTDMthreshold
CfgCESoETHFrameLossThreshold
Timestamp
frequency
(NOT
SUPPORTED)
{0[default],
77760kHz,
25000kHz,
16384kHz}
pwCTDMDifferentialTimestampFrequency
Timestamp
frequency
per session
Expected
ingress RTP
synchro
source
integer:
pwCTDMRTPHdrSsrcIn
2* PW ingress
label (default)
Expected
RTP
synchronization source
label of
incoming
packets
integer
pwCTDMRTPHdrSsrcInActual
Expected
RTP
synchronization source
label of
incoming
packets
pwCTDMRTPHdrSsrcOut
RTP
synchronization source
label of
outgoing
packets
pwCTDMRTPPayloadTypeIn
Expected
RTP payload
type of
incoming
packets
Actual
ingress RTP
synchro
source
Expected
ingress RTP
payload type
integer:
2* PW egress
label (default)
[0..127]:
101(default)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-127
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 24-26
PKT attr
name
Actual
ingress RTP
payload type
(continued)
Comment
SNMP MIB
Description
pwCTDMRTPPayloadTypeInActual
Actual RTP
payload type
of incoming
packets
[0..127]:
101(default)
pwCTDMRTPPayloadTypeOut
RTP payload
type of
outgoing
packets
NE CIR
INTEGER
pwCTDMBandwidth
Committed
information
rate
computed
by NE
pwCTDMClassOfService
Class of
Service
{G(default),
G2, R1, R, R3,
R4, BE, BK}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-128
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Dedicated wizard for CES creation
In case of SATOP CES, the operator can select if the CES will be created in bottom-up or
top-down mode, by toggling the top-down flag:
in bottom-up mode, the operator must select the single link transporting the service
in top-down mode, no transport link can be selected and the system automatically
picks up one unused link or it creates a new one on the fly
In case of MEF8 CES, the system automatically applies a routing algorithm to identify
the transport links crossed by the service.
Wizard for SATOP CES creation
Some CES attributes are present both for MEF8 and SATOP services, but with different
range of values, as described in Table 24-22, MEF8 CES attributes (p. 24-115) section
and Table 24-23, SATOP CES attributes (p. 24-117).
Depending on domain type selection, the system automatically computes the
corresponding encapsulation type (MEF8, SATOP) and the wizard should present the
appropriate range of values for that encapsulation type.
Therefore, the operator can configure the following tabs:
The RTP, QoS and OAM tabs are disabled in case of MEF8, since the corresponding
attributes are not supported by MPR.
The management of SATOP requires also to introduce new CES attributes.
CES automatic allocation and routing
The CE service can be optionally allocated in cascade right after creation time.
The CES allocation triggers the automatic Tunnel allocation.
PKT supports the automatic routing of CE services. It automatically identifies the needed
radio/cable/T-MPLS links for transporting the service and reserves the needed bandwidth
on these links.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-129
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > Packet > Services > Circuit Emulation > Create CES.
Result: The Create Circuit Emulation Service window is shown.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-130
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Comment 1
Comment 2
Comment 3
Text 1
Text 3
Text 2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Insert Destination MAC Address. Meaningful only if TDM2ETH CES. (in hex
characters). (for MEF8 only)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-131
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PM enabling
PM granularity
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Insert RTP header used (for SATOP only. When RTP header is NOT used, all
remaining following attributes in tab are greyed)
Select Expected Ingress RTP Payload Type from list (for SATOP only)
Select Egress RTP Payload Type from list (for SATOP only)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Next.
Result: The step CES Terminations is highlighted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Click Next.
Result: The step Available actions is highlighted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
12
Click OK.
Result: The step Circuit Emulation Service is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-132
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Inventory from CES
CE service terminations
Select Search > Packet > Services > Circuit Emulation > Circuit Emulation Services.
Result: The CES list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CE Service terminations
Server Tunnels
Result: The resource list is shown according to the selected type.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-133
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Configure CES
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure CES
When to use
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Allocated SATOP CES configuration
When the CES is in allocated state, PKT allows the configuration of the following
attributes:
Signal mode
PM enabling/granularity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-134
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Configure CES
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When the CES is in implemented state, PKT allows the configuration of the following
attributes:
Signal mode
PM enabling/granularity
TDM clock source
Select Search > Packet > Services > Circuit Emulation > Circuit Emulation Services.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-135
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Configure CES
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-136
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Routing display of
CES (p. 24-33).
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Services > Circuit Emulation > CES.
Result: The Create Circuit Emulation Service list is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-137
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description about Circuit Emulation Services, refer to the topic Circuit Emulation
Services definition (p. 24-4).
SATOP CES termination configuration
PM enabling/granularity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-138
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The procedure permit to take in charge Network Elements and Connectivity when the
PKT is deployed in a network where (network wide) such connectivity is already in place.
Related information
CES Ports
CES NEs
For more information refer to: CES Takeover description (p. 24-56)
Before you begin
Select the object to start the CES Takeover using one of the following command:
Search > Packet > Services > Circuit Emulation > CES Port.
Search > Packet > Services > Circuit Emulation > CES NE.
Result: The list of the selected objects is shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-139
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the Cross Connections form a complete CES, The CES is automatically created on
PKT DB.
Port used bandwidth is updated.
The CES Provisioning Status is set to Implemented
Note: If Cross Connections are present on NE and do not belong to any CES, they are
loaded on DB with reserved consistency state.
The user can delete unused Cross Connections.
Note: If a Node is not reachable, CES discovery algorithm cannot be completed. The
uploaded Cross Connections are not correlated to any CES. Therefore they are loaded
on DB with reserved consistency state.
When the node is reachable again, the user restart the action to complete the Takeover.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-140
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The procedure permit to take in charge Network Elements and Connectivity when the
PKT is deployed in a network where (network wide) such connectivity is already in place.
Related information
For more information refer to: CES Takeover description (p. 24-56)
For more information refer to: T-MPLS Takeover description (p. 17-96)
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Link Over Cable.
Assign Links Over Cable to T-MPLS domain.
For details refer to the procedure Assign a Link Over Cable to a Domain (p. 14-122).
Result: The selected Links Over Cable are assigned to T-MPLS domain
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-141
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: T-MPLS Tunnels and PseudoWires are discovered and created in the PKT
DB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Start the CES Takeover from a CES port or from a CES NE.
Refer to Task for MEF8 CES (p. 24-139)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
24-142
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
Purpose
25-1
26-1
27-1
28-1
29-1
30-1
31-1
32-1
33-1
34-1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
IV-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Advanced Functions
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
IV-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
25
Topology
25
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides the conceptual information and the associated tasks for the Network
configuration of the1350 OMS PKT application. The network construction consists in
representing the managed network with the necessary submaps and creating all the
required objects in the data bases.
Contents
Network configuration
25-2
25-2
25-13
25-19
Create LAG
25-23
Create Domain
25-26
Create Domain
25-26
25-30
Define NE
25-34
Traffic categories
25-38
25-38
25-42
L2 Encapsulation
25-45
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Network configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network configuration
Create the network objects
When to use
During this activity, the operator has to create all the submaps according to the network
partitioning levels and insert inside them all the objects (network, subnetworks, 2nd level
subnetworks, nodes, ports and connections).
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Network configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create Subnetwork
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Point to the parent object where you wish to create the subnetwork and issue Actions >
Create Subnetwork
Figure 25-1 Actions>Create Subnetwork
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Create Subnetwork box is displayed. Enter name. The starting object, i.e. the parent
one, is already selected. In case you want to modify the choice, select the Starting Object
(left click) field. This will retrieve a list of potential parent objects, where to select the
starting object,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Network configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Network configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Network configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the node to assign to the subnetwork being created and click on OK.
Figure 25-4 Node to assign to subnetwork
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Network configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-7
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Network configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-8
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Network configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Creating Nodes
Search > EML > NE to verify that the NE has been created
Select the NE in the list and then with the right mouse button select from the
popup menu Actions > NE Address
All NEs of the managed EML layer are automatically created and present in the database.
They can be inserted by the user in the target topology.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the subnetwork where you want to create the node and issue Actions>Modify
subnetwork
Figure 25-7 Actions>Modify subnetwork
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-9
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Network configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-10
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Network configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Modify Subnetwork dialog box is displayed. Click on button Contained Nodes and
Subnetworks. The relevant list is opened as a subwindow. see following figure. Select the
node (TSS-A in this case) to add and click on V to confirm.
Figure 25-9 Select the node to add
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-11
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Network configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on OK to confirm.
Figure 25-10 Modify subn: adding a node
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The new node is created and its relevant icon is displayed in the relevant map.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-12
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Network configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
External Networks are used to describe a connection between various SDHs or to create a
path terminated on a node non controlled by SDH. A path is defined as non terminated if
either one of the NAPs or both are not in the SDH domain. A non-terminated path
describes a path between a Trail Termination Point (TTP) associated to a PDH port and a
Connection Termination Point (CTP).
Before you begin
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select from the main menu bar Actions > Physical > Create External Network
Figure 25-11 Actions>Physical>Create External Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-13
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Network configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Create External Network. dialog box is presented. Enter userlabel, sitename and click
on OK
Figure 25-12 Create Ext Netw. dialog box
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-14
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Network configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the destination topology and issue Actions > Modify subnetwork
Figure 25-13 Actions>Modify subnetwork
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-15
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Network configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Modify Subnetwork dialog box is displayed. Click on button Contained Nodes and
Subnetworks. The relevant list is opened as a subwindow. see following figure. Select the
node (virtual in this case) to add and click on V to confirm.
Figure 25-14 Modify subnetwork
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-16
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Network configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Modify Subnetwork dialog box now contains the new added node in its node list
Figure 25-15 Modify Subn box: new added node
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-17
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Network configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The icon of the new added node is present in the target subnetwork.
Figure 25-16 New added node in the target map
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-18
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Network configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar issue Actions > Physical > Create Physical Connection
Figure 25-17 Create>Physical Connection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-19
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Network configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Create Physical connection box is presented. Enter userlabel, select Connection
type= Ethernet. Click on Next button
Figure 25-18 Physcon create
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-20
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Network configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the starting node, if not already selected, clicking on A-node empty box.. From the
node list select the relevant node and click on V. Select the port. Click on A Port. The list
of selectable ports is displayed in the left-lower area of the window. Select the port and
confirm by clicking on Exec (green V) button.
The A port icon is now present in the selection area. With the same modality, perform the
selection of Z Port
Figure 25-19 Physcon create: port selection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-21
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Network configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Physical Connection list, displayed via Search > Physical > Physical
Connections, you can see that the Ethernet physical connection has been created as
defined.
Note: the Ethernet physical connection status will remain defined since the HO
payload is not applicable to an Ethernet physical connection
Figure 25-20 Physcon list: Eth physcon defined
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The notification mechanism allows to see the just created Eth Physical connection in the
list of Link over Cable.
Figure 25-21 Link over Cable list
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-22
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Network configuration
Create LAG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create LAG
When to use
From the main menu bar select Actions > Packet > Construction > Create LAG Port
Figure 25-22 Actions>Packet>Construction>Create LAG Port
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-23
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Network configuration
Create LAG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-24
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Network configuration
Create LAG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-25
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Create Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create Domain
Create Domain
When to use
From the main menu bar select Actions > Packet > Construction > Create Domain
Figure 25-25 Actions>Packet>Construction>Create Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-26
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Create Domain
Create Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For Domain type=Bridge you further select bridge type. In particular, selecting
MAC-802-1D you will select the STP (spanning tree protocol) type.
Figure 25-26 Create Domain MAC-802.1D
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-27
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Create Domain
Create Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on OK.
Figure 25-27 Create Domain
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To check the created domain select Search > Packet > Construction > Domains
Figure 25-28 Search>Packet>Construction>Domains
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-28
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Create Domain
Create Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-29
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Create Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar issue Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements >
Defined NEs
Figure 25-30 Search>Packet>Construction>Network Elements>Defined NEs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-30
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Create Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The list of the Defined NEs is displayed. Select the NE to assign and issue
Figure 25-31 NE: Search>Ethernet Physical Ports
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Ethernet Ports list you can see that the involved ports are now busy
Figure 25-32 Eth Ports: the port is now busy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-31
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Create Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the LoC and issue Actions > Assign Resources to Domain
Figure 25-33 LoC: Actions>Assign Resources to Domain
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-32
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Create Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-33
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Create Domain
Define NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Define NE
When to use
From the main menu bar select Search > Packet > Construction > Defined NEs
Figure 25-35 Defined NEs list
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-34
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Create Domain
Define NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-35
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Create Domain
Define NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar select Actions > Packet > Construction > Define Network
Element.
Figure 25-37 Actions>Packet>Construction>Define Network Element
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-36
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Create Domain
Define NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on OK.
Figure 25-38 Define Network Element
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The NE which has been defined is now present in the list of defined NEs and the ports
involved in the LoC have Administative status = UP.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-37
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Traffic categories
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Traffic categories
Create Traffic Descriptor
When to use
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-38
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Traffic categories
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar select Actions > Packet > Services > Create Traffic
Descriptor.
Figure 25-39 Actions>Packet>Services>Create Traffic Descriptor
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-39
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Traffic categories
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-40
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Traffic categories
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-41
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Traffic categories
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar select Actions > Packet > Services > Create Traffic Classifier
Figure 25-42 Actions>Packet>Services>Create Traffic Classifier
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-42
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Traffic categories
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-43
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Traffic categories
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-44
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Traffic categories
L2 Encapsulation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
L2 Encapsulation
When to use
From the main menu bar select Actions > Packet > T-MPLS > Create T-MPLS Tunnel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-45
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Traffic categories
L2 Encapsulation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Create T-MPLS Tunnel box, enter Tunnel name, main attributes and QoS attributes.
For detail see sect. 3.2 T-MPLS Tunnel create.
Figure 25-45 Create T-MPLS Tunnel step1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-46
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Traffic categories
L2 Encapsulation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-47
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Traffic categories
L2 Encapsulation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Display the segments of the T-MPLS tunnel via Search>T-MPLS Segments pop-up menu.
Figure 25-48 Tunnel:Search>T-MPLS Segments
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-48
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Traffic categories
L2 Encapsulation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the segment (in this case you can manage only the real segment) and issue
Search>T-MPLS L2 Encapsulation Profiles
Figure 25-49 T-MPLS segment:Search>T-MPLS L2 Encapsulation Profiles
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-49
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Traffic categories
L2 Encapsulation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-50
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Traffic categories
L2 Encapsulation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Display the list of the L2 Encapsulation Profiles via Search>Packet>T-MPLS>QOS>TMPLS L2 Encapsulation Profiles
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-51
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Traffic categories
L2 Encapsulation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The profile which has been just created is included in the list.
Figure 25-53 L2 Encapsulation Profiles list
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-52
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Traffic categories
L2 Encapsulation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-53
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Traffic categories
L2 Encapsulation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the segment (in this case you can manage only the real segment) and issue
Search>T-MPLS L2 Encapsulation Profiles
Figure 25-56 Segment:Search>T-MPLS L2 Encapsulation Profiles
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-54
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Traffic categories
L2 Encapsulation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-55
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Traffic categories
L2 Encapsulation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on Next.
Figure 25-58 Create T-MPLS Pseudo Wire
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-56
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Traffic categories
L2 Encapsulation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on the left button on the right-hand side of the Constraints subwindow Select
a section as constraint.
In addition, set PW on section attribute to True. See below figure.
Click on Apply/OK to confirm the creation.
Figure 25-59 Create T-MPLS PW step2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-57
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Traffic categories
L2 Encapsulation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-58
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Traffic categories
L2 Encapsulation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-59
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
Traffic categories
L2 Encapsulation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the segment (in this case you can manage only the real segment) and issue
Search>T-MPLS L2 Encapsulation Profiles
Figure 25-64 T-MPLS L2 Encapsulation Profiles for PW
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-60
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
L2 Encapsulation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-61
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Topology
L2 Encapsulation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
25-62
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
26
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides the conceptual information and the associated tasks for managing
Ethernet Virtual Connection over T-MPLS .
Contents
Create T-MPLS Structure
26-2
26-2
26-15
T-MPLS-Create PW
26-24
EVC on T-MPLS
26-30
26-30
26-56
26-73
26-88
26-92
26-96
26-96
26-97
26-115
26-115
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar issue Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements >
Defined NEs.
Figure 26-2 Search>Packet>Construction>Network Elements>Defined NEs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The list of the defined NEs is displayed. Select the relevant NE and issue Search >
Ethernet Physical Ports
Figure 26-3 NE: Search>Ethernet Physical Ports
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
There are idle ports which could be used to create the Link over Cable.
Figure 26-4 Ethernet Physical Ports
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter the physical connection name, select physcon type=Ethernet. Click on Next.
Figure 26-5 Create Physcon-basic
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Physcon end points by means of the usual selection mechanism: select node and
port on both ends.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on OK to confirm.
Figure 26-6 Create Physcon: End Points
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-7
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-8
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Thorough a notification mechanism the created physical connection is present in the Link
over Cable list. To get the Link over Cable list, select Search > Packet > Construction >
Transport Links > Link over Cable
Figure 26-8 Search>Packet>Construction>Transport Links>Link over Cable
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-9
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Alternatively, or if SDH is not installed, you can issue Actions > Packet > Construction
> Create Link over Cable
Figure 26-10 Actions>Packet>Construction>Create Link over Cable
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-10
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-11
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
The LoC is created and is present in the LoC list. Select the LoC and issue Actions >
Assign Resources to Domain.
Figure 26-12 Actions>Assign Resources to Domain
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
Click on button Domains. From the domain list select T-MPLS and click on the green V
to confirm.
The selection of the domain is present in the main window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-12
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-13
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar select Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS Sections.
Figure 26-14 Search>Packet>T-MPLS>T-MPLS Sections
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-14
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar select Actions > Packet > T-MPLS > Create T-MPLS tunnel.
Figure 26-16 Actions>Packet>T-MPLS>Create T-MPLS tunnel
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-15
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select as constraint the relevant T-MPLS Section. In this case the ports are automatically
selected.
Figure 26-17 Create T-MPLS tunnel:Constraints
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-16
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-17
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter CIR, PIR, CBS, PBS and select T-MPLS PHB Profile.
Figure 26-18 Create T-MPLS tunnel: Quality of Service
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-18
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-19
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-20
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-21
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The tunnel has been created. To verify the creation issue Search > Packet > T-MPLS >
T-MPLS Tunnels.
Figure 26-21 Search>Packet>T-MPLS>T-MPLS Tunnels
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The tunnel is created with status defined. Select the created tunnel in the list and issue,
using the right mouse button, Actions > Allocate.
Figure 26-22 Tunnel list
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-22
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-23
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
T-MPLS-Create PW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
T-MPLS-Create PW
When to use
From the main bar select Actions > Packet > T-MPLS > Create T-MPLS Pseudo Wire.
Figure 26-25 Actions>Packet>T-MPLS>Create T-MPLS Pseudo Wire
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Create T-MPLS Pseudo Wire box enter name, select flow=Bidirectional
Select end nodes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-24
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
T-MPLS-Create PW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-25
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
T-MPLS-Create PW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter CIR, PIR, CBS, PBS and select T-MPLS PHB Profile.
Note: these values must be consistent with those specified for the relevant tunnel
Figure 26-27 Create T-MPLS Pseudo Wire: Quality of Service
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-26
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
T-MPLS-Create PW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select OAM values and click on Apply. The Pseudo Wire is created.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The list of the T-MPLS pseudo wires is shown below. The PW just created is Allocated.
Figure 26-29 T-MPLS Pseudo Wires
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-27
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
T-MPLS-Create PW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the relevant Pseudo Wire and issue Actions > Implement T-MPLS Pseudo wire.
Figure 26-30 PW Implementation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Pseudo Wire is seen as a T-MPLS Transport Link in the area of the Services.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-28
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
T-MPLS-Create PW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar issue Search > Packet > Services > T-MPLS > T-MPLS
Transport Links to list the Transport Links.
Figure 26-32 Search>Packet>Services>T-MPLS>T-MPLS Transport Links
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
The list of the T-MPLS Transport Links is displayed. It includes the Pseudo Wire just
created.
Figure 26-33 T-MPLS Transport Links
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-29
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EVC on T-MPLS
Create EVC over T-MPLS EVPL bottom up
When to use
The scope of this procedure is to create an EVC over T-MPLS, service type EVPL, modality
bottom up.
Related Information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-30
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar select Actions > Packet > Services > T-MPLS > Create T-MPLS
EVC
Figure 26-34 Actions>Packet>Services>T-MPLS>Create T-MPLS EVC
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Domain=T-MPLS.
Select Traffic Ttype=Unicast. For Service Type=BTV, Traffic Type=Multicast.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-31
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Resource Sharing= Full. It describes the resource reservation (UNI and link). We
select full sharing.
Figure 26-35 Create T-MPLS EVC: Specific
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-32
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-33
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-34
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select folder PM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-35
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-36
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-37
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-38
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Traffic Descriptor button. Select the traffic descriptor from the selection box and
click V-sign to confirm.
Note: Traffic Descriptor values (CIR, PIR,....) must be contained in the
corresponding values of the PW being associated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-39
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Transport link selection phase of the EVC over T-MPLS tunnel create (this
procedure).
Figure 26-40 Termination Settings
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-40
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Select Policy Mode. If you select Color Aware, you will select Color Profile.
Select classification priority code = 0-7 and DSCP code = 0-63
Select VLAN POP disabled
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-41
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
Click Create.
Figure 26-41 Ingress flow create
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-42
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
You can monitor that the Ingress flow has been created: after create the relevant traffic
descriptor is displayed in the bottom of the window
Figure 26-42 Ingress Flow: create monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-43
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-44
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
active.
Figure 26-43 Egress Flow: Push
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-45
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-46
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can monitor that the Egress flow has been created: after create the relevant traffic
descriptor is displayed in the bottom of the window
Figure 26-44 Create Egress monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-47
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-48
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-49
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18
If you do not select automatic (first row of the dialog), you will choose the transport link.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-50
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-51
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19
Select the Pseudo Wire we had created and confirm clicking the V-sign.
Figure 26-48 Select the transport link
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-52
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-53
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-54
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-55
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The scope of this procedure is to create an EVC over T-MPLS, service type EVPL, modality
top down.
Related Information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-56
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
As a prerequisite, select Actions > Packet > Services > Create Traffic Descriptor. This
traffic descriptor will be dedicated to the new PW which will be created by the system.
This is not strictly necessary; anyway, in this context, it allows a better understanding of
the resource utilization.
Figure 26-52 Actions>Packet>Services>Create Traffic Descriptor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-57
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Create Traffic Descriptor box enter User Label name, select Class Of Service,
CIR, PIR, PBS. Click Apply.
Figure 26-53 Create Traffic Descriptor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-58
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar select Actions > Packet > Services > T-MPLS > Create T-MPLS
EVC
Figure 26-54 Actions>Packet>Services>T-MPLS>Create T-MPLS EVC
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Domain=T-MPLS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-59
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Resource Sharing=Full. It describes the resource reservation (UNI and link).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-60
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-61
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-62
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Traffic Descriptor button. Select the Traffic Descriptor from the selection box and
click V-sign to confirm.
Note: Traffic Descriptor values (CIR, PIR,....) must be contained in the corresponding
values of the PW being associated..
See Transport link selection phase of the EVC over T-MPLS tunnel create (this
procedure)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Policy Mode. If you select Color Aware, you will select Color Profile.
Select classification priority-code = 0-7 and DSCP code = 0-63.
Select VLAN POP disabled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Click Create.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-63
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can monitor that the Ingress flow has been created: after create the relevant traffic
descriptor is displayed in the bottom of the window.
Figure 26-57 Ingress Flow: create
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-64
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-65
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
active.
Figure 26-58 Egress Flow: Push
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-66
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
13
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-67
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select automatic (first row of the dialog), the system will create the transport link.
Figure 26-59 Transport Link selection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-68
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
Issue Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS Pseudo Wires.
Figure 26-60 Search>Packet>T-MPLS>T-MPLS Pseudo Wires
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-69
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-70
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17
The PW list after EVC TD create is displayed. It contains the new PW created by the
system.
Figure 26-63 PW list after EVC TD create
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18
Select the list of T-MPLS EVCs to show the EVC which has just been created. Issue
Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS EVCs
Figure 26-64 Search>Packet>T-MPLS>T-MPLS EVCs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-71
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-72
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The scope of this procedure is to create an EVC over T-MPLS, service type EVPLAN
Related Information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-73
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar select Actions > Packet > Services > T-MPLS > Create T-MPLS
EVC
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-74
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select domain=T-MPLS
Select Topology= Any to Any
Select traffic type=unicast. For service type=BTV, traffic type=multicast
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-75
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select resource sharing=full. It describes the resource reservation (UNI and link).
Figure 26-69 Create T-MPLS EVC: Specific
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-76
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Per each LAN termination, one at a time, select the node and select the port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-77
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Next.
Figure 26-70 Terminations Selection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-78
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click traffic descriptor button. Select the traffic descriptor from the selection box and
Click V to confirm.
Note: traffic descriptor values (CIR, PIR,....) must be contained in the
corresponding values of the PW being associated..
See Transport link selection phase of the EVC over T-MPLS tunnel create (this
procedure)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Policy Mode. If you select Color Aware, you will select Color Profile.
Select classification Priority-Code=0-7 and DSCP code= 0-63.
Select VLAN POP disabled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Create.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-79
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can monitor that the Ingress flow has been created: after create the relevant traffic
descriptor is displayed in the bottom of the window
Figure 26-71 EVPLAN: Ingress Flow: create
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-80
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-81
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Priority Mode. If set to Color Aware fields Green and Yellow are active.
Figure 26-72 EVPLAN:Egress Flow
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-82
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
11
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-83
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-84
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-85
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-86
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
The PW list after EVC TD create is displayed. It contains the new PW created by the
system.
Figure 26-75 PW list after EVC TD create
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
Select the list of T-MPLS EVCs to show the EVC which has just been created. Issue
Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS EVCs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
16
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-87
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The scope of this procedure is to create an EVC over T-MPLS, service type BTV
Related Information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-88
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar select Actions > Packet > Services > T-MPLS > Create T-MPLS
EVC
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter name
Select Service Type=BTV
Select Resource Sharing=Full. It describes the resource reservation (UNI and link)
Select Domain=T-MPLS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For each LAN termination, one at a time, select the node and select the port.
Click Next.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Traffic Descriptor button. Select the Traffic Descriptor from the selection box and
Click V-sign to confirm.
Note: Traffic Descriptor values (CIR, PIR,....) must be contained in the corresponding
values of the PW being associated.
See Transport link selection phase of the EVC over T-MPLS tunnel create (this
procedure)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Policy Mode. If you select Color Aware, you will select Color Profile
Select classification priority-code = 0-7 and DSCP code = 0-63.
Select VLAN POP disabled
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-89
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Create.
You can monitor that the Ingress flow has been created: after create the relevant traffic
descriptor is displayed in the bottom of the window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Priority Mode. If Priority Mode is set to Color Aware, fields Green Priority and
Yellow Priority are active.
You can monitor that the Egress flow has been created: after create the relevant traffic
descriptor is displayed in the bottom of the window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
11
12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-90
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
The PW list after EVC TD create is displayed. It contains the new PW created by the
system.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
Select the list of T-MPLS EVCs to show the EVC which has just been created. Issue
Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS EVCs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-91
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The scope of this procedure is to create an EVC (Ethernet Virtual Call) over T-MPLS,
service type=HSI
Related Information
HSI=High Speed Internet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-92
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar select Actions > Packet > Services > T-MPLS > Create T-MPLS
EVC
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Per each LAN termination, one at a time, select the node and select the port.
Click on Next.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on traffic descriptor button. Select the traffic descriptor from the selection box and
click on V to confirm.
Note: traffic descriptor values (CIR, PIR,....) must be contained in the
corresponding values of the PW being associated..
See Transport link selection phase of the EVC over T-MPLS tunnel create (this
procedure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-93
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select policy mode. If you select color aware, you will select color profile
Select classification priority-code0-7 / DSCP code 0-63
Select VLAN POP disabled
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on Create.
You can monitor that the Ingress flow has been created: after create the relevant traffic
descriptor is displayed in the bottom of the window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
11
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-94
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
13
The PW list after EVC TD create is displayed. It contains the new PW created by the
system.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
Select the list of T-MPLS EVCs to show the EVC which has just been created. Issue
Search>Packet>T-MPLS>T-MPLS EVCs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-95
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remove Tunnel(s)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Delete Node.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-96
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-97
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The EVC list is displayed. Select the relevant T-MPLS EVC and issue
Actions>Deimplement.
Figure 26-80 T-MPLS EVC:Actions>Deimplement
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-98
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The T-MPLS Transport Links list is displayed. In the fact our T-MPLS EVC is carried by
the displayed PW.
Figure 26-83 T-MPLS Transport Links
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-99
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Anyway the complete list of the Pseudo Wires can be obtained by selecting
Search>Packet>T-MPLS>T-MPLS Pseudo Wires
Figure 26-84 Search>Packet>T-MPLS>T-MPLS Pseudo Wires
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-100
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-101
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-102
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-103
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Select the Tunnel spare and issue Actions>Remove Protection keeping Main
Figure 26-88 Tunnel spare: Actions>Remove Protection keeping Main
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-104
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-105
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-106
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-107
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17
18
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-108
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-109
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23
The Link over Cable has the same name as the Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-110
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-111
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
25
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
26
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-112
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
27
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
28
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-113
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
29
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-114
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-115
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar select Search > Packet > Services > T-MPLS > T-MPLS EVCs.
Figure 26-107 Search>Packet>Services>T-MPLS>T-MPLS EVCs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-116
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-117
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
26-118
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
27
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides the conceptual information and the associated tasks for the
management of Ethernet Virtual Connection over SDH in the1350 OMS PKT application.
Contents
Structure for EVC over SDH
27-2
27-2
27-12
27-17
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar select Search > Packet > Construction > Transport Links >
Links over TDM(Sdh/Sonet)
Figure 27-1 Search>Packet>Construction>Transport Links>Links over
TDM(Sdh/Sonet)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This list contains an Ethernet path, created on SDH, which will be used
Figure 27-2 Links over TDM(Sdh/Sonet)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the relevant NE and issue Search > Ethernet Physical Ports
Figure 27-4 Defined NE:Search>Ethernet Physical Ports
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Ethernet port and issue Actions > Assign Resource to Domain
Figure 27-5 Port:Actions>Assign Resource to Domain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on button Domains. From the domain list select the ETS Domain and click on V.
Figure 27-6 ETS Domain selection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Execute the assignment for the far end port on TSS-B. (Port:Actions>Assign Resource to
Domain)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Select the relevant Link over TDM (path) and issue Actions>Assign Resources to Domain
Figure 27-8 Link over TDM (path): Actions>Assign Resources to Domain
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-7
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-8
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-9
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
Since we do not find the path in the list of ETS Transport Links, this is due to the fact that
we forgive to commission the path.
Figure 27-12 Path commissioning
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
After path commissioning the path is included in the Links over TDM list.
Figure 27-13 Path included in the Links over TDM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-10
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-11
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar select Search > Packet > Construction > Network Elements >
Defined NEs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select a Defined Network Element from the list and using the right mouse button, select
from the popup menu, Search > Ethernet Physical Ports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-12
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-13
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-14
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar select Search > Packet > Services > T-MPLS > T-MPLS Edge
Ports.
Figure 27-17 Search>Packet>Services>T-MPLS>T-MPLS Edge Ports
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-15
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-16
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main bar select Actions > Packet > Services > Connection Oriented(ETS) >
Create EVC.
Figure 27-19 Actions>Packet>Services>Connection Oriented(ETS)>Create EVC
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-17
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-18
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-19
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-20
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on Next.
Figure 27-21 Far end edge port selection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-21
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on Apply
Figure 27-22 Ethernet Segments definition
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-22
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar select Search > Packet > Services > Connection
Oriented(ETS)
Figure 27-23 Search>Packet>Services>Connection Oriented(ETS)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-23
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the ETS EVC and issue Search > Ethernet Segments.
Figure 27-25 ETS EVC: Search>Ethernet Segments
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-24
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
You may select an Ethernet Segment from the list and using the right mouse button, select
from the popup menu Actions > Add Constraints to an Ethernet Service
Figure 27-27 Actions>Add Constraints to an Ethernet Service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-25
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on Apply.
Figure 27-28 Add Constraints to an Ethernet Service
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-26
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Select the Ethernet Segment in the list and using the right mouse button follow the path
Actions > Associate Traffic Classifier
Figure 27-29 Segment:Actions>Associate to Traffic Classifier
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-27
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-28
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-29
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-30
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-31
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
27-32
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
28
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides the conceptual information and the associated tasks for the end to
end service management in the1350 OMS PKT application.
Contents
E2E
28-2
28-2
EVC-E2E
28-3
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
28-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E2E
End to End EVC connection
Introduction to End to End EVC connection
The following two modalities can be used in creating an End to End EVC connection:
bottom-up. This modality requires the separate creation of the EVCs within their
domains, then the user will join the different EVCs.
top-down. This modality is completely automatic. The user creates the full EVC over
different domains and all relevant commands are forwarded to the subordinate
network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
28-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
EVC-E2E
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EVC-E2E
When to use
The scope of this procedure is to create an End to End EVC connection. With reference to
the below schema.
Figure 28-1 Network schema for E2E connection
Related Information
After the assignment of port B1 to Domain ETS and port C1 to Domain T-MPLS,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
28-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
EVC-E2E
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
the Loc between NE-B and NE-C becomes IWI (it was generic)
ports B1 and port C1 become UNI (Edge port in their domains)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
28-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
29
29
TSS-320
versus TSS-40
with packet ring
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides the conceptual information and the associated tasks for managing
Ethernet Virtual Connection over the T-MPLS tunnel with packet ring facility.
Contents
Create T-MPLS Tunnel and PW (SNI)
29-2
29-2
29-16
29-23
29-23
29-36
29-43
29-43
29-67
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The scope of this procedure is to create the T-MPLS tunnel between TSS-40 and
TSS-160/320.
Related Information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar select Actions > Packet > T-MPLS > Create T-MPLS tunnel.
Figure 29-2 Actions>Packet>T-MPLS>Create T-MPLS tunnel
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Flow = bidirectional
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the node relevant to the first extremity working and to the first extremity protection
(Node 122 in this case).
Figure 29-4 Point to point Packet Ring bidir protected T-MPLS tunnel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-7
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the port for the first extremity working. It is the SDH port used by the SDH path
connecting Node 41 to Node 122.
Figure 29-5 Selection of the port
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Analogously select the first extremity protection port on the same node.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-8
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the port working and protecting, according to the physical connections previously
created.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-9
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-10
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-11
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-12
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
The tunnel has been created. To verify the creation issue Search > Packet > T-MPLS >
T-MPLS Tunnels.
Figure 29-10 Search>Packet>T-MPLS>T-MPLS Tunnels
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-13
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
The tunnel is created with status defined. Select the created tunnel in the list and issue,
using the right mouse button, Actions > Allocate.
Figure 29-11 Tunnel list
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-14
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-15
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The scope of this procedure is to create a pseudo wire within a T-MPLS tunnel.
Related Information
From the main bar select Actions > Packet > T-MPLS > Create T-MPLS Pseudo Wire.
Figure 29-14 Actions>Packet>T-MPLS>Create T-MPLS Pseudo Wire
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-16
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label
Flow = Bidirectional
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-17
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the extremities. The modality of selection is the same as described for the above
procedure of tunnel create.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-18
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-19
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Packe t> T-MPLS > T-MPLS Pseudo Wire.
Figure 29-17 Search>Packet>T-MPLS>T-MPLS Pseudo Wire
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The list of the T-MPLS pseudo wires is shown below. The PW just created is Allocated.
Figure 29-18 T-MPLS Pseudo Wires
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-20
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the relevant Pseudo Wire and issue Actions > Implement T-MPLS Pseudo wire.
Figure 29-19 PW Implementation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
The Pseudo Wire is seen as a T-MPLS Transport Link in the area of the Services.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-21
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar issue Search > Packet > Services > T-MPLS > T-MPLS
Transport Links to list the Transport Links.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
The list of the T-MPLS Transport Links is displayed. It includes the Pseudo Wire just
created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-22
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The scope of this procedure is to create the T-MPLS tunnel between TSS-40 and
TSS-160/320.
Related Information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-23
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-24
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar select Actions > Packet > T-MPLS > Create T-MPLS tunnel.
Figure 29-22 Actions>Packet>T-MPLS>Create T-MPLS tunnel
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-26
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the node relevant to the first extremity working (Node 122 in this case).
Figure 29-24 Point to point Packet Ring bidir protected T-MPLS tunnel open sink
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-27
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the port. It is the SDH port used by the SDH path connecting Node 41 to Node
122.
Figure 29-25 Selection of the port
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-28
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the port working and protecting, according to the physical connections previously
created.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-29
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-30
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-31
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-32
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
The tunnel has been created. To verify the creation issue Search > Packet > T-MPLS >
T-MPLS Tunnels.
Figure 29-30 Search>Packet>T-MPLS>T-MPLS Tunnels
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-33
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
The tunnel is created with status defined. Select the created tunnel in the list and issue,
using the right mouse button, Actions > Allocate.
Figure 29-31 Tunnel list
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-34
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-35
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The scope of this procedure is to create a pseudo wire within a T-MPLS tunnel.
Related Information
From the main bar select Actions > Packet > T-MPLS > Create T-MPLS Pseudo Wire.
Figure 29-34 Actions>Packet>T-MPLS>Create T-MPLS Pseudo Wire
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-36
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label
Flow = Bidirectional
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-37
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the extremities. The modality of selection is the same as described for the above
procedure of tunnel create.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-38
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-39
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS Pseudo Wire
Figure 29-37 Search>Packet>T-MPLS>T-MPLS Pseudo Wire
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The list of the T-MPLS pseudo wires is shown below. The PW just created is Allocated.
Figure 29-38 T-MPLS Pseudo Wires
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-40
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the relevant Pseudo Wire and issue Actions > Implement T-MPLS Pseudo wire.
Figure 29-39 PW Implementation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
The Pseudo Wire is seen as a T-MPLS Transport Link in the area of the Services.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-41
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar issue Search > Packet > Services > T-MPLS > T-MPLS
Transport Links to list the Transport Links.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
The list of the T-MPLS Transport Links is displayed. It includes the Pseudo Wire just
created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-42
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar select Actions > Packet > Services > T-MPLS > Create T-MPLS
EVC
Figure 29-41 Actions>Packet>Services>T-MPLS>Create T-MPLS EVC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-43
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Label
Select domain=T-MPLS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-44
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-45
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select folder PM
Execute the suitable selections.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-46
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-47
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-48
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Traffic Descriptor button. Select the traffic descriptor from the selection box and
Click V-sign to confirm.
Note: Traffic Descriptor values (CIR, PIR,....) must be contained in the
corresponding values of the PW being associated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-49
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See TransportLlink selection phase of the EVC over T-MPLS tunnel create (this
procedure)
Figure 29-45 Termination Settings
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-50
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Select policy mode. If you select color aware, you will select color profile
Select classification priority-code0-7 / DSCP code 0-63
Select VLAN POP disabled
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-51
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
Click Create.
Figure 29-46 Ingress flow create
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-52
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
You can monitor that the Ingress flow has been created: after create the relevant traffic
descriptor is displayed in the bottom of the window
Figure 29-47 Ingress Flow: create monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-53
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-54
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
active.
Figure 29-48 Egress Flow: Push
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-55
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-56
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can monitor that the Egress flow has been created: after create the relevant traffic
descriptor is displayed in the bottom of the window
Figure 29-49 Create Egress monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-57
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-58
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-59
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-60
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-61
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-62
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-63
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-64
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-65
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-66
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The scope of this procedure is to verify the creation of EVC over T-MPLS.
Related Information
From the main menu bar select Search > Packet > Services > T-MPLS > T-MPLS EVCs.
Figure 29-55 Search>Packet>Services>T-MPLS>T-MPLS EVCs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-67
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-68
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-69
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
29-70
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
30
Fault Detection
30
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides the conceptual information and the associated tasks for the Fault
detection of the1350 OMS PKT application.
Contents
Alarms EVC T-MPLS
30-2
30-2
30-5
30-5
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
30-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Fault Detection
Alarms EVC T-MPLS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
30-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Fault Detection
Alarms EVC T-MPLS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
30-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Fault Detection
Alarms EVC T-MPLS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
30-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Fault Detection
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the MS-GUI main menu, get the list of path following
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
30-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Fault Detection
Alarms EVC SDH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the involved path from the list and using the right mouse button select from thr
popup menu Search > Show Elementary alarms.
Figure 30-5 Path: Show Elementary alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
30-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Fault Detection
Alarms EVC SDH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
30-7
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Fault Detection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
30-8
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
31
Tunnel protection
31
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides the conceptual information and the associated tasks for the Tunnel
protection management of the1350 OMS PKT application.
Contents
Tunnel protection
31-2
31-2
31-6
31-9
31-16
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
31-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Tunnel protection
Tunnel protection
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Tunnel protection
Tunnel protection create
When to use
Tunnels MAIN and SPARE have been created separately, with same origin/destination
and same values of transmission parameters.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
31-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Tunnel protection
Tunnel protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Tunnel MAIN and issue Actions>T-MPLS Tunnel Protection Management
Figure 31-1 Tunnel MAIN: Actions>T-MPLS Tunnel Protection Management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The T-MPLS Tunnel Protection Management box is displayed. The working tunnel is
already selected. Select the protecting tunnel. Select hold-off time and reverting time.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
31-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Tunnel protection
Tunnel protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on Apply.
Figure 31-2 T-MPLS Tunnel Protection Management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
31-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Tunnel protection
Tunnel protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: the Protection Role of tunnel MAIN is now Working and the Protection Role of
tunnel SPARE is now Protecting.
The Protection State of tunnel SPARE is now Activeand the Protection State of tunnel
SPARE is now StandBy.
Figure 31-3 T-MPLS tunnel list
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the MAIN or the Spare T-MPLS tunnel and issue Search>Routing display
Figure 31-4 T-MPLS tunnel: Search>Routing display
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
31-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Tunnel protection
Tunnel protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The scope of this procedure is to show the T-MPLS Tunnel Routing display
Related Information
From the main menu bar select Search > Packet > T-MPLS > T-MPLS Tunnels.
Figure 31-5 Search>Packet>T-MPLS>T-MPLS>Tunnels
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
31-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Tunnel protection
Tunnel protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select a T-MPLS tunnel from the displayed list, with the right mouse button, display the
popup Actions menu
Figure 31-6 T-MPLS tunnel: Actions menu
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
31-7
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Tunnel protection
Tunnel protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the T-MPLS tunnel Action popup menu select : Search > Routing display
Figure 31-7 T-MPLS tunnel: Search>Routing display
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
31-8
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Tunnel protection
Tunnel protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
31-9
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Tunnel protection
Tunnel protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
31-10
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Tunnel protection
Tunnel protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the T-MPLS Protection Group (Tunnel Switch) you can open the Actions menu
Figure 31-9 Tunnel Switch: Actions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
31-11
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Tunnel protection
Tunnel protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the protecting Tunnel and issue Actions > Remove Protection (keeping Main)
Figure 31-10 Tunnel:Actions>Remove Protection(keeping Main)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
31-12
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Tunnel protection
Tunnel protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
After the remove protection the routing display changes view accordingly.
Figure 31-11 Spare tunnel routing display
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
31-13
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Tunnel protection
Tunnel protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Both protection role and protection state of the two tunnels are don't care.
Figure 31-12 Don't care protection role and protection state
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
31-14
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Tunnel protection
Tunnel protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
31-15
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Tunnel protection
Tunnel protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The scope of this procedure is to show other info on T-MPLS routing display
Related Information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
31-16
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Tunnel protection
Tunnel protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
31-17
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Tunnel protection
Tunnel protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
31-18
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Tunnel protection
Tunnel protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
31-19
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Tunnel protection
Tunnel protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
31-20
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
32
Performance Monitoring
32
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides the conceptual information and the associated tasks for the
Performance Monitoring management of the1350 OMS PKT application.
Contents
PM in EVC create
32-2
PM in EVC create
32-2
32-8
PM activate
32-8
PM consistency
PM consistency
PM Reports create
PM Reports create
PM report generate
PM report generate
32-13
32-13
32-17
32-17
32-21
32-21
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
32-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Performance Monitoring
PM in EVC create
PM in EVC create
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PM in EVC create
PM in EVC create
When to use
The scope of this procedure is to set PM characteristics in the phase of EVC create.
Related Information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
32-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Performance Monitoring
PM in EVC create
PM in EVC create
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
During the EVC creation phase select PM folder on the creation window.
Figure 32-1 EVC definition: PM folder
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
32-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Performance Monitoring
PM in EVC create
PM in EVC create
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
32-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Performance Monitoring
PM in EVC create
PM in EVC create
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
32-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Performance Monitoring
PM in EVC create
PM in EVC create
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
32-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Performance Monitoring
PM in EVC create
PM in EVC create
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
measure name (userlabel) . The measure name can be modified only if the measure
status is PLANNED.
start/end time. If you do not specify start/end time, you can subsequently activate
manually the measure by means of the command Measure Start, otherwise the
Measure will be started at the Start Time and stopped at the Stop time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
32-7
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Performance Monitoring
Performance Monitoring activate
PM activate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
32-8
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Performance Monitoring
Performance Monitoring activate
PM activate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main menu bar the user can issue Search > PM > PM domains on NML.
Figure 32-5 Search>PM>PM domains
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
32-9
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Performance Monitoring
Performance Monitoring activate
PM activate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
32-10
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Performance Monitoring
Performance Monitoring activate
PM activate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
32-11
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Performance Monitoring
Performance Monitoring activate
PM activate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
32-12
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Performance Monitoring
PM consistency
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PM consistency
PM consistency
When to use
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
32-13
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Performance Monitoring
PM consistency
PM consistency
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the measure list select the measure and issue Actions>Measure consistency
Figure 32-12 Measure consistency
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
32-14
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Performance Monitoring
PM consistency
PM consistency
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
32-15
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Performance Monitoring
PM consistency
PM consistency
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
32-16
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Performance Monitoring
PM Reports create
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PM Reports create
PM Reports create
When to use
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
32-17
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Performance Monitoring
PM Reports create
PM Reports create
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
32-18
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Performance Monitoring
PM Reports create
PM Reports create
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can issue the correlation of the Measure with Report Profile.
Figure 32-16 Correlation Measure with Report Profile
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
32-19
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Performance Monitoring
PM Reports create
PM Reports create
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can issue the uncorrelation of the Measure from Report Profile.
Figure 32-17 Uncorrelation Measure with Report Profile
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
32-20
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Performance Monitoring
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PM report generate
PM report generate
When to use
From PM TP Actions menu you can select the generate of the suitable report.
Figure 32-18 PM TP Actions menu
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
32-21
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Performance Monitoring
PM report generate
PM report generate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
32-22
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Performance Monitoring
PM report generate
PM report generate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
32-23
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Performance Monitoring
PM report generate
PM report generate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
32-24
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Performance Monitoring
PM report generate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
32-25
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Performance Monitoring
PM report generate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
32-26
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
33
Technical Annexes
33
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides some technical annexes of the1350 OMS PKT application.
Contents
T-MPLS tunnel schema
33-2
33-2
33-5
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
33-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Technical Annexes
T-MPLS tunnel schema
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Layering
Figure 33-1 Layering
Tunnel entities
Tunnel entities
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
33-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Technical Annexes
T-MPLS tunnel schema
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PW entities
PW entities
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
33-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Technical Annexes
T-MPLS tunnel schema
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
33-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Technical Annexes
T-MPLS tunnel schema
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following considerations are valid for all Ethernet services built over one T-MPLS
domain:
in case of Virtual services, e.g. EVPLINE and EVPLAN, it is possible to share the same
UNI for more than one service
each T-MPLS transport link (PW) is dedicated to only one Ethernet service (EVC). The
hardware implementation is standard compliant (the FPGA inserts/strips the PW label at
the UNI in case of p2p connections)
there is no need to have a routing algorythm at the Ethernet layer over one T-MPLS
domain. In fact, one PW connects always two edge nodes and so routing is done at the
T-MPLS layer. The notable exception to this rule is the case of H-VPLS services, but in
that case routing at the Ethernet layer is again avoided since the operator has to specify
the VPLS core nodes
for scalability reasons, for all service types, all Ethernet flows belonging to the same
EVC termination must be transported over the same PW towards each remote EVC
termination. Specifically,
for point-to-point services: in case an EVC termination has multiple ingress Ethernet
flows, all flows must be mapped to the same PW; similarly, in case of multiple egress
flows, all flows must be (de)mapped from the same PW
for multipoint services: in case one EVC termination has multiple Ethernet ingress
flows, all flows must be mapped to only one PW dedicated to each remote destination;
similarly, in case of multiple egress flows, all flows must be (de)mapped from only one
PW for each remote source
POINT-TO-POINT EVC OVER T-MPLS - EVPL service
The EVPL EVC must be layered over two unidirectional T-MPLS PWs (uniformly or
diversely routed) if different bandwidth characteristics (traffic descriptors) are required
for the forward and backward directions.
All Ethernet flows that compose the EVC termination must be carried over the same PW.
PKT checks that the bandwidth parameters of the T-MPLS transport link satisfy the
bandwidth requirements of the associated ETS ingress flow:
- Max Flow PIR <= TL PIR
- Flow CIR <= TL CIR
- Max Flow PBS <= TL PBS
- Flow CBS <= TL CBS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
33-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Technical Annexes
T-MPLS tunnel schema
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The EPL service reserves the edge port (UNI) usage to only one service.
Other service constraints are
: - service frame disposition is only deliver unconditionally
- L2 CP processing is always tunnel except for PAUSE frames that are discarded
- policing mode of Ethernet flow is only color blind
- only guaranteed CoS of Ethernet flow is allowed
- no specific traffic classification is applied to the Ethernet flow
Apart from service characteristic values, the same management of the EVPL service
applies.
MULTI POINT-TO-MULTI POINT EVC OVER T-MPLS - EVPLAN service
The EVC contains a set of EVC terminations at the edge nodes. There is a set of core
PWs interconnecting a set of core nodes, in full-mesh modality. The core PWs are always
bidirectional. The core nodes are also edge nodes when they have EVC terminations.
All edge nodes are also core nodes and, in the top-down workflow, they are automatically
interconnected by the system with a full mesh of core PWs (top-down allocation phase).
In the bottom-up workflow, the operator has to manually select the full-mesh of core PWs
(bottom-up allocation phase).
If an edge node is not a core node, then it must be interconnected to one core node with
one unidirectional or bidirectional spoke PW for each EVC termination in the edge node.
A core node contains one Virtual Switch Instance (VSI). The VSI is a split-horizon
bridge, in the sense that no traffic egressing from one core PW is allowed to ingress
another core PW. An edge node contains at least one EVC termination.
The case where all EVC terminations are present in one single edge node is allowed.
The same UNI and the same tunnel infrastructure could be shared between different
services, point-to-point or multi-point services.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
33-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Technical Annexes
T-MPLS tunnel schema
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
33-7
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Technical Annexes
T-MPLS tunnel schema
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
33-8
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Technical Annexes
T-MPLS tunnel schema
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The HSI service is a rooted-multipoint service (aka bidirectional E-TREE service w/o
packet replication), namely a service characterized by one EVC termination as root and
all other EVC terminations as leaves.
It allows connecting one main site with many remote sites of the same customer
(back-hauling) or one main site with many remote sites associated to different customers
(broadband access).
The HSI traffic flows both in the root to leaf direction (downstream) and in the leaf to
root direction (upstream). The downstream and upstream directions have usually different
bandwidth characteristics.
The features are:
- it is possible to have different bandwidth characteristics for downstream and upstream
traffic
- there is no need to replicate packets originated by the root termination towards more
than one leaf termination
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
33-9
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Technical Annexes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
33-10
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
34
Enhanced Procedures
34
Overview
Purpose
34-3
Overview
34-3
34-4
In-band configuration
34-8
34-11
34-17
34-19
34-21
34-23
34-25
34-26
34-27
34-28
34-29
34-30
34-31
34-32
34-33
34-34
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
34-35
34-41
34-44
Configure protection
34-45
34-46
34-47
34-48
34-50
34-51
34-52
Disabled operations
34-53
34-54
34-55
34-57
34-58
34-59
Tunnel Redundancy
34-60
Description
34-61
34-70
34-72
34-74
EVC setup
34-76
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
TSS 5 In Band Management
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The equipment of the family TSS 320, 100 etc. are able to take in charge and manage
other devices (TSS-3, TSS-5 etc.) usually on the customer side.
The local management is made by DCN, in the case of remote devices the management is
implemented by reserving a channel on the fiber link. On the cable PKT realizes user
services that are added to the service reserved to the control.
Management systems such as PKT must take into account the resources already allocated
in the managing equipment during both the allocation of new resources for the user, but
especially during the reserve release.
In case of release of all the resources you should not put down the ports when the channel
management must remain active.
The ZIC configures the "IN BAND MANAGEMENT". The cable port is configured with
an IP address reserved for the equipment to manage (add route) and a VLAN = 4094
reserved for the management of the NE (VLAN-DCN). In the case of TSS-5, T-MPLS
management requires a structuring of the cable tunnel and the pseudowire. The PKT, to
learn about the resources allocated by the ZIC should do a Takeover that is not working
with TSS-5/T-MPLS. Therefore needs to be rebuilt in PKT "hand" made the management
structure and take it up with the ZIC Allocated in order to reserve resources at PKT. These
resources must be recognizable not be erased by the operator.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
TSS 5 In Band Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OMS uses the Router as a gateway (next hop) to manage the TSS nodes. A VSI is
configured on TSS-320 to transport the management traffic received from OMS (via
Router). The VSI consists of an incoming port from the Router, PWs connecting to the
remote TSS-5s, and a local interface to TSS-320.
Initially, when the OMS sends traffic towards TSS-5, the Router sends ARP request
towards TSS-320. The VSI on TSS-320 broadcasts this request over all ports/PWs of the
VSI. When the ARP response is received from TSS-5 the VSI learns the MAC address
over the PW and forwards it to the Router. The Router resolves the IP to MAC address of
TSS-5. All further traffic from the OMS (via Router) is sent with MAC address of TSS-5.
The VSI on TSS-320 forwards this traffic on a specific PW based on the destination MAC
address of the packet.
In this topology all IP addresses are on the same IP subnet.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
TSS 5 In Band Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Each T-MPLS network has nodes in different IP subnetworks. For e.g. TSS-5 {a, b, and
c} are in a different subnetwork compared to TSS-5-{x, y, and z}.
A separate physical connection is provided from the Router to the TSS-320 for each
subnetwork.
The VSIs forward traffic similar to the single T-MPLS subnetwork topology.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
TSS 5 In Band Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Each T-MPLS network has nodes in different IP subnetworks. For e.g. TSS-5 {a, b, and
c} are in a different subnetwork compared to TSS-5- {x, y, and z}.
A single physical connection is provided from the Router the TSS-320 for each
subnetwork.
Outgoing traffic from the Router is tagged with a different VLAN for each IP subnetwork.
On the TSS-320, each VLANs traffic is associated with a different VSI.
The VSIs forward traffic similar to the single T-MPLS subnetwork topology.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
TSS 5 In Band Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Protection
In the protected solutions, the PW and the Tunnel may take an alternate path for
protection.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-7
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
TSS 5 In Band Management
In-band configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In-band configuration
Configuration Notes
Figure 34-1 TSS-5 interworking with TSS160/320
Configuration requirements
VLAN tag
The TSS5 requires a VLAN tag on management traffic. The router sends untagged
traffic. The TSS160/320 is not able to push a VLAN tag onto incoming traffic. As a
result there are 2 options:
1. Reconfigure router to insert a VLAN tag onto the port interfacing with the
Gateway TSS 160/320.
2. Insert another TSS5 between the router and the gateway. The VLNC4x will push a
VLAN on the incoming management traffic.
One T-MPLS tunnel required per TSS5 shelf. In addition, if protection is required, 1
protection tunnel per TSS5 is required.
For inband management of the TSS5s, the network (internal) IP address on the TSS5s
must be in the same subnet as the router. The serviceport (external) IP address must be
in a different subnet.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-8
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
TSS 5 In Band Management
In-band configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Inband management of both the VLNC4x and the VLNC6x requires only 1 tunnel.
However, 1 pseudo-wire (PW) is required for the VLNC4x and one PW for the
VLNC6x.
A transit T-MPLS tunnel is required on a node that is not terminating the given tunnel.
For instance, tunnel #3 is terminated on TSS5 #3. So TSS5 #1 and TSS5 #2 must have
a transit tunnel provisioned to forward the management traffic to TSS5 #3.
The management tunnel depicted above is a terminated T-MPLS tunnel. The traffic
descriptor associated with the management tunnel, should have a CIR=PIR. This
value can be increased if necessary. The value for CBS and PBS can be any value.
The two tunnels depicted above are for management of both the VLNC4x and the
VLNC6x. PW #1 above is the PW for inband management of the VLNC4x. PW #2
above is the PW for inband management of the VLNC6x.
Port a-100 is an internal port on the VLNC4x. It is dedicated to inband management.
It is used as the UNI port for the PW #1. Port a-100 is used in R7.0.1 and above. In
release R7.0.0, the UNI port will be port a-60. Port d2-4 is the backplane port to the
VLNC6x. It is the UNI port for the PW #2.
Configuration details
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-9
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
TSS 5 In Band Management
In-band configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create VPWS, set name, set port a-100, associate PW and traffic descriptor
created before.(policing mode disable).
For inband management to function for each VLNC6x:
Set a VPWS service similar to the prior VPWS changing the port: d2-4.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-10
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
TSS 5 In Band Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The procedure allocate in the PKT all the resources allocated in the NEs for the In fiber
InBand management.
Related information
Following steps should be done to execute correctly the Takeover with online command:
From MS-GUI main window:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-11
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
TSS 5 In Band Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If not created,
Create one or more domains that corresponds to the scenario already acting in field : from
the Construction application
Select Action > Packet > Costruction > Create Domain.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-12
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
TSS 5 In Band Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Insert the User Label, Domain Type, Bridge Type and STP Type compliant with the
attributes already present.
Figure 34-2 Create Domain
If not created,
Define the Network Elements to the PKT environment : from the Construction
application.
Select Action > Packet > Costruction > Define NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-13
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
TSS 5 In Band Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Insert the User Label, Working Mode and STP Type compliant with the attributes already
present.
Figure 34-3 Define NE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If not created,
Select the Network Elements to be added from the list, click the confirm button. The
Defined Network Element List updated. When the NEs are added, assign the resources
already present or create them.
Select Action > Packet > Costruction > Assign Resources to Domain.
Result: The list Network Element window is shown with new NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-14
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
TSS 5 In Band Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create Traffic Descriptor that corresponds to the scenario already acting in field :
Select Action > Packet > Services > Create Traffic Descriptor.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create Traffic Classifier that corresponds to the scenario already acting in field :
Select Action > Packet > Services > Create Traffic Classifier.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Create the Tunnel that corresponds to the scenario already acting in field :
Select Action > Packet > T-MPLS > Create T-MPLS Tunnel.
Insert the parameters compliant with the attributes already present.
Note: For the general settings, refer to T-MPLS tunnel create (p. 26-15).
Result: The tunnel list window is shown with new object.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Create the PseudoWire that corresponds to the scenario already acting in field :
Select Action > Packet > T-MPLS > Create T-MPLS Pseudo Wire.
Insert the parameters compliant with the attributes already present.
Note: For the general settings, refer to T-MPLS-Create PW (p. 26-24).
Result: The PW list window is shown with new object.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
Create one or more EVC (with the Service in automatic mode) that corresponds to the
scenario already acting in field :
Select Action > Packet > Services > T-MPLS > Create T-MPLS EVC.
Insert the parameters compliant with the attributes already present.
Insert VLAN ID reserved for the management of the NE (Standard value is 4094).
Insert Service Type EVPLAN.
Note: For the general settings, refer to Create EVC over T-MPLS EVPLAN
(p. 26-73).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-15
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
TSS 5 In Band Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-16
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
34-19
34-21
34-23
34-25
34-26
34-27
34-28
34-29
34-30
34-31
34-32
34-33
34-34
34-35
34-41
34-44
Configure protection
34-45
34-46
34-47
34-48
34-50
34-51
34-52
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-17
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Disabled operations
34-53
34-54
34-55
34-57
34-58
34-59
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-18
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A Link over EVC is composed by an EVC and two interworking links are required.
The system checks that:
there exist two Transport Links that are connected to the two extremities of the EVC
the two Transport Links have the same Technology. The technology can be either
SDH, Cable, VCG LAG or LAG
in case of Transport Links with SDH or VCG LAG Technology, both links have the
same Protocol Type (either GFP, LAPS or HDLC);
both links are bi-directional (no unidirectional links allowed)
the extremities of the two links that are not UNI for the EVC (the extremities are not
extremities of the Link over EVC):
the extremities:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-19
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Bandwidth usage
The bandwidth used on the lower layer EVCs is allocated on the ports where they have
their termination, i.e. the internal ports of the interworking links.
On the external ports of the interworking links, only the bandwidth of the created Links
over EVC is allocated (in the above figure you can see that of the 3 Mb/s allocated on the
internal ports, only 2 Mb/s are allocated on the external ports, because one of the EVCs
has not been used to form a Link over EVC).
The Link over EVC has its own bandwidth and, on it, it is allocated the bandwidth used
by higher layer EVCs that use that Link over EVC.
A check of the available bandwidth is performed on the two Transport Links that have
been identified during previous checks. Since those Transport Links will be, together with
the specified EVC, the infrastructure of the Link over EVC to be created, the bandwidth
of the Link over EVC will consume the bandwidth of the Transport Links and, hence,
both Transport Links must have enough free bandwidth to host the Link over EVC.
Both Transport Links must have a capacity of at least the PIR of the EVC and they must
have an available bandwidth of at least the CIR of the EVC.
for each Transport Link:
sum of CIR is the sum of the CIR of all the Links over EVC terminated by that
port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-20
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Any operation that does not modify the EVC can be performed on it (list, properties,
navigations from/to other objects, etc.).
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-21
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-22
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > Packet > Construction > Create Link Over EVC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
EVC
userlabel
comment (optional)
Result: The system locks the EVC as exported for infrastructure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-23
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-24
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
if this was the last/only Link over EVC the two interworking Transport Links were
part of, the latter are no more locked and can be freely operated
the operation of un-export is invoked for the EVC
As result of a deletion, the Link over EVC is decomposed to an EVC and two
interworking Links.
Before you begin
Select Search > Packet > Construction > Link Over EVC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-25
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarms on the interworking Transport Links or on the EVC are propagated to the Link
over EVC. Alarms on the Link over EVC are propagated normally.
The Link over EVC introduces a couple correlation kinds:
whenever the EVC is alarmed the Link over EVC is alarmed too
whenever one interworking Transport Link is alarmed the Link over EVC is alarmed
too
In addition, since the Link over EVC is a link, alarms on it must be propagated to other
kinds of link
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-26
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OAM over link has limitations if applied to the Link over EVC. OAM is not allowed
OAM on the Link over EVC
OAM over EVC is handled normally if applied to an EVC that uses the Link over EVC.
On the higher level EVC(s) that use the Link over EVC, no MIPs are create within the
Link over EVC (only at its extremity). .The Link over EVC must be considered a link
from all points of view.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-27
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Being the Link over EVC a link from most points of view, it must be possible to assign it
to a Domain.
The only kind of Domain allowed to accept such a link is Provider Bridge.
As for any other link kind, whenever a Link over EVC is assigned to a Domain, the
system must check that the extremities of the link reside on two NEs that have a Working
Mode compatible with the chosen Domain.
The main difference in respect to another link kind is that the first Link over EVC to be
assigned to a Domain causes all the other Links over EVC that are made with one or both
of its interworking links, to be assigned to the same Domain (this is in order to prevent
that the same real port is assigned to two different domains).
If, for a mistake of the operator, a Link over EVC "LEVC1" is made by an interworking
Transport Link "Link1", that is part of another Link over EVC assigned to Domain
"PB1", and by an interworking Transport Link "Link2", that is part of another Link over
EVC assigned to Domain "PB2", this means that "LEVC1" can't be assigned to any
domain at all.
Once a Link over EVC is assigned to a Domain, the usual mechanics of the used
bandwidth management apply to its (virtual not real) extremities.
Refer to the general function to assign a resource to a domain.
Deassign Link over EVC from Domain
If not already used by an EVC, a Link over EVC assigned to a (Provider Bridge) Domain
can be de-assigned from it by the operator (as for other kinds of link).
To move a Link over EVC from a Domain to another, all the Links over EVC that share
with the former at least one interworking Transport Link, needs not to be assigned to any
Domain (i.e. any of those Links over EVC must be de-assigned from the Domain it
belongs to).
The procedure to move a Link over EVC from a Domain to another is:
1. De-assign the Link over EVC (LOE1) from its Domain (DOM1)
2. De-assign from DOM1 any Link over EVC sharing at least one interworking
Transport Link with LOE1. Any Link over EVC that shares an interworking TL with
LOE1 either is assigned to DOM1 or not assigned to any Domain.
3. Assign LOE1 to the new Domain (DOM2)
Refer to the general function to deassign a resource from a domain.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-28
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The configuration of the extremities of the Link over EVC, from a bridge perspective, is
subject to limitations in its applicability.
The Link over EVC extremities are not real interfaces in the NE, rather they are virtual
ports internally created by PKT.
This means, among other things, that when the operator requests the configuration of a
Link over EVC, he is warned by the system that the configuration will affect all the Links
over EVC that shares the same interworking Transport Links.
In addition, the system will prevent the operator to configure a Link over EVC if it shares
only one interworking Transport Link with another Link over EVC (because this would
cause the other Link over EVC to have its extremities misaligned).
From a bridge perspective, it is possible to configure only the extremities of a Link over
EVC, also because the interworking links which make part of it do not belong to any
bridge Domain (hence they could not be configured in a bridge perspective) and, in
addition, have two extremities that have different Client Types.
As for other bridge Transport Links the configurable attributes are:
VLAN Type
Default User Priority
Priority Bit Mapping
PCP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-29
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The activation of the extremities of the Link over EVC is subject to limitations in its
applicability.
The Link over EVC extremities are not real interfaces in the NE, rather they are virtual
ports internally created by PKT.
This means that when the operator requests the activation of a Link over EVC, he is
warned by the system that the activation will affect all the Links over EVC that shares the
same interworking Transport Links.
If the activation is in the scope of the implementation of an EVC that uses the Link over
EVC, the operator is not warned.
The deactivation of the extremities
The deactivation of the extremities of the Link over EVC is subject to limitations in its
applicability.
The Link over EVC extremities are not real interfaces in the NE, rather they are virtual
ports internally created by PKT.
This means, among other things, that when the operator requests the deactivation of a
Link over EVC, he is warned by the system that the deactivation will affect all the Links
over EVC that shares the same interworking Transport Links.
If the deactivation is in the scope of the de-implementation of an EVC that uses the Link
over EVC, the operation is not performed at all if there's another Link over EVC with the
same interworking Transport Links and that is used by an EVC that is at least partially
implemented.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-30
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
There are limitations to be worked around in order to make correctly interact the Link
over EVC with STP.
The capability of the Link over EVC to correctly interact with (i.e. let pass through) the
BPDU of the xSTP protocol used by the higher level EVC, depends on how the
underlying EVC is made.
capability of the inner EVC to encapsulate the BPDU and transport them;
frames allowed to transit into the inner EVC.
A T-MPLS EVC complies with 1), but the compliancy with 2) depends on the TCs
present in the EVC Terminations of the inner EVC.
This means, for example, that an EVC with a set of TCs that makes only pass frames with
VIDs in the range 10-100, will never be able to make STP/RSTP BPDUs to pass (they are
untagged...).
In this case the operator can approach this problem in different ways:
use the Link over EVC only in domains with STP Type = None/Disabled;
configure the extremities of the Link over EVC to have Forced Port State =
Forwarding;
have the Link over EVC accept any kind of frame (Default TC = Don't Care);
create a second Link over EVC used only for BPDU to pass.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-31
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Link over EVC extremities are not real interfaces in the NE, rather they are virtual
ports internally created by PKT.
For this reason, in the scope of AAR, they are not considered at all.
This means that AAR will be performed, instead, on the real ports that support the virtual
extremities.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-32
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The routing display of the Link over EVC shows its components (interworking TLs +
EVC)
The routing display of the Link over EVC shows its three components, i.e. the two
interworking Transport Links and the EVC.
It is possible to navigate from the EVC to the routing display of the EVC itself.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-33
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Starting from an EVC marked "for infrastructure" navigates to the Link over EVC built
on it.
Link over EVC to EVC
Starting from a Link over EVC navigates to the EVC marked "for infrastructure" that
makes part of it.
Link over EVC to Transport Link
Starting from a Link over EVC shows the list of Transport Links that support it. The list
shows two Transport Links.
Transport Link to Link over EVC
Starting from a Transport Link shows the list of Links over EVC that are supported by it.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-34
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Whenever on the main route there's a failure that prevents traffic, the failure is detected
by OAM CC and the Protection Group performs the switch on the alternate route.
Independently from the protection, the EVC as a whole can be monitored by an OAM CC
through a MA.
ITU-T G.8031/Y.1342 is a VLAN based protection, this means that what is protected is
the VLAN used as a transport for the frames (i.e. the S-VID in the Provider Bridge case).
The EVC to protect has it's S-VID distributed over its data plane, in addition, the alternate
route must have the protecting S-VID distributed all over the ports that belongs to it.
The protecting S-VID can be the same S-VID of the EVC or a different one depending on
what supported by the involved NEs (e.g. TSS-3 R2.2 only supports different VIDs).
Since STP and EPL conflicts, when EPL is used no STI must be running on the involved
ports. This means either that STP is disabled on the involved NEs (STP Type =
None/Disabled) or that STP Force Port State is "Forwarding" for the involved ports.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-35
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
As a consequence, the routes of the involved EVC must be fully linear, with no cycles,
nor branches inside (otherwise, without STP, traffic would multiply until fully fill the
transport links capacity).
This specification has been developed with in mind the T-MPLS protection (tunnel
protection). Since the differences of the two cases (the EVC is an object conceptually
very different than the Tunnel), it has not always been possible to stick to the same
approach.
Even if it could already be obvious (or it will be obvious in the following), it's worth to
specify now that ELP only applies to EVCs with VLAN Distribution = Not Full Meshed.
The T-MPLS approach: why we can't follow it completely
In the T-MPLS approach, when we have a Tunnel to protect, we are able to create another
Tunnel and associate the two under a Protection Group, so that the first Tunnel is the
working one and the second Tunnel is the protecting one.
As a first try, an identical approach based on having a working EVC and a protecting
EVC was firstly analyzed and, after some reasoning, discarded because, in reality, the
"protecting EVC" is not an EVC at all (it has no EVC Terminations), but simply an
alternate route, a protecting data plane.
We discovered that modeling the alternate route as an EVC (which isn't) brings a lot of
conceptual and practical problems that made us discard it.
The proper way to model a protected EVC is to have one EVC and two data planes:
We found a couple of approaches to achieve this kind of model.
Link over EVC and Protecting Data Plane
The approach hereby described consists in having the direct creation of the data plane
(that in the case of EVC Fragment is not a big issue) while removing the need for E2E (so
that we can safely ignore the E2E issues we would have with this approach).
We need two things:
1. direct creation of protecting data plane within the Add Protection operation;
2. link over EVC.
A new operation "Add Protection" is available to the operator that, through it, is able to
add a "Protecting Data Plane" to an existing EVC. The Protecting Data Plane is specified
in Add Protection by passing a number of Transport Links and, optionally, one or two
E-NNI port(s).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-36
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Even if the Protection Group must be provisioned to the involved NEs, it's not needed to
make it a distinct object at PKT level: it could just be a set of properties that are
visible/enabled when the EVC is under protection.
Link over EVC over T-MPLS
Pros:
there is clear distinction between the working route, the protecting route and the
protected EVC;
alarm correlation works on a single EVC (it could be feasible to allow alarm
correlation only if the EVC is under OAM CC);
Cons:
a new entity is introduced (even if it's only a "sub object" of the EVC) and operations
are needed to manage it, alternatively, if few operations are provided to the operator to
manage it, it will be difficult for him to handle this kind of object;
effort to realize Link over EVC
impacts caused by Link over EVC
this approach was designed to avoid E2E, if E2E is needed despite the link over EVC,
creating a Protecting Data Plane for an E2E EVC can be not trivial for the operator
and difficult to understand/manage (it seems also a problem from the development
point of view)
New attributes are added to the EVC in order to support ELP. These new attributes are
meaningful only for protected EVCs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-37
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Notice that, while Protection is always meaningful, when Protection is no all the other
attributes are not meaningful.
Table 34-1
Attribute
name
Attribute type
Default
Master
Protection
{yes, no}
no
PKT
NE object
name
(SNMP)
{yes, no}
yes
PKT
opticsIMEthLinearPGType
0, ..., 12 min
5 min
PKT
opticsIMEthLinearPGWTR
0 ms
PKT
opticsIMEthLinearPGHoldoff
working
NE
opticsIMEthLinearPGProtectingActive
{working, protecting}
No
Request
(Working
Active)
NE
opticsIMEthLinearPGProtectionstatus
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-38
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 34-1
(continued)
Attribute
name
Attribute type
Default
Master
NE object
name
(SNMP)
Pending
request
none
NE
opticsIMEthLinearPGPendingRequest
The pending APS command that will executed when current request clears (i.e. it tells whether
there's a lower priority automatic switch request blocked by a higher priority manual request)
APS
Priority
0, ..., 7
PKT
opticsIMEthLinearPGAPSPriority
Priority of ethernet frames with ETH-APS information (default value (7) is the highest priority)
Protect an EVC
the values specified for the attributes of the protection are valid;
the S-VID for the Protecting Data Plane is different than the S-VID of the EVC;
the EVC is linear.
the EVC is linear when (the following conditions imply that the EVC is at least
allocated):
it has its EVC Terminations in exactly two NEs (i.e. it has at least two EVC
Terminations in two different NEs, but there can be more than two EVC
Terminations as long as the involved NEs are no more than two);
it has a data plane (which is going to become the Working Data Plane) that is
linear, i.e. it's and end-to-end chain of Transport Links from an extremity NE
(i.e. a NE where an EVC Termination is) to the other;
the specified Protecting Data Plane is linear and has the same extremities of the
Working Data Plane, i.e. it's and end-to-end chain of Transport Links from an
extremity NE (i.e. a NE where an EVC Termination is) to the other;
the involved Domain has STP Type = None/Disabled or all the involved ports have
Forced Port State = Forwarding;
the NEs at the extremities support Ethernet Linear Protection.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-39
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unprotect an EVC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-40
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The operator is able to turn an existing unprotected EVC into a protected one, by
specifying the S-VLAN to be used for the protection and the route of the protection.
The "Add protection" command is only enabled/visible for those EVCs with Protection =
no.
For more information, refer to Ethernet Linear Protection (ELP) (p. 34-35).
For more information, refer to Protect an EVC (p. 34-39).
Before you begin
Select the route of the Protecting Data Plane as a list of Transport Links.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
(see EVC attributes to support ELP (p. 34-37) for ELP attributes of the EVC, for the
meaning of each attribute, the allowed values and the default values)
Select the attributes of the protection
Revertive
Revert time (meaningful only if Revertive is "yes")
Hold-off time
APS priority
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-41
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: Once all the checks are passed: the protection is added to the EVC only in the
PKT DB.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-42
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If, after an Add Protection, an EVC that initially was Implemented becomes Partially
Implemented, the operator can recover the situation in one of these three ways:
de-implement the EVC and obtain an allocated protected EVC (then it's possible to
continue by re-trying the implementation of the EVC or removing the protection);
remove the protection from the EVC, thus obtaining (in case of success) an
implemented unprotected EVC (if successful the EVC could yet remain in Partially
Implemented state and it could be necessary to implement it to update its Provisioning
State);
implement the EVC, thus obtaining (in case of success) an implemented protected
EVC.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-43
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The operator specifies the protected EVC from which the protection must be removed.
The "Removed protection" command is only enabled/visible for those EVCs with
Protection = yes.
For more information, refer to Ethernet Linear Protection (ELP) (p. 34-35).
For more information, refer to Unprotect an EVC (p. 34-40).
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-44
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
Configure protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure protection
When to use
For more information, refer to Ethernet Linear Protection (ELP) (p. 34-35).
For more information, refer to EVC attributes to support ELP (p. 34-37).
Before you begin
(see EVC attributes to support ELP (p. 34-37) for ELP attributes of the EVC, for the
meaning of each attribute, the allowed values and the default values)
Modify the attributes of the protection:
Revertive
Revert time (meaningful only if Revertive is "yes")
Hold-off time
APS priority
Result: Attributes are modified.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-45
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The protection-specific attributes of the EVC are shown in a dedicate tab of the properties
window.
Related Information
For more information, refer to Ethernet Linear Protection (ELP) (p. 34-35).
For more information, refer to EVC attributes to support ELP (p. 34-37).
Before you begin
See the following topic in this document: Description of the properties (p. 34-47)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-46
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Revertive (yes, no).Whether traffic switches back after recovery of working resource.
Revert time (from 0 to 12 min; default: 5).Time before switching back (meaningful
information.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-47
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The operator is able to send APS commands to the NE, so to affect the selection of the
active data plane.
For more information, refer to Ethernet Linear Protection (ELP) (p. 34-35).
Before you begin
Lockout of Protection (LO); to fix the selector position to the working connection
Forced Switch (FS); for working connection: switches the selector from the working
connection to the protection connection (unless a higher priority switch request (i.e.,
LO) is in effect)
Manual Switch (MS); for working connection: switches the selector from the working
connection to the protection connection (unless an equal or higher priority switch
request (i.e., LO, FS, SF or MS) is in effect)
Manual Switch (MS-W); for protection connection: switches the selector from the
protection connection to the working connection (unless an equal or higher priority
switch request (i.e., LO, FS, SF, MS, MS-W) is in effect);
Exercise (EXER); tests if the APS communication is operating correctly, and does not
modify the selector
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-48
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Freeze, Clear Freeze, Lockout and Clear Lockout have been excluded because
not supported by our NEs.
Result: The system checks that the specified EVC is protected and implemented and
then sends the command to one of the two NEs at the extremities of the EVC. If one
of the two NEs is an ENE, the provisioning is mandatory in the other NE.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-49
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The operator is able to manually align the NE mastered attributed of the Protection
Group/Protection Units.
Related Information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-50
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-51
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-52
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
Disabled operations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Disabled operations
Deallocation is disabled
A Provider Bridge EVC can be protected only when at least allocated, hence de-allocation
is disabled.
To enable de-allocation is necessary to remove the protection from the EVC.
Change topology is disabled
A protected Provider Bridge EVC has its topology locked so any operation that changes
the topology is disabled.
The following operations are not allowed for a protected EVC:
add termination
remove termination
NNIs is Locked
The NNIs that are referred by a Protection Group (i.e. the extremities of the working and
protecting data planes) can't be configured or they could have different configuration and
that's not allowed.
For each protected EVC there exist four NNIs that are the extremities of its two Data
Planes (two NNIs for the working Data Plane and two NNIs for the protecting Data
Plane), in order for the protection to work properly the working NNI and the protecting
NNI that are in the same NE must have the same configuration.
This means, among other things, that when an EVC is protected the NNIs at the
extremities of its Data Planes can't be configured anymore by the operator (they are
locked). any explicit configuration operation on those ports is refused by the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-53
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
At the moment, in the scope of bridge EVCs, there's no propagation at all of alarms from
Transport Link to EVC. This is due to the fact that a failure on a single Transport Link in
a connectionless scenario does not mean, in general, any failure for the supported EVC(s).
The case of the protected EVC is different: there are two linear routes and this means that
if two links on the two routes stop working, the EVC is alarmed. This kind of
correlation/propagation could be done by PFM BB basing on the currently active route.
Anyway, in order to simplify the management of alarms it has been decided to not
implement this kind of correlation and, instead, leave this task to the OAM on the EVC.
In other words, if the operator wants to know whether the EVC is working or not, he will
have to activate the OAM CC on it and watch OAM alarms.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-54
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In order for ELP to work, there's the need of a MA for each Data Plane.
This means that a new kind of MA is introduced: after the MA for EVC, the MA for Edge
Port and the MA for Transport Link we have the MA for Data Plane.
OAM on protected EVC
The EVC has two VIDs : the VID of the protected route/data plane (i.e. the original
S-VID) and the VID of the protection.
If the protection route is active the NEs at the extremity of the EVC take care to "convert"
the OAM packets, that originally were created for the S-VID, so to work with the
protection VID.
The internal NEs of the protection route are not even aware of the protection and, in order
to make OAM work, must have a MA with protection S-VID.
The operator must be aware of the protection when operating the OAM over the protected
EVC.
For example, when the operator requests an OAM LB specifying the MAC address of a
MIP, he/she must be aware of the currently active route and know that if a MIP on the
other route will be chosen, the loopback will fail for sure.
Analogously, in the case of OAM LT, the operator must be aware of the protection in
order to correctly interpret the results of the link trace.
Performance Monitoring
First two items must be handled by PKT at high level (toward the operator and internally
within the DB) but the related NE elementary objects (VLAN member sets, MDs, MAs,
MEPs) are already managed by PKT. This means that no new management is needed for
these objects on the AAR side
In the audit results we will only see the Protection Group entity that, will encompass
attributes of both the Protection Group and the Protection Unit.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-55
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Protection Group, introduced for ELP, needs to be part of all the AAR procedures.
The provisioning sequence for the ELP is:
1. VLAN Member set on Data Plane
2. Data Plane MAs and MEPs
3. Protection Group + Protection Units
This order is fixed both for provisioning and for un-provisioning .
Reservation and take-over
The Protection Group and Protection Unit information are saved during reservation to be
used during the take-over.
For the operator, operations are identical to the ones done in the un-protected case.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-56
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This command shows the list of Transport Links of the Working Data Plane or of the
Protecting Data Plane.
Related Information
For a protected PB EVC the Search > Transport Links contextual menu is replaced by two
menu items:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-57
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This command shows the list of MA of the Working Data Plane or of the Protecting Data
Plane.
Related Information
From a protected EVC the operator can navigate to the MA associated to its Working
Data Plane or its Protecting Data Plane.
Before you begin
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-58
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Ethernet Linear Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Routing Display command shows both the route of the Working Data Plane and of
the Protecting Data Plane.
The operator is able to understand which is the working Data Plane and which is the
protecting Data Plane.
Any additional action from the operator is required.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-59
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Tunnel Redundancy
Abbreviations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Tunnel Redundancy
Overview
Purpose
34-61
34-70
34-72
34-74
EVC setup
34-76
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-60
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Tunnel Redundancy
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Reference network
This section describes a reference network that implements the Tunnel Redundancy.
Figure 34-4 Tunnel Redundancy Reference network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-61
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Tunnel Redundancy
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PW Dual-point-to-point protection
The NE behavior on CPE and HUB nodes coordinates to prevent the MAC black-hole for
downstream traffic generated by the remote HUB.
HUB node triggers MAC flushing and R-APS generation (towards other HUB nodes)
upon detection of one of the following conditions:
RDI packet received from CPE node (due to unidirectional fault detected by CPE
node)
R-APS packet received from CPE node (triggered by manual command switch or
WTR elapsed)
R-APS packet received from other HUB node
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-62
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Tunnel Redundancy
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Interconnection types
Interconnection characteristics:
Reference scenarios
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-63
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Tunnel Redundancy
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reference Scenario #1
Scenario #1
1 x DP2P PW + 2 x P2P PW
2 x MAC Flushing Schema: DNI + SNI
1 x EVC (EVPLAN w/ 2 UNI)
Reference Scenario #2
Scenario #2
2 x 1:1 linear protected tunnel (NodeY -> NodeZ & NodeX -> NodeZ)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-64
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Tunnel Redundancy
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 x DP2P PW + 2 x P2P PW
2 x MAC Flushing Schema: DNI + DPI
1 x EVC (EVPLAN w/ 3 UNI)
Reference Scenario #3
Scenario #3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-65
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Tunnel Redundancy
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reference Scenario #4
Scenario #4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-66
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Tunnel Redundancy
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reference Scenario #5
Scenario #5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-67
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Tunnel Redundancy
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reference Scenario #6
Scenario #6
Reference Scenario #7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-68
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Tunnel Redundancy
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Scenario #7
2 x 1:1 open protected tunnel (CPE B -> NodeX & NodeY + CPE E -> NodeZ &
NodeW)
4 x 1:1 linear protected tunnel (NodeY -> NodeZ & NodeX -> NodeZ & NodeY ->
NodeW & NodeX -> NodeW)
2 x DP2P PW + 4 x P2P PW
2 x MAC Flushing Schema: DNI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-69
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Tunnel Redundancy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > Packet > MPLS-TP and T-MPLS > Create TMPLS Tunnel.
Result: The wizard is open.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-70
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Tunnel Redundancy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-71
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Tunnel Redundancy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Action > Packet > MPLS-TP and T-MPLS > Create T-MPLS Pseudo-Wire.
Result: The wizard is open.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-72
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Tunnel Redundancy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-73
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Tunnel Redundancy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Involved nodes
Involved NNI or UNI ports (each port can be involved in only one interconnection
scheme)
The MAC flushing protection operates at Ethernet layer then ports involved in MAC
flushing protection can be:
Ethernet UNI
Link over T-MPLS (MPLS-TP) termination
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-74
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Tunnel Redundancy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-75
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Tunnel Redundancy
EVC setup
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EVC setup
When to use
In Termination Setting step and when configuring the CPE UNI the operator select
the Remote VSI port tab
Transport Link: dp2p PW
Refer to:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-76
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
Tunnel Redundancy
EVC setup
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-77
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Enhanced Procedures
EVC setup
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
34-78
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Verify that the migration of the data has been correctly executed checking the file
changeNeShOperatorLabel.lst.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
A-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Where
Variable
Description
BM Id
BM version
old_shOperatorLabel
userlabel to be modified
new_shOperatorLabel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
A-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Limits
Overview
This appendix provides a reminder of every limits and constraints that are managed by the
1350 OMS PKT application.
Table B-1
500
60
250
Table B-2
Table B-3
500
2500
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
B-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Application Limits
Limits
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table B-5
20000
100
10
Table B-7
250000
108000
250000
250000
500000
Table B-11
500000
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
B-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Application Limits
Limits
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table B-11
(continued)
1000000
100000
Table B-12
600000
25000
2000
Table B-22,
Limits for each
board (p. B-5)
Table B-15
5000
Table B-22,
Limits for each
board (p. B-5)
Table B-16
2000
Table B-22,
Limits for each
board (p. B-5)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
B-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Application Limits
Limits
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table B-17
2000000
128
200000
Table B-19
Maximum number of Best Effort VC-LSPs & LSP tunnels per Transport
Link (FW & BW)
Table B-20
200
200
200
Table B-21
504000
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
B-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Application Limits
Limits
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Depending of NE type are defined different limits for each object that 1350 OMS PKT
provisions on the boards. The table these limits:
Table B-22
Board Type
ES1 3FE
Board
Version
Traffic
Descriptor
Limit
Color
Profile
Limit
Cross
Connection limit
Traffic
Classifier
Limit
1.0
Not
supported
16
16
1.1 / 1.1B
Not
supported
1512
512
1.0
Not
supported
16
16
1.1 / 1.1B
Not
supported
1512
512
ES1 8FX
1.1 / 1.1B /
1.2
Not
supported
1512
512
ES4 8FE
1.1 / 1.1B /
1.2
Not
supported
1512
512
ISA PR EA S1P
1.0
200
Not
supported
2000
2000
1.1 / 1.2
200
256
2000
5000
1.0
200
Not
supported
2000
5000
1.1 / 1.2
200
256
2000
5000
1.0
200
Not
supported
2000
5000
1.1 / 1.2
200
256
2000
5000
ES16- No Access
Module
2.0
200
256
20000
20000
ES16 - Access
Module: 14FE
2.0
200
256
20000
20000
ES16 - Access
Module: 4GE
2.0
200
256
20000
20000
ES16 - No Access
Module
2.1
200
256
20000
20000
ES1 8FE
ISA PR EA 4ETH
ISA PR EA 1GEP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
B-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Application Limits
Limits
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
B-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Appendix C: List of
Abbreviations
Abbreviations
List
Abbreviation
Meaning
100Base-T
10Base-TX
1355VPN
14FE
Board type.
1678MCC
Alcatel-Lucent equipment.
1GEP
Board type.
3FE
Board type.
4ETH
Board type.
4GE
Board type.
802.1ad
802.1D
802.1p
802.1Q
802.1X
8FE
Board type.
8FX
Board type.
AAR
ACL
ADM
AF
Assured Forwarding.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
C-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of Abbreviations
Abbreviations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Abbreviation
Meaning
AIS
ALMAP
ANSI
AS
ASAP
ATM
BA
Broadband Access.
BE
Best Effort.
BM
BPDU
BSR
BTV
BW
BandWidth.
CAC
CBS
CCITT
CD-ROM
CE
Customer Edge.
CES
CE-VLAN
CIR
CIST
CM
Connect Manager.
CNA
CORBA
CoS
Class of Service.
CP
CPE
CSF
CTP
C-VLAN
Customer VLAN.
DB
Database.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
C-2
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of Abbreviations
Abbreviations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Abbreviation
Meaning
DEG
Degraded Signal.
DSCP
DSLAM
DWDM
DXC
Cross-Connect.
E/FE
E/FE/GE
E2E
End to End.
EBS
EF
Expedited Forwarding.
EIR
E-LAN
Ethernet LAN.
E-LINE
Ethernet Line.
ELR
E-LSP
EML
ENE
eOMS
EOT
EPL
EPLAN
EPLANE
EPLINE
EPTL
EPTLINE
ES
ES1
ES1/4
ES16
ES4
ETB
ETH
Ethernet.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
C-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of Abbreviations
Abbreviations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Abbreviation
Meaning
ETP
E-TREE
ETS
ETSI
EVC
EVP
EVPL
EVPLAN
EVPLINE
FAD
FE
Fast Ethernet.
FM
Fault Management.
FR
Fault Report.
FW
Farward.
GARP
Gbit
Giga bits.
Gbit/s
Gbps
GE
Gigabit Ethernet.
GENOS
generic OS-to-OS.
GFP
GMPLS
GMRP
GTM
GUI
GVRP
HA
High Availability.
HDLC
HSI
HTML
I/O
input/output.
Id
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
C-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of Abbreviations
Abbreviations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Abbreviation
Meaning
IEEE
IETF
IGMP
IM
Information Manager.
IP
Internet Protocol.
ISA
ISA E/FE
ISA E/FE/GE
ISA ES
ISA ES1
ISA ES1/4
ISA ES16
ISA ES4
ISA PR
ISA PR EA
ISA PR ES16
ISP
IWI
Interworking Interface.
Kb/s
Kbit
Kilo bits.
Kbit/s
L2CP
LAC
LACP
LAG
LAN
LAPS
LER
LO
Low Order.
LOF
Loss-of-Frame.
LOS
Loss-of-Signal.
LSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
C-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of Abbreviations
Abbreviations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Abbreviation
Meaning
LSR
MAC
MAN
MAU
max
maximum.
Mb/s
Mbps
MEF
MEN
MEP
MIB
min
minimum.
MISTP
MPLS
MPtoMP
MS-GUI
MSTI
MSTP
MW
Middleware equipment.
MW-INT
Middleware Interface.
NA
Network Adapter.
NAD
NAP
NBI
Northbound Interface.
NE
Network Element.
NML
NMS
NNI
Network-to-Network Interface.
NV
Native View.
OAM
OMSN
OS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
C-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of Abbreviations
Abbreviations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Abbreviation
Meaning
OSK
OTH
PAE
PBS
PC
personal computer.
PCP
PE
PHB
PIR
PKT
Packet.
PLM
PLS
PM
Performance Monitoring.
PMC
POP
Point Of Presence.
PPT
PR EA
P-tagged
PtoMP
PtoP
Point to Point.
PTP
P-VLAN
Provider VLAN.
PVSTP
PW
Pseudo Wire.
Q3
QoS
Quality of Service.
Q-TAG
Q-tagged
RM
RMP
routed multipoint.
RPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
C-7
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of Abbreviations
Abbreviations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Abbreviation
Meaning
RSTP
S1P
Board type.
SC
Service Connect.
SDH
SLA
SMF
SML
SNMP
SNMP NE
SONET
STI
STP
SUBM
S-VLAN
Service VLAN.
TCI
TDM
TL
Transport Link.
TL1
Transaction Language 1.
T-MPLS
TNA
TOS
Type Of Service.
TSF
TSS
TU
Transport Unit.
UI
User Interface.
UNI
URU
VC
VC12
VC-LSP
VID
VLAN Identifier.
VLAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
C-8
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of Abbreviations
Abbreviations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Abbreviation
Meaning
VPAS
VPHS
VPLAN
VPLS
VPN
VPWS
VT
Virtual Terminal
WDM
XC
Cross-Connect.
XML
XoS
XML-over-socket.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
C-9
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
List of Abbreviations
Abbreviations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
C-10
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Index
Symbols
Adapters
AlignDBSDHPathID Tool
definition, 10-2
*_dbi.log, 6-3
*Gui.log, 6-3
.............................................................
Numerics
1350 OMS
applications, 1-2
definition, 1-2
supported NEs, 1-5
1350 OMS PKT application
General information, 11-3
1354BM.log, 6-2
ADM
See: Add and Drop Multiplexer
offline procedure
AlignDBSDHPathID, 12-3
Administrator, 11-75
Also see: System management
AF
See: Assured Forwarding
See: Assured Forwarding (AF)
Alarm management
See: Fault Management
Any to Any
See: Service classification
Applications
Overview, 13-145
Alarms
1678MCC NE
instances, 2-1
.............................................................
A AAR
See: Utilities
Access control
default operator profiles, 5-2
Access Control Data Base, 11-75
ascurusm.log, 6-3
Align Up
See: Utilities
AlignDBSDHPathID
See: Alignment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
IN-1
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Audit
See: Utilities
BmAdaptationModifyTrace.log,
6-3
Bridge Network
See: Ethernet Transport
Bridging (ETB)
List, 18-129
Bridge ENE, 18-115
Bridge EVC
Allocation, 18-117
Commission, 18-121
Decommission, 18-122
Deimplementation, 18-120
Delete, 18-46
Delete Termination, 18-71
Details, 18-48
Implementation, 18-119
List, 18-36
Modify, 18-43
Overview, 18-6
QoS, 18-19
BE
See: Best Effort (BE)
Best Effort (BE), 11-70
Deactivate, 18-132
B B-VID
Terminations, 18-60
Configure, 18-51
BA
Configure, 18-73
.............................................................
Activate, 18-133
Add to EVC, 18-123
Configure, 18-25
deactivate, 18-134
Details, 18-33
Get extremities, 18-29
Inventory, 18-126
List, 18-22
Remove from EVC, 18-124
Bridge Workflow, 18-78
Add NE to a Domain, 18-82
Configure a NE, 18-89
Create a Customer, 18-96
Create an Ethernet Service,
18-99
Create and configure EVC,
18-103
Create Domain, 18-80
Domain configuration, 18-78
Domain Configuration, 18-85
Domain definition, 18-78
Domain Modification, 18-87
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NE configuration, 18-79
Overwiew, 18-78
Modify, 20-11
Overview, 20-3
Service workflow, 20-33
BTV
See: Broadcast TV (BTV)
Bundling
See: User Network Interface
(UNI)
.............................................................
C C-VLAN
Enable, 19-83
CBS
See: Committed Burst Size
(CBS)
CC
Create, 20-8
Create Customer, 20-33
Create element, 20-26
Create ETP, 20-20
Create EVC, 20-37
Create Link, 20-29
CDN
See: CORBA-based interface
(CDN)
CE
See: Customer Edge (CE)
CE-VLAN, 11-13
CES
See: Circuit Emulation
Services
Delete, 20-14
Details, 20-16
EVC management, 20-45
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
IN-3
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NE attributes, 24-70
CIR
See: Committed Information
Rate (CIR)
NE inventory, 24-73
NE List, 24-69
NE properties, 24-71
NE property attributes, 24-72
PDH Port attributes, 24-84
CoS, 24-31
CoS/PHB Profile
compatibility, 24-32
creation, 24-36
Overview, 24-4
PDH degrade thresholds
(TSS-5C), 24-24
Performance Monitoring,
24-20, 24-20, 24-20, 24-20
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
IN-4
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create, 17-102
SAToP, 24-7
Delete, 17-107
scenarios, 24-4
Details, 17-108
security, 24-29
List, 17-100
stitch, 24-29
Modify, 17-104
Overview, 17-99
Configuration
Access the System
Configuration Window and
Configure a 1350 OMS
Application task, 3-4
Integrate the 1350 OMS PKT
Master Workstation with the
Client Workstation task, 3-10
Integrate the 1350 OMS PKT
with Other NMSs task, 3-9
Configure the application, 11-46
Confirm the action, 11-43
Connection Less Networks
See: Ethernet Transport
Bridging (ETB)
Connection Oriented EVC
Add termination, 17-66
Allocation, 17-238
Commission, 17-242
Configure, 18-51
Create, 17-49
Deallocation, 17-239
Decommission, 17-243
Deimplement, 17-241
Delete, 17-54
Delete Termination, 17-61
Details, 17-56
Fault Localization, 17-69
Get terminations, 17-59
Implement, 17-240
List, 17-47
Modify, 17-52
Overview, 17-41
Properties, 17-63
Routing Display, 17-249
Show PM, 17-247
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
IN-5
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create, 17-13
ORACLE/databases/dbnml/
admin/create, 6-3
ORACLE/databases/dbnml/
admin/logbook, 6-3
Delete, 17-17
ORACLE/databases/network,
6-4
Details, 17-18
inventory Services, 17-231
List, 17-11
Modify, 17-15
Overview, 17-10
Single-Customer, 12-11
VLAN Mapping, 11-62
Also see: Ethernet Frame
Hierarchy
VLAN tunneling, 11-65
Also see: Ethernet Frame
Hierarchy
Customer management
macro functions and default
user profiles, 5-10
Customer Premise Equipment
(CPE), 11-51
Also see: Network Topology
Construction
.............................................................
D Data Plane
See: EVC
Databases
PM Administration, 2-3
databases/dbbmml/data directory,
6-4
DB_SIZE parameter, 7-6
SMF/tools/log/data, 6-3
TAO/maintenance/trace, 6-4
DM
(Packet) Delay Measurement
See: DM Tool
DM Tool, 23-36
Activate DM Tool, 23-49
Configure Maintenance End
Points, 23-39
Configure OAM ETH DM
Tool, 23-55
Create ETH DM Tool, 23-45
Deactivate DM Tool, 23-49
Description, 23-37
Inventory, 23-51
List, 23-41
Documentation
related documents, lxxxii
Domain
Assign resource, 13-31
Create, 13-23
create Topological View,
13-158
Delete, 13-27
Details, 13-29
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
IN-6
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eOMS, 13-18
ETB Domain, 13-18
ETS Domain, 13-18
Indirect, 13-18
inventory of NE, 13-153
ELP
See: Ethernet Linear Protection
(ELP)
EML
See: Element Management
Layer
inventory of VT Queue
Profiles, 13-156
EMLStart.log, 6-2
List, 13-20
Modify, 13-25
Overview, 13-18
Domain management, 11-50
Also see: Network Topology
Construction
macro functions and default
user profiles, 5-3
Domain Wide VID distribution
See: PBB B-VID
Duplex mode
EML-IM, 11-46
Encapsulation
Layer-2
See: T-MPLS Pseudo Wire
See: T-MPLS tunnel
Martini
See: Martini encapsulation
End-to-End, 17-72
Also see: End-to-End EVC
Also see: End-to-End Service
End-to-End EVC
Create, 17-75
Create full EVC, 17-79
DXC
See: Cross-Connect (DXC)
.............................................................
E E_Bridge
Join, 17-85
List, 17-73
EOT
e_AuditAlignRecovery
process, 4-4
e_DataManagement process,
4-4
e_Facility process, 4-4
e_FaultManagement process,
4-4
e_ProfileManagement process,
4-4
e_ServiceManagement
process, 4-4
e_TrafficManagement process,
4-4
EotModifyTrace.log, 6-3
EPL
See: Ethernet Private Line
See: Ethernet Private Line
(EPL)
EPTL
See: Ethernet Private
Transparent Line
Equipment
Inner equipment, 11-51
Also see: Network
Topology Construction
Overview, 17-72
view, 13-74
ERP
See: Ethernet Ring Protection
See: Ethernet Ring Protocol
ERP Instance
See: Ethernet Ring Protocol
(ERP)
ETB
See: Ethernet Transport
Bridging (ETB)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
IN-7
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ether Type
Frame Classification, 17-7
Ethernet connectivity
See: Functional domain
Ethernet Edge Physical Port
Configure, 17-144
Details, 17-147
List, 17-140
List traffic parameters, 17-150
Ethernet Segment
management, 5-12
Ethernet Traffic Classifier
management, 5-11
Ethernet Traffic Descriptor
management, 5-11
Ethernet Transport Segment
management, 5-12
EVC management, 5-10
de-implementation, 34-52
Provider Network
management, 5-15
Description, 34-35
Modify, 17-142
Overview, 17-139
Implementation, 34-51
Ethernet Operations,
Administration, and Maintenance
(OAM), 23-1
See: Operations,
Administration, and
Maintenance (OAM)
Linear, 34-39
Inventory, 34-34
Inventory of MA, 34-58
OAM, 34-55
PM, 34-55
Configure, 13-101
Properties, 34-46
Details, 13-111
Reservation, 34-56
List, 13-98
Modify, 13-107
Navigation to equipment,
13-114
Take-Over, 34-56
Ethernet Macro functions
Color Profile management,
5-13
Customer management, 5-10
Ethernet Edge Physical Port
management, 5-12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
IN-8
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Deallocate, 17-203
Deimplement, 17-207
Delete, 17-181
Create, 20-20
Details, 17-216
Delete, 20-23
List, 20-18
Disassociate a Traffic
Classifier, 17-185
Get extremities, 17-211
Create/delete, 19-122
Implement, 17-205
List, 17-172
Modify, 17-178
Implement/deimplement,
19-124, 19-138
Setup, 17-28
Overview, 17-170
Ethernet Service, 11-7, 11-16
All to One Bundling attribute
See: User Network
Interface (UNI)
Bundling Service attribute
See: User Network
Interface (UNI)
Create, 17-26
Delete, 17-37
Details, 17-38
List, 17-24
management, 11-56
Also see: Traffic
Management
Modify, 17-35
Overview, 17-20
Service Multiplexing attribute
See: User Network
Interface (UNI)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
IN-9
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EVPL
See: Ethernet Virtual Private
Line
See: Ethernet Virtual Private
Line (EVPL)
EVPLAN
See: Ethernet Virtual Private
LAN
Expedited Forwarding (EF), 11-70
Extended Ethernet Virtual
Connection
See: End-to-End EVC
Extended Ethernet Virtual Private
LAN (Extended EVPLAN),
11-22
Extended Ethernet Virtual Private
Line (Extended EVPL), 11-21
Extended EVPL
See: Extended Ethernet Virtual
Private Line
Extended EVPLAN
See: Extended Ethernet Virtual
Private LAN
External Network Element (ENE),
13-78, 11-51
Also see: Network Topology
Construction
Create, 13-82
Delete, 13-87
Details, 13-89
List, 13-80
Modify, 13-85
Overview, 13-78
External termination management
macro functions and default
user profiles, 5-5
External Termination Point
Create, 13-93
Delete, 13-96
.............................................................
F FAD
List, 13-91
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
IN-10
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................
I
In Band
Address Configuration, 19-175
LAG port creation, 19-184
Management, 19-174
NMS Start Supervision,
19-203
In band management, 34-3
Maintenance management,
11-49
Configuration requirements,
34-8
Network Topology
Construction, 11-48
Overview, 34-3
Overview, 11-48
Utilities, 11-49
.............................................................
G Glossary, lxxxi
In fiber management
See: In band management
inband management, 24-14
Also see: Circuit Emulation
Services
IP DSCP/TOS
Frame Classification, 17-7
ISA BCE Ethernet Board
Configuration, 13-151
ISA board
MIB realignment for, 9-2
Realign an ISA Board MIB
task, 9-4
ISA Ethernet equipment
ISA E/FE/GE, 11-6
ISA ES, 11-6
ISA PR, 11-6
ISA PR EA, 11-6
IWI
See: Interworking Interface
.............................................................
J JacORB.log, 6-2
Join
See: CES procedures
Jumbo Frames, 13-140
Configure, 13-142
Overview, 13-140
.............................................................
L Label Edge Router (LER), 11-11,
11-11
Label Switched Router (LSR),
11-11
LAC state, 13-37
See: Network Element (NE)
LAG
See: Link Aggregation
LAG Link Over Cable, 14-58
Create from extremities, 14-61
Create from Links, 14-64
Create VCG from extremities,
14-67
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
IN-11
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Delete, 14-75
Details, 14-79
Create, 14-41
List, 14-59
Delete, 14-45
Modify, 14-73
Details, 14-50
Overview, 14-58
LAG Port
Join, 14-52
Create, 13-123
List, 14-39
Details, 13-131
Inventory of physical port,
13-133
List, 13-120
Modify, 13-125
LAN
See: Local Area Network
Layer-2
Control Protocol Processing,
18-16
Encapsulation
See: T-MPLS Pseudo Wire
See: T-MPLS tunnel
LER
See: Label Edge Router
Creation, 34-23
Deactivation, 34-30
Deassign from Domain, 34-28
Deletion, 34-25
Overview, 13-117
Description, 34-19
Inventory, 34-34
OAM, 34-27
Configure, 14-117
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
IN-12
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
JacORB.log, 6-2
Implement, 15-64
Details, 14-86
NMLStart.log, 6-2
pmc2.log, 6-2
List, 14-82
PMCStart.log , 6-2
Overview, 14-81
Upload, 13-61
Link Over WDM
Linktrace
See: Operations,
Administration, and
Maintenance (OAM)
Local port, 11-50, 11-50
Also see: Ethernet physical
port
log out, 11-41
login, 11-41
Logs
.data log file suffixes, 6-2
smf.log, 6-2
System logs, 2-3
trace management log file
locations, 6-6
trace management log file
suffixes, 6-6
Loopback
See: Operations,
Administration, and
Maintenance (OAM)
LSP PHB profile
Create, 16-8
Delete, 16-12
*_dbi.log, 6-3
Details, 16-14
*Gui.log, 6-3
List, 16-6
1354BM.log, 6-2
Modify, 16-10
allTracesModify.logg, 6-3
Overview, 16-5
ascurusm.log, 6-3
BmAdaptationModifyTrace.log, 6-3
BmMplsModifyTrace.log, 6-3,
6-3
Command logs, 2-3
EMLStart.log, 6-2
EotModifyTrace.log, 6-3
failure management log file
location, 6-5
failure management log file
suffixes, 6-5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
IN-13
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Force, 16-155
Management Layers
MPLS
Interconnection Schemes,
16-153
List, 16-151
m_AuditAlignRecovery
process, 4-3
m_DataManagement process,
4-3
m_FaultManagement process,
4-3
m_NetworkManagement
process, 4-3
m_TrafficProfileManagement
process, 4-3
Traffic descriptor management
macros, 5-8
Transport Link management
macros, 5-8
VC LSP management macros,
5-9
MPLS layer
T-MPLS comparison, 11-10
MPLS management, 11-49
Also see: Functional domain
overview
LSP Tunnel, 11-69, 11-70
MPLS Transport Link, 11-69
T-MPLS Transport Link,
11-69, 11-69
categories of misalignment,
9-3
definition, 9-2
MS-GUI
See: Multi-Service GUI
Multi-Manager management,
11-47
Multi-Manager Management
definition, 8-2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
IN-14
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
identifying Ethernet-defined
entities, 8-3
operational guidelines, 8-3
scenarios, 8-2
Multi-Service GUI (MS-GUI),
11-42
Multi-service node
T-MPLS PseudoWire, 11-11
Multiplexing attribute
See: User Network Interface
(UNI)
Multipoint to Multipoint
See: Service classification
MW-INT
functionality, 2-1
instances and, 2-1
Process Monitoring, 2-1
.............................................................
N NAD
List, 13-135
Management, 11-50
Also see: Network
Topology Construction
Modify, 13-138
Modify, 13-48
Delete, 13-139
Overview, 13-37
NBI
Resources, 11-50
Also see: Network
Topology Construction
NNI
See: Network-to-Network
Interface
.............................................................
O OAM
See: Operations,
Administration, and
Maintenance (OAM)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
IN-15
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SYS_START_WAIT_VAL
parameter, 7-5
Model, 23-4
SYSTEM_TUNING_VAL
parameter, 7-5
Configure Maintenance
Association, 23-24
Configure OAM Domain,
23-13
Continuity Check (CC), 23-3
Create OAM Domain, 23-7
Deimplement Maintenance
Association, 23-27
Deimplement OAM Domain,
23-14
Disable Continuity Check,
23-26
Enable Continuity Check,
23-26
Modify Maintenance
Association, 23-22
Modify OAM Domain, 23-12
Monitored Objects, 23-6
Overviw, 23-3
Properties of MA, 23-20
Properties of OAM Domain,
23-10
Start on EVC, 23-30
Terminology, ITU vs IEEE,
23-3
Operator, 11-75
Also see: System management
Oracle
TMP_A:LM_
TEMPOPOLLING
parameter, 7-9
TMP_ALM_PADDINGRATE
parameter, 7-9
TMP_ALM_TEMPOASYNC
parameter, 7-9
TMP_ALM_TEMPOTIMER
parameter, 7-9
TMP_
CDNDATABLOCKSIZE
parameter, 7-9
TMP_EML_
TEMPOPOLLING
parameter, 7-10
oracle_monitor_process, 4-3
ORACLE/databases/dbnml/
admin/bdump directory, 6-4
TMP_FORBIDDEN_
COMMENT_CHAR
parameter, 7-10
Inventory of monitored
objects, 23-16
ORACLE/databases/dbnml/
admin/create directory, 6-3
TMP_FORBIDDEN_LABEL_
CHAR parameter, 7-10
ORACLE/databases/dbnml/
admin/logbook file, 6-3
TMP_LINK_OVER_SDH_
SYNCHRONIZATION_AT_
STARTUP parameter, 7-10
Linktrace, 23-3
ORACLE/databases/network
directory, 6-4
.............................................................
P P-VLAN, 11-63
Packet Radio
See: Circuit Emulation
Services
Parameters
DB_SIZE parameter, 7-6
MIB parameter, 7-6
TMP_LOG_BASED_
SYNCHRONIZATION_AT_
STARTUP parameter, 7-10
TMP_NE_UNDER_
<application>_
MANAGEMENT parameter,
7-11
TMP_NML_
TEMPOPOLLING
parameter, 7-11
TMP_
REMOTENAMINGEMLFILE parameter, 7-11
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TMP_SDH_TERM_
SYNCHRONIZATION_AT_
STARTUP parameter, 7-11
TMP_SE_ACCESSCTL
parameter, 7-12
TMP_TRACELEVEL
parameter, 7-12
TMP_
TRACEMAXLINECOUNT
parameter, 7-12
TMP_WAIT_EOT_
SYNCHRO_STARTUP
parameter, 7-12
TMP_WAIT_MPLS_
SYNCHRO_STARTUP
parameter, 7-12
UI_LANGUAGE parameter,
7-4
PBB
See: Provider Backbone Bridge
(PBB)
deimplement, 19-74
PBB B-VID
Allocate, 19-96
Implement, 19-72
Create, 19-93
List, 19-64
Deallocate, 19-97
Management, 19-63
Deimplement, 19-100
Delete, 19-95
Remove Termination on
implemented EVC, 19-78
Implement, 19-98
Automatic association to
default VT, 19-87
List, 19-91
per-STI
See: Spanning Tree Instance
Performance Monitoring (PM),
11-73
Start, 17-244
Stop, 17-245
Synchronize, 17-246
VPWS procedure, 12-4
PHB
See: Per Hop Behaviour (PHB)
Physical Layer, 11-5, 11-5
Physical Port
Inventory from LAG port,
13-133
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
IN-17
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Upload, 13-55
PIR
See: Peak Information Rate
(PIR)
PM
See: Performance Monitoring
(PM)
PM Administration, 2-3
pmc2.log, 6-2
PMCStart.log, 6-2
Point to Multipoint
See: Service classification
Point to Point
See: Service classification
Topology, 11-32
Also see: Network
Topology Description
Policy Control, 11-67
Also see: Traffic Management
PRINTER parameter, 7-4
Priority Id, 11-59
Also see: VLAN Management
Routed Multipoint
See: Service classification
RSTP
See: Reserved Spanning Tree
Protocol
Proxy_N_NML_NAME
process, 4-4
.............................................................
Proxy, 11-46
Pseudo Wire
See: T-MPLS Pseudo Wire
SDH equipment
ADM, 11-6
.............................................................
DXC, 11-6
MW, 11-6
Protection, 34-17
Also see: Ethernet Linear
Protection (ELP)
Proxy_E_SNA_NAME
process, 4-4
QoS
See: Quality of Service
Resynchronization
See: Synchronization
Equipment, 11-51
Also see: Network
Topology Construction
Proxy_E_EML_NAME
process, 4-4
Provider
Upload, 13-166
Raw E2E EVC
See: End-to-End EVC
Remote port, 11-50, 11-50
Also see: TDM terminations
SUBM, 11-6
SDH termination management
macro functions and default
user profiles, 5-4
SEC User Administration, 2-2
SEC User Authentication, 2-2
Section
See: T-MPLS Section
Security
SEC User Administration, 2-2
SEC User Authentication, 2-2
Service classification, 11-16
Replacement
See: Utilities
Reservation
See: Utilities
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
IN-18
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
STI
See: Spanning Tree Instance
Stitch
See: CES procedures
Broadcast, 11-27
BTV, 11-25
configuration, 18-136
EPL, 11-19
EPTL, 11-18
Deimplementation, 18-140
EVPL, 11-17
EVPLAN, 11-20
Implementation, 18-139
inventory, 18-128
List, 18-135
HSI, 11-23
Overview, 18-8
FAD, 11-75
per-STI, 18-8
ST-link, 18-8
Overview, 11-75
Sessions
SessionManagement process,
4-4
SLM
(Packet) Loss Measurement
See: SLM Tool
SLM Tool, 23-36
Activate SLM Tool, 23-50
ST-link
See: Spanning Tree Instance
SYSTEM_TUNING_VAL
parameter, 7-5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
IN-19
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................
T T-MPLS EVC
Modify, 16-60
Overview, 16-54
T-MPLS Section
Details, 14-107
Get extremities, 14-105
Inventory from tunnel, 16-134
List, 14-103
Overview, 14-102
Create one-to-one-open
protection, 34-70
PseudoWire, 11-11
Description, 34-61
Section, 11-11
T-MPLS Tunnel
PW dual-point-to-point, 34-62
Allocate, 16-117
Bandwidth load, 16-136
Allocate, 16-73
Create, 16-100
Deimplement, 16-124
Delete, 16-105
Create, 16-57
Deallocate, 16-76
Dellocate, 16-120
Deimplement, 16-80
Details, 16-107
Delete, 16-62
Details, 16-64
Implement, 16-122
Inventory, 16-134
Implement, 16-78
List, 16-98
List, 16-55
Tasks
Modify, 16-103
Overview, 16-96
Takeover
CES
See: CES Procedures
Description for TMPLS, 17-96
Full EVC Overview, 17-87
Key features for T-MPLS,
17-96
Main procedure steps for
T-MPLS, 17-96
Procedure for full EVC, 17-88
Procedure for TMPLS, 17-97
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
IN-20
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TMP_LINK_OVER_SDH_
SYNCHRONIZATION_AT_
STARTUP parameter, 7-10
TMP_LOG_BASED_
SYNCHRONIZATION_AT_
STARTUPP parameter, 7-10
TMP_NE_UNDER_
<application>_MANAGEMENT
parameter, 7-11
TMP_NML_TEMPOPOLLING
parameter, 7-11
TMP_
REMOTENAMINGEMLFILE
parameter, 7-11
TMP_SDH_TERM_
SYNCHRONIZATION_AT_
STARTUP parameter, 7-11
TMP_SE_ACCESSCT parameter,
7-12
TMP_TRACELEVEL parameter,
7-12
TMP_TRACEMAXLINECOUNT
parameter, 7-12
Details, 15-16
TMP_ALM_PADDINGRATE
parameter, 7-9
TMP_WAIT_EOT_SYNCHRO_
STARTUP parameter, 7-12
List, 15-5
TMP_ALM_TEMPOASYNC
parameter, 7-9
TMP_WAIT_MPLS_SYNCHRO_
STARTUP parameter, 7-12
TMP_ALM_TEMPOPOLLING
parameter, 7-9
TMPLS management
TMP_ALM_TEMPOTIMER
parameter, 7-9
TMP_CDNDATABLOCKSIZE
parameter, 7-9
TMP_EML_TEMPOPOLLING
parameter, 7-10
TMP_FORBIDDEN_
COMMENT_CHAR parameter,
7-10
TMP_FORBIDDEN_LABEL_
CHAR parameter, 7-10
Inventory, 15-18
Modify, 15-11
Traffic descriptor management
macro functions and default
user profiles, 5-8
Traffic management, 11-49
See: Ethernet Transport
Bridging (ETB)
Also see: Functional domain
overview
Overview, 11-56
Traffic Classifier
Associate to an Ethernet
Segment, 17-183
Create, 17-130
Delete, 17-135
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
IN-21
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Traffic parameter
See: Ethernet Edge Physical
Port
Transparent transmission, 11-32,
11-33
Transport layer, 11-10
RPR ring, 11-12
SDH layer, 11-10
T-MPLS layer, 11-10
Transport Link, 17-155
Also see: Ethernet Transport
Link
Classification, 14-6
Concatenated VC, 14-12
List by domain, 14-109
Overview, 14-5
Transport Link for MPLS
Bandwidth load, 15-33
Define, 15-24
.............................................................
Details, 15-31
UNI
See: User Network Interface
(UNI)
VC LS management, 5-9
VLAN Typemanagement, 5-14
Users
SEC User Administration, 2-2
SEC User Authentication, 2-2
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Utilities, 11-49
Also see: Functional domain
overview
AAR procedure, 22-3
Align Up, 22-15, 22-27
Alignment, 22-4, 22-26
Audit, 22-3
Overview, 15-83
Create, 16-37
Overview, 22-3
Recovery, 22-5
Replacement, 22-29
Reservation, 22-4, 22-31
Start AAR procedure, 22-16
Stop AAR procedure, 22-17
Utilities management
macro functions and default
user profiles, 5-7
.............................................................
V VC LS management
Virtual Transport
Configure, 16-46
Viewer, 11-75
Also see: System management
PM management, 12-4
Modify, 15-90
Deimplement, 16-50
Delete, 16-42
Details, 16-44
Get extremities, 16-52
Implement, 16-48
List, 16-35
Modify, 16-40
Overview, 16-33
VLAN
See: Virtual Local Area
Network
Vlan and Priority based
Frame Classification, 17-7
Also see: VLAN
Tunneling, 11-65
Also see: Ethernet Frame
Hierarchy
VLAN configuration scenario,
12-17
VLAN Tag, 11-60
Also see: Ethernet Frame
Hierarchy
VLAN Tag Protocol Type,
11-65
Also see: Ethernet Frame
Hierarchy
Also see: VLAN Type
Virtual Private Hub Service
(VPHS), 11-9
VLAN type
Create, 17-225
Delete, 17-230
List, 17-223
Modify, 17-228
Overview, 17-222
VLAN Type Management
macro functions and default
user profiles, 5-14
VPHS, 11-36
See: Virtual Private Hub
Service (VPHS)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
IN-23
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VPWS
See: Virtual Private Wire
Service
VT
association to fixed VT, 19-88
default VT, 19-87
VT Queue Profile
create, 13-167
.............................................................
W Web Desktop, 11-41
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS
IN-24
8DG42227DAAA 9.6
Issue 2 June 2012